PDF Um Geopak Engl v3.0

GEOPAK
Geometrical 3D-Measurement Software for

for Co-ordinate Measuring Machines
User's Manual v3.0

MCOSMOS
1 MCOSMOS
PartManager
Administrator
ProtocolManager
DialogDesigner
Scheduler
GEOPAK
MachineBuilder
Scanning
Mafis
ROUNDPAK
PatchScanningGenerator
SurfaceDeveloper
DMIS-OUT
CAT1000PS
GEARPAK
MI-Worm
Bevel-Hypoid
STATPAK
Formula
TASK-EDITOR
2 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
2 GEOPAK Contents
1 MCOSMOS ........................................................................ 2
2 GEOPAK Contents ........................................................... 3
3 General Information ....................................................... 26
4 Hints for Help .................................................................. 27
5 Part Program Editor ....................................................... 28
5.1 Introduction Part Program Editor ................................................. 28
5.2 GEOPAK Editor: Contents ............................................................ 29
5.3 File Management............................................................................ 30
5.3.1 Create a New Part Program ....................................................... 30
5.3.2 Open Part Program..................................................................... 31
5.3.3 Edit Several Part Programs Simultaneously............................ 31
5.3.4 Store as ....................................................................................... 32
5.3.5 Change Name of Part Program ................................................. 32
5.3.6 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS) ........................................... 33
5.3.6.1 Export in ASCII Format ............................................................ 33
5.3.6.2 Export in DMIS Format ............................................................ 33
5.3.7 Delete Part Program ................................................................... 33
5.4 Settings........................................................................................... 33
5.4.1 Input Characteristics.................................................................. 33
5.4.2 Change Unit of Measurement.................................................... 34
5.5 Edit Part Programs ........................................................................ 34
5.5.1 Mirror Part Programs ................................................................. 34
5.5.2 Search Facilities ......................................................................... 35
5.5.2.1 Facilities according to Function Selection................................ 35
5.5.2.2 Search marked Function.......................................................... 35
5.5.3 Find Programming Error............................................................ 36
5.5.3.1 Error Messages: Overview....................................................... 36
5.5.3.2 Check Branches....................................................................... 36
5.5.3.3 Found Unexpected Command ................................................. 36
5.5.3.4 Branch in a deeper Loop.......................................................... 37
5.5.3.5 Open Loop ............................................................................... 37
5.5.3.6 Branch in/from an Element ...................................................... 37
5.5.3.7 Missing End-Instruction............................................................ 37
5.5.3.7.1 Blank of Else Instruction................................................................ 37
5.5.3.8 Blank of Else Instruction .......................................................... 37
5.5.3.9 Blank of If Instruction ............................................................... 37
5.5.3.10 Label already exists ................................................................. 38
5.5.3.11 Label not found ........................................................................ 38
07.04.07 v3.0 3
GEOPAK Contents
5.5.4 Branches ..................................................................................... 38

5.5.4.1 Programming of If Branch........................................................ 38
5.5.4.2 Programming of Alternative Branch......................................... 38
5.5.4.3 Start of Branch......................................................................... 39
5.5.4.4 End of Branch.......................................................................... 39
5.5.4.5 Definition of Branch without Fail .............................................. 39
5.5.4.6 Goto Label ............................................................................... 39
5.5.5 On Error Goto ............................................................................. 40
5.5.5.1 On Error Goto: Introduction ..................................................... 40
5.5.5.2 Error Handler: User Defined .................................................... 41
5.5.5.3 Error Handler: Dialogue ........................................................... 42
5.5.5.4 Throw Error.............................................................................. 43
5.5.5.5 Before and While Error Handler .............................................. 43
5.5.5.6 User Defined Errors ................................................................. 44
5.5.5.7 Example: On Error Goto .......................................................... 44
5.5.5.8 Example: E-Mail Message ....................................................... 45
5.5.5.9 Example: User Defined Errors ................................................. 46
5.5.6 Statistical Data Rejection .......................................................... 47
5.5.7 Output ......................................................................................... 48
5.5.7.1 "Graphics for Template" in the Editor ...................................... 48
5.5.7.2 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS) ......................................... 49
5.5.7.2.1 Export in ASCII Format ................................................................. 49
5.5.7.2.2 Export in DMIS Format.................................................................. 49
5.5.7.3 Settings for Export to DMIS ..................................................... 49
6 Learn Mode ..................................................................... 50

6.1 Learn Mode: Contents................................................................... 50
6.2 Introduction Learn Mode .............................................................. 50
6.3 Starting Learn Mode...................................................................... 51
6.4 Start up Wizard .............................................................................. 52
6.4.1 Definition..................................................................................... 52
6.4.2 Procedure ................................................................................... 52
6.5 Temperature Compensation ......................................................... 54
6.6 Temperature Coefficient: Select from List .................................. 56
6.7 Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM ................................. 56
6.8 Reference Position ........................................................................ 58
6.9 Volume Compensation.................................................................. 59
6.9.1 Probe Offset to Z-spindle: ......................................................... 59
6.9.2 Automatic Control ...................................................................... 60
6.10 Volume Compensation for Carbody Measurement ............ 60
6.11 Confirm Probe Configuration............................................... 61
6.12 Learn Mode Main Window .................................................... 61
4 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
6.13 Windows and Tools............................................................... 63

6.14 Window Positions.................................................................. 64
6.15 Exit Single Measurement ...................................................... 65
6.16 Relearn from Repeat Mode ................................................... 65
6.17 Measurement Window / Measurement Time ....................... 66
6.17.1 Measurement Window................................................................ 66
6.17.2 Measurement time ...................................................................... 66
6.18 Settings GEOPAK.................................................................. 67
6.18.1 Settings GEOPAK: Contents ..................................................... 67
6.18.2 Input Characteristics.................................................................. 67
6.18.3 Reset System .............................................................................. 67
6.18.4 Printer Settings........................................................................... 68
6.18.5 Reset Controller.......................................................................... 68
6.18.6 Sound Output.............................................................................. 68
6.18.7 On- and Offline Machine ............................................................ 68
6.18.8 Statistics: Setting the Group Size............................................. 68
7 Probe ............................................................................... 70
7.1 Probe Contents .............................................................................. 70
7.2 Probe Data Management ............................................................... 71
7.2.1 About symbols: .......................................................................... 71
7.2.2 About columns ........................................................................... 72
7.3 New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data................................... 72
7.3.1 New Input of Probe..................................................................... 73
7.3.2 Edit Probe Data........................................................................... 73
7.3.3 Copy Probe Data......................................................................... 73
7.4 Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe Data................................................. 74
7.4.1 Save ............................................................................................. 74
7.4.2 Delete........................................................................................... 74
7.4.3 Calibrate ...................................................................................... 74
7.5 Probe Selection.............................................................................. 74
7.6 Confirm Probe Configuration........................................................ 75
7.7 ChangeProbe Configuration ......................................................... 75
7.8 PH9 Probe Clearance..................................................................... 77
7.9 Automatic Calibration (Menu Probe)............................................ 78
7.9.1 Introduction................................................................................. 78
7.9.2 Dialogue ...................................................................................... 78
7.10 Automatic Calibration: Further Settings ............................. 79
7.11 Calibration from Probe Data Management .......................... 81
7.11.1 Introduction................................................................................. 81
7.11.2 Settings for calibration .............................................................. 81
07.04.07 v3.0 5
GEOPAK Contents
7.12 Probe Calibration: Limitations ............................................. 81

7.13 Manual Calibration ................................................................ 82
7.14 Calibration of Scanning Probes........................................... 83
7.15 Calibrate Scanning Probe Systems(MPP/SP600) ............... 83
7.16 Define MPP/SP Factors......................................................... 84
7.17 DefineMasterball ................................................................... 84
7.18 Z-Offset .................................................................................. 85
7.19 Maximum Difference ............................................................. 85
7.20 Archive Probes...................................................................... 86
7.21 Load Probe Data from Archive ............................................ 86
7.22 Single Probe Re-Calibration................................................. 87
7.23 Re-Calibrate from Memory ................................................... 87
7.24 Calibrate Probe: Display....................................................... 88
7.24.1 Standard Display ........................................................................ 88
7.24.2 Specialty with REVO Head Calibration..................................... 89
7.25 Several Masterballs: Introduction........................................ 89
7.26 Masterball Definition: Dialogue ........................................... 90
7.27 Define Masterball Position ................................................... 90
7.28 Element Calculation with Different Probe Spheres............ 91
7.28.1 Introduction ................................................................................ 91
7.28.2 Background ................................................................................ 91
7.29 Special Probe Systems......................................................... 92
7.29.1 Micro Probe UMAP ..................................................................... 92
7.29.2 PHS1 ............................................................................................ 93
7.29.2.1 PHS1: Servo Probe Head........................................................ 93
7.29.2.1.1 Introduction.................................................................................... 93
7.29.2.1.2 Limitations of Version 3.0.............................................................. 94
7.29.2.1.3 Principles....................................................................................... 94
7.29.2.2 Probe Change by Angle .......................................................... 94
7.29.2.3 Calibration of PHS1 ................................................................. 95
7.29.2.3.1 Probe Calibration .......................................................................... 95
7.29.2.3.2 Dialogue and Procedure ............................................................... 96
7.29.2.4 Re-Referencing ....................................................................... 97
7.29.2.4.1 After Activation .............................................................................. 97
7.29.2.4.2 After a Tree Change...................................................................... 97
7.30 Cancel Probe Change ........................................................... 98
7.30.1 Cancel Probe Change: Sequence ............................................. 98
7.30.2 Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips .................................. 98
7.30.3 Rotary Table: Hints .................................................................... 99
7.31 Configure Probe Systems .................................................... 99
6 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
7.32 Combination of Racks......................................................... 100

7.32.1 Combination of Racks / Introduction...................................... 100
7.32.1.1 Definitions .............................................................................. 100
7.32.1.2 Ports for parking..................................................................... 101
7.32.2 Sub-Racks ................................................................................. 101
7.32.3 Manual and Virtual Changer .................................................... 101
7.32.4 Manual Change ......................................................................... 102
7.32.5 Manual Tree Change with MPP ............................................... 102
7.32.6 Manual Change with Following Rack ..................................... 103
7.32.7 Definition of Sub-Racks ........................................................... 103
7.32.8 Probe Extension Module "PEM" ............................................. 104
7.32.9 Rack Alignment ........................................................................ 104
7.32.10 Convert Rack Data.................................................................... 104
7.32.11 Set Advanced MPP100 Data .................................................... 105
7.32.11.1 Set origin................................................................................ 105
7.32.11.2 Determine Reference Position ............................................... 105
7.32.12 Calibrate ACR 3 ........................................................................ 106
7.32.13 Numbering Method of Probe Configurations......................... 106
7.32.14 Rack Definition ......................................................................... 107
7.32.14.1 The theme on a glance .......................................................... 107
7.32.14.2 Characteristic features of the FCR25..................................... 108
7.32.15 Options with the FCR25 ........................................................... 108
7.32.16 General FCR25 Settings........................................................... 109
7.32.17 Configuration with the SCR200............................................... 109
7.32.17.1 Rack Parameter ..................................................................... 110
7.32.17.2 Probe Tree Number / Port Settings........................................ 110
7.32.18 Configuration with the ACR3 and Two Times FCR25 ........... 110
7.32.19 Rack Specific Parameters and Positions ............................... 111
7.32.20 Port Settings ............................................................................. 112
7.32.21 Save / Print Out Rack Configuration....................................... 112
8 Workpiece Alignment................................................... 113

8.1 Workpiece Alignment .................................................................. 113
8.2 Define Co-Ordinate System......................................................... 113
8.3 Store/Load Co-Ordinate System................................................. 115
8.4 Store/Load Table Co-Ordinate System ...................................... 116
8.5 Patterns for Alignment ................................................................ 116
8.6 Alignment by Single Steps.......................................................... 117
8.7 Create Co-ordinate System through Best Fit ............................ 118
8.8 Alignment in Space...................................................................... 118
8.9 Alignment in Space by Plane ...................................................... 120
8.10 Alignment in Space by Cylinder or Cone .......................... 120
8.11 Alignment in Space by Line................................................ 121
07.04.07 v3.0 7
GEOPAK Contents
8.12 Align Axis Parallel to Axis.................................................. 122

8.13 Align Axis through Point .................................................... 123
8.14 Align Axis through Point with Offset................................. 124
8.15 Create Origin ....................................................................... 124
8.16 Move and Rotate Co-ordinate System............................... 125
8.17 Origin in Element ................................................................ 125
8.18 RPS Alignment .................................................................... 126
8.18.1 Background .............................................................................. 126
8.18.2 Pre-conditions .......................................................................... 126
8.18.3 Operation .................................................................................. 127
8.19 Direction of a Plane............................................................. 127
8.20 List of Elements .................................................................. 128
8.21 Types of Co-ordinate Systems .......................................... 128
8.22 Polar Co-Ordinates: Change Planes.................................. 130
8.23 Set relation to CAD Co-ordinate System........................... 130
9 Pallet Co-Ordinate System .......................................... 132

10 Elements ....................................................................... 134
10.1 Geometric Elements Contents ........................................... 134
10.2 Elements .............................................................................. 134
10.3 Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation.............. 136
10.4 Point / Constructed Points (Overview).............................. 137
10.5 Sphere.................................................................................. 138
10.6 Circle .................................................................................... 139
10.7 Constructed Circles: Overview .......................................... 140
10.8 Inclined Circle ..................................................................... 141
10.9 Selection of Points Contour ............................................... 141
10.10 Ellipse .................................................................................. 143
10.11 Cone ..................................................................................... 143
10.12 Cylinder................................................................................ 144
10.13 Probing Strategy Cylinder/Cone ........................................ 146
10.14 Line....................................................................................... 147
10.15 Constructed Lines............................................................... 148
10.16 Plane .................................................................................... 148
10.17 Step Cylinder ....................................................................... 149
10.18 Contour ................................................................................ 149
8 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
10.19 Surfaces ............................................................................... 150

10.20 Angle Calculation ................................................................ 151
10.21 Calculation of Distance....................................................... 152
10.22 Distance along Probe Direction ......................................... 153
10.23 Type of Construction .......................................................... 153
10.24 Type of Calculation ............................................................. 154
10.25 Enveloping or Fitting-in Element ....................................... 155
10.26 Positive Direction by Vector ............................................... 156
10.27 Re-calculate Elements ........................................................ 157
10.28 Input of Nominal Values for Elements ............................... 158
10.29 Nominal Values: Three Input Options................................ 159
10.30 Free Element Input .............................................................. 160
10.31 Element Toothed Gear ........................................................ 161
10.32 Calculation ........................................................................... 162
10.32.1 Calculation according to Gauss.............................................. 162
10.32.2 Minimum Zone Element ........................................................... 163
10.32.3 Enveloping Element ................................................................. 163
10.32.4 Fitting-in Element ..................................................................... 163
10.32.5 Spread / Standard Deviation.................................................... 163
10.33 Carbody Elements ............................................................... 164
10.33.1 Hole Shapes: Introduction....................................................... 164
10.33.2 Differences: Hole Shape - Inclined Circle .............................. 165
10.33.3 Hole Shapes: Symmetry Axis and Width ............................... 167
10.33.4 Hole Shapes: How to Work...................................................... 168
10.33.5 Hole Shapes: Tolerance Comparison / Position.................... 169
11 Constructed Elements ................................................. 170

11.1 Constructed Elements: Contents....................................... 170
11.2 Connection Elements.......................................................... 170
11.2.1 Connection Elements, General ............................................... 170
11.2.2 Connection Element "From Measured Points"...................... 172
11.2.3 Connection Element Point....................................................... 173
11.2.4 Connection Element Line ........................................................ 173
11.2.5 Connection Element Circle...................................................... 174
11.2.6 Connection Element Ellipse .................................................... 174
11.2.7 Connection Element Sphere.................................................... 175
11.2.8 Connection Element Cylinder ................................................. 175
11.2.9 Connection Element Cone....................................................... 175
11.2.10 Connection Element Plane ...................................................... 175
11.2.11 Contour Connection Element.................................................. 176
11.2.12 Connection Element Freeform Surface .................................. 177
07.04.07 v3.0 9
GEOPAK Contents
11.3 Intersection Elements......................................................... 178

11.3.1 Intersection Element Line........................................................ 178
11.3.2 Intersection Element Point ...................................................... 179
11.3.3 Intersection: Extras.................................................................. 180
11.3.4 Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point) .......... 182
11.3.5 Intersection Element Circle ..................................................... 182
11.3.6 Intersection Element Ellipse ................................................... 183
11.3.7 Intersection Cylinder / Freeform Surface............................... 184
11.4 Symmetry Elements............................................................ 184
11.4.1 Symmetry Element Line........................................................... 184
11.4.2 Symmetry Element Plane: Two Ways..................................... 184
11.4.3 Symmetry Element Point ......................................................... 186
11.5 Fit in Elements .................................................................... 186
11.5.1 Fit in Element Sphere............................................................... 186
11.5.2 Fit in Element Circle................................................................. 186
11.6 Further Constructed Elements .......................................... 187
11.6.1 Shift-Element Line.................................................................... 187
11.6.2 Tangent ..................................................................................... 187
11.6.3 Min. and Max. Point.................................................................. 188
12 Automatic Element Recognition ................................. 190

12.1 Automatic Element Recognition ........................................ 190
12.1.1 Introduction .............................................................................. 190
12.1.2 Further Options ........................................................................ 190
12.1.3 Activating the Function ........................................................... 191
12.2 The Dialogue: Symbol and Information Boxes................. 191
12.3 The Dialogue: Important Functions................................... 191
12.4 Settings................................................................................ 192
12.5 Special Cases / Limitations................................................ 194
13 Carbody Measurement ................................................ 195

13.1 Carbody Measurement: Introduction ................................ 195
13.2 Settings................................................................................ 196
13.3 Volume Compensation for Carbody Measurement .......... 198
13.4 Monitoring: Data Transfer .................................................. 198
13.5 Start Part Program .............................................................. 199
13.6 Synchronisation of Part Program ...................................... 199
13.6.1 Synchronisation is nessecary................................................. 199
13.6.2 Both Part Programs should be Finished................................ 200
13.7 Retrieve Element Data ........................................................ 200
13.8 Element Container .............................................................. 201
10 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
13.9 Joint Co-ordinate System ................................................... 201

13.10 Transfer Co-ordinate System ............................................. 201
14 Graphics of Elements................................................... 203

14.1 Contents: Graphics of Elements ........................................ 203
14.2 Graphics of Elements - Task .............................................. 203
14.3 Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window ............... 204
14.4 Further Components of the Graphics of Elements Window
205
14.5 Graphic Limits ..................................................................... 205
14.6 Changing the representation of the graphics of elements
205
14.7 Select Element ..................................................................... 205
14.8 Element Information............................................................ 206
14.9 Rotate ................................................................................... 207
14.10 Contour View ....................................................................... 207
14.11 Display Sub Elements of a Contour................................... 208
14.12 Circles as Partial Circle Display ......................................... 208
14.13 Contour Point Selection by Keyboard ............................... 209
14.14 Multi-Colour Contour Display............................................. 210
14.15 Contour Display as Lines and/or Points............................ 211
14.16 Learnable Graphic Settings................................................ 211
14.17 Display of Graphic Windows .............................................. 212
14.18 Options of the "Graphics of Elements" ............................. 213
14.19 Recalculate Straightness, Flatness and Circularity ......... 214
14.19.1 Elements of the Graphics Window: ........................................ 214
14.19.2 Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate ........................ 215
14.20 Print Graphics during Learn and Repeat Mode ................ 215
14.21 Store Section of Graphic Display in Learn Mode.............. 216
14.22 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with "Autoscale"... 217
14.23 Learn Graphics of ElementsPrinting with a "Scale Factor"
217
14.24 Define Scaling...................................................................... 217
14.25 Print Graphic in Repeat Mode ............................................ 218
14.26 Define Label Layout ............................................................ 218
14.27 Flexible Graphic Protocols ................................................. 219
14.28 Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor........... 220
07.04.07 v3.0 11
GEOPAK Contents
14.29 Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points ............... 220

14.30 Compare Points................................................................... 221
14.31 Parallelism Graphics........................................................... 222
15 Nominal and Actual Comparison................................ 224

15.1 Table of Contents................................................................ 224
15.2 Tolerances: General............................................................ 225
15.2.1 Definition................................................................................... 225
15.2.2 Two tolerance characteristics................................................. 225
15.3 Maximum Material Condition (MMC) ................................. 225
15.3.1 Definition/Applicability ............................................................ 225
15.3.2 The MMC in GEOPAK............................................................... 226
15.4 Tolerances in Detail ............................................................ 226
15.5 Straightness ........................................................................ 227
15.5.1 Definition................................................................................... 227
15.5.2 Graphical Representation........................................................ 227
15.6 Flatness ............................................................................... 228
15.6.1 Definition................................................................................... 228
15.7 Roundness .......................................................................... 229
15.7.1 Definition................................................................................... 229
15.8 Scaling of Tolerance Graphics .......................................... 230
15.8.1 Roundness Scaling .................................................................. 230
15.8.2 Straightness/Flatness Scaling ................................................ 231
15.9 Position................................................................................ 232
15.9.1 Definition................................................................................... 232
15.9.2 Take over the actual value....................................................... 233
15.10 Position of Plane ................................................................. 234
15.11 Position of Axis ................................................................... 234
15.12 Calculate Absolute Position Tolerance............................. 236
15.13 Concentricity ....................................................................... 237
15.14 Coaxiality ............................................................................. 237
15.15 Parallelism ........................................................................... 238
15.16 Parallelism: Example .......................................................... 239
15.17 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Axis....................... 240
15.18 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Plane..................... 240
15.19 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Axis ....................... 240
15.20 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Plane ..................... 241
12 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
15.21 Perpendicularity .................................................................. 241

15.22 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Axis .............. 242
15.23 Perpendicularity of an Axis to aReference Plane ............. 242
15.24 Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Axis .............. 242
15.25 Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Plane ............ 242
15.26 Angularity............................................................................. 242
15.27 Symmetry Tolerance Point Element .................................. 243
15.28 Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element.................................... 244
15.29 Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element.................................. 244
15.30 Runout Tolerance ................................................................ 245
15.31 Axial Runout ........................................................................ 246
15.32 Circular Runout ................................................................... 247
15.33 Tolerance Variable............................................................... 248
15.34 Tolerance Comparison"Last Element" .............................. 248
15.35 Tolerance Comparison Element......................................... 248
15.36 "Tolerance Comparison Elements" Dialogue ................... 248
15.36.1 Tolerance Class ........................................................................ 249
15.36.2 Polar Co-Ordinates................................................................... 249
15.36.3 Position ..................................................................................... 250
15.37 Set Control Limits................................................................ 250
15.38 Contours with Tolerance Check......................................... 251
15.38.1 Contours: General .................................................................... 251
15.38.1.1 Tolerance Comparison Contours ........................................... 251
15.38.1.2 Tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs .................... 251
15.38.2 Pitch........................................................................................... 252
15.38.3 Comparison (Vector Direction) ............................................... 253
15.38.4 Bestfit Contour ......................................................................... 254
15.38.5 Degrees of Freedom for Bestfit............................................... 254
15.38.6 Bestfit within Tolerance Limits ............................................... 255
15.38.6.1 Introduction ............................................................................ 255
15.38.6.2 Alignment in Two Steps: ........................................................ 256
15.38.7 Bestfit within Tolerance Limits: Graphic Display.................. 256
15.38.8 Bestfit Values............................................................................ 258
15.38.8.1 Use for Tolerance Comparisons of Contours......................... 258
15.38.8.2 Different Applications ............................................................. 258
15.38.9 Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor) .......................................... 259
15.38.9.1 Definition ................................................................................ 259
15.38.9.2 Three examples ..................................................................... 260
15.38.9.3 Offset ..................................................................................... 260
15.38.10 Form Tolerance Contour.......................................................... 261
07.04.07 v3.0 13
GEOPAK Contents
15.38.11 Tolerance Band Editor ............................................................. 262

15.38.12 Define Tolerance Band of a Contour ...................................... 262
15.38.12.1 Define uniform tolerance range ............................................. 262
15.38.12.2 Define proportional tolerance range ...................................... 263
15.38.13 Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour .......................................... 263
15.38.14 Tolerance Band Contours ....................................................... 264
15.38.15 Filter Contour / Element........................................................... 265
15.38.15.1 Regular Contours .................................................................. 266
15.38.15.2 Irregular Contours.................................................................. 266
15.38.15.3 Automatic Circle Measurement.............................................. 266
15.38.15.4 Automatic line measurement ................................................. 267
15.39 Further Items ....................................................................... 267
15.39.1 Nominal-Actual Comparison, e.g. "Element Circle" ............. 267
15.39.2 Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison ................. 268
15.39.3 Origin of Co-ordinate System ................................................. 269
16 Print and File Output.................................................... 270

16.1 Table of Contents................................................................ 270
16.2 Output .................................................................................. 270
16.3 File Format Specification ................................................... 271
16.4 Standard or Special File Format ........................................ 272
16.5 Change File Output Format................................................ 274
16.6 File Format End ................................................................... 274
16.7 Print Format Specification ................................................. 274
16.8 Change Print Format........................................................... 275
16.9 Print Format End ................................................................. 275
16.10 Form Feed............................................................................ 275
16.11 Printing according to Layout Head Start .......................... 275
16.12 ProtocolDesigner ................................................................ 276
16.13 Protocol Archive ................................................................. 277
16.14 External Printing ................................................................. 277
16.15 External Print Format Change ........................................... 277
16.16 External Print Format End.................................................. 277
16.17 Output Text.......................................................................... 277
16.18 Export Elements.................................................................. 278
16.19 Layout for Surface .............................................................. 279
16.20 Save Contour in ASCII File................................................. 279
16.21 Open Protocol ..................................................................... 280
16.22 Change Protocol ................................................................. 281
14 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
16.23 Close Protocol ..................................................................... 281

16.24 Protocol Output ................................................................... 281
16.25 Types of Output ................................................................... 282
16.26 Print Preview (Page View)................................................... 283
16.27 Flexible Graphic Protocols ................................................. 284
16.28 Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic ........................... 285
16.28.1 Print Graphic............................................................................. 285
16.28.2 Edit graphic............................................................................... 286
16.28.3 Layout of info windows in the learn mode............................. 286
16.29 Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor........... 286
16.30 Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol..................... 287
16.31 Templates of Graphic Windows ......................................... 287
16.32 Dialogue for Protocol Output ............................................. 288
16.33 Transfer Contour into an External System........................ 288
16.34 Compare Points ................................................................... 289
16.35 Scale and Print Graphics .................................................... 290
17 CMM Movements .......................................................... 292

17.1 Table of Contents ................................................................ 292
17.2 Machine Movement ............................................................. 293
17.3 Move CMM along an Axis ................................................... 294
17.4 Five Axes Movement ........................................................... 294
17.5 Circular Movement .............................................................. 295
17.6 Drive Manually to Point....................................................... 296
17.7 Manual Measurement Point ................................................ 296
17.8 Joystick in Workpiece Co-ordinate System ...................... 297
17.9 Define Clearance Height ..................................................... 297
17.10 Safety Plane: Task / Procedure .......................................... 298
17.11 Safety Plane: Further Details.............................................. 298
17.12 Measurement Point ............................................................. 299
17.12.1 Quick Overview......................................................................... 299
17.12.2 Details........................................................................................ 300
17.13 Measurement Point (Laser) ................................................ 302
17.14 Measurement Point with Direction..................................... 302
17.15 Direction Entry via Variables .............................................. 303
17.16 Groove Point ........................................................................ 303
07.04.07 v3.0 15
GEOPAK Contents
17.17 Measurement Point with Imaginary Point ......................... 304

17.18 Measuring Point on Circular Path...................................... 305
17.19 Probing of Edge Point ........................................................ 307
17.20 Automatic Line Measurement ............................................ 308
17.21 Automatic Plane Measurement .......................................... 309
17.21.1 Circular...................................................................................... 310
17.21.2 Slot Width.................................................................................. 310
17.22 Automatic Circle Measurement ......................................... 310
17.22.1 Circular...................................................................................... 310
17.22.2 Slot Width.................................................................................. 311
17.22.3 Thread Pitch.............................................................................. 311
17.23 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement ........................... 312
17.24 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue.......... 313
17.24.1 Surface and Circle.................................................................... 313
17.24.2 Inner and outer circle............................................................... 313
17.24.3 Edge distance and plane vector ............................................. 313
17.24.4 Further elements possible....................................................... 314
17.25 Automatic Cylinder Measurement ..................................... 314
17.26 Automatic Hole Measurement............................................ 315
17.26.1 Optical Measurement and UMAP ............................................ 315
17.26.2 Measurement withPre-measured Element ............................. 316
17.27 Scanning.............................................................................. 316
17.28 Scanning of Known Elements............................................ 316
17.29 Scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z Planes ................... 317
17.30 Element finished ................................................................. 318
17.31 Delete Last Meas. Point ...................................................... 319
17.32 Stop ...................................................................................... 319
17.33 Turn Rotary Table ............................................................... 319
17.34 Deflection............................................................................. 320
17.35 Trigger-Automatic ............................................................... 320
17.36 Rotary Table ........................................................................ 320
17.36.1 Rotary Table Types .................................................................. 320
17.36.2 Rotary Table: Calibration Method........................................... 321
17.36.3 Switch Rotary Table: Calibration Method .............................. 321
17.36.4 Save Rotary Table Position ..................................................... 322
17.37 CNC Parameter.................................................................... 322
17.37.1 Installation of CNC Mode......................................................... 322
17.37.1.1 Enter values........................................................................... 323
17.37.2 Measuring Speed...................................................................... 323
16 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
17.37.3 Movement Speed ...................................................................... 324

17.37.4 Safety Distance......................................................................... 324
17.37.5 Measurement Length ............................................................... 324
17.37.6 Positioning Accuracy............................................................... 324
17.37.7 Optimized Movement ............................................................... 325
17.37.8 Change CNC Parameters ......................................................... 326
17.37.9 High Precision Measurement .................................................. 327
17.38 Calculations: Best Fit.......................................................... 327
17.38.1 Best Fit: Definition and Criteria............................................... 327
17.38.2 Two Purposes ........................................................................... 328
17.38.3 Best Fit with Fixed Number of Points..................................... 328
17.38.4 Best Fit with a Variable Number of Points ............................. 329
17.38.5 Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit............................................. 329
17.38.6 Tolerance and MMC for Best Fit.............................................. 330
17.38.7 Graphics for Best Fit ................................................................ 330
17.38.8 Calculation of Minimum-/Maximum ........................................ 330
17.38.9 Best Fit ...................................................................................... 331
18 Programming Tools...................................................... 333

18.1 Programming Help Contents .............................................. 333
18.2 Programming Help .............................................................. 333
18.3 Measurement Graphic / Measurement Sequence ............. 334
18.4 Variables and Calculations................................................. 335
18.5 Definition of Variables......................................................... 335
18.6 Variables: Input of Formula ................................................ 336
18.7 Global and Local Variables................................................. 337
18.8 Input of Variables ................................................................ 337
18.9 Yes/No Variable ................................................................... 338
18.10 Store Variables to File......................................................... 338
18.10.1 Enter name of file for variables ............................................... 338
18.10.2 Store filter to variables............................................................. 339
18.11 Store Variable in INI-File ..................................................... 339
18.12 Load Variable from INI-File ................................................. 340
18.13 Load Variables from File..................................................... 340
18.13.1 Load variables from a file section........................................... 340
18.13.2 Attention with Definition .......................................................... 341
18.13.3 Calling Variable from File ........................................................ 341
18.14 Transfer Actual CMM Position to Variable ........................ 341
18.15 Actual Temperature in Variable.......................................... 342
18.16 Settings for Temperature Compensation .......................... 342
18.16.1 Introduction............................................................................... 342
07.04.07 v3.0 17
GEOPAK Contents
18.16.2 Settings in the dialogue........................................................... 343

18.16.3 Define calculation temperature............................................... 344
18.16.4 Apply temperature compensation to movements................. 344
18.17 Check Temperature............................................................. 345
18.18 Temperature Warning ......................................................... 345
18.19 Definition of String Variables............................................. 346
18.20 Input of String Variables..................................................... 346
18.21 Store String Variables......................................................... 347
18.21.1 Enter name of file for variables............................................... 347
18.21.2 Store filter to string variables ................................................. 348
18.22 Load string variables .......................................................... 348
18.22.1 Load string variables with a filter ........................................... 348
18.22.2 Load string variables from a file section ............................... 349
18.22.3 Wait for file with string variable .............................................. 349
18.23 Store Text Variable in INI-File ............................................ 349
18.24 Load Text Variable from INI-File ........................................ 350
18.25 Formula Calculation............................................................ 350
18.26 Operators and Functions ................................................... 351
18.26.1 Overview: Operators and Functions ...................................... 351
18.26.2 Arithmetic Operators ............................................................... 351
18.26.3 Relational operators................................................................. 351
18.26.4 Logical Operators..................................................................... 352
18.26.5 Constants.................................................................................. 352
18.26.6 Trigonometrical Functions ...................................................... 353
18.26.7 Arithmetic Functions ............................................................... 353
18.26.8 Operator Precedence ............................................................... 353
18.26.9 Basic Geometry Elements ....................................................... 354
18.26.10 GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes ........................................... 355
18.26.11 GEOPAK Probes....................................................................... 356
18.26.12 GEOPAK Rotary Table Data .................................................... 357
18.26.13 Minimum Maximum .................................................................. 357
18.26.14 Best Fit ...................................................................................... 358
18.26.15 Other GEOPAK Variables ........................................................ 359
18.26.16 Date and Time........................................................................... 359
18.26.17 Examples .................................................................................. 360
18.26.18 Result of Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons ............................ 361
18.26.19 Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison ...................................... 361
18.26.20 Nominal-to-Actual Comparison of Last Element................... 363
18.26.21 Result of All Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons ...................... 363
18.26.22 Measurement Points ................................................................ 364
18.27 Scale Factor......................................................................... 365
18.27.1 Scale only element point ......................................................... 366
18.27.2 Use scale factor for CAT1000S ............................................... 367
18 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
19 Sequence Control......................................................... 368

19.1 Table of Contents ................................................................ 368
19.2 Loops.................................................................................... 368
19.3 Branches .............................................................................. 369
19.4 Subprograms ....................................................................... 369
19.4.1 Definition and Types ................................................................ 369
19.4.2 Create a Local Sub-Program ................................................... 370
19.4.3 Using an already existing Sub-Program ................................ 370
19.5 Delete Last Step................................................................... 370
19.6 Error While Executing Command....................................... 371
19.7 Comment Line...................................................................... 371
19.8 Show Picture........................................................................ 371
19.9 Programmable Stop ............................................................ 372
19.10 Clear Picture ........................................................................ 372
19.11 Play Sound........................................................................... 372
19.12 Send E-Mail .......................................................................... 372
19.13 Send SMS............................................................................. 373
19.14 Create Directory................................................................... 373
19.15 Copy File .............................................................................. 373
19.16 Delete File ............................................................................ 374
19.17 Input Head Data ................................................................... 375
19.18 Set Head Data Field ............................................................. 375
19.19 Sublot Input ......................................................................... 376
19.20 Set Sublot............................................................................. 377
19.21 Open/Close Window............................................................ 378
19.22 Program Call ........................................................................ 378
19.23 IO Condition (IO Communication)...................................... 379
20 Input Instruments ......................................................... 380

20.1 Possibilities of Text Input / Data Name.............................. 380
20.2 Single Selection................................................................... 380
20.3 Group Selection................................................................... 381
21 Special Programs ......................................................... 383

21.1 Special Programs (Contents) ............................................. 383
21.2 ASCII-GEOPAK-Converter .................................................. 383
07.04.07 v3.0 19
GEOPAK Contents
21.3 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS) .................................... 384

21.3.1 Export in ASCII Format ............................................................ 384
21.3.2 Export in DMIS Format............................................................. 384
21.4 Settings for Export to DMIS ............................................... 384
21.5 Import GEOPAK-3 Part Program ....................................... 384
22 Repeat Mode................................................................. 386

22.1 Repeat Mode: Table of Contents ....................................... 386
22.2 Repeat Mode........................................................................ 386
22.3 Temperature Coefficient in Repeat Mode ......................... 387
22.4 Cancel Repeat Mode ........................................................... 387
22.5 Repeat Mode with Offset .................................................... 387
22.6 Settings................................................................................ 388
22.7 Repeat Mode: Start Editor .................................................. 388
23 ROUNDPAK-CMM......................................................... 390
23.1 ROUNDPAK-CMM: Table of Contents ............................... 390
23.2 Task...................................................................................... 390
23.3 Alignment ............................................................................ 390
23.4 Steps .................................................................................... 391
23.5 Pass Data to ROUNDPAK-CMM ......................................... 391
23.5.1 Working steps in the dialogue ................................................ 391
23.5.2 Hide element types................................................................... 392
23.6 Analysable Elements .......................................................... 392
23.7 Non-Analysable Elements .................................................. 394
23.8 Error Messages ................................................................... 394
23.9 Learn and Repeat Mode...................................................... 396
24 SCANPAK ..................................................................... 397

24.1 Scanning-Contents ............................................................. 397
24.2 Introduction ......................................................................... 399
24.3 Measurement Methods: Overview ..................................... 400
24.4 Start of SCANNING ............................................................. 400
24.4.1 Symbols .................................................................................... 400
24.4.2 Scanning from the toolbar....................................................... 401
24.5 Manual CMM ........................................................................ 401
24.5.1 Touch Trigger Probe ................................................................ 401
24.5.1.1 Closed Contour...................................................................... 401
24.5.1.2 Compensation of Probe Radius............................................. 402
20 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
24.5.2 Manual CMM: Fixed Probe....................................................... 402

24.5.2.1 Closed Contour ...................................................................... 402
24.5.2.2 Compensation of Probe Radius ............................................. 402
24.6 CNC Scanning...................................................................... 403
24.6.1 CNC Scanning: "Automatic Measurement" On ..................... 403
24.6.1.1 Procedure .............................................................................. 403
24.6.1.2 The CNC Scan Dialogue........................................................ 403
24.6.1.3 Pitch and Safety Distance...................................................... 404
24.6.2 Driving Strategies..................................................................... 404
24.6.3 Scanning in Phi-Z with Constant Radius ............................... 405
24.6.4 Open Contour ........................................................................... 406
24.6.5 Start and End Position of a Contour as a Contact Point ...... 407
24.6.6 CNC Scanning with "Automatic Element" ............................. 407
24.6.7 Compensation of Radius of Probe (Scanning) ...................... 408
24.6.8 Scanning with Measuring Probe ............................................. 408
24.6.8.1 Scanning Speed..................................................................... 408
24.6.8.2 Deflection ............................................................................... 408
24.6.9 Clamp Axis with MPP ............................................................... 409
24.6.10 Thread Scanning with MPP10 ................................................. 409
24.7 Element Contour.................................................................. 410
24.7.1 Contour...................................................................................... 410
24.7.2 Selection of Points Contour .................................................... 411
24.7.3 Contour Connection Element.................................................. 413
24.7.4 Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point) .......... 413
24.8 Contour Im-/Export / Contour Manipulate ......................... 414
24.8.1 Contents Contour Import/Export ............................................ 414
24.8.2 Principles .................................................................................. 414
24.8.3 Import Contour ......................................................................... 415
24.8.4 Export Contour ......................................................................... 416
24.8.5 Technical Specification............................................................ 416
24.8.6 DXF Format ............................................................................... 416
24.8.7 VDAFS Format .......................................................................... 417
24.8.8 VDAIS (IGES) Format ............................................................... 417
24.8.9 NC Formats ............................................................................... 418
24.8.10 Special Formats........................................................................ 418
24.8.11 Error Message........................................................................... 418
24.9 Manipulate Contour............................................................. 419
24.9.1 Contents .................................................................................... 419
24.9.2 Manipulate Contour.................................................................. 420
24.9.3 Scale Contour ........................................................................... 420
24.9.4 Edit Contour Point.................................................................... 420
24.9.5 Mirror Contour .......................................................................... 421
24.9.6 Move / Rotate Contour ............................................................. 421
24.9.7 Create Offset-Contour.............................................................. 421
24.9.8 Idealize Contour........................................................................ 423
07.04.07 v3.0 21
GEOPAK Contents
24.9.8.1 Select contour........................................................................ 423

24.9.8.2 Select element....................................................................... 423
24.9.8.3 Select contour range ............................................................. 423
24.9.9 Change Point Sequence .......................................................... 424
24.9.10 Sort Sequence of Contour Points........................................... 424
24.9.11 Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter.............................................. 425
24.9.12 Middle Contour ......................................................................... 426
24.9.13 Prepare Leading Contour ........................................................ 426
24.9.14 Activate Leading Contour........................................................ 427
24.9.15 Scanning with Guiding Contour ............................................. 428
24.9.15.1 Basis...................................................................................... 428
24.9.15.2 Default: .................................................................................. 428
24.9.16 Loop Counter............................................................................ 429
24.9.17 Scanning of a Nominal Contour.............................................. 430
24.9.18 Define Approach Direction ...................................................... 431
24.9.19 Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy............................. 431
24.9.20 Delete Contour Points.............................................................. 432
24.9.21 Delete Points of a Contour ...................................................... 432
24.9.22 Delete via "Single Selection" .................................................. 433
24.9.23 Delete with the Co-Ordinates .................................................. 433
24.9.24 Delete with Radius ................................................................... 434
24.9.25 Delete via an Angle Area ......................................................... 434
24.9.26 Reduce Number of Points ....................................................... 435
24.9.27 Delete Linear Parts of a Contour ............................................ 435
24.9.28 Reduce Neighboured Points ................................................... 436
24.9.29 Delete Point Intervals from Contour....................................... 437
24.9.30 Clean Contour........................................................................... 438
24.9.31 Delete Contour Loops.............................................................. 438
24.9.32 Delete Reversing Paths from Contour ................................... 438
24.9.33 Delete Double Contour Points ................................................ 439
24.9.34 Min. and Max. Point.................................................................. 439
24.9.35 Automatic Element Calculation: Introduction ....................... 441
24.9.35.1 Introduction............................................................................ 441
24.9.35.2 Tolerance Limits .................................................................... 442
24.9.35.3 Idealize .................................................................................. 442
24.9.35.4 Permanency .......................................................................... 443
24.10 Graphics of Elements ......................................................... 444
24.10.1 Contour View ............................................................................ 444
24.10.2 Display Sub Elements of a Contour ....................................... 444
24.10.3 Circles as Partial Circle Display.............................................. 445
24.10.4 Contour Point Selection by Keyboard.................................... 446
24.10.5 Multi-Colour Contour Display ................................................. 447
24.10.6 Contour Display as Lines and/or Points ................................ 448
24.11 Contours with Tolerance Check ........................................ 448
24.11.1 Contours: General.................................................................... 448
24.11.1.1 Tolerance Comparison Contours........................................... 448
22 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
24.11.1.2 Tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs .................... 448

24.11.2 Pitch........................................................................................... 449
24.11.3 Comparison (Vector Direction) ............................................... 450
24.11.4 Bestfit Contour ......................................................................... 451
24.11.5 Degrees of Freedom for Bestfit............................................... 452
24.11.6 Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor) .......................................... 452
24.11.6.1 Definition ................................................................................ 452
24.11.6.2 Three examples ..................................................................... 453
24.11.6.3 Offset ..................................................................................... 453
24.11.7 Form Tolerance Contour.......................................................... 454
24.11.8 Tolerance Band Editor ............................................................. 455
24.11.9 Define Tolerance Band of a Contour ...................................... 455
24.11.9.1 Define uniform tolerance range.............................................. 455
24.11.9.2 Define proportional tolerance range....................................... 456
24.11.10 Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour .......................................... 456
24.11.11 Filter Contour / Element........................................................... 457
24.11.11.1 Regular Contours................................................................... 457
24.11.11.2 Irregular Contours .................................................................. 457
24.11.11.3 Automatic Circle Measurement.............................................. 458
24.11.11.4 Automatic line measurement ................................................. 458
24.12 Scanning - CNC Dual Flank ................................................ 459
24.12.1 Dual Flank Scanning ................................................................ 459
24.12.1.1 General .................................................................................. 459
24.12.1.2 Also without rotary table......................................................... 460
24.13 Laser Probe.......................................................................... 460
24.13.1 Single Point Laser "WIZprobe" ............................................... 460
24.13.1.1 General Information ............................................................... 460
24.13.1.2 Select PH10 Probe Angle ...................................................... 461
24.13.2 Calibration................................................................................. 461
24.13.3 The Menu................................................................................... 461
24.13.4 Laser Probe: Measurement Course ........................................ 462
24.13.4.1 Principles ............................................................................... 462
24.13.4.2 Start point for scanning .......................................................... 464
24.14 Scanning with Rotary Table ............................................... 464
24.14.1 Scanning with Rotary Table: Introduction ............................. 464
24.14.2 Scanning with Rotary Table: Three Kinds ............................. 465
24.14.3 Scanning with Rotary Table: Stop Conditions ...................... 466
24.14.4 Rotary-Table: Clamp Axis........................................................ 467
24.15 Manual Scanning by CMM .................................................. 467
24.16 Scanning with External Programs ..................................... 467
24.16.1 Scanning with "MetrisScan" (Laser)....................................... 467
24.16.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................ 467
24.16.1.2 Hardware and system requirements ...................................... 468
24.16.1.3 Metris-Dongleoptions ............................................................. 468
24.16.2 MetrisScan: Program Run ....................................................... 469
07.04.07 v3.0 23
GEOPAK Contents
24.16.2.1 Learn-/Repeat Mode.............................................................. 469

24.16.2.2 The program run in detail ...................................................... 469
24.16.3 Elements from Point Cloud ..................................................... 469
24.16.3.1 Dialogues............................................................................... 469
24.16.3.2 Defaults ................................................................................. 470
24.16.3.3 Define Element ...................................................................... 470
24.16.3.4 Calculate................................................................................ 470
24.16.4 Edit Mode / Filter ...................................................................... 471
24.16.4.1 Open Graphic ........................................................................ 471
24.16.4.2 Filter....................................................................................... 471
24.16.5 Scanning with RenScanDC ..................................................... 471
24.17 Save and Export Contour ................................................... 472
24.17.1 Save Contour ............................................................................ 472
24.17.2 Save Contour in ASCII File ...................................................... 473
24.17.3 Select Contour.......................................................................... 473
24.17.4 Transfer Contour into an External System ............................ 473
24.17.5 Load Contour............................................................................ 474
24.17.6 Load Contour from External Systems.................................... 474
24.17.7 Export to Surface Developer ................................................... 475
25 Airfoil Analysis ............................................................. 477

25.1 Airfoil Analysis: Contents .................................................. 477
25.2 Airfoil Analysis .................................................................... 477
25.3 Selection of an Airfoil Contour .......................................... 478
25.4 Analysis of Multiple Airfoil Layers..................................... 479
25.5 Preparation of Measurement Results................................ 480
25.6 Select Airfoil Analysis Functions ...................................... 481
25.7 Tolerance Comparison of Airfoil Contours....................... 481
25.8 Airfoil Contour Comparison with Bestfit........................... 482
25.9 Apply Bestfit to a Part of the Airfoil Contour.................... 483
25.10 Result output ....................................................................... 484
25.10.1 Graphical Output ...................................................................... 484
25.10.2 Tolerance Comparison of Airfoil Contours............................ 485
25.10.3 Flexible MAFIS-Protocol .......................................................... 486
25.11 Airfoil Analysis Functions.................................................. 488
25.11.1 Analysis functions with static result values.......................... 488
25.11.1.1 Mean Camber Line ................................................................ 488
25.11.1.2 Leading Edge Point ............................................................... 489
25.11.1.3 Trailing Edge Point ................................................................ 489
25.11.1.4 Maximum Profile Thickness................................................... 490
25.11.1.5 Basic Chord Length ............................................................... 490
25.11.1.6 Chord Length Overall ............................................................ 490
24 v3.0 07.04.07
GEOPAK Contents
25.11.1.7 Leading Edge Radius............................................................. 491

25.11.1.8 Trailing Edge Radius.............................................................. 491
25.11.1.9 Chord Twist Angle.................................................................. 492
25.11.1.10 Tangent Twist Angle .............................................................. 492
25.11.1.11 Primary Axis Width................................................................. 493
25.11.1.12 Tangent to Stack Axis Distance ............................................. 493
25.11.2 Analysis functions with static result values .......................... 494
25.11.2.1 Extreme Leading Edge Centrality .......................................... 494
25.11.2.2 Leading Edge Thickness........................................................ 494
25.11.2.3 Trailing Edge Thickness......................................................... 495
25.11.2.4 Extreme Leading Edge Centrality at a given contour rotation 495
25.11.2.5 Gage Twist Angle (Lead Edge).............................................. 496
25.11.2.6 Gage Twist Angle (Stack) ...................................................... 497
25.11.3 Bestfit ........................................................................................ 498
25.11.3.1 Complete Bestfit..................................................................... 498
25.11.3.2 Partial Bestfit.......................................................................... 499
07.04.07 v3.0 25
General Information
3 General Information
GEOPAK
registers and calculates the geometric data of your parts
records program runs for the following measurements
provides, among others, all data (nominal-actual comparison) for
statistics (STATPAK)
is the basic program for the 3D nominal-actual comparison of
surfaces (CAT1000S).
Copyright (c) 2007 Mitutoyo
Neuss, March 2007
Mitutoyo Messgeraete GmbH
Borsigstrasse 8 - 10
D - 41469 Neuss
Phone ++49 - 21 37-102-0
Fax ++49 - 21 37-86 85
E-mail: info@Mitutoyo.de
International copyright laws protect the program itself as well as this online help.
It is not allowed to copy or pass to third persons the total or part of it. The
copyright is exclusively at Mitutoyo Messgeraete GmbH.
26 v3.0 07.04.07
Hints for Help
4 Hints for Help

You have several possibilities to call our special help for these programs:
Via the menu bar with the "Help / MCOSMOS Help". You get an
overview about the big program groups Mitutoyo is offering to you.
By clicking on GEOPAK, you come to the table of contents of this
program. Select the topic you want, either from the table of contents
or from the index.
Via the buttons labeled with "? Help" in the dialogue windows. When
clicking on these buttons, you immediately come to the topic.
Via the menus or pull-down menus. Activate a function and press
<F1>. You get immediately the topic.
Via <F1>, at any time, you come to the GEOPAK Help.
If you see a combination of characters and figures (see above
<F1>) enclosed with <...>, this is always one of the function keys
of the top row of your keyboard.
If you want to "Confirm" optionally select the <Return>, <Enter> or
the "OK" buttons in the dialogue windows.
When you find coloured and underlined definitions in the help texts,
you will come to the next topic.
You point this definition with the mouse that is changing into a hand
with a pointed finger, click on the definition and come immediately to
the next topic. Example: Main Window Learn Measurement. Click
on the definition "Main Window Learn Measurement" and
immediately come to your topic.
When you find colored and underlined definitions or topics in the
help texts, a popup window containing information to this topic is
opened via mouse click.
Bulleted list
The list type square serves in all rule to list important points of
enumerating among themselves.
With the list type circle we list a set of points, which do not have the
completely great importance.
Ö The list type arrow marks a procedural instruction.
• The indented smaller points...
• display a subsection.
07.04.07 v3.0 27
Part Program Editor
5 Part Program Editor

5.1 Introduction Part Program Editor
The part program editor allows you to

view a part program,
change a previously learnt part program,
create new programs.
Select your part in the PartManager's part list, then activate the editor by a
mouse click on the symbol shown above or via the menu bar "CMM / Part
program editor". The main menu of the editor will be displayed.
Then you find a window (one for each part) in the centre of the screen (second
window). With the <CTRL> key, you can call multiple part program windows from
the parts list. The title line contains the name of the corresponding part program.
It is possible to randomly move the part program windows as well as all the
following dialogue windows.
Activate Window
If you work with several part program windows, you can activate the single
windows as you want (Menu Bar / Window / Window …).
Ö In the list of the following window, you click on the title of the window
you want and
Ö then on "Activate".
The part program window contains the following information (subdivided into five
columns):
Sequence number of the line (infinitely)
Loop nesting
Symbols of the function
Text (name) of the function
Parameter(s) of the function
To call the dialogue from the learn mode, activate the corresponding line via
mouse click. This line is shown now as a dark field. Now you have three
possibilities to continue your work:
Double click into the program line
Click the symbol of the machine tools (e.g. "circle" if the element
"circle" has been used in the single/learn mode for the
measurement). The "Automatic Circle Measurement" dialogue
window is displayed.
You can also use the way via the menu bar
"Measurement"/"Automatic Element"/"Circle" (our example)
You can also click on a tool of your machine tools, which has not yet
been measured. You get a dialogue window to this tool (e.g. "Automatic
Element Measurement Cylinder"). Depending on the mode you selected
before – overwrite or insert – you overwrite the activated line or insert a
new line.
28 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
Important Instructions
Rights to write
If you want to change a part program or create a new one, you need the
corresponding user right. The administrator assigns these rights (cf. also User
Rights). You can see by the pen symbol in the status bar, lower left corner,
whether you are actually allowed to change the program or not.
Insert/Overwrite
You have two possibilities to toggle between Insert/Overwrite. You can see the
mode in the status line on the right below.
You toggle with the insert key of your keyboard.
You can change via the menu bar "Edit / Overwrite". The
"Overwrite" gets a tic, or the tic is removed.
Copy/Insert
You can also copy one or several command (program lines) by marking
them with the mouse; if you want to mark several lines, keep - as usual - the
<CTRL> key pressed when selecting. Thus the lines are put to the clipboard;
from there they can be inserted into the same program at a different place, or
even inserted into another part program. You deactivate the lines with the mouse
or the <Shift> key.
Undo
If you want to copy lines, use the icon of the editor tool bar. If the tool bar is
not displayed, you can undo all changes you have made, until the beginning of
your editor session. Cancelling of any action can be achieved in two ways:
Click on the backspace arrow of your editor tool bar, or …
Choose the menu bar "Edit / Undo".
5.2 GEOPAK Editor: Contents

Introduction
File Management
Create New Part Program
Open Part Program
Edit Several Part programs Simultaneously
Store as
Rename Part Program
Export Part Program
Delete Part Program
Settings
Input Characteristics
Change Unit of Measurement
DialogDesigner
Edit Part Programs

Mirror Part Programs
Search Facilities
Facility according to Function Selection
Search marked Function
07.04.07 v3.0 29
Part Program Editor
Find Programming Error

Error Messages: Overview
Check Branches
Found Unexpected Command
Branch in a deeper Loop
Open Loop
Branch in/from an Element
Missing End Instruction
Blank of Else Instruction
Blank of If Instruction
Label already exists
Label not found
Branches
Programming of If Branches
Programming of an Alternative Branch
Start of Branch
End of Branch
Definition of Branches without Fail
Goto Label
On Error Goto
On Error Goto: Introduction
Error Handler: User Defined
Before and While Error Handler
Error Handler: Dialogue
Throw Error
User Defined Errors
Example: User Defined Errors
Example: E-Mail Message
Example: On Error Goto
Sequential Control
Statistical Data Rejection
Output
"Graphics for Template" in the Editor
Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS)
Settings for Export to DMIS (Function)
Export Settings (DMIS)
5.3 File Management

5.3.1 Create a New Part Program
In a part program, GEOPAK instructions are stored which result in a

practical test sequence during the CMM-Repeat Mode. When creating a new part
program, you are prompted to input a name for the new part program. You should
select a name which clearly describes your test sequence.
Ö Select the "File" menu and in the pull-down menu the "New"
function.
The "New" window is displayed.
In the parts list the opened parts are shown. From this list, you
select the part for which you want to create a new part program.
30 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
Ö Via the symbols, you decide to select a new "Part

Program" or "Subprogram".
Via this dialogue, it is possible to create a local subprogram. That

means that this subprogram can only be executed of part programs
which are in the part.
General and directory orientated subprograms can only be created in the
PartManager with the function "Sub-program Manager".
Ö Input the name of the program into the "Name of Program" text field.
Ö
You have the possibility to create several part programs in one part, e.g. if you
require a part program for the position of the part and another one for measuring
the part.
In the new window of the GEOPAK Editor, you find the name of the
part program in the title bar and in brackets the name of the part.
All GEOPAK functions you edit, are listed in this window.
5.3.2 Open Part Program
Ö Select the "File" menu and in the pull-down menu the "Open"
function.
You get a new "Open" window.
In the parts list (upper text field), the parts opened in the GEOPAK
editor are displayed. From this list, select the part for which you
want to see the part programs. If you click on one of these parts,
part programs which are not opened are displayed in the lower
large text field.
Ö Now you can edit the part program you want.
Ö If you search for a subprogram, click on the symbol.

In the text field, the existing subprograms are displayed. Select by
mouse-click.
You come to the window of the GEOPAK editor.
5.3.3 Edit Several Part Programs Simultaneously

It is possible to keep several part programs open at the same time. If you are
dealing with a part with several part programs belonging to it, and wish to open
this part using the Editor, you will get a selection of programs. Now you choose
and edit the required program..
To open a second part program, use the menu "File" and "Open" in the Editor.
You will then be offered a list of the rest of the programs related to this part,
select and edit the required program.
07.04.07 v3.0 31
Part Program Editor
5.3.4 Store as
New name
You want to record an existing part program under a new name.
Ö Click on the „File/Save As" functions via the menu bar.
Ö In the „Save As” window, open the parts in the parts' list.
Ö By mouse-click, activate the corresponding part.
Ö In the „Name of Program" text field, you enter the new name and
confirm.
Change a part
Example: You have a local subprogram required in a similar or varied form for
another part. Even now, select the shortest way only in opposite order:
Ö In the "Save As" window, you can find a part with a part program.
Ö Pull-down the parts list,
Ö click on the corresponding part
Ö and confirm.
Change Type of Program
Example: You have learnt a part program, that should be available now as a
subprogram.
You switch to the other icon via mouse-click.

You should know
Changes are recorded - for example under a new name - only if you have stored
and confirmed them in the „Save As" dialogue. Parts and its programs you edited
before, are saved without changes.
Safety Question
If a part program already exists, you get a safety question whether the part
program should be overwritten or not. If you want to answer to the safety
question and the part or the name will not be changed, the current parts program
will be recorded.
5.3.5 Change Name of Part Program
Of course, you can modify names of part programs in MCOSMOS you

have already entered before.
Ö Select the "File" menu and in the pull-down menu the "Change
Name" function.
A new "Change Name" window appears.
Ö Change the name in the text field and press OK.
The modified name is displayed in the title bar of the GEOPAK
editor.
The name of the part cannot be changed with this function. This is only
possible in the PartManager.
32 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
5.3.6 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS)

5.3.6.1 Export in ASCII Format
Like you can import agw-files with the ASCII-GEOPAK Converter and generate
these to part programs, the reverse way is, of course, also possible for the
purpose of a data exchange. This is how you can generate a GEOPAK part
program and export it in ASCII format from the GEOPAK editor (menu bar / file /
Export / Export …).
Ö In the window "Save as", select in the line "File type" the type "ASCII
GEOPAK (*.agw)".
Ö Either confirm or enter another file name of your choice.
Ö For detailed information about the structure of this file, refer to the
ASCII specification on your MCOSMOS-CD under "Documentation /
GEOPAK / pp_ascii_e.pdf".
5.3.6.2 Export in DMIS Format

Apart from the ASCII Format as agw-File you can export part programs also in
DMIS format as a dmo-file. You get to the function and the further dialogue only
in the GEOPAK editor via the menu bar / File / Export / Export.
Ö In the window "Save as", select in the line "File type" the type "DMIS
(*.dmo)".
Find detailed information about the contents of this file in your DMIS
specification.
5.3.7 Delete Part Program

For a better overview, it is possible to delete part programs respectively
subprograms.
Ö Select the "File" menu and in the pull-down menu the "Delete"
function.
You get a new "Delete Part Program" window.
Ö Click on the part.
Ö In the corresponding "Part Programs" or "Subprograms" lists, click
on the program and press OK.
The deleting of the last part program is not directly possible in the
GEOPAK editor. This automatically takes place if all lines are deleted
from the last part program.
5.4 Settings
5.4.1 Input Characteristics
You can display the single GEOPAK functions in different forms in the GEOPAK
editor.
Ö Select the "File" menu and in the pull-down menu the "Settings"
function and open the "Input Characteristics" dialogue.
07.04.07 v3.0 33
Part Program Editor
You decide in particular, which angle formats etc. you want to input.
Ö Via the "Standard" button, you decide if the settings are to be taken
over:
• for new lines
• for new part programs
Ö When you press the "Ok" button, the settings are taken over for one
or more marked lines.
Basically, you should pay attention in which mode (insert or overwrite)

you are. The mode is displayed in the status line of the GEOPAK window
below on the right. You can modify the mode via the "Editing / Overwrite"
functions. In addition, see details under Introduction Parts Editor.
5.4.2 Change Unit of Measurement

In GEOPAK, you have the possibility to modify the measure of length in
millimetres on inches.
Ö Select the "File" menu and in the pull-down menu the "Settings"
function. With the function "Change Unit" you open the dialogue
"Unit".
Ö Select the desired unit and press the "Ok" button.
This setting only changes the setting for the part program actually opened.
If variables are used in the part program, these should be checked.

When using constant lengths, these are to be divided by the variable
SYS.UF (SYS.UF is in the mm mode 1,0 and in the inch mode 25,4). If
this variable only contains e.g. element components (diameter, xyz co-
ordinates), no further internal message is required.
5.5 Edit Part Programs

5.5.1 Mirror Part Programs
In techniques, it continually occurs that parts have the same nominal

values, however, these are mirrored along a determined axis. When constructing
vehicles, we often have such parts (headlamps, door handles, etc.). So that it is
not necessary to write a second part program, you can mirror your part programs
at one of the planes. This means that at each co-ordinate, the sign will be
inverted.
Because the editor does not know the content of a variable, it cannot be
inverted. If the component, of which the mirror must be realized is a
variable, it is not possible to realize a mirror. You get a warning
message.
You have already programmed, e.g. the part program for a right-side door
handle. You named this part program " Right Door Handle".
34 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
For safety reasons, you should copy this Part Program and save it under the
name ‘Left Door Handle’.
If done so, continue as follows:
Ö Select the "Edit" menu and in the pull-down menu the "Mirror"
function.
Ö Select a plain from which you want to mirror and press the "Ok"
button.
An information box displays the number of part program lines,

which have been mirrored.
The following GEOPAK operations are mirrored:
• all theoretical elements
• all automatic elements
• shift and rotate co-ordinate system
• RPS alignment
• driving instructions (absolute and relative)
• probing points
5.5.2 Search Facilities

5.5.2.1 Facilities according to Function Selection
You are looking for a special GEOPAK function, however, you do not know if this
function already exists in the part program.
Ö With click on one of the two symbols "Facilities according to

Function Selection" in the toolbar, your editor is giving some
instructions. Or select the path via "Edit"/"Search".
In an information box, you are prompted to select the looked

up function, i.e. in the
• menu bar
• toolbar
• menus/pull-down menus
You can optionally start searching forward or backwards.

If the function is found it is marked. If the looked up GEOPAK function does not
exist in the part program, you get a message.
5.5.2.2 Search marked Function

You want to find out if a special GEOPAK function appears twice in your part
program.
Ö Mark the desired GEOPAK function.
Ö Use the symbol of the GEOPAK toolbar. Or select the path

via "Edit"/"Search".
The marked item moves to the found function.
07.04.07 v3.0 35
Part Program Editor
It is possible to optionally search forward or backwards.

If the searched function occurs once again, it is marked. If it is not found, you get
a message.
5.5.3 Find Programming Error

5.5.3.1 Error Messages: Overview
Found Unexpected Command
Branch in a more intensely Loop
Open Loop
Branch in/from an Element
Missing Final Instruction
Blank of Else Instruction
Blank of If Instruction
Label already exists
Label not found
5.5.3.2 Check Branches

You can check possible branch errors as follows:
Ö Via the symbol in the GEOPAK toolbar, open the "Error List
(branch)" dialogue. Or select the path via "Edit"/"Check Branches".
In this dialogue, all branch errors of the part program are displayed.
In the part program, the first error is marked.
The number before the error means the line number in the part
program, the number after the error message is the error number.
When clearing off the errors, you should proceed as follows:
Ö With click on the symbol or double-click on the error display

in the dialogue "Error List (branches)".
Ö It is also possible to click an error and...
Ö make modifications in the editor via the "Goto" button.
Keep the "Error List (branches)" dialogue displayed.
Ö For getting a better overview, delete also the error display in the
dialogue window. The "Delete" button does not have effect on the
actual part program.
If there exist other error messages, process the next errors as described.
The following Error Messages are possible.
5.5.3.3 Found Unexpected Command

A context depending on instructions has been used without the relevant
coherence.
The "Loop End" command was found without the "Loop Start"
instruction belonging to it.
The "Start of Branch" command was found without the "If Branch" or
"Else Branch" instruction.
36 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
5.5.3.4 Branch in a deeper Loop

With branches, it is possible to leave a loop.
However, the branch into a deeper nested loop is not supported.
5.5.3.5 Open Loop

A loop has not been finished with the "Loop End" instruction.
5.5.3.6 Branch in/from an Element

A branch has been programmed in / from an element (element declaration,
measuring instructions, element finished).
Explanation:
GEOPAK is in element mode if an element can't be finished through
a part program line (notice in the editor). In the example below the
element is finished with the "Element Finished" function. A
theoretical element doesn't need the "Element Finished" function
and can be finished through a part program line.
This element mode is used for the display in the editor and for the
checking of branches. The editor inserts the icons within an
element. The single/learn mode disables GEOPAK to terminate until
having finished the element because otherwise this element will not
be stored.
A branch should include the whole element or run in the element itself. This way,
we avoid for example that the following construction is possible.
5.5.3.7 Missing End-Instruction

A block has not been finished with the "Branch End" command.
5.5.3.7.1 Blank of Else Instruction

The "Else Branch" command is only followed by the "Start of Branch" command.
The block has not been finished with the "Branch End" command.
5.5.3.8 Blank of Else Instruction

The "Else Branch" command is only followed by the "Start of Branch" command.
The block has not been finished with the "Branch End" command.
5.5.3.9 Blank of If Instruction

The "If Branch" command is only followed by the "Start of Branch" command. The
block has not been finished with the "Branch End" command.
07.04.07 v3.0 37
Part Program Editor
5.5.3.10 Label already exists

A label was defined twice.
5.5.3.11 Label not found

A label defined in the "Goto Branch" command has not been defined with the
"Branch Label".
5.5.4 Branches
5.5.4.1 Programming of If Branch
In GEOPAK, it is possible to carry out comparisons of two criterions via the

so-called "If Branch". In the 'Criterion 1/2' fields, you can enter numbers and/or
variables which are then compared with the adjusted operator.
The following comparison symbols at your disposal:
<> not equal
= equal
< less
<= less than or equal
> greater than
>= greater than or equal
The block following the "If Branch" command is only executed if the decision
branch comparison operation result is the logical 'True' proposition, i.e. the
required criterion is fulfilled.
A block means
• a line after an "If Branch",
• a loop
• Commands, which are within the "Start" and "End" command.
With the setting of "Decimal Places" the two values respectively the variables of
the criterions are rounded on the indicated accuracy and then the comparison is
carried out.
5.5.4.2 Programming of Alternative Branch

The programming possibilities of GEOPAK permit also an alternative branch, the
"Else Branch":
Ö Use the symbol of the GEOPAK toolbar.

Ö Or select the "Program" menu and in the pull-down menu the
"Branch" function and open the "Else" dialogue.
The "Else Branch" command is entered in the GEOPAK editor
before the marked item.
An "Else Branch" is executed if the criterion of an "If Branch" is not fulfilled. Then,
the following Block of the "Else Branch" is executed.
38 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
5.5.4.3 Start of Branch

After the "If" or "Else" command, you can write either a line or a block. A block
can be a loop or a group of commands. A block always begins with the "Start"
command.

"Branch" function and open the "Start" dialogue.
The "Start" command is entered in the GEOPAK editor before the
marked item.
5.5.4.4 End of Branch

After the "If" or "Else" command, you can write either a line or a block. A block
can be a loop or a group of commands. The end of a block is marked by the
"End" command.

"Branch" function and open the "End" dialogue.
The "End" command is entered before the marked item, in the
GEOPAK editor.
5.5.4.5 Definition of Branch without Fail

In GEOPAK, it is possible to skip to labels. For this, you must define these labels.

"Branch" function and open the "Label" dialogue.
Ö Enter the name of the label into the text field.
The label can be any text of a maximum of 20 characters, whereby
we differentiate capital and small letters.
The new label defined is entered before the marked item, in the
GEOPAK Editor.
Skipping is not possible if you want to skip to an element or from outside

into a loop.
5.5.4.6 Goto Label

In order to skip on a defined label, proceed as follows:

"Branch" function and open the "Goto" dialogue.
07.04.07 v3.0 39
Part Program Editor
Ö Enter the name of the label to which you want to skip into the text
field.
During the input of the label, pay attention to style of writing
because you must differentiate capital and small letters.
The new label defined is entered before the marked item, in the
GEOPAK Editor.
5.5.5 On Error Goto

5.5.5.1 On Error Goto: Introduction
The error handler (PartManager / Part Program Editor / Program / Branch / On
Error Goto) is separated in
Measures to take in operation without supervising, which have
already been defined in the part program and …
in the standard error handler.
Operation without supervising:
In an operation without supervising, the manual operation is not desired. In these
cases, we drive to the safety planes defined in the part mode (see details of
Safety Plane topic) and the part program is finished.
You can only use this option if you have started the part program via a
manager program or via the Remote Manager.
Particularly in the operation without supervising, many times it is necessary to

have a finer control system for the error handler. A case of application is e.g. a
collision when measuring variants, this means because features have been
omitted.
The user can program the part program so that he will be
automatically informed by receiving an e-mail or a SMS about the
incident (cf. details under the following topics Send E-Mail and
Settings SMS).
But, he may also enter an IO Condition when defining the part
program. The target is that, in case of an error, a red lamp is lighting
up at the CMM.
Standard Error Handler
GEOPAK calls this kind of error handler. It allows to manually interfere in the
program run.
You only can use this option if the user has directly started the part
program, e.g. via a click on the GEOPAK icon in the toolbar of the
Partmanager.
For details, see the following topics

Throw Error
40 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
User Defined Errors

The following examples of topics are useful:
Example: E-Mail Message
5.5.5.2 Error Handler: User Defined

From version 2.1, GEOPAK offers the "On Error Goto" function. This function
activates a user defined error handler. In case of an error, GEOPAK goes to a
“Label”. The declaration of this label is identical with the declaration of the labels
for a goto action. Then, you can use the declared labels for the ‘on error goto’ as
well as for the “normal” goto commands (branches).
Possibility of Several Error Handlers
It is possible to declare several error handlers in a program. In case of an error,
you use the current error handler that is activated. It is also possible to declare
local error handlers in subprograms.
In case of an error in the subprogram, the local error handler that is
declared will be used.
If there is no error handler defined in the subprogram and an error
handler is defined in the string of the calling programs (e.g. main
program calls 1st subprogram; 1st subprogram calls 2nd
subprogram),
• the subprogram is finished and
• the control is transferred to the next error handler.
So, a return via several levels from a subprogram to the main program can take
place.
07.04.07 v3.0 41
Part Program Editor
Diagram of the Run-Off Control in Case of an Error
If GEOPAK carries out a special error handler, this error handler will be
deactivated. That is why in case of an error during the error handler, this one will
not be called again but the control is transferred to the superior error handler,
respectively to the standard error handler.
If a subprogram has been finished, the error handler of the calling

program is automatically valid again. Thus, it is not possible to deactivate
the error handler of the calling program through a subprogram.
For details, see the following topics:

Throw Error
5.5.5.3 Error Handler: Dialogue

With the "On Error Goto" command, you can
activate a user defined error handler or
deactivate a user defined error handler.
To do so, click on the icon (left).
The icon (left) and the text field are deactivated.
42 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
A part of this command can also be whether a still open element must be finished
or not. In this case, the element will be deleted because there is no guarantee
that this element can be calculated.
See also the following topics:
User Defined Errors
5.5.5.4 Throw Error

For the error handler, this option concerns e.g. the following specialized case:
In the main program, a user defined error handler is activated.
Out of this main program, we then call a subprogram.
In the subprogram, a user defined error handler is activated, too.
But this only executes a part of the necessary actions.
Thus, e.g. the user information is already defined in the error
handler of the main program.
Ö Then, by means of this command, you can branch from "Error
Handler of Subprogram" to "Error Handler Main of Program".
Hint
If you call the command out of an error handler, and no other user defined
error handler is activated, the standard error handler of GEOPAK is
called.
5.5.5.5 Before and While Error Handler

Before Error Handler
Before realizing the error handler, GEOPAK carries out the following actions:
According to the settings of the error handler, an eventually open
element will be abandoned.
If a safety plane is defined and wanted (operation without
supervising), we try to go to this safety plane.
The Sys.ErrFatal variable contains the statement whether driving to
the safety plane has been successful or not.
The Sys.Err contains the numerical error code of the occurred error.
While Error Handler
While error handler, the user determines the further run of the program. For the
run-off control, the following actions are possible:
07.04.07 v3.0 43
Part Program Editor
Program continuation after the error handler

Goto another program record
Passing on of the error to a superior error handler (GEOPAK
command): Throw Error
Example: User Defined Errors .
5.5.5.6 User Defined Errors

In addition to the errors of which GEOPAK sent a message, it is possible to
define some errors resulting out the program flow. From version 2.1, you have at
your disposal the GEOPAK "Set User Defined Error" command.

5.5.5.7 Example: On Error Goto

Optimum Bore
For our example we use two parts, which are identical with the exception of one
bore (difference for only one variant, see picture below). So that it is not
necessary to write a separate part program for part 2, we want to measure the
two parts by means of "On Error Goto".
Part 1 and part 2 with the difference.

In our example, we check with a point measurement whether the optional bore
exists. If a bore exists, the CMM probes into space. An error message will be
sent to GEOPAK that will be worked out by the user defined error handler.
Explanations to the picture below:
Ö In line 10, you enter the current measurement length.
In the lines 12 to 14, we try to go into the bore.
If the bore exists, the point measurement is abandoned with an error
(workpiece not found).
44 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
Through the error message, the "EXISTING_BORE" label is started

and the bore is measured.
If the bore does not exist, the point measurement will run without an
error.
Lines 10 – 17: Existing bore

Lines 18 – 20: Variant with bore
Line 21:Label (here to skip the bore measurement)
Lines 22 ff All variants
In case of an error
If no error occurred, the error handler in line 15 will be deactivated
again.
This step is important because failing this, in case of errors in the
program run, the measurement of the optimum bore would be
executed.
Next, the program segment of the error handler will be skipped
(here, the measurement of the bore).
Get a general overview under the topic:
5.5.5.8 Example: E-Mail Message

If an error occurs during the part program run (lines 2 – 10, see picture below),
the “MESSAGE“ error handler will start.
Otherwise, after having processed line 10, to deactivate, line 11 will
be executed with the program segment of the error handler.
07.04.07 v3.0 45
Part Program Editor
In the course of the error handler, an e-mail will be sent and the
standard error handler of GEOPAK is called.

5.5.5.9 Example: User Defined Errors

At the beginning of the part program, we test whether the part has been correctly
fixed on the measuring table. For that, a bore will be measured and its position is
examined referred to the origin. In line 9, the user defined error handler for a
wrong position of the part will be activated. After the bore measurement the
alignment - based on the nominal co-ordinates - will be checked by means of the
formula calculation.
Aligned = (abs (CR[1].X -20) < 0.01) AND (abs(CR[1].Y - 30)
< 0.01)
Here, we check whether the deviation of the position X and the position Y is
relatively smaller than 10µm (0,01 mm) (nominal position: X = 20.0 mm and Y =
30.0 mm). Both calculations will be AND linked. This means.: If both statements
are true, the whole statement is true, too (GEOPAK: true = 1; untrue = 0).
If the part is not aligned, a user defined error is placed in line 16. This user
defined error generates the same procedure as if an error has been placed by
GEOPAK.
By means of the user defined error, the error handler will be started.
There will first be checked whether it has been possible to go to the
safety plane set in line 6.
If this has not been possible, the standard error handler of GEOPAK
will be activated (“Throw Error”) in line 23.
46 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
If this part program is available as a subprogram, the error handler

will be transferred to the calling part program.
If the safety plane has been reached, the user will be asked in line 24 to correctly
place the part.
After that, the alignment check will be realized again.
If the part is correctly aligned, the error handler in line 18 will be
deactivated and in line 26 the branch to the actual measurement is
carried out.
5.5.6 Statistical Data Rejection

Beginning from Version 2.2, this function is provided in the GEOPAK-Editor in
order for you to reject statistical data This function is accessed via the menu bar
and the "Programme" menu
You should know:
When calling up the instruction ""Statistical Data Rejection", the
statistical data of the current part program under execution is
rejected.
It is understood though that statistical data is not required to be
rejected whenever a part program is executed.
Therefore this "Delete" command should be combined with an "If"
application.
Example: Reject data, in case some specific values are not within
the range, as the workpiece is not clamped correctly.
As a rule, you will call the "Statistical Data Rejection" command at
the end of a part program.
07.04.07 v3.0 47
Part Program Editor
In case the statistical data has been generated during a repeat run and
this command is called up, then no request dialogue and no error
dialogue will show up.
Restrictions
You can use this function in the editor only.
The dongle option "Statistics Output" in GEOPAK is absolutely
required.
It is necessary that the rights of use have been assigned
accordingly in the PartManager. In fact, in the default setting, this
right is assigned to user level L5.
The right of use is checked in the Edit mode only.
In other words: In the Repeat mode – the command has already
been programmed - this right of use is no longer required.
The "Statistical Data Rejection" command can be used only if the
setting "Immediate Output of Statistical Data" de-activated. If this is
not the case, you will get an error message.
Once you have obtained rights covering this function for a part program,
you can transfer said right to other part programs just by copying. Then
there will be no further inquiry about these rights.
Abort part program

When the user aborts a part program, GEOPAK will check,
whether the function "Immediate Output of Statistical Data" is de-
activated, or
whether STATPAK is the only receiver.
If one of these cases is true, GEOPAK will ask the user "Store Statistical Data?".
Now the user can make his decision as to whether the statistical data is required
to be transferred to the receiver/s or to be rejected.
5.5.7 Output
5.5.7.1 "Graphics for Template" in the Editor
In the GEOPAK Editor, the "Graphics of Elements" window with the "Print or
Store Graphic" option (as with the GEOPAK learn mode) is not available. In the
editor you are therefore required to use the function "Store Graphics for
Template".
The function and the corresponding dialogue (picture below) is accessed through
the menu bar and the "Output" menu.
This dialogue combines the "Learnable Graphic Commands" dialogue and the
"Flexible Graphic Protocols" dialogue.
48 v3.0 07.04.07
Part Program Editor
5.5.7.2 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS)
5.5.7.2.1 Export in ASCII Format

GEOPAK (*.agw)".
5.5.7.2.2 Export in DMIS Format

(*.dmo)".
specification.
5.5.7.3 Settings for Export to DMIS

Before exporting part programs to DMIS (GEOPAK editor / menu bar / File /
Export / Export settings) you can perform specific settings.
When clicking the function, the dialogue window "Set initial environment" opens.
The settings you perform in this dialogue are saved in the file
"..\INI\DMISOUT.INI".
For Information about the possible settings read the topic "Settings for export
(DMIS)"
07.04.07 v3.0 49
Learn Mode
6 Learn Mode
6.1 Learn Mode: Contents
Introduction Learn Mode
Getting Started Learn Mode
Start-Up-Wizard
DialogDesigner
Compensation Temperature
Temperature Coefficient: Select from List
Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM
Reference Position
Volume Compensation
Volume Compensation for Carbody Measurement
Confirm Probe Configuration
Learn Mode Main Window
Windows and Tools
Window Positions
Exit Learn Mode
Relearn from Repeat Mode
Measurement Window / Measurement Time
Settings GEOPAK: Contents
6.2 Introduction Learn Mode
Using GEOPAK, you can obtain the geometrical data of your parts by a
measurement procedure. To prepare the measurement program, you are
automatically guided until all conditions for a smooth program run are fulfilled:
Check of the connected devices
Definition of the probe data
Alignment of the part
Usually, you want to compare certain features of your parts against their nominal
values shown on the drawing (e.g. diameter, straightness, and parallelism).
GEOPAK offers elements (circle, plane etc.) that can be used to get these
features.
Example:
You want to measure a diameter (cf. drawing below) and to check whether its
size is within the specified limits (here: 30mm diameter, the limits defined by a
table value of H8).
50 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
In the main window of "Single / Learn", click the circle in the icon bar on top. Then
you get a window to define how your circle must be constructed:
the type of construction (measurement, intersection, etc.)
the type of calculation, if made from single points or not (Gauss,
minimum circumscribed, etc.)
further measurement parameters (e.g. automatic measurement,
graphic, tolerancing),
for measured element, the number of points,
give also a name and a number to each element,
After confirmation, you may only concentrate on the measurement.
In the next step, - if you have activated tolerances via the symbol, you can
input:
• the tolerance values, e.g.: +-0.100 or
• e.g. with H8 the tolerance field according to DIN/ISO.
This measurement sequence is automatically stored. The data registered and
stored in the learn mode is the prerequisite for any subsequent or later repeat
mode.
6.3 Starting Learn Mode

You have called learn mode of a part for which at least one part program already
exists. Furthermore, there do exist measuring data of the last program run. Now
you have the following possibilities:
Relearn: You can extend the existing program, i.e. continue it. If
you select this possibility, GEOPAK restores the data that resulted
during the last program run. You can continue at the position, you
e.g. stopped the day before. You do not have to execute the
measurement again.
If you have changed the program in the meantime with the

editor, it happens that the stored data do not correspond any more
with the program run. The editor changes the part program but has
no influence on the data!
07.04.07 v3.0 51
Learn Mode
You can overwrite the existing part program if you do not use it
any longer
You can create a New Part Program if you want, e.g. determine a
position program for a part and a separate CNC-operational
sequence.
• Enter your new part program into the text field and confirm
(OK).
• When starting the repeat mode, you can select from a part
program table, which part programs you want to execute.
6.4 Start up Wizard

6.4.1 Definition
To control the program start for the learning mode, you can use the "Start up
Wizard". This Start up Wizard is designed to give you the possibility to learn the
part program start in a standardised form. It is basically possible to configure the
Start up Wizard regarding its settings yourself. The Mitutoyo defaults are
described under the topic "Procedure" below.
6.4.2 Procedure
Start the part program like usual in the PartManager.
Following the two windows you know "Which probe tree is active?" and
"Temperature coefficient", the dialogue "Start up Wizard" opens.
In the first window of the Start up Wizard you already define
the probe to be used.
Click on "Next" to get to the co-ordinate system,
then click on "CNC-Parameter and CNC on",
then on "Print format specification "
and finally on the selection of the protocol.
As you can see, you have to work with five windows according to the default
values, which is also indicated by the contents of the bracket in the title. The
number of windows depends on the settings in the windows and on the default
settings in the PartManager (Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK /
Menues). If, for example, you have selected the pattern alignment, an additional
window is shown for entering this said pattern alignment.
52 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
If you have e.g. not requested the optional protocol, the Start up Wizard will not
offer a respective option.
Hints
The symbols in the windows of the Start up Wizard are each
complemented by a balloon.
However, the following symbols are particularly important:
You use this symbol to decide that you do not want your inputs to be
learned.
You click on this symbol when you wish to make an input and you
want this input to be learned.
Configuration
If you want to change the configuration, go to GEOPAK and click on the menu
"Settings" and the function "Start up Wizard: Configuration". In the following
dialogue...
07.04.07 v3.0 53
Learn Mode
...you have the choice between these options:

Start up Wizard
Initialisation dialogues and
No "Start up Wizard" or "Init. Dialogues".
Only when you have activated the option "Start up Wizard", you have the choice
between the "Standard settings" and the "CAT1000PS settings".
If you, for example, click on "Standard settings", you can subsequently work your
configuration. It starts with entering the decimals, the comment lines (up to
32,000 characters are possible), the temperature coefficient etc. By clicking once
onto the buttons "Next", "Back" or "Done" you proceed as usual. The individual
topics as well as the clearance height or subprogram are described in the
GEOPAK-Help in detail.
Another symbol
You use this symbol to decide that you want the part program automatically
learnt as per your configuration definitions. That means that the system learns
without queries.
CAT1000PS-Settings
If you work with the program CAT1000P / CAT1000S, click on this button. The
procedure is identical to the procedure for the "Standard settings".
Self-explanatory
The options "Initialisation dialogues" and "No Start up Wizard and no initialisation
dialogues" are self-explanatory.
6.5 Temperature Compensation

This topic concerns the co-ordinate measuring instruments by means of which
you can realise a temperature compensation.
What you should know
The program control automatically executes the compensation of
the machine.
The compensation of the part is executed by GEOPAK.
Depending on material, take the expansion coefficient from the
tables for expansion coefficients of longitudinal.
54 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
You must input the temperature coefficient.

Activate the temperature compensation on the motherboard of the
CMM.
The machine control reads the values of the temperature sensors in
minute steps again.
The fact that the co-ordinate measuring instrument supports the
temperature compensation is displayed through a thermometer in
the "Machine Position" window.
Continue as follows
Ö In learn mode, you can input the temperature coefficient via the
menu Settings/Temperature Coefficient. It has the unit K-1. The
reference temperature is 20° C (68° F).
Ö In repeat mode, you can input the temperature coefficients into the
start dialog.
The input value is multiplied by 10*E-6.
The software analyses the arithmetic mean value of the connected
temperature sensors at the part.
Each measured point is divided by the following factor:1,0 +
temperature coefficient * (current temperature - 20°C)
Ö If you do not want a temperature compensation, you must input as
temperature coefficient 0.000.
when proceeding this way, but if the CMM compensation is
activated, a more important failure would occur as if you would not
at all have activated the temperature compensation. Therefore, the
input 0.000 is not allowed. Nevertheless, if you want this, it is
necessary to enable it via an input in the INI file.
See also detailed in the topic "Reference Position ".
For detailed information also refer to the topic Temperature Coeffizient: Select
from List
07.04.07 v3.0 55
Learn Mode
6.6 Temperature Coefficient: Select from List
The list of temperature coefficients is memorised in language dependent files.

The files are listed in the INI-directory. For the German language, there are, for
example, the following file names: "MAT_GERM.DAT“ and "MAT_GERM.USR“
whereas the scope of delivery contains only the first file and only the first file is
installed. The user can use the second file to create his own list of temperature
coefficients.
Both files are pure ASCII-files. The format is specified as follows:
Material name <TAB> More detailed material description <TAB> Temperature
coefficient
e.g.:
My material (xxx) 9.98
6.7 Temperature Compensation: Manual CMM

Except for CNC-operated machines which have the temperature compensation
feature integrated also with regard to the hardware components, beginning from
Version 2.2. the present option will be offered for manual CMMs, as well.
When you have installed MCOSMOS and wish to install the drivers, in the
following dialogue window you get to the option "Temperature Sensor; Manual
CMM" (see dialogue window below).
56 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
Clicking this option you get to the dialogue window "Temperature Sensor
Settings" (see picture below).
You are offered up to eight temperature probes (sensors). For your MCOSMOS
installation you can get a "Thermal Compensation System" (Hardware Box) with
up to eight sensors supplied from Mitutoyo. This is possible for CMMs beginning
from EURO-M version. With your order you already decide whether you want to
use "Workpiece" and/or "Scale" sensors.
07.04.07 v3.0 57
Learn Mode
In the dialogue you then have to relate the sensor type to the sensor numbers (1-
8). Theoretically, every combination is possible. As a rule, the situation will be
similar to what is shown in the example dialogue above. Also in the picture below,
you see, on the left, a sensor on the green workpiece. Three sensors are
integrated within the axes.
Follow these steps:

Ö At the beginning of the driver installation you insert the disk supplied
with the sensor calibration data into drive A: and select the file with
the ending ".dat".
Ö Then you select the serial communication port (Comport) to which
you have connected the device (COM1 through COMn).
Ö The sensors to be set are shown in the dialogue as activated.
Should you have ordered e.g. only five sensors, the buttons 6-8 are
deactivated.
Ö The sensors are assigned their individual tasks by mouse-click into
the check buttons.
Ö You click on the "Store" button to inform the MCOSMOS program of
the settings. This also causes the program to be left.
For detailed information on this subject, see Temperature Compensation .
6.8 Reference Position

The compensation of the part temperature is carried out in machine co-ordinates.
The part co-ordinates are not suited for a compensation because they can
change in the course of a part program, e.g. through relocation of the origin. This
could cause that the compensation would not be uniformly realised to the whole
part and thus would be wrong.
58 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
Compensation and Rotary Table

When using a rotary table, also the machine co-ordinates are not sufficient to
realise the temperature compensation. Example: A rectangular part is placed on
the rotary table and measurement is done from one side. Then, the part is rotated
by 180° and you measure the other side. Since the measurements are carried out
at the same machine position, indeed no compensation will be realised.
Define Reference Position
For this reason, compensation is realised in the machine co-ordinates but it is
also possible to enter a reference point for the compensation. If you work with a
rotary table, the calibrated rotary table position is automatically taken as
reference point for the compensation. But it is also possible to define a reference
position. You can do that via the GEOWIN.INI file:
Section [TempCompRefPos]; in the variables TempCompRefX,
TempCompRefY, TempCompRefZ
You proceed in the following way
The temperature compensation will then be realised in the following steps:
Ö If a rotary table is defined respectively calibrated, you take the rotary
swivel point as the reference point.
Ö If a reference point is given, you take this one as the reference
point.
Ö If no case applies, take (0/0/0) as reference point.
The reference point will be subtracted from the co-ordinates proceeding from the
machine. Then, calculation is realised with the factor described above followed by
translation of the co-ordinates to the part system.
6.9 Volume Compensation

The volume compensation is realised for some of the CMM. At the first program
start, after program installation, a window to input the necessary parameters for
the volume compensation appears.
If you do not input the correct values (Z offset to Z-spindle will always be
negative), this dialogue will appear with each new software initialisation
of the machine. You must enter these values correctly; otherwise the
measurement will not have the specified accuracy.
6.9.1 Probe Offset to Z-spindle:
When producing our CMM, Mitutoyo does not know the probe systems
used from customers during the measurement; therefore Mitutoyo has
determined and stored the compensation values of the Z-spindle. In order to
execute compensation at the actual measurement place, the program must know
the offset from Z-spindle to stylus tip. You must enter these values.
The Z offset is always a negative value because the Z-axis of the

machine co-ordinate system shows into the opposite direction.
07.04.07 v3.0 59
Learn Mode
6.9.2 Automatic Control

Generally, it is possible to change the probe system. An automatic control of
every change is programmed. The Z offset to the Z-spindle is calculated through
calibration of probe no. 1. For calculation, a fixed reference is necessary.
As reference point, you can choose between two methods.
Method with table distance
To determine "Distance machine table / Z-spindle", you must move the Z-

spindle to Z = 0. Normally, you have to remove your probe system to determine
this distance. The distance machine table / masterball is defined from the table to
the centre of the masterball.
Method with position of the masterball
You only have to input the Z value. To determine this value, only calibrate
probe no. 1 and press the button "Last measured masterball position". The X and
Y values are only for information.
Attention
If you change the probe configuration, you must at least calibrate probe no. 1 in
order that the program automatically recalculates the Z offset. For details, refer to
Automatic Calibration.
The carbody measurement offers special features. See also: Volume
Compensation for Carbody Measurement
6.10 Volume Compensation for Carbody Measurement

If a compensation of plane deviation usually results in determining the Z-offset,
this procedure is not always possible when using a DualArm system. In these
cases, the compensation needs also to be possible in the X- or respectively Y-
axes.
Therefore, the "Automatic monitoring" is always deactivated in such systems
(Dialogue GEOPAK settings). To get to this dialogue, go to the PartManager and
proceed via the menu Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / GEOPAK
settings /Other.
Hint
The option "Automatic monitoring" can also be deactivated for the
"standard" CMM.
A prerequisite for the volume compensation in the X- or respectively Y-axis is that
your system also includes the functionality. To get to the dialogue, go to the
GEOPAK learn mode / menu Settings / System and then to the function. As
opposed to the "standard" volume compensation (see the topic Volume
Compensation), this is in general an offset to a Z-spindle (see ill. below) and not
in particular the offset of the z-spindle to the Z-axis.
60 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
In fact, you can enter the offset to any axis. For detailed information, refer again
to the topic Volume Compensation.
Hint
You will not get to this dialogue in the repeat mode if the offset data have
already been changed in the ProbeBuilder or in the probe data
management.
6.11 Confirm Probe Configuration
This only refers to machines that are equipped with a probe changer
system.
After starting learn or repeat mode, you get the window "Confirm Actual Probe
Configuration". This dialog is a safety question at exit. Meanwhile, the probe
configuration may have been manually changed. Therefore, you should examine
the "real" probe tree and then confirm. If the probe configuration has been
changed, you should enter the number of the configuration, which is active now.
If you do not enter the correct configuration, your measurement data will
be wrong. Furthermore, while executing a part program, there are
collisions when working with the wrong probe data. Last but not least,
there will be problems as soon as you change the probe configuration;
GEOPAK would try to record the probe configuration into an occupied
port.
After confirmation, you get the "Change Probe" window. In the headline, you find
the number of the probe configuration. Now, you continue as you did in Probe
Selection .
6.12 Learn Mode Main Window
You want to realise a measurement and have created a new part in the
PartManager (see Create New Part). Activate the part and come to the main
window of the GEOPAK learn mode, either via the pull-down menu or by a click
on the symbol. Then you see...
07.04.07 v3.0 61
Learn Mode
a series of symbols (icons) along the screen margins. These icons

make possible a quick and easy access to the corresponding
functions.
an activated dialog window to the probe selection; you find details
under "Probe Selection ".
When using an automatic probe tree changer system, some more items must be
taken into consideration. Cf. details of these items under Change Probe
Configuration .
The layout of the main window
You activate the measurement process from the main window. Mitutoyo offers a
series of menus, pull-down menus, and icons with functions, which make working
as simple as possible.
In the header of your screen, you see the title strip. Our example:
shows the title strip "GEOPAK CMM Learn Mode" with the version
number and the name of the part which you have enabled via the
parts list.
Below the title strip, you find the menu bar with the different menus
from "Element" to "Help". If you activate one of these, pull-down
menus appear. Most of the functions can be activated both ways,
either by the icon or by the pull-down menus. The way you select is
just a matter of personal preference.
The leftmost position of the menu bar is the "Preferences" menu. If
you click this menu, several general settings can be made for the
program. Here you can choose if the program runs in metric or inch
mode, whether an audio signal is made during measurement, or
how the printer layout is made and other settings.
Below the menu bar, you find, next to the "Quit" symbol a horizontal
toolbar with icons:
• The left part contains the elements
from "Point" to "Angle". These elements are also listed in the

pull-down menu "Elements".
• The right part contains (starting from right) the "trash"; this is
used to delete the previous command, and the symbols {bmc
SY_O_RE.bmp}
for the modification of the part co-ordinate system.
On the left margin, you find the tools for the machine
movement beginning with the symbol for the probe change. Through
these tools, you decide about measurement and driving strategy.
In the lower part of the screen, you find a toolbar with, among other
things, the different tolerances
Here, you can have a "Circularity Diagram".
62 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
The status bar at the bottom of the main window gives information
about the status of the program.
Here, you find e.g. information about the actually connected

devices, and the unit of measurement (mm or inches).
On the right margin, you find, among other things, the

symbol for the calculator (define and calculate variables) as well as
the toolbar with the programming tools. Via e.g. mouse click, you
define the start of a loop (loop start, see symbol above, right side).
Activate the "Programming Tools" bar via the pull-down menu
"Window".
6.13 Windows and Tools

In the "Window" pull-down menu, you can find a number of options that can be
activated/deactivated. In particular for the tools, by clicking with the mouse, you
have a shorter way to access these functions.
Field for results
In the field for results, you will find all information about your last operations, this
means from the change of probe to the evaluation. Each action you have effected
for the purpose of your task is represented in this field for results. Normally, you
will find here more information as necessary to print out later (e.g. change of
probe, etc.).
Position of Machine
On principle, the position of machine is represented in co-ordinates. If you
decided in the (menu bar "File / Settings / Input Characteristics") dialogue for
another as the Cartesian co-ordinate system, of course this will be considered in
the representation of the position of machine.
If you have a CMM with temperature compensation, also a
thermometer with the actual temperature will be shown.
If you dispose of the functions with a rotary table, also the rotary
table position will be indicated.
The remaining running time can also be indicated in the repeat
mode.
Display Axes
When you display the axes, you can see the machine co-ordinate system (grey)
and the co-ordinate system of the part (yellow).
07.04.07 v3.0 63
Learn Mode
Via the symbols (in the picture above in the upper line), you can select a view in
the different planes.
List of Elements
In the list of elements, you can see all geometric elements you have generated,
that means the measured elements e.g. also the connection and intersection
elements.
Element Graphics
For this subject, see details of Information of Element .
Tools for Machine
You will find these tools in your GEOPAK main window, vertically on the left side.
Each of the buttons corresponds to a menu item from the menu bar ("MMC" or
"Probe").
Tools for Evaluation
See details of Tolerances: Principles .
Program Tools
By clicking on the program tools - in the main window, vertically on the right
screen side -, you can e.g. call the dialogues of the variables or also determine
the loop start or the loop end.
6.14 Window Positions

You can select between two modes of window style, namely the
normal mode and the
"Split Screen" mode.
Hint:
In the default, the windows are displayed in normal mode. Only if you
activate in the pull-down menu the "Split Screen" function, all windows are
displayed in the "Split Screen" mode.
This function can be reached via the "Menu Bar / Window". The store, load and
default functions are valid for the normal mode as well as for the "Split Screen"
mode.
64 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
"Split Screen" mode.

By the "Split Screen" function, a displaying on your screen of e.g. windows of
GEOPAK and CAT1000S or GEOPAK and CAT1000P at the same time is
possible.
This function can be reached via the menu bar "Window".
Saving
You can store the window positions that you have selected at last according to
your ideas. You will get this position again at each restart.
Default
Under "Default Window Positions", you will find a configuration that Mitutoyo
considered to be useful. Wherever your window positions may be, via this
function you return into a home position, with which you can, in each case,
continue your work.
Load
You will choose the "Load Window Position" function if for example someone
different worked on your computer, but you want to have your characteristic
window constellation again.
6.15 Exit Single Measurement

This dialogue is shown when you have added commands in the part program. In
this case you have the following possibilities:
Store part program
The additionally learned commands are stored with the part
program and are available for the next execution of a part program.
Delete part program
Only the additionally learned part program commands are deleted.
Already existing part program commands are not deleted.
Store Data for Relearn
If you don't use the recorded data for relearn, you should deactivate
them by click on the option button. These data include all
information you have recorded in the learn mode. Since there is
considerable data, your fixed disk would be unnecessarily loaded.
6.16 Relearn from Repeat Mode

The relearn function can be started immediately from the repeat mode (Menu bar
/ Repeat Mode / Start Relearn).
You can start this function also via this symbol.

The GEOPAK-Learn Mode is called up using the part program processed last.
The "Start Relearn" function, however, is not possible unless there
is relearn data existing for the current part program.
The repeat mode is closed.
Relearn is automatically started without any dialogue at the
beginning of the learn mode.
Of course, you can also "relearn" in the learn mode. For this, click the option
"Store data for relearn" in the dialogue "GEOPAK" (see ill. below). If you start the
learn mode for this part out of the PartManager, you can select "relearn".
07.04.07 v3.0 65
Learn Mode
6.17 Measurement Window / Measurement Time

6.17.1 Measurement Window
You can close the meas. point display according to Windows conventions via the
x-symbol. Then, the complete measurement process is deleted. This action
corresponds to the repeated clicking on the dustbin symbol.
You must close the following safety question at exit.
6.17.2 Measurement time

In the repeat mode, you can have displayed the remaining measurement time.
Ö In the PartManager, click via the menu bar "Settings / Defaults for
Programs / CMM / GEOPAK" and come to the "Settings GEOPAK"
window.
Ö In this window, click on the "Other" button and
Ö in the following window, click on "Display Remaining Measurement
Time".
In the first program run is indicated, how many time the

measurement course has lasted till now.
After the first program run, the remaining measurement time of the
part program is indicated.
This remaining measurement time is updated with each run.
Since part programs can also contain commands as well as
branches, text on screen etc. only an approximate remaining
measurement time can be indicated.
66 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
6.18 Settings GEOPAK

6.18.1 Settings GEOPAK: Contents
Input Characteristics
Reset System
Printer Settings
Reset Controller
Sound Output
Offline Machine
Statistics: Setting the Group Size
6.18.2 Input Characteristics

In the Input characteristics dialogue box we distinguish between
settings which will not be modified during the whole program
(millimetres/inch) and
settings, which are valid for one program line only (see GEOPAK
editor). These settings can be changed at any time. The type of co-
ordinate system can even be changed in several follow-up dialogue
boxes (e.g. "CMM procedure", "Theoretical element circle" etc.). The
default settings made at this time determine which suggestions are
made in the dialogue boxes.
By means of these default settings you determine how e.g. angles, direction
vectors etc.
are entered in the dialogue boxes
are described in the result field.
Normally, direction vectors are standardised (length=1). Their components are
also called cosine because they include the cosine of the angle, which the vector
has with the corresponding principal axis.
If you have selected the input of cosines, it is not necessary to care that the
vectors have the length=1. It will do if the components accord in their proportion.
For example (1/1/0) for a probing below 45 degrees in the X/Y plane.
The changes made in the program lines are stored. These changes are important
for the repeat mode.
To open the Input characteristics dialogue box choose Settings / Input
characteristics from the menu bar.
6.18.3 Reset System
To reset means to delete all actions made so far in the program run.
To open the Reset system window choose "Settings / System / Reset system"
from the menu bar.
07.04.07 v3.0 67
Learn Mode
6.18.4 Printer Settings

It is possible to output graphic and text on different printers, e.g. if they do not fit
in one document for layout reasons. Another reason to choose different printers
may be the printer resolution or you simply wish to print graphic and text on
different printers.
To open the Print dialogue box choose "Settings / System / Printer Settings /
Graphic or Text" from the menu bar.
6.18.5 Reset Controller

Do not use this function unless problems with the machine control occur. To use
the function choose "Settings / System / Reset Controller" from the menu bar.
6.18.6 Sound Output

To open the Sound output dialogue box choose Settings / System / Sound from
the menu bar. Check the "Sound on" check box first and then check the following
check boxes:
Element begin
Count points
Element finished.
6.18.7 On- and Offline Machine

You can use the function "Offline machine" for easily switching between the
online machine (real machine) and the offline machine without having to
terminate GEOPAK.
Click the symbols to get to the functions or proceed via the menu
"Settings" (learn mode) and then select one of the two options. In the repeat
mode, you will find the functions under the menu "Machine".
Hints
With a virtual machine as a default setting, the offline machine is
automatically initialised. The offline machine is considerably quicker
than the virtual machine.
With a real machine as a default setting, the online machine is
automatically initialised.
Switching between offline and online machine is only possible
before starting to execute a part program or before learning one line
in the learn mode.
After initialisation, the offline machine takes on the status of the
online machine.
6.18.8 Statistics: Setting the Group Size

The group size is required for the statistical evaluation of your measurement
results.
Sometimes you may be required to statistically evaluate your measurement
results in different ways. Therefore you might need to change the group size from
part program to part program.
68 v3.0 07.04.07
Learn Mode
To get to the function, go to the menu bar "Settings / Statistics".

In the input field "Group size", dialogue window "Statistics", you enter a value
between 1 and 25 for the group size.
Using the group size
You can only enter the group size in the GEOPAK learn mode because the
features for the statistical evaluation are usually created in the learn mode only.
This also applies for the statistical data evaluation in ASCII. Only then, the group
size is required.
Hint
To change the group size, you need the user right "Change group size".
The group size is not saved in the part program. Therefore it is better to
always check the currently set group size. You can use also use this
function for this check.
07.04.07 v3.0 69
Probe
7 Probe
7.1 Probe Contents
Probe Data Management
New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data
Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe Data
Probe Selection
Confirm Probe Configuration
Change Probe Configuration
Automatic Calibration (Menu Probe)
Automatic Calibration: Further Settings
Calibration from Probe Data Management
Probe Calibration: Limitations
PH9 Probe Clearance
Manual Calibration
Calibration of Scanning Probes
Calibrate Scanning Probe Systems
Define MPP / SP
Define Masterball
Z Offset
Maximum Difference
Archive Probe
Load Probe Data from Archive
Single Probe Re-Calibration
Re-Calibrate from Memory
Calibrate Probe: Display
Several Masterballs: Sequence
Masterball Definition: Dialogue
Define Masterball Position
Element Calculation with Different Probe Spheres
Special Probe Systems

Micro Probe UMAP
PHS1/3
PHS1: Servo Probe Head
Probe Change by Angle
Calibration of PHS1
Cancel Probe Change

Sequence of Operations
Details and Tips
Rotary Table: Hints
ProbeBuilder
ProbeBuilder: Table of Contents
70 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
Combination of Racks
Combination of Racks / Introduction
Sub-Racks
Manual and Virtual Changer
Manual Change
Manual Tree Change with MPP
Manual Tool Changer with Following Rack
Definition of Sub-Racks
Probe Extension Module "PEM"
Rack Alignment
Convert Rack Data
Set Advanced MPP100 Data
Calibrate ACR 3
Numbering Method of Probe Configurations
Rack Definition
Options with the FCR25
General FCR25-Settings
Configuration with the SCR200
Configuration with the ACR3 and Two Times FCR25
Rack Specific Parameters and Positions
Port Settings
Save / Print Out Rack Configuration
7.2 Probe Data Management
You want to perform a single measurement. Your co-ordinate measuring

machine is equipped with the probe suitable for your measuring job. You start
your measuring program through the PartManager (for details refer to Single
Measurement/Learn Mode). The GEOPAK main window opens and tells you that
no probe is defined yet. Upon confirmation you are presented the dialogue
window "Probe Data Management".
• For information about "ProbeBuilder" or "Define Probe" first
click on the topic "ProbeBuilder".
• Further subjects are described under the topics "ew Input of
Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data" and "Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe
Data".
Hints
You can input as many probes as you currently need. Make sure that the
window is not unnecessarily overloaded. Keep in mind that probes can be
archived and recalled again from there.
It is always the probe identified with an asterisk behind the probe number
that is used for measurement.
7.2.1 About symbols:

The symbol (on the left) is activated, when you define a loop start prior to
changing the probe. For details refer to the topic "Loops".
Ö Click on the probe from where you want the loop to start.
Ö Click on the symbol for OK.
It is possible to Load Probe from Archive.
The Archive probe function is possible, too.
07.04.07 v3.0 71
Probe
Click the function "Select All" in case you want to calibrate all probes in
succession.
As a rule, you print the current probe list. If a probe-tree changing system is
used, the tree number will be asked for previously. The current tree number is
suggested.
Provided you have manually set the angles of your probing system using
the Renishaw Hand Control Unit (HCU), you just click on the symbol to accept
the angle values. The HCU is suitable for all rotary-type probing systems (PH9,
PH10).
7.2.2 About columns

The first column shows probe numbers.
The second column displays symbols.
The probe symbol represents a theoretical probe. There is a

general rule: A changed or redefined probe is always given the
symbol of a theoretical probe;
the pin symbolises an already calibrated probe.

Data regarding the Maximum Difference relative to the calculated calibration ball
diameter is indicated after the diameter column. It is necessary that you have
approached a minimum of 5 points for measurement. When the values are too
high, then, for instance, you have touched the ball from the side (sliding-type
probing).
Under "A" and "B" of the columns you find information on the probe angles (refer
also to New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data).
The probe offset relative to the reference probe is shown in the columns X,Y and
Z (refer also to New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data).
7.3 New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data

The dialogues "New Input of Probe", "Edit Probe Data" and "Copy Probe Data"
are prompted up by clicking over the menu bar / Probe Data Management and
the function required. The dialogues are almost identical.
72 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
7.3.1 New Input of Probe

The probes are consecutively numbered - necessarily starting from
1.
Ö First enter a theoretical value for diameter, for example 2.000 (e.g.
in mm). Whether to enter linear measures in millimetres or inches, is
to be chosen in the following dialogue window via the menu bar /
Settings / Input Characteristics.
Ö If you have, for instance, a part program with offset values already
defined for later recalibration (star-type probe) by another part
program, then enter rough offset values. Otherwise leave the values
set to 0.
Ö In the lines for probe angles, use the arrow keys to select the
values, upwards and downwards in steps of 7.5 degrees.
7.3.2 Edit Probe Data

Ö Click the respective line in the Probe Data Management window,
click on Edit and perform the changes in the subsequent window.
Upon OK, all changes are transferred to Probe Data Management.
Ö In case data was saved previously and you have made changes,
you will get a safety query.
7.3.3 Copy Probe Data

Only the line "Copy to..." is active in the "Copy probe Data"
dialogue. Click the line of the probe to be copied. Ignoring the
number suggested, you can enter an already occupied probe
number. This probe is then overwritten. Otherwise the copied probe
is placed to the end of the list.
Copying onto the reference probe is not possible.
In case data was saved previously and you have made changes,
you will get a safety query.
As a rule of principle, any changed or redefined probe is always
given the symbol of a theoretical probe..
Further topics:
07.04.07 v3.0 73
Probe
Probe Data Management;

Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe Data
7.4 Save/Delete/Calibrate Probe Data

7.4.1 Save
Saving causes all current data to be physically written on the hard disk.
In case data saving has been confirmed with OK and you want to change or
recopy probe data in a subsequent step, you are requested to answer a safety
query.
Hint
If, however, you use the Probe Data Management window
• to save,
• then to make changes or recopy data, and finally
• to finish the window with Abort,
the "old", previously saved values will be displayed.
7.4.2 Delete
Deletion is possible for any probe. The #1 probe (reference probe), however, can
only be deleted if it is the last probe in the list, or if all subsequent probes are
deleted at the same time together with the reference probe. Otherwise a fault
message will show up.
7.4.3 Calibrate
You always calibrate the active probe (for details refer to Automatic Calibration).
Further topics:
Probe Data Management;
New Input of Probe/Edit/Copy Probe Data
7.5 Probe Selection
If at least one probe is defined, you can see the window "change probe"
with the data of the defined probe(s). Select one and confirm; then this becomes
the actual probe used for measurement.
If there are no defined probes, you will see the window for probe management;
here you can define your probe(s). For details, cf. (Probe Data Management and
Automatic Calibration (Menu Probe)).
Even if there are probes defined, you can add new probes to the list. For this, you
use the function "Probe / probe data management" in the pull-down menu. You
can also access this function via the "probe" icon of the tool bar on the left margin
of the screen.
Further Information
The active probe is marked by an <*>; this one is used for
measurement.
The menu "probe" can access the windows for "select probe" and
"probe data management".
74 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
You can easily change probe data by simply clicking any probe of
the list twice. The window "change probe data" immediately
appears.
The new data are directly passed to the probe data management window (for
details, cf. Probe Data Management).
After changing, the following question appears: "Data have been changed; store
changes"?
7.6 Confirm Probe Configuration
This only refers to machines that are equipped with a probe changer
system.
After starting learn or repeat mode, you get the window "Confirm Actual Probe
Configuration". This dialog is a safety question at exit. Meanwhile, the probe
configuration may have been manually changed. Therefore, you should examine
the "real" probe tree and then confirm. If the probe configuration has been
changed, you should enter the number of the configuration, which is active now.
If you do not enter the correct configuration, your measurement data will
be wrong. Furthermore, while executing a part program, there are
collisions when working with the wrong probe data. Last but not least,
there will be problems as soon as you change the probe configuration;
GEOPAK would try to record the probe configuration into an occupied
port.
After confirmation, you get the "Change Probe" window. In the headline, you find
the number of the probe configuration. Now, you continue as you did in Probe
Selection .
7.7 ChangeProbe Configuration
The change of probe tree will be automatically realized. If you dispose of

a manual tool changer, you must respect a series of special steps. Also see
details of Manual Tool Changer .
The automatic change of probe tree will be realized from where the probe tree is
situated at the moment you want to change it. The probe tree takes the direct
way to the port. This direct way will only be selected if you have not indicated a
security position in the "Rack Definition" program. To avoid collisions, take care
that the access to the probe tree is free. Therefore, you should pay attention to
warning messages.
Ö You call the probe tree change via the menu probe / change
configuration. Enter the number of the probe configuration and
confirm.
07.04.07 v3.0 75
Probe
In single / learn mode, you get the message "Attention: Probe

Configuration has Changed". Now you have a chance to check
whether the rack can be reached without collision; otherwise, you
can correct the actual position by the joysticks. Do not forget to
define these positions for the repeat mode by pressing the "GOTO
button" of the joystick box.
In repeat mode, you get the message only if the CNC can be
manually moved, and you can use the joysticks to move the
machine.
After the configuration has been changed, you get the window for
the selection of the actual probe; the number of the configuration is
written in the headline. Then, proceed as in Probe Selection .
If you have worked, before, with a swivelling probe, you get an additional
message "Attention: Probe will move!". Make sure that the probe can be
rotated without collision (see above).
You should also know

If the probe configuration has not been calibrated yet, you get the error message
"Probe # 1 not Defined". After you confirm it, you get the window for "Probe Data
Management" (the number of the configuration appears in the headline).
As all the measurements can be made with different probe configurations,
nevertheless can be combined no matter which configuration an element has
been probed with, GEOPAK needs a common reference probe. This is probe #1
of configuration #1. This probe must be calibrated first; cf. also Probe Data
Management .
The probe configuration number is the number of the port in the rack.
Numbering, e.g. for two racks
If you have, for example two racks of the same type (see picture below with two
SCR200), you must give an exact name to the ports in the corresponding rack.
The numbering begins in your Rack with the number 01 and in the rack with the
number 11.
76 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
Ancient kind of counting

The following counting can still be used because of compatibility with GEOPAK 3
in connection with your part programs from this version:
If you use two SCR 200 with 6 ports, the numbering of the ports of the second
rack starts from 7 and goes to 12; in case of an ACR, usually 8 ports are
available, then counting for the second rack starts from 9. If, however, the
number of assessable ports in the ACR has been reduced (e.g. to 7), counting for
the second rack starts from 8.
If the rack position has not been determined yet, you get an error message.
See in detail the topic Combination of Racks / Introduction.
7.8 PH9 Probe Clearance

With this command, you can move to a probe position, for which you must not
especially define a probe. This makes sense for example if the probe should be
moved alongside a part and has to be swivelled for this purpose.
After this function, you must again move to a defined probe if you want to
continue the measurement.
The offset is made by the reference probe, i.e. the machine moves as if the
reference probe would be active. The angle position is taken either from the
probe number or correspondingly from the angle you entered.
07.04.07 v3.0 77
Probe
7.9 Automatic Calibration (Menu Probe)

7.9.1 Introduction
Before calibrating one of the probes 2 to …x, first calibrate the reference probe,
i.e. probe 1, because otherwise the system returns a warning "Masterball position
is not defined yet". This masterball is defined only by calibrating "Probe 1",
because only then its position is known. To determine this position, securely
fasten the masterball, for example with a screw-in foot, on the measurement
table. The masterball needs to be freely accessible from all sides when
calibrating rotary probes.
7.9.2 Dialogue
To open the dialogue "Automatic calibration", proceed via the menu "Probe" and
click the function.
Probe selection
Enter the number of the 1st probe to be calibrated in the probe selection box. As
you wish to calibrate multiple probes one after the other, you also enter the
number of the probe to be calibrated last. To enter the number of the probe to be
calibrated last is also required if only one probe shall be calibrated (e.g. 3 + 3).
Masterball position
There are two possibilities to determine the position of the masterball:
If you do not click the symbol (deactivated), the program

automatically reads in a position that is already existing and has
been assigned to the masterball.
For determining the position by manual probing, click the symbol.
• For ball probes (see ill. below), probing on the pole in direction
of the probe is sufficient.
• Four points on the sphere are required for disc probes.
See also the other topics for "Calibration":

78 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
7.10 Automatic Calibration: Further Settings

In the dialogue "Automatic Calibration", execute the following settings:
Ö Select a defined masterball by entering the number into the box "No.
of masterball". If you enter a number of a masterball that has not yet
been defined and confirm with "OK", the dialogue "Define
Masterball" opens.
Ö You see the diameter of the masterball,
Ö enter the number of executions and
Ö the distance over the masterball. The latter is important for the
probe change and can be compared to the safety distance for
measuring.
Ö If a scanning probe is connected, the option "Determine

factors" is also active in order to determine and store the MPP/SP
factors and the scan radius during the calibration.
Ö If you wish to measure more than just one circle and for a more
precise calibration, enter the number of circles and the height angle
1. To activate this function, click the option "Point on top of sphere".
The default setting is 15 degrees which is the smallest angle
between the top of sphere and the next circle.
1) Axis in direction of masterball shaft

2) Top of sphere
3) Smallest possible angle (15°)
4) Equator
Ö Enter the number of points you wish to probe per circle, but at least
four points because otherwise a warning message is returned. If
more than one circle is measured, the minimum number of points is
three.
Ö With height angle 2 you specify the circle to be measured first. In
most cases this is the circle that is positioned next to the sphere
equator.
Ö The program automatically calculates and displays the Z-offset with
the height angle 2.
07.04.07 v3.0 79
Probe
Ö When calibrating a short probe, there is a potential risk that the

masterball collides with the body of the probe system. In order to
avoid this collision, you should enter a value of less than 90 degrees
for the height angle 2 (see ill. below). Renishaw recommends a
probing of the masterball at an angle between 75 and 90 degrees in
order to avoid inaccurate results.
CNC parameters
It is possible to change the CNC parameters for the calibration but if you do, you
should use these settings for all subsequent measurements.
High-precision measurement
This option is available for all scan probes without MPP2 and MPP10.
When starting GEOPAK, you will in general enter the values of your
workpiece in the window for the temperature coefficient. However, if you
wish to calibrate probes, you will need to enter the values of the
masterball instead or a wrong probe diameter will be returned.
See also these topics for "Calibration":

80 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
7.11 Calibration from Probe Data Management

7.11.1 Introduction
You can also initiate the calibration of probes from the dialogue "Probe data
management". For this, first select the probes for calibration. Use the button
"Calibrate" to get to the dialogue "Calibrate probe".
As opposed to the dialogue "Automatic calibration", you will not find the section
"Probe selection" in this dialogue as you have already made your selection.
Manual calibration
In extension of the dialogue "Automatic calibration", you can also perform the
calibration manually.
Under the title "Type of calibration", the additional option "Manual

calibration" is available.
7.11.2 Settings for calibration

Ö Select a defined masterball by entering the number into the text box
"No. of masterball". If you enter the number of a masterball that has
not yet been defined and confirm with "OK", the dialogue "Define
Masterball" opens.
Ö You see the diameter of the masterball.
Ö If a scanning probe is connected, also the option "Determine

factors" is active in order to determine and store the MPP/SP factors
and the scan radius during the calibration.
Ö Enter the number of points you wish to probe per circle, but at least
five points, because otherwise a warning message is returned.
See also these topics for "Calibration":
Re-calibration from memory

For detailed information, see also the topic Re-Calibration from Memory.
7.12 Probe Calibration: Limitations

Limitations automatic calibration:
The automatic calibration function does not support the following probe systems:
Metris and WIZ laser probes
- Optical probes
- PHS 1/3 probe systems
- MPP10 probe systems
Hint
Manually indexable probe heads can only be automatically calibrated
under certain conditions. You can only calibrate one probe at a time when
calling up this function.
07.04.07 v3.0 81
Probe
Limitations manual calibration:

The manual calibration function does not support the following probe systems:
REVO probe heads
Metris and WIZ laser probes
Optical probes
PHS 1/3 probe systems
Metris laser probes are calibrated by software of the manufacturer. WIZ laser
probes and PHS1/3 probe systems are calibrated by other GEOPAK functions.
Optical probes are calibrated with part programs. MPP10 probe systems can only
be calibrated manually.
See also the other topics for "Calibration":

7.13 Manual Calibration

To get to this function and the dialogue, use the menu bar and the „Probe“ menu.
Prior to calibrating probes with numbers greater than 1, probe 1
needs to be calibrated.
Enter the probe number and the number of points in the text boxes.
In a volume-compensated machine, every single point with the
probe offset is sent to the machine. As a reply, you get the volume-
compensated points. These points are used to calculate the probe.
For further details refer to the topic Volume Compensation
For the following functions and the corresponding dialogues, you will always have
to enter the number of a masterball that has already been defined:
Manual calibration
Re-calibrate single probe
Re-calibrate from memory
The diameter, however, is shown depending on the number of the masterball
defined previously.
You will get an error message if the masterball is not defined.
Master ring
Also when using a master ring for manual calibration, you first need to define its
diameter via the function "Define masterball".
In the dialogue "Manual calibration", click the symbol (left) and enter the
number of the master ring in the text box for the number of the masterball.
Confirm and the calibration can be started.
82 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
7.14 Calibration of Scanning Probes

When using one of the probe systems SP600, SP25, SP80 or one of the MPP
probe heads, the system uses special calibration routines. For this, click the
option "Determine probe factors" in the window "Calibrate probe".
With a newly defined probe, the text of the option "Factor determination" is
greyed out. However the function is active and cannot be deactivated, i.e. you
have to determine the probe factors.
As a result (ill. above) you receive two different probe diameters, one for touching
measurement and the other for scanning measurement. The values of the
scanning probe are always the lower ones. Always only the offset of the touching
measurement is used.
For the probe radius compensation of scanning commands (e.g. CNC scanning),
always the diameter of the scanning probe is used. This also applies to the case
that the measurement procedure was changed during the element measurement.
For more detailed information, refer to "Re-calibrate from Memory".
7.15 Calibrate Scanning Probe Systems(MPP/SP600)

The probe systems MPP of Mitutoyo and SPxx of Renishaw are scanning probe
systems where scales are installed in the probe head. The position of these
scales relative to the CMM scales must be additionally defined for the calibration.
Another feature of all the scanning probe systems is that the effective ball
diameter is slightly different depending on whether the scanning probe systems
will be operated in touch trigger or scanning mode. This is why the ball diameter
must be determined twice.
Proceed as follows:
Measure the ball with the probe no. 1. From now on, the subsequent
steps will be automatically realized. This is valid for all probes to be
calibrated.
The ball will be measured in the touch trigger mode. This way, the
offset of the current probe to probe no. 1 will be defined.
By means of this information, the MPP/SPxx factors will be
determined by scanning the ball once again in a special mode.
Then, the ball will be measured once again in the touch trigger
mode by using these factors in order to get the exact probe data.
07.04.07 v3.0 83
Probe
7.16 Define MPP/SP Factors

With measuring probes, for calibration purposes, you must define factors so that
the measurement accuracy is guaranteed. Measuring inaccuracies can, for
example, be due to structural differences. The factors of each individual system
are determined with a method defined by the manufacturer, i.e.
by Mitutoyo for the Mitutoyo systems MPP2, MPP100 and MPP300
and
by Renishaw for the systems SP600, SP80 and SP25.
The controller calculates the factors.
The definition of the factors is always realized for the current probe. For this, you
can also use the number of a previously defined masterball. If you want to call
this command in the part program ("Menu Bar / Probe / Define MPP Factors"),
the following conditions must be fulfilled:
The probe must have been calibrated before.
In CNC operation, the probe must be moved over the masterball
with the program.
In the manual mode, a dialogue is displayed prompting the operator
to manually move the probe over the masterball.
When using a previously defined masterball, the CMM automatically
moves over this position.
Note
When using scan probe systems (SP600, SP80 and SP25), the MPP-
factors and the relevant probe diameter are automatically calculated.
If you execute a probe configuration without a star probe, the probe
calibration is automatically called up in the learn mode.
For a probe configuration with a star probe, you must first write a part
program.
Define the probe configuration including the star probe with the
ProbeBuilder.
I fit is not possible to calculate the movement and measurement

commands, the reason may be that masterball seat and probe sphere
have the same direction.
7.17 DefineMasterball
Problem and Solution
Situation
You have started GEOPAK in single / learn mode and want to calibrate a new
probe in the probe data management window. When clicking the "calibrate"
button, you get the warning "Position of masterball not defined; continue?"
Reason
84 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
The reference probe has not been calibrated yet, and you try to calibrate a probe
with a number different from 1. This warning tries to prevent you from getting
wrong results. If the position of the masterball has been changed in the
meantime, or a different masterball is used. In these cases, the probe calibration
would result in wrong probe data, because the differences to probe #1 would be
wrong.
Solution
Calibrate probe #1 as new. However, if you are sure that the masterball position
has not been changed since you have calibrated probe #1 the last time, you can
opt for "continue" when you get the warning.
7.18 Z-Offset
Usually during probe calibration, the masterball is probed using a circle along the
equator, and a point on the pole. If you actually use a small tip, probing of
equator may not be possible (cf. drawing below). In such a case, you can input
an offset in Z; this means the height above the equator where the masterball is
touched.
7.19 Maximum Difference
The maximum difference is an information about the quality of an element

or - if the element is close to perfect, e.g. as a masterball - the quality of the
measurement or probe system.
It is calculated after the element data have been obtained from the measurement
points. Then the distance of the individual points to the calculated surface is
computed; in case of a sphere (the masterball) the following two points determine
the value:
the point having the largest distance from the centre, and ...
the point that is nearest to the centre.
The difference between these two distances is the "maximum difference". The
idea is the same for all the other elements as well; the maximum distances on
one side and on the other give an indication about the measurement (cf. also
Probe Data Management ).
07.04.07 v3.0 85
Probe
A = maximum distance
B = maximum distance
C = maximum difference
The value can only be obtained if an element is measured with more than the
minimum number of points required for that element. If an element has been
measured with only the minimum number of points, it is defined exactly through
the points; there are no distances from the element to the points. For a sphere,
you need at least 4+1=5 measurement points to get the value for the maximum
difference.
Now the program calculates the "maximum difference". From this value, you can
evaluate the quality of the measurement, the higher the value, the worse
measurement.
Even in CNC mode, you may get a high value for the "maximum difference". This
can be an indication that either your probe is defective, or has not been tightly
screwed.
7.20 Archive Probes

You can archive any probe set; however, the probe #1 must also be archived. If
you want to archive the complete list on the screen, click on probe #1 first, then
press the <Shift> key and move the mouse up to the last probe. Then the whole
block is marked and put in the archive.
Ö Use the menu bar probes / archive or ...
Ö Click in the "Probe Data Management" dialogue window on

the symbol.
Note
You can de-select single probes in a block by <Strg> and mouse click.
A selected block is de-activated if you activate a single probe of this block.
In this case, only the single probe is activated, the rest is de-activated.
You can get a list of archived probe sets if you select "Probes/from
archive" from the menu bar, or click "Load from archive" in the probe data
management window.
7.21 Load Probe Data from Archive

You are in single / learn mode of GEOPAK and want to use a probe
configuration, which has been defined (calibrated) and archived.
Ö Select "Probes / Data from Archive" from the menu bar, or ...
86 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
Ö Click in the "Probe Data Management" dialogue window on

the symbol.
In either case you get the "Probe from Archive" window.
Ö Select the probe set you need and confirm.
You can display the archived probe data before loading them.
• This means, in the "Probe from Archive" window, either

with a click on the symbol ("View" bubble) or
• with a double click on the archive name.
Then you find the loaded probe set in the probe data management
window. Next, activate the probe you need for the next
measurement and click on "Change to" (cf. also Probe Data
Management), and confirm.
Note
As this implies a change of the actual probe, the new number and tip
diameter indicate this change in the result field.
7.22 Single Probe Re-Calibration

Proceed as described in chapter "Re-calibrate from memory". A difference is that
for single probe re-calibration only one probe will be determined. Gaps in the
probe list are possible.
If you wish to calibrate a probe of any number of the list, the probe with
the number 1 must be calibrated first (you will find more detailled
information in chapterAutomatic Calibration (Menu Probe)
7.23 Re-Calibrate from Memory

To get to this function and the dialogue, use the menu bar and the „Probe“ menu.
This function gives you the possibility to re-calibrate probes via measured
spheres.
The main advantage of this function is that even complex probe configurations
can be calibrated using a CNC part program. This means that it can be done
automatically.
However, a first set of probe data must already exist, e.g. as a set of theoretical
values, or the previously defined probes.
The procedure
Ö You fix the masterball on the table of the machine at a position
where it can be accessed by all probes you want to calibrate.
Ö You start with probe #1 and measure the ball as element "sphere"
by all probes.
Ö The spheres must be stored into subsequent memory numbers.
However, the first number can be freely selected.
Ö If you have measured the ball with all the probes, you select the pull
down menu "probes / re-calibrate from memory".
07.04.07 v3.0 87
Probe
Ö In the following window you input the number of probes that have to
be calibrated. In addition, you enter the memory number of the
sphere which you have measured first with probe #1.
Ö You confirm by "OK".
The probe data are calculated anew. These new data are stored to the disc
immediately, if no error has occurred. The correlation between the probes and
measured spheres must be exact.
The sequence number only does the correlation of the measured

spheres and the probes. This means that the sequence numbers of the
probes must not have interruptions, as otherwise a wrong correlation is
done, and wrong probe data are stored.
For the following functions and the corresponding dialogues, you will always have
to enter the number of a masterball that has already been defined:
Manual calibration
Re-calibrate single probe
The diameter, however, is shown depending on the number of the masterball
defined previously.
You will get an error message if the masterball is not defined.
For calibrating single probes and re-calibrating from memory it is possible to
define the type of calibration (touching or scanning).
For the probe types SP600, SP80 and SP25, the scanning is already defined by
determining the MPP Factors.
7.24 Calibrate Probe: Display

7.24.1 Standard Display
In the display window for "Calibrate probe", you find all status information
concerning the probe calibration. You find the current data in the upper field with
the black background. The information there depend on the installed hardware.
Via the symbols (left) the functions "Delete" and "Element ready" can
be selected.
Hints
The options "Delete" and "Element finish" are not available for the
automatic calibration.
When the MPP/SP factors are determined, the window with the display of
the measurement points shows a progress bar in percent.
The percent value is also shown when the scan radius is determined with the
probe heads MPP2, MPP4, MPP5, MPP100 and MPP300. This is also the case
when the control does not support nominal scanning with the SP600.
In the centre of the window you find instructions as to which action is currently
being performed (see example below).
88 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
In the lower table part of this window you see ...

...the results of former calibrations in case that you have calibrated more than just
one probe,
the current probe calibration and
the calibrations still to be worked off.

Note
To set the font type and size according to Windows conventions, click on
the right mouse key – separately in both window parts.
7.24.2 Specialty with REVO Head Calibration

During the REVO head calibration, no status is given on the point display.
If a RSP102 probe system is calibrated at a REVO head,
• always three manual points at the equator of the masterball and
• one point at a slightly higher position need to be measured for
defining the position of the masterball.
• Also these points are not included in the count on the point
display. In this case, the info display refers to the online help
function.
When calibrating a RSP103 probe system at a REVO head, you can

use a point in probe direction on the masterball. This corresponds to
the procedure with standard probes.
7.25 Several Masterballs: Introduction

This function enables you to calibrate the probes with one or more masterballs in
different positions. The use of this function may be advisable where, e.g., it is
impossible to calibrate all probes with one masterball only. Such a situation may
occur, if it is impossible for all defined probes to approach the masterball. Another
need for this function could arise also, when the probe tip used is so small that
there is a potential risk of the probing action being performed with the shank of
the probe. In all these cases you would get wrong measurement results.
Calibration of number 1 probe defines automatically the position of the first
masterball.
In our example the probe designated X is the probe that cannot reach the first
masterball. Probe Y is the probe that reached both masterballs. The sequence is
performed in the following steps:
Calibrate probe 1 and define the position of the first masterball..
Calibrate probe Y against the first masterball.
Define the position of the second masterball using probe Y.
Calibrate probe X against the second masterball.
This method cannot be applied but for learnable part program commands used
for calibration (for details refer to Define Masterball Position).
07.04.07 v3.0 89
Probe
7.26 Masterball Definition: Dialogue

Masterballs can be used in different fitting positions. Perform the required
settings in the dialogue "Define Masterball" (menu bar / settings / masterball …).
To define a new masterball, click on "Add" in this dialogue. The following

dialogue "Add new masterball number" then suggests the next number. If you
want another number, enter this number manually and confirm.
In the dialogue "Masterball definition", you will find the new number
in the textbox at the top.
In the line below, you enter the diameter of the ball and for the ball
shaft you enter the direction of the fitting position and the shaft
diameter.
Notes
The shaft diameter is the diameter at the point of connection to the ball.
The direction is defined as the direction from the shaft to the ball.
These settings are used for creating part programs for calibration.
7.27 Define Masterball Position

Recommendation
For some fundamental information on the topic „Several Masterballs“ we
recommend you first refer to the chapter Introduction .
How to proceed
With a click on this symbol, the input field for the diameter of
the masterball gets editable. The diameter of the masterball is
stored when you have activated the symbol (left). Otherwise, the
system will use the diameter that you have defined in the dialogue
"Masterball Definition".
Number of masterball
Use this symbol to activate the loop counter.
90 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
List to select the ball (position only is stored).

Further hints
The maximum number allowed for the masterball is 100.
Gaps are permitted among these numbers.
Where the position of the reference masterball is not defined, the
definition of other masterballs will not be possible. In this case you will get
an error message.
A part program defining several masterball positions has to be written

with the temperature coefficient 0.0. If this is not the case, the difference
between the masterballs will be temperature-compensated. This should
be avoided.
For details refer also to the topics

Re-Calibrate from Memory,
Re-Calibrate Single Probe and
Manual Calibration.
7.28 Element Calculation with Different Probe Spheres

7.28.1 Introduction
If you have to measure elements with different probe spheres, GEOPAK offers a
solution. Before starting such a measurement task, you should first change some
default settings in the PartManager. In the dialogue "GEOPAK configuration"
(Menu Bar / Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / Dialogues), click the
option "Calculate element with different probes".
This setting is required due to the fact that the algorithms are not certified (for
further details see below under "Background").
After you have clicked this option, the element dialogues of GEOPAK will
show the symbol (top left). Activate this symbol with a mouse click. There are no
restrictions regarding the calculation modes.
7.28.2 Background
Elements can be calculated from measured points. This method is unproblematic
as long as the points are measured with probe spheres of the same diameter.
Then the element is calculated with the centres of the probe spheres and
subsequently corrected by the probe sphere diameter. If, however, the
measurement has been executed with probe spheres of different diameters, this
method is not possible.
07.04.07 v3.0 91
Probe
In these cases, the element is calculated as follows:

First, an element is calculated through the probe spheres centres. With
that, the material direction is approximately known. Now the contact points
can be determined in which the probe touches the real element.
These contact points are now used to recalculate the element which leads to an
improvement of the first result. The program repeats this procedure until the
result remains unchanged.
This procedure is realised for all elements and is used when the probe diameters
for an element to be measured differ by more than 5 µ.
Reliable results but no certification yet
As opposed to the standard algorithm, the results of this method are not
PTB-certified and therefore Mitutoyo not uses this method basically. As is
known, the algorithms for the individual calculations are certified so that
the user may well use this method. The end results are therefore reliable.
There is no method for certification available yet by PTB.
7.29 Special Probe Systems

7.29.1 Micro Probe UMAP
You can use the micro probe UMAP (Ultra sonic Micro and Accurate Probe) of
Mitutoyo to measure very small holes, for example injection nozzles in motors or
parts of micro machines.
The probe has a diameter of 30 micrometers.
The micro probe can be used either independently or in connection with an
optical measurement system (QuickVisionProbe, QVP). No particular settings in
"Defaults for programs" must be made, as the system automatically checks if the
hardware requirements are met.
In the relevant dialogues, a special option button is available for probe definition
and probe calibration, i.e. the following dialogues:
Define probe (see ill. below)
Single probe re-calibration
Manual calibration
92 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
As the UMAP-system and the QVP belong to a probe tree in physical terms,
GEOPAK must be able to differentiate, which one of the two probe systems shall
actually be used for measurement. So if, for example, you wish to define the
probe fort he UMAP-system, you must click the option "Use for UMAP" (see ill.
above).
For a probe change, these options are evaluated and the respective CNC-
parameters are sent to the CMM.
Hint
There is a special command for setting the CNC-parameters of UMAP. To
get to this command, use the menu bar / CMM / CNC-parameter (UMAP.
In the following dialogue you also have the possibility to set the joystick
parameters.
7.29.2 PHS1
7.29.2.1 PHS1: Servo Probe Head
7.29.2.1.1 Introduction
The PHS1 is a probe head that
can be continuously rotated in all positions (from -184 degrees to
+184 degrees). The individual positions need neither be calibrated
nor defined in the probe data management.
The PHS1 is a probe head powered on two axes.
Extra long extensions can be used.
Different probes can be installed that can be automatically changed,
including normal probes and laser probes. Scan probes are not
supported.
For positioning a laser probe and a star probe, a third axis is
available as an option (PHS3).
07.04.07 v3.0 93
Probe
The PHS1 adaptor arm can be changed using a ACR2 tree change
system.
7.29.2.1.2 Limitations of Version 3.0

The probe head can only be used in connection with a CMM and a
UC500 control.
Probe crosses are not supported.
Simultaneous movement and rotation is not possible.
The third axis (PHS3) is supported as of v3.0.
If the probes have not yet been defined, the system has no access
to the angle or the cosine of the probe angle. This is the case when
the command "Probe change by angle" with the option "Swivel by
angle in space" has been used.
Hint
You cannot assume to be able to use the PHS1 with a scan probe
system.
7.29.2.1.3 Principles
In the dialogue driver system (PartManager / Settings / CMM driver
system [GEOPAK]), you need to preset the PHS1/3 under "Rotary
probe". Select UC500-LL as the measuring instrument.
For each probe system, Renishaw provides you with a disk
containing the so-called Error-Map-File.
• Copy this file to your hard disk.
• Afterwards you have to enter the path to this file into the file with
the head data for the PHS1, namely into the section
[ProbeHead].
• The file containing the head data you find in the subdirectory
"Probe" under the name "PHS1.asc".
• Example:
[ProbeHead]
ErrMapFile=.\..\PROBE\0H2822.dat
Use the ProbeBuilder to arrange the components for the PHS1.
If you start the calibration without having first defined the masterball,
an error message is returned.
Calibration commands are not learnable.
A corresponding user right is required for "Probe calibration". See
also the topic User Rights.
Further topics:
Calibration of PHS1
Re-Referencing
7.29.2.2 Probe Change by Angle

The PHS1 offers two possibilities for a probe change by angle:
Swivel by angle and
94 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
Swivel by angle in space

To get to the dialogue, proceed via the menu bar / Probe and the function (learn
and edit mode).
You can also use both options for the PH10. Please note:
PH10:
The change is only possible for defined probes. In case of a defined angle (angle
in space or A/B-angle), GEOPAK selects the appropriate probe within a range of
+-3,75 degrees. If GEOPAK finds no suitable probe, an error message is
returned.
PHS1:
The PHS1 swivels directly to the defined angles.
The angle resolution of the pHS1 is 0.2 angles/second. This corresponds to 0,1 µ
with a radius of 100 mm.
If you delete the command "Probe change by angle", you get a warning
message. If you confirm this warning message with "OK", the probe
swivels back to the previously valid position.
Further topics:
Calibration of PHS1
Re-Referencing
7.29.2.3 Calibration of PHS1

Use one of the following three methods for calibrating this probe head:
Probe calibration
Re-referencing after activating
Re-referencing after tree change
7.29.2.3.1 Probe Calibration

The probe calibration needs only to be executed once after installation of the
PHS1. The masterball needs to be measured at five positions (see ill. below).
The masterball needs to be measured with at least five points at each position
and then the alignment can be calculated.
07.04.07 v3.0 95
Probe
The points p1 – p5 define two circles in space with three points on each circle (p1
is a joint point). In reality, the masterball remains at the same position and the
probe head moves. The drawing has been arranged in this way for reasons of
clarity only.
Hint
We recommend to use the shortest adaptor and to screw the probe
directly into the M8-bush. This is important for the following three
reasons:
Longer adaptors can cause malfunctions due to the elasticity of the

adaptor, the probe head and the CMM.
It is easier to position the masterball within the CMM in order to ensure
the required distances during calibration.
The minimum number of 25 measurement points is mandatory.
Proposal for probe head positions:
Position Angle A Angle B Angle C
p1 0 0 0
p2 +120 0 0
p3 -120 0 0
p4 0 +120 0
p5 0 -120 0
p6 0 0 +120
p7 0 0 -120
The first position must be defined by the angles A=0° and B=0° because the first
position is the reference position for all other calculations. The positions p6 and
p7 are only needed for a PHS3. The default setting of the C-angle is 0.
7.29.2.3.2 Dialogue and Procedure

To get to the dialogue, use the menu "Probe" and click the function.
96 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
Enter the number of the masterball. If this masterball has already

been defined, the diameter is shown, too.
After your OK, calibration starts. Measure the first point on the
masterball manually, the rest is done automatically.
The calibration values are read by the configuration file PHS1.ASC.
Further topics:
Re-Referencing
7.29.2.4 Re-Referencing
7.29.2.4.1 After Activation

Use this method with the PHS1 already active. You should call up this dialogue
when the GEOPAK learn or edit mode has been started and a PHS1 has been
installed. The dialogue is called up via the menu "Probe" (learn mode) or "CMM"
(repeat mode) and the function.
The procedure corresponds to the procedure described for "Probe calibration".
7.29.2.4.2 After a Tree Change

A complete re-referencing is not required if you have executed a tree change.
However, the masterball needs to be measured with the angles A=90.0 and
B=0.0. The direction of the adaptor must be in minus Z-direction. This procedure
is required once after each tree change.
The procedure is similar to when determining the probe tree offset.
Ö Open the dialogue "Probe data management",
Ö select probe #1 and
Ö click "Calibrate".
Hint
A continued learning is only possible with the command "Probe change by
angle" on a defined probe.
Further topics:
Calibration of PHS1
07.04.07 v3.0 97
Probe
7.30 Cancel Probe Change

7.30.1 Cancel Probe Change: Sequence
If, for instance, an error occurs when a probe is being changed, you may need to
cancel probe change. In this case it is ensured, beginning from version 2.2, that
the subsequent measurements can be performed using the previous probe.
In cases where you have connected a swivel-type probing system, you

first get a safety query.
Regarding the general sequence (cancel probe changes, probe tree

changes, and rotate table)
You work with a probe (probe tree or rotary table) in the CNC mode
and intend to make a probe change. Then you realise, however, that
you do not want this change to happen.
Ö Click on the "Delete Last Step" symbol in the learn mode.
Ö Click on the "Step Back" symbol in the repeat mode.

Should you already have performed the change and the
measurement as well, you need to delete the measurement results
you have got by mistake, and then click on this symbol.
The CMM changes automatically to manual mode.
A warning comes up: e.g.: "Attention! Probe is being changed". This
warning cannot be deleted.
In order to avoid collisions, move the CMM into a safe position and
then click OK. The CMM will immediately resume the CNC
operation.
The CMM changes to the previously used probe (probe tree; rotary
table).
For further details refer to the topics

Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips and
Rotary Table: Hints.
7.30.2 Cancel Probe Change: Details and Tips

For cancelling probes (cancelling probe tree) you should know that cancelling in a
loop first deletes all repeats. Only then probe change is cancelled.
Tip:
In the repeat mode, we recommend the use of the "Program Jump"
function in cases where you want to skip more than one program line.
98 v3.0 07.04.07
Probe
Cancelling a probe change, namely directly prior to changing a probe

tree, causes the probe to lose its definition.
Output
Going back in the part program causes ...
the data in the result box to be deleted.
Depending on the new settings, the CMM position is updated.
The status line is updated with the current, correct probe number
(probe tree number).
Performance limits
When you have deleted an intermediate position, the CMM is not moved back
into the previous position.
7.30.3 Rotary Table: Hints

In case the CMM has not been moved into a safe position, you will get the error
message "CMM not in safe position relative to rotary table".
The "Cancel Table Rotation" command reverts the sense of rotation and turns the
co-ordinate system back (if used).
Indexing rotary table
Furthermore, this command reloads the previously used co-ordinate system,
provided the table is of the indexing type. Indexing-type rotary tables are tables
which rotate only by fixed degree increments (e.g. 90-degree increments). For
each of the indexing table position, a fixed table co-ordinate system is loaded.
7.31 Configure Probe Systems

Before you start to set up your probe system, you can read up on the possibilities
offered by the ProbeBuilder. Click the Table of Contents to show the individual
topics of the ProbeBuilder. We recommend that you carefully read the information
of topic "Introduction".
You configure your probe system by opening the pull-down menu "Settings" in
the PartManager and activating the function "ProbeBuilder".
Prepare the calibration of probes and probe trees in four steps:
Selection of a probe tree
When activating the button "New", the input dialogue "New probe
tree" opens. In this dialogue you can enter a new probe tree number
that is written into the list "Available probe trees".
Compiling the probe system
When activating the button "Configure", the input dialogue Configure
Probe System opens. Here, you define the components of your
probe system.
Defining the probe positions
When activating the button "Def. probes", the input dialogue Define
Probe opens. Here, you define the required probe positions.
07.04.07 v3.0 99
Probe
Create part program for calibration

When activating the button "Generate", the input dialogue Generate
Part Program for Calibration opens. Here, you can define the CNC
parameters, the number of measurement repetitions or the type of
master ball you are using.
Hint
The button "New" is only active if you have selected an automatic probe
tree change system in the "CMM driver system".
Remove probe tree from list
Ö Select the probe tree in the list.
Ö Click the button "Delete".
You receive a warning message asking if the probe tree shall be
really deleted.
7.32 Combination of Racks

7.32.1 Combination of Racks / Introduction
GEOPAK allows the combination of different racks. This serves to realise an
automated and quick change of components as well as automated measurement
tasks that have to be performed with different probes. For more information, also
refer to the topic "Change Probe Tree".
Combinations of probe change systems are configured via the definition program
“Rack definition” and are subsequently measured in GEOPAK. MCOSMOS
supports the following types of probe change systems:
FCR25
MCR20
SCR200
SCR600
SCR6
SCR80
Manual changer
Virtual changer
ACR3
ACR (with GPIB- or RS232-interface)
7.32.1.1 Definitions
Master Rack:
These racks pick up components with the interface PAA, including:
• ACR (RS232C)
• ACR (IEEE)
• ACR3
• Manual changer
• Virtual changer
100 v3.0 07.04.07

Probe
Hint
Master Racks always pick up complete probe trees.
Examples of probe trees with which the master rack can be fitted:
• TP20 with probe
• SP25M with SM25-1 and SH25-1
• SP25M with TM25-20 and TP20-probe
7.32.1.2 Ports for parking

Because the master racks always pick up complete probe trees, components
must first be deposited in alternating cycles before new components can be
picked up. Define the "Ports for parking" as places of deposit for ports. Leave
those "Ports for parking" empty.
These allocations are required for each type of component.
Therefore, you need
• One port each for parking for TP20-probes.
• One port each for parking for TP200-probes.
• One joint port each for SM25-1, SM25-2, SM25-3; SM25-4 and
TM25-20.
• One joint port each for SH25-1, SH25-2, SH25-3 and SH25-4.
Hint
The TP20-probe can be deposited both in the MCR20 and in the FCR 25.
7.32.2 Sub-Racks
The racks MCR20, SCR200, SCR600 can also be defined and used as so-called
"sub-racks" of either the ACR, the manual or the virtual changer.
On the other hand it is possible that two ports of the ACR access the same sub-
rack. E.g. one ACR port may be equipped with a TP200 without extension and
another ACR port with a TP200 with extension (e.g. PE1). Both TP200 exchange
the styli in the same SCR200.
Further note that
...a probe extension module (PEM), which can be accessed before any
other probe tree is supported in the ACR (but not in the ACR3).
Further themes:
"Definition of Sub-Racks" and
"Probe Extension Module "PEM"".
7.32.3 Manual and Virtual Changer

A manual changer can be used if you wish to exchange the probe
system and there is no ACR available.
Two examples:
TP200 and SP600
TP2 and QVP
07.04.07 v3.0 101

Probe
A virtual changer is used if the probe system is to be changed but a

physical exchange is not necessary, e.g. with the RMV camera
system and the PH10, used at the same time.
The virtual changer is also used for the offline creation of part
programs.
7.32.4 Manual Change

We must distinguish between an
exclusively manuel change and a
tool changer with a following rack (e.g. SCR 200; see details of
Manual Tool Changer with Following Rack).
Manual Change:
Ö Via the Probe/Change of Probe menu item, you call the change of
probe. Enter the number of the probe tree you want and confirm.
You get a window with the information to the change of probe tree
and the probe tree no.
Ö Now, you must switch off the probe signal on the joystick box and
change the tree.
Ö After that, confirm in the "Manual Change of Probe Tree" window.
By confirming this, the machine control of the CMM registers the
new probe system.
After the change of probe tree, you get the "Change Probe" window
(probe tree no. in the title bar). Now, proceed as for the selection of
probe.
7.32.5 Manual Tree Change with MPP

Starting situation
You have already defined a manual probe change in the PartManager under
"Settings / CMM driver system". In the dialogue "Rack definition" you have, for
example, performed the following port settings:
• Port01 TP2#1
• Port02 MPP2/4/5#1
• Port03 TP2#3
• etc.
Task
You want to change from Port01 (probe tree 1) to Port02 (probe tree 2).
Proceed as follows:
Ö Go to the menu item Probe/Probe tree change and call up the probe
tree change. Enter the number of the required probe tree and
confirm.
In the following window, you are alternatively asked to perform the
manual change.
102 v3.0 07.04.07

Probe
In a following information window, the individual steps are described

as follows:
• Remove probe head.
• Install MPP.
• Push "Start" button on joystick box.
After you have completed these actions, the change is complete.
The change from MPP to the probe head is performed in the same way.
Limitation
It is not permissible that a manual rack contains two MPP.
7.32.6 Manual Change with Following Rack

The sequence of operations for this configuration is described in an example.
Initially you have a "Master rack" (manual changer) and the following racks 1
(SCR 200) and 2 (SCR 600). The active tree is tree TP 200 with the probe tip of
port 4 (following rack 1).
Its number is 14. The port for parking is port 1. The probe tree with its component
has the number 11. You wish to change with the probe tip from port 3 (following
rack 2) to the SP 600. The number of the new probe tree is 23. Also the SP 600
has set up the port for parking. The same applies to port 1. The probe tree with
the component that will be deposited here has the number 21.
Proceed according to the following three steps:

Ö In following rack 1 (SCR 200), the probe is automatically deposited
in port 4 and the parked probe from port 1 is changed in.
Ö Now you have to perform the probe tree change from number 11 to
number 21 manually (for detailed information, refer to the topic
"Manual Change".
Ö In the following rack 2 (SCR 600), the probe is automatically
deposited in the port for parking and the probe of port 3 is picked up
(probe tree change from 21 to 23).
7.32.7 Definition of Sub-Racks

If an ACR, a manual or a virtual changer is used, additional sub-racks to change
the styli can be defined.
Double-click on the port number to open the dialogue box "Port Settings".
If you select a TP200, TP20 or SP600 you can define the
corresponding sub-rack.
Move the mouse to the port number and click the right mouse
button. The "Insert" dialogue box will be opened.
The rack is added by a simple click on the icon.
To change the rack-specific parameters, see Rack Definition.
07.04.07 v3.0 103

Probe
7.32.8 Probe Extension Module "PEM"

If an ACR, a manual or a virtual changer is used, you can also use the
automatically changeable extension "PEM".
In the "Port Settings" select "PEM".
Make sure to enter the offset by which the probe system is extended
in X, Y and Z direction.
The figure in brackets indicates the number by which you can
address the probe including the extension.
7.32.9 Rack Alignment

ACR
The alignment (measurement) of the ACR is achieved in the single/learn mode
via the pull-down menu "Probe / ACR alignment". The operator is guided through
the measurement by pictures independent of the language. The operator must
have the user right to execute "Rack alignment" in GEOPAK.
The command "ACR alignment" is not learnable.
MCR20, SCR200, SCR600
The rack types MCR20, SCR200, SCR600 are measured by part programs. After
the measurement the positions are converted by the learnable command
"Convert rack data".
The part programs for the alignment of the racks and for the conversion of the
data are available on the MCOSMOS CD under "AlignRacks". We recommend
studying the Readme file in this directory carefully. The delivered part programs
already contain the command "Convert rack data". Therefore no additional action
is necessary after the execution of the part programs.
To execute the command "Convert rack data" in the learn or edit mode the
operator must have the user right to execute "Rack alignment" in GEOPAK. In
the repeat mode this command will be executed even if the operator does not
have this right.
7.32.10 Convert Rack Data

In order to automatically change the probe tip, GEOPAK must know the position
of the probe change system. You determine this position by calibrating the probe
change system by means of an example of a part program, which you will find on
the MCOSMOS-CD under "AlignRacks".
Through the "Convert Rack Data" command, the position data will be converted
in a format meeting the requirements of the CMM.
"Convert Rack Data" Dialogue Window
Via the "Menu Bar / Probe", you come to the "Convert Rack Data" dialogue
window.
"Convert Rack Data" List Box
In the "Convert Rack Data" dialogue window, you select in the "Rack Data File"
list box the ASCII file, in which the rack position has been stored.
The format of this ASCII file and the order of the necessary positions in this ASCII
file can be taken out of the examples of part programs you find on the
MCOSMOS-CD under "AlignRacks".
104 v3.0 07.04.07

Probe
"Length of Probe" List Box

Enter the length of the stylus (l) in the "Length of Probe" list box.
You determine the length (l) out of the tables of stylus and stylus extensions.
You can find more information to this subject under "Calibrate Probe Change
System".
7.32.11 Set Advanced MPP100 Data

Starting-situation: You use the MPP100 together with the probe change system
SCR6.
After having changed the probe combination, the origin must be re-determined.
This is necessary because different probe combinations have a different weight
and thus the origin is different.
7.32.11.1 Set origin

Continue as follows:
Ö Measure the reference sphere with probe no. 1 of the current probe
tree.
Ö After that, set the origin in the "Set Advanced MPP100 Data"
dialogue window.
Ö For this, click on the "Set Origin after Probe Change" radio button.
Ö Select the corresponding "Sphere" reference element in the list box
and confirm.
7.32.11.2 Determine Reference Position

Requirement:
You only can set the origin after the probe change if the system knows the
reference position.
To be able to determine the reference position, proceed as follows:
Ö Measure the masterball with the reference probe (probe no. 1,
probe tree no. 1).
Ö For this, click on the "Determine Reference Position (Masterball)"
radio button.
07.04.07 v3.0 105

Probe
Ö After that, select the corresponding "Sphere" reference element in

the list box and confirm. By this, the reference position will be
automatically stored.
Hint
This determination of the reference position must always be repeated
after the following cases:
• If the rack has been re-aligned or
• the rack position has been changed or
• if the reference probe has been changed.
Mitutoyo provides examples of part programs you can find on the MCOSMOS-CD
under "AlignRacks". After the change of probe tree, you can call these part
programs to automatically measure the masterball and to set the origin.
7.32.12 Calibrate ACR 3

You only can use the ACR 3 from version 2.1.
On principle, you proceed as already described in the topic Calibrate the Change
Probe System . Certainly, there is an essential improvement with the ACR 3:
To calculate the position where the probe is situated we had to determine
till now the distance of the stylus for the recording of the probe (PAA) at a
"Masterball" on the rack. For the ACR 3, this distance will be entered at
installation in the "Change Direction" window by the service-engineer. You
don’t need any longer a controller incl. the expensive cabling.
Beginning from the Version 2.2 you can use two ACR-3 modules in order for you
to have more than four different probing systems at your disposal. To this end
you are required to make a change in the dialogue window designated "Position".
You access this dialogue window through the "PartManager / Menu bar / Tools /
Rack Definition / Movement Parameters". Enter the number 8 into the column
"Number of Available Ports" and confirm.
7.32.13 Numbering Method of Probe Configurations
The numbering method described below is applicable up to MCOSMOS

version 2.3, as starting with version 2.4, you always must define the
probe tree numbers. It is, however, basically possible that each customer
continues with the numbering method he has grown used to – also when
working with version 2.4 or upwards. In this case he only needs to
perform the definition himself but is free to select (also refer to the topic
"Configuration with the SCR200").
This selection is only possible if no configuration has been defined

before.
For defining the probe trees, first determine the components in the port (for
detailed information, see "Port Settings".
You can choose the tree numbers freely:
106 v3.0 07.04.07

Probe
Ö Click the basic component (Port 1-8),

Ö in the menu "Probe tree", select the function "Add",
Ö select a component and assign a tree number.
You can repeat this as often as you like. The list of your actions is shown in the
table at the bottom of the dialogue "Rack definition".
In case of a complex rack combination, this kind of definition might be very time-
consuming. Therefore the system provides a function for "Automatic Probe
Tree Generation". The program calculates the possible combinations with the
relevant tree numbers.
Proceed as follows:
Ö If the table still contains probe tree numbers, these need to be
deleted first (right mouse-click and the function). You can also select
several numbers and delete the numbers at a time, following
Windows conventions.
In the next step, go to the menu "Probe tree" and click "Automatic
probe tree generation". In the following window, you define the
intervals (increments) for numbering the probe trees. If you, for
example, enter a "10", the tree numbers of Rack1 are assigned from
1 to 9, the numbers of Rack2 start with 11 and the numbers of
Rack3 with 21, i.e. intervals of 10.
You should make sure that the intervals chosen are not too short.
To avoid a duplication of tree numbers, we strongly recommend
using intervals of 10.
The same basically applies for the automatically changeable
extensions (PEM) for which we, however, recommend Increment
from rack to rack of 100.
Limitations
The possibilities of rack FCR25 are so flexible and variable that the automatic
generation of tree numbers is not possible.
7.32.14 Rack Definition

7.32.14.1 The theme on a glance
Start the definition program for the probe change system (Rack Definition) from
the PartManager via the menu "Settings / Rack Definition". For this, the user
must have already been assigned the user right "Rack Definition" in the
PartManager.
Define the combination in the definition program.
The measurement takes place in GEOPAK. Also read the topic
"Automatic Calibration".
Before starting the probe change system, you have to define the
configuration in the definition program.
Hint:
The rack definition program is installed together with GEOPAK.
07.04.07 v3.0 107

Probe
Proceed as follows:
Select all racks you intend to use from the program "Rack Definition"
via the menu bar / "Changer" / "Add / Delete". You can add or delete
a rack by double click.
Then you can define the components of master racks or FCR 25
with a double click on the desired component. You get to the
dialogue "Port settings".
If the component is from the master rack or the FCR 25, also define
the "Port for parking" for the probe.
Before you can confirm the dialogue "Rack definition", you need to define the
probe trees. Proceed as follows:
Ö Highlight a component in the master rack.
Ö Use the right mouse key to select the option "Define probe tree"
from the context menu.
You get to the dialogue window "Define probe tree".
Define the probe tree number at the top right in the dialogue.
Ö Combine the probe tree using the buttons "Add" and "Delete".
Hint
If you want to change a probe tree configuration that has already been
defined, click in the dialogue "Rack definition" on the required line at the
bottom of the table".
7.32.14.2 Characteristic features of the FCR25

If no master rack has been defined, start the probe tree definition with one of
these components: SM25-1, SM25-2, SM25-3, SM25-4 and TM25-20.
If a master rack has been defined, you have the option to change the
components SM25-1, SM25-2, SM25-3, SM25-4 and TM25-20. In this case you
need to define the "Port for parking".
Basically, also the probe tip can be changed. In this case, you have to define a
"Port for parking" also for the probe tips.
7.32.15 Options with the FCR25

Starting with MCOSMOS version 2.4, the programme offers a range of additional
options to structure the probe trees. You can, for example
select the probe tree numbers freely and
assign individual names to the components for recognition.
Particularly, the flexible fitting of the FCR25 is supported. Probe tips,
modules and probe systems can be changed in this rack.
If you wish to perform a probe tree change in GEOPAK, you need no longer care
about where the individual components have been parked (parking ports) after
the learn mode or where from to get the individual components.
To guarantee a smooth operation, you only need to consider some factors when
defining the probe trees:
To be at all able to perform a probe change, the relevant probe trees must have
previously been defined with a probe tree number.
108 v3.0 07.04.07

Probe
For defining your probe trees you must always start with the basic
components from the masterrack (e.g. SP25M). As regards the window "Define
probe tree", you should know that only those components are offered in this
window that can actually be used.
7.32.16 General FCR25 Settings

Deactivate safety position between two lined up FCR25s
When two probe change systems of the same kind (e.g. two FCR25 systems) are
lined up, it is not necessary to keep to the preset safety position. To safe time you
can deactivate this position in the dialogue "General FCR25 settings". The probe
will then move on the shortest path like he would move within one rack.
7.32.17 Configuration with the SCR200

To clarify the processes, we use two examples: first, an example with a rack
(SCR200) and second, an exemplary rack combination (ACR3 + two times
FCR25). For information regarding the second example, go to the topic
Configuration with the ACR and Two Times FCR25 ".
Example (SCR200):
Proceed as follows:
Ö In the window 'Rack definition', click in the menu "Changer" (Racks)
on "Add/Delete".
Ö In the following window "Add/Delete", click in the list "Available
components" on the SCR200, then send it via the function "Add" to
the page "Selected components" and confirm.
Back in the window "Rack definition" you see that the SCR200 has been defined
as Rack1. The list underneath defines six ports that are each equipped with the
probe TP200. With a click on the line "Rack1:SCR200", the right hand part of the
window displays complete rack specific parameters, i.e. from rack direction to
approach speed (see ill. below).
07.04.07 v3.0 109

Probe
When clicking on one of the ports, the right hand part of the window displays
information about
• the change speed in the port and
• the probe tree component.
7.32.17.1 Rack Parameter

A click with the right mouse key on the rack line, and three options appear with
which you can change the parameters:
• Rack direction
• PH10 angle
• Movement parameters (for detailed information, refer to the
topic "Rack Specific Parameters and Positions "
7.32.17.2 Probe Tree Number / Port Settings

A click with the right mouse key on a port, and two options appear:
• Define probe tree number
Starting with version 2.4, the probe tree numbers

must always be defined. Please note that in future you always
have the free choice of these numbers.
The probe tree numbers and the components are shown in a list
in the window "Rack definition " (see ill. above).
• Port Settings(for further information, click on the topic)
7.32.18 Configuration with the ACR3 and Two Times FCR25

To perform this configuration, always proceed as described for example 1 in the
topic "Configuration with the SCR200", with the exception that in this case three
racks are selected. For how to fit the racks, refer to the topic "Definition of Probe
Change Systems (Rack Definition)".
110 v3.0 07.04.07

Probe
In our example, the racks are fitted as shown in the illustration below.
7.32.19 Rack Specific Parameters and Positions

The definition of your new change system configuration requires that you enter,
among other things, several rack specific parameters.
To select a changer choose "File / New Configuration".
To change the parameters double-click on the corresponding icon
(e.g. rack direction or safety position).
Rack direction: Defines the position of the rack on the CMM.
PH9/10 Angles: Defines the angle the probe head moves to before
changing (accessing the rack).
Movement parameters:
• Safety position: Defines the position (in CMM coordinates),
which is accessed before and after the change cycle.
• Distance to rack: Defines the distance of the CMM to the rack
during the change cycle. The value is given relative to the rack.
• Distance to sensor: The distance to the sensor of the SCR200
can be corrected.
• Number of accessible ports: If not all ports are equipped with
a probe or a stylus, pay attention not to change to an empty
port.
Approach speed: Defines the speed of the CMM when
approaching the rack.
Port01, speed during change cycle: Defines the speed of the
CMM when entering a port. Sometimes this speed must be reduced
(e.g. for long styli) to avoid a false triggering when opening a lid.
07.04.07 v3.0 111

Probe
7.32.20 Port Settings

In a first step you must perform some settings for the port. In the following
window (see ill. below), it is important that you activate both options, i.e.
• module is subject to change and
• stylus is subject to change.
• If appropriate, you must change the number of the rack with
parking port or the number of the parking port.
• Confirm.
With a further click (right mouse key) on Port01, you define in the following
window the probe trees no. 1 and no. 2 (see also the topic "Definition of Probe
Change Systems (Rack Definition)") and confirm.
7.32.21 Save / Print Out Rack Configuration

If you want to save or respectively print out your rack configuration, proceed to
the dialogue "Rack definition" via the menu bar / File and the function "Output in
file".
In the following dialogue, the system suggests the MCOSMOS temp directory as
a folder and "output.txt" as the file name. You may, however, also proceed
according to Windows conventions and determine another folder and another file
name.
In any case, a click on OK immediately opens the system editor and you get all
information about your configuration.
Day, time etc.
Rack configuration
Tree number
Changer/Port
Components.
From this editor, you can also print out the file.
In this editor you can also edit the file (add, delete, colour texts etc.).
These actions have no retroactive influence on your configuration.
112 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
8 Workpiece Alignment
8.1 Workpiece Alignment
Clicking on the topics in the below list, you will obtain the required information
about this topic.
Define Co-ordinate System
Store/Load Co-Ordinate System
Store/Load Table Co-Ordinate System
Pattern for Alignment
Alignment by Single Steps
Create Co-ordinate System through Best Fit
Alignment in Space: Overview
Alignment in Space by Plane
Alignment in Space by Cylinder/Cone
Alignment in Space by Line
Align Axis Parallel to Axis
Align Axis through Point
Align Axis through Point with Offset
Create Origin
Move and Rotate Co-ordinate System
Origin in Element
Alignment by RPS
Direction of a Plane
Element List
Type of Co-ordinate Systems
Polar Co-ordinates: Change Planes
Set Relation to CAD Co-ordinate System
8.2 Define Co-Ordinate System
Before you start to measure the elements for alignment, you should
make sure that the part is fixed to the machine in such a way that it
cannot move.
You have selected the necessary probe and get the dialogue window
"Define co-ordinate system".
The upper part gives an option of three methods:
Alignment Patterns
Machine co-ordinate system
Co-ordinate system from archive

If you do not need exact alignment, or you have to use a more complex way of
alignment not covered by the patterns, start with the machine co-ordinate system.
Then, just click here and confirm.
07.04.07 v3.0 113

Workpiece Alignment
If you need a co-ordinate system from the archive, just click the symbol shown
above. Now you can either input the number directly, or get a list of all stored co-
ordinate systems by a click on the arrow symbol of the input field. Then you can
select from the list, too.
The third possibility is to use one of the alignment patterns to construct a co-
ordinate system.
New co-ordinate system
In the dialogue window "define co-ordinate system", you find eight patterns
frequently used for the initial alignment of a part. In the upper line, a plane
determines the axis in space; in the lower line, axes in space (cylinder or cone)
are used to create the direction in space.
If none of these patterns applies to your case, first measure single elements, and
then align your part using them by the co-ordinate system functions of the menu
bar (for more details, see Alignment by Single Steps).
Hint
Before you opt for the pattern, you should inform yourself about details of
the possibilities regarding Patterns for Alignment .
Plane, Line, Line
Plane, Circle, Circle
Plane, Circle, Line (origin in centre of circle)
Plane, Circle, Line (origin on line)
Cylinder, Point, Point
Cylinder, Circle, Point
Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on axis of cylinder)
Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on line)
114 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
Circle or cylinder can be replaced by ellipse or cone. This is done in the

window appearing after you have made the first decision on the pattern;
this next window allows you to select (or change) the elements you are
going to measure for alignment.
In this window, GEOPAK suggests the elements and a way of measuring. The
suggestion for the number of measurement points is always the minimum number
required for the element plus one; this gives you an indication about the quality of
the alignment. You can either accept the suggestions, or input your own data
for...
the name of the element,
the memory number of the element,
the number of measurement points and...
the memory number of the co-ordinate system.
The co-ordinate system which is constructed this way can be immediately stored.
Just click the symbol, input the selected number, and confirm.
If you do not store at this point, you can do so later via the menu bar "Co-ordinate
system / Store co-ordinate system".
The results, i.e. the measured elements, are listed in the result window. They can
be used later for all types of further evaluation.
If you want to measure parts on one or more pallets, refer to details of "Pallet Co-
Ordinate-System" and the following subjects.
8.3 Store/Load Co-Ordinate System

When storing co-ordinate systems, we distinguish temporary and permanent co-
ordinate systems.
Temporary co-ordinate systems are those created during the part
program run, which are erased each time you start a new run.
Permanent (archive) co-ordinate systems correspond to fixed
positions on the CMM table. Normally, they are used to enable a
CNC run without manual alignment.
At "Load Co-Ordinate System", you proceed the same way.
For details to store or load a pallet co-ordinate system, see details of "Pallet Co-
Ordinate System".
Beginning from Version 2.2, there will be separate functions with their
own dialogues provided for the options "
Save/Load Table Co-Ordinate System
".
07.04.07 v3.0 115

Workpiece Alignment
8.4 Store/Load Table Co-Ordinate System

Already in the default settings made in the PartManager you decide which
options you take regarding the table co-ordinate system (menu bar / settings /
default settings / programs / CMM / GEOPAK / settings GEOPAK / menu
functions). Click the table co-ordinate system in this list.
A table co-ordinate system relates to the origin of the CMM. Thus it determines a
position on the CMM table, which, for instance, may be provided with stops.
Great importance is attached particularly to the table co-ordinate systems with
the manager programs, e.g. where several workpieces are clamped at different
positions on the CMM. In these cases, already in the manager program the
workpieces can be related to a table co-ordinate system from the archive.
In a pallet-based operation, the table co-ordinate system determines the position
of the pallet. The pallet co-ordinate system, in turn, determines the position of the
(different) workpieces on the pallet. For further details see "Pallet Co-Ordinate
System".
In GEOPAK, you access these functions through the "Menu bar / Co-Ordinate
System/ Save / Load Table Co-Ordinate System".
Regarding this topic, refer also to Save/Load Co-Ordinate System .
8.5 Patterns for Alignment

In practical applications, most of the initial alignments are made using one of the
following eight methods (patterns). Using these patterns makes easier and
simpler set up of a co-ordinate system (cf. also Define Co-ordinate System ).
The pattern "Plane, Line, Line" defines the axis in space by the
measured plane. The first line gives the direction of the x-axis; the origin is the
intersection of the two lines.
The pattern "Plane, Circle, Circle" defines the axis in space by the
measured plane. The line gives the direction of the x-axis from the first circle
centre to the second; the origin is the centre of the first circle.
The pattern "Plane, Circle, Line (origin in circle)" defines the axis in
space by the measured plane. The line gives the direction of the x-axis; the origin
is the centre of the circle.
The pattern "Plane, Circle, Line (origin on line)" defines the axis in
space by the measured plane. The line gives the direction of the x-axis; the origin
is on the line; it is the centre of the circle projected to the line.
116 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
The pattern "Cylinder, Point, Point" defines the axis in space by the
measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder; the first single point
determines the Z-height of the origin. The direction of the x-axis is from the origin
through the second measured point. If you use two probing points for the second
point, and you probe on the right and left flank, you can use this to align a gear.
The pattern "Cylinder, Circle, Point" defines the axis in space by the
measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder; the single point
determines the Z-height of the origin. The direction of the x-axis is from the origin
through the centre of the circle.
The pattern "Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on the cylinder axis)"

defines the axis in space by the measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of
the cylinder; the single point determines the Z-height of the origin. The measured
line gives the direction of the x-axis.
The pattern "Cylinder, Line, Point (origin on the line)" defines the
axis in space by the measured cylinder. The origin is on the axis of the cylinder;
the single point determines the Z-height of the origin. The measured line gives
the direction of the x-axis. The origin is projected to the line.
Circle or Cylinder can be replaced by ellipse or cone. You can switch

between the element types by the icons of the following dialogue
window.
Then, measure the elements; the measurements are recorded in the result
window (cf. also Define Co-Ordinate System ).
8.6 Alignment by Single Steps

In order to perform a complete alignment, the axis in space (in other words, the
base plane), one axis within this plane, and the origin must be determined. This is
done by the alignment patterns by using a single command. However, if your part
does not suit for the use of one of these patterns, you must do it systematically.
The following example shows these steps:
07.04.07 v3.0 117

Workpiece Alignment
Ö Select e.g. the machine co-ordinate system to start with.

Ö Measure the F1 plane for the plane alignment.
To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Co-

ordinate system / Align plane" from the menu bar. In the "Align
Plane" dialogue box choose OK to confirm.
Ö Measure the F2 plane.
Ö Create the intersection line between F1 and F2 for "Axis Alignment".

ordinate system / Align axis parallel to axis" from the menu bar.
Ö Measure the F3 plane.
Ö Create the intersection point between F3 and the intersection line
for the zero point determination.

ordinate system / Create origin" from the menu bar.
8.7 Create Co-ordinate System through Best Fit

If you want to create a co-ordinate system via best fit, proceed as described
under "Best fit with a fixed number of points " or "Best fit with a variable number
of points ". However, in the first window "Best fit" you activate the check box "co-
ordinate system".
If you want to store the co-ordinate system, you activate the symbol.
Then you can input the number of the co-ordinate system in the field next to the
symbol.
8.8 Alignment in Space
For the most ordinary cases, GEOPAK proposes the Patterns for
Alignment. However, there are cases that cannot be matched with one of these
patterns; therefore GEOPAK has also the possibility to align by other means.
Basically, you proceed in three steps.
Alignment in space; you create the axis in space, or in other words a
reference plane (usually XY plane).
Axis alignment; you need to determine an axis in the reference
plane (mostly the x-axis).
Origin; you take a point in space and declare this the origin.
The determination of the origin can be independent of the two other steps, and
made before these steps.
In many cases, however, you use elements, which determine as well the rotation
in space as one or two components of the origin. Now you can decide your
procedure according to the actual measurement task (drawing, position of the
part on the machine, etc.). Here you must define your measurement strategy.
For the alignment in space, you can use following elements:
Alignment in Space by Plane
Alignment in Space by Cylinder/Cone
Alignment in Space by Line
118 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
You should also know:

• The elements are stored in the Element List with a symbol,
memory number, and the number of points each.
• The simplest way is to use one of the Patterns for Alignment .
However, if this is not sufficient, you can measure the elements
for alignment manually, and then afterwards align your co-
ordinate system by these.
• You should start with the element necessary for the alignment
in space, and then activate "alignment".
• If the window for space alignment is displayed, and you
measure the element then, the list of elements in the selection
box is not yet updated. You must close the window and open it
again.
Proceed as follows:
Ö You come to the window for space alignment by the menu bar/co-
ordinate system and the function alignment in space.
You also can click on the symbol.

Ö By the arrow key of the dialogue window, you open a list of
elements. This is not the complete list as it only contains elements,
which can be used for alignment in space, not e.g. circles or
spheres.
Ö Select the element (plane, cylinder, cone, or line).
Ö Then you decide your co-ordinate plane (XY-, YZ-, or XZ-plane).
Ö In most cases, you also select "Origin in Element" by clicking

the symbol.
Z=0
P = new origin (Z = minus)
Example 1: The plane (cf. drawing above) determines the axis in space, here the
XY plane. Then "Origin in Element" means that Z is set to zero for all points of the
plane. If you do not want this, just click "Origin to Element" off; then the origin
stays where it has been before.
After this, the origins in x and y direction are still unchanged; they must be
determined by some other elements.
07.04.07 v3.0 119

Workpiece Alignment
Example 2: The cylinder axis (cf. drawing above) is used for the axis in space,
here the xy plane. In this case "Origin in Element" means that the origin in x and
y is set to the cylinder axis; the z height of the origin is still open and has to be
determined by some other element afterwards. Normally, the example for the
cylinder axis is also valid for the axis of a cone. This is also true for the Patterns
for Alignment.
The direction of a cylinder is determined by the sequence of probing; the positive
direction runs from the first to the last measurement point. The positive direction
of a cone always runs from the apex into the cone.
8.9 Alignment in Space by Plane

The Alignment in Spacecan be achieved by means of a plane, a cylinder, or
cone. A line can only be used if it is a line in space, in other words a "Connection
Element" (cf. also Alignment in Space by Cylinder/Cone and Alignment in Space
by Line.
You measure - e.g. via the symbol - the plane; the result of the
measurement is stored in the element list. Then you activate the alignment in
space. In the dialogue window, select the measured plane. After you confirm, this
plane is made the base plane of your co-ordinate system.
After the Alignment in Space by a plane, the axis in space always points out of
the material; different from the alignment by a cylinder or a line, the sequence of
measurement does not affect the result.
8.10 Alignment in Space by Cylinder or Cone

The Alignment in Space can be achieved by a plane or the axis of a cylinder or
cone (cf. also Alignment in Space by Plane and Alignment in Space by Line).
By clicking the symbol or via the menu bar (elements / cylinder), you define
the element as usual (measure or construct). The resulting element is stored in
the element list.
120 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
Then, click and select the cylinder as the axis in space. When applying the
Alignment in Space, the axis of the cylinder becomes the z-axis of the co-ordinate
system. The positive direction is determined by the probing sequence of the
cylinder: from the first to the last measured point.
If a cone defines the axis, proceed accordingly. When applying the Alignment in
Space for a cone, the positive direction is always the direction from the apex into
the cone.
8.11 Alignment in Space by Line

The Alignment in Space can be achieved by a plane, the axis of a cylinder or
cone, or by a line (cf. also Alignment in Space by Plane and Alignment in Space
by cylinder/cone).
By "Alignment in Space by Line" you will get a not projected line (Symbol {bmc
N_PLANNO.bmp}). Take care that the elements, you need for creating the line
will be measured not projected.
Activate the element line by the icon. Then you get the element definition window.
For the alignment in space, you can only use a line in space. Therefore you
cannot use a measured line; a measured line is always projected.
Using the icon or the menu bar, you activate the element line. In the
subsequent window, you can select
the connection element,
07.04.07 v3.0 121

Workpiece Alignment
the intersection element, or
the symmetry element.
You can use intersection lines of two planes (cf. example below); symmetry lines
of lines in space, and lines connected from points in space, e.g. the centre points
of two circles or ellipses.
1 = plane 1
2 = plane 2
3 = intersection line
8.12 Align Axis Parallel to Axis

The function "Align axis parallel to axis" is used if the co-ordinate system should
be positioned horizontally to a certain axis. Before you execute this function carry
out the plane alignment. The axis alignment determines one of the two axes to be
positioned horizontally to the plane. In this example the Z axis is the plane axis.
Ö First determine the alignment element, ellipse, line, cylinder or cone
(measurement, theoretical etc.).
122 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
Ö To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Co-

ordinate system / Align axis parallel to axis" from the menu bar.
You can choose between four alignment elements each of which
with a defined axis.
Ö To choose an element click on the corresponding icon.
Ö In the "Co-or.-Plane-Axis" group box determine the axis (X or Y) you
wish to align with the element at a click on the corresponding icon.
The selected element will be projected into the X/Y plane.
The co-ordinate system will be rotated around the Z axis until the X
axis or Y axis is positioned parallel to the element.
Origin on axis
Click on this icon if the axis should not only be aligned parallel with the
element but should be positioned exactly on the element. In this case the co-
ordinate system is rotated and afterwards moved until the origin is positioned on
the element.
8.13 Align Axis through Point

The function "Align axis through point" is used if a co-ordinate axis should pass a
certain point. Before you execute this function carry out the plane alignment. The
axis alignment determines one of the two axes to be positioned horizontally to the
plane. In this example the Z axis is the plane axis.
Ö First determine the alignment element, ellipse, line, cylinder or cone
(measurement, theoretical etc.).
Ö To open the dialogue box click on this icon or choose "Co-

ordinate system / Align axis through point" from the menu bar.
You can choose between four alignment elements each of which
with a defined point.
Ö To choose an element click on the corresponding icon.
Ö In the "Co-or.-Plane-Axis" group box determine the axis (X or Y)
which should pass the point of the element at a click on the
corresponding icon.
The selected element will be projected into the X/Y plane.
The co-ordinate system will be rotated around the Z axis until the X
axis or Y axis passes this point.
Offset alignment
Click on this icon and enter a value if the axis should not pass the point
but should be positioned in a certain distance to the point.
The co-ordinate system will be rotated so that the point is positioned with the
determined distance to the axis.
07.04.07 v3.0 123

Workpiece Alignment
8.14 Align Axis through Point with Offset

In our example, a circle has been measured, the plane has been aligned and the
origin has been determined. The alignment of the axis has still to be performed.
In order to be able to align the axis, we have developed the function "Align axis
through point with offset". To get to the relevant dialogue, go to the menu bar /
Co-ordinate system / Align axis.
In our example (see ill. below), you can go by the plane axis to be the Z-axis.
Ö First, capture the alignment element, i.e. either point, circle, ellipse
or sphere (measurement, theoretical etc.).
You will find the four elements with a defined point each as
alignment elements.
Ö Define the element type with which you want to work. The list
contains the elements of this type.
Ö Click the symbol to select an element (in our example for the
XY-plane)
The selected element is projected into the X/Y-plane.
The co-ordinate system is then rotated around the Z-axis until the
relation of the x- and the y-co-ordinate of the selected element
corresponds to the entered offset values.
8.15 Create Origin

If your drawing has been measured from a certain origin, you can choose the
"Create origin" function to align the co-ordinate system with the element, which
contains this point.
Ö Measure the element, which determines this origin first.
Ö Click on this icon or choose "Co-ordinate system / Create

origin" from the menu bar.
Ö In the dialogue box choose the type of alignment element.
The text box indicates the element measured last.
Ö If you wish to choose another element click on the arrow of the list
box and make your selection from the elements listed.
124 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
With these icons you determine in which axis the element co-
ordinate is set to zero. This can be done for each axis individually. For some
elements (circle), however, two axes are available only.
GEOPAK sets all selected axes to zero. It may occur that the position of
the origin may be changed accidentally.
Example
: You have selected all three axes and have determined the X/Y plane by
a measured plane. The origin is positioned in this plane. If you measure
a circle below this plane (Z=-3) the program would position this co-
ordinate on the measuring height, i.e. Z=-3.
In this case the Z axis should not have been selected.
8.16 Move and Rotate Co-ordinate System
If you wish to move and rotate the co-ordinate system, proceed as

follows:
Ö Click on the icon shown above or choose "Co-ordinate system /
Move and rotate co-ordinate system" from the menu bar.
Ö In the dialogue box enter the values in the X, Y and Z text boxes.
Ö In the text box enter the angle and click on the icon
of the axis (axes) you wish to rotate.
If you wish to move and to rotate and you have entered the requested
values in the dialogue box the co-ordinate system will always be moved
first and then rotated.
If you wish to rotate first and then move, proceed as follows:
Ö Rotate first and confirm.

Ö Open the dialogue box again, move and confirm.
The values differ from the ones obtained before.
8.17 Origin in Element

When you measure an element to determine the axis in space, the orientation
properties (direction in space) are evaluated. However, depending on the
element, one or more co-ordinates of the origin can also be determined by this
element.
This is achieved by clicking the icon. This means that the element is not
only parallel to the axes of the co-ordinate system, but goes passes through the
origin.
07.04.07 v3.0 125

Workpiece Alignment
Z=0
P = new origin (z = minus...)
Example 1: The plane (cf. above) determines the axis in space. If you select
"Origin to Element", the z-value of the co-ordinate system is also set to zero on
the plane. In other words, the origin is shifted into the plane. The other co-
ordinates (x and y) must be determined differently, e.g. by a circle.
Example 2: The axis of the cylinder (cf. above) determines the z-axis in space, in
other words the xy plane. In this case, "origin to element" means that the x and y
co-ordinates of the origin are set to the axis of the cylinder. The z-value of the
origin must be defined distinctly.
8.18 RPS Alignment

8.18.1 Background
The RPS (Reference Point System) alignment is mainly used for sheet metal
parts in a car, the origin of the co-ordinate system being in the centre of the front
axle. The sheet metal parts do not have any features, which can be used for a
conventional alignment. Therefore the designer usually designates specific
points; these points have certain co-ordinates given. The RPS alignment consists
of constructing the transformation in such a way that the actually measured
points have these pre-defined co-ordinate values.
8.18.2 Pre-conditions
The values can be realised in different ways; two extreme are:
each point only determines one value; this means that 6 points are
necessary, or...
one point (e.g. centre of a circle thanks to a created plane)
determines 3 values, another 2, and the third determines one co-
ordinate value. This means that only 3 elements are necessary.
GEOPAK can handle as well the two extreme cases as all the others in between.
However, this makes the operation somewhat complicated.
General Rule
For a proper alignment, the 6 degrees of freedom have to be removed; this
means that normally 6 values must be given. The distribution is such that one co-
ordinate has 3 known values, the second only 2, and the last only one value. As
this can be any of the x, y, or z, this has to be transmitted to GEOPAK by buttons.
126 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
8.18.3 Operation
In a practical application, you have to distinguish two cases:
Case 1: Drawing and known RPS Points
Usually, the points are designated on the drawing, and the co-ordinates written in
the lower right corner.
Furthermore, the drawing specifies which co-ordinate the point, e.g. Fxy for a
point defining x and y, fixes. In addition, the tolerance for this co-ordinate is given
as 0.0.
In this case, proceed as follows:
Ö Measure the points on the part using the GEOPAK functions
(compensated point, circle, intersection, etc.).
Ö Select "Co-ordinate System"/"RPS Alignment" in the menu bar.
Ö Select whether the first reference point, and enter the three nominal
co-ordinates from the drawing, or ...
(bubble help: set defaults) by click on the symbol the values of
the measured element will be copied in the RPS-point-fields (right
side in the dialogue).
Ö Press the button(s) for those co-ordinates, which have to be exactly
determined (the drawing states "Tolerance = 0.0"; usually, the label
is something like 'Fz' for a z-value, etc.).
Ö Enter the other values as well, even if they are not relevant for the
alignment, because they are needed internally.
Ö Repeat the last 3 steps for the other references. For each reference,
you must activate the input by the button on the upper part of the
input field.
Ö After all references have been input, check the input: the number of
pressed co-ordinate keys must be exactly 6; 3 for one of x, y, or z; 2
for the next, and 1 for the last. Then press 'OK'.
Case 2: Only Data Set Given
In this case - which happens frequently during demonstrations for customers - it
is necessary to first determine the nominal co-ordinates.
For this, proceed as follows:
Ö Load the drawing in CAT1000S.
Ö Use the function "Search Border Points" to find the nominal co-
ordinates. Send these points to GEOPAK by pressing the
corresponding button in the window.
Ö Now measure close to your designated points in GEOPAK.
Ö Then proceed as in the case of given RPS points (cf. above).
For the input of the co-ordinates, you can either take these values into variables
(by the "formula calculation") or write them down and key them in.
Inform additionally in the documentation under the title "si_rps_e.pdf" on your
MCOSMOS CD. In this document we inform also in detail about the net
parallelism.
8.19 Direction of a Plane

A vector perpendicular to the surface determines the direction of a plane. For a
measured plane, this always points out the material, independent on the probing
sequence (cf. also "Alignment in Space").
07.04.07 v3.0 127

Workpiece Alignment
8.20 List of Elements

The list of elements contains all measured or calculated elements. It consists of
four columns with the following contents
the graphical symbol of the element (circle, point etc.)
a graphical symbol of the type of construction (measured,

connection element, etc.). Here you can also find the number of
points used to calculate the element (probing points for measured
elements, or points of other elements for connection elements).
the name of the element.
the memory number of the element. The elements are separately
stored for each type. The program automatically assigns the
numbers 1 to...X, but you can also input the memory numbers you
want in the dialogue window for the elements.
8.21 Types of Co-ordinate Systems

GEOPAK offers three types of co-ordinate system
Cartesian
Cylindrical
Spherical
You can always switch between these types.
For OUTPUT, select "Settings / Co-ordinate system mode" from the
menu bar, and select the type in the following window.
For INPUT, switching is possible by clicking on the corresponding
symbol in the input window. If you key-in an element, it is displayed
using the co-ordinates you have input.
If you want to see the element in a different co-ordinate system
type, switch the output (cf. above) to the required system type, then
re-calculate the element from memory.
After program start, the Cartesian co-ordinate system is active.
Cartesian co-ordinates
Here, the values of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes define the position of a point in space.
128 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
1 = X-co-ordinate
2 = Y-co-ordinate
3 = Z-co-ordinate
Cylindrical co-ordinates
In this system a point in space is defined by
the projected distance from the origin,
the angle Phi with the first (x-) axis, and
the value of the z-axis.
If you have used an axis different from Z to make the alignment in space, the
definitions are slightly different. The X-axis corresponds to the first axis of the
selected plane. This means for the Y/Z-plane the Y-axis, for the Z/X-plane the Z-
axis.
1 = angle Phi
2 = radius to origin
3 = Z-co-ordinate
Spherical co-ordinates
In this system a point in space is defined by
the distance from the origin in space,
the angle Phi with the first axis, and
the angle Theta. In GEOPAK, the angle Theta is the angle between
the z-axis and the vector to the point.
07.04.07 v3.0 129

Workpiece Alignment
1 = angle Phi
2 = angle Theta
3 = (angle Theta)
4 = radius to origin
In literature, some take also the view that the angle Theta is the angle between
the base plane and the vector.
8.22 Polar Co-Ordinates: Change Planes

In the dialogue windows where you can select one out of the three co-ordinate
system types, we offer you another option.
As a rule, you select your polar co-ordinate system with a click on the middle or
lower symbol (cylindrical or spherical, see picture below, left column).
With a further click on one of these two polar co-ordinate systems you can
additionally change the working plane. The changes are displayed to you.
8.23 Set relation to CAD Co-ordinate System

Task
After you have completed the alignment, use this function to "inform" the program
that the following conditions have been met:
The alignment is complete.
The alignment corresponds to the CAD co-ordinate system.
These conditions are recorded in the part program.
Start
To get to the dialogue "Set relation to CAD co-ord. system", proceed via the
GEOPAK menu bar / co-ordinate system and menu item "Set relation to CAD co-
ord. system".
Before you can use this function you need to ensure that the CAD co-ordinate
system in CAT1000 corresponds to the co-ordinate system in GEOPAK.
Read also the topics
"Virtual Part Alignment" and "Define Co-ordinate System".
130 v3.0 07.04.07

Workpiece Alignment
Option "Not defined yet"

If you select this option the changes of the GEOPAK co-ordinate system are
automatically taken on in CAT1000S – although in CAT1000S you can only work
with a co-ordinate system where the CAD co-ordinate system corresponds to the
co-ordinate system of the workpiece.
Option "Defined; apply future co-ordinate system changes"
Here you define the relation of the machine co-ordinate system to the CAD co-
ordinate system. By selecting this option all subsequent changes of the GEOPAK
co-ordinate system are automatically applied to the CAD co-ordinate system and
the measurement results are updated.
Hint
In GEOPAK, all changes of the GEOPAK co-ordinate system are
calculated with the measured results.
In CAT1000, however, the nominal co-ordinate system is calculated on
the basis of the appropriate nominal data.
This requires an input of the nominal data in GEOPAK.
See also "Input of Nominal Values for the Elements".
If you have programmed the element measurements in CAT1000,
CAT1000 automatically transfers the nominal data to GEOPAK.
Option "Defined; ignore future co-ordinate system changes"
We provide this option on reasons of downward compatibility of the MCOSMOS
version. Without this option, you could not use part programs you have created
with a previous MCOSMOS version.
If you are not depending on downward compatibility we recommend to use the
option "Defined; apply future co-ordinate system changes".
By selecting this option, the current co-ordinate system is stored as the view co-
ordinate system. In this context, the view co-ordinate system is the co-ordinate
system that was valid at the time at which the option "Defined; ignore future co-
ordinate system changes" was activated.
This function serves to "inform" CAT1000S that the current GEOPAK co-ordinate
system corresponds to the CAD co-ordinate system. From the moment you select
this option, CAT1000S accepts no further co-ordinate systems. This prevents that
the position of the workpiece changes in 3D view. Otherwise, multiple changes of
the co-ordinate system, e.g. in a loop, could lead to a slow-down of the program
run due to permanent updating processes.
With CAT1000S you can only work in the co-ordinate system with the
two systems corresponding. This is also not changed with the option
"Defined; ignore future co-ordinate system changes" where only the
updates are suppressed and the measurement points and elements are
not shown at their correct positions.
07.04.07 v3.0 131

Pallet Co-Ordinate System
9 Pallet Co-Ordinate System

With the pallet co-ordinate system you can
measure different parts
on one or several pallets
at different positions on the machine table
automatically or in CNC mode (see picture below).
Definitions
The table co-ordinate system (table position) determines in which position the
pallet is situated on the CMM table.
The pallet co-ordinate system determines, at which position the part is placed
on the pallet.
As different types of pallets are possible, you must assign numbers to the pallets.
The pallet co-ordinate systems are separately stored for each type of pallet. You
may assign the same pallet co-ordinate system numbers for different types of
pallets.
Connection to Manager Programs and Q-PAK
As for each single part exists a part program, the same way exists for each pallet
a manager program, which is calling the single part programs. This manager
program
includes information about which part program must be executed at
which pallet position and ...
gets the information from Q-PAK, on which table position the pallet
is situated.
Condition
First of all, you must have stored as table co-ordinate system the positions at
which the pallets must be situated (refer to "Store/Load Co-Ordinate System").
Ö For each position on the pallet, you define a co-ordinate system.
Ö Store this co-ordinate system as a pallet co-ordinate system (menu
bar "Co-Ordinate System / Store Pallet Co-Ordinate System").
Window "Store Co-Ordinate System"
Ö In this window, you enter the pallet co-ordinate system no. at the
top. This number is used for the pallet co-ordinate system in the
manager program.
132 v3.0 07.04.07

Pallet Co-Ordinate System
Ö In the middle field, you enter for which type of pallet this co-ordinate
system is valid.
Ö Below, you enter at which table position the pallet was situated
when defining the co-ordinate system.
So, you have all information for using the pallet co-ordinate system in the
manager program.
The "Load Pallet Co-Ordinate System" command is exclusively used for
tests.
07.04.07 v3.0 133

Elements
10 Elements
10.1 Geometric Elements Contents
Elements: Overview
Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation
Point: Conctructed Points (Overview)
Sphere
Circle
Constructed Circle: Overview
Inclined Circle
Contour
Ellipse
Cone
Cylinder
Probing Strategy Cylinder/Cone
Line
Constructed Lines: Overview
Plane
Step Cylinder
Selection of Point Contour
Surface
Angle Calculation
Calculation of Distance
Distance along Probe Direction
Type of Construction
Type of Calculation
Enveloping or Fitting-in Element
Positive Direction by Vector
Re-calculate Elements
Free Element Input
Pre-define Nominal Values for Elements
Nominal Values: Three Options
Element GEAR
Calculation
Calculation according to Gauss
Minimum Zone Element
Enveloping Element
Fitting in Element
Spread / Standard Deviation
Graphics of Elements
Graphics of Elements Contents
Carbody Elements
Hole Shapes: Introduction
Automatic Element Recognition

Automatic Element Recognition: Introduction
10.2 Elements
For your tasks you dispose of, among other things, the following elements: Point
Line
134 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Circle
Inclined Circle
Ellipse
Plane
Cone
Sphere
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
Contour
Calculation of Angles and
Calculation of Distance. Activate one of these elements either by a click on the
icon or the pull down menu, and come to the corresponding dialog window.
Skipping of "Element Dialog"
To carry out measurement the most quickly, you can skip the "Element Dialog".
To do this, click on "Settings / Properties for Selection Dialog" in the menu. In the
following window, click on the option "Skip Element Dialogue". Then, when calling
up the element via the symbol, you immediately come to measurement.
When you call up your element using the menu bar and the function, you come to
a dialogue window whose basic structure is identical for all elements (see
example shown below "Element Circle").
The dialogue window consists of five areas.

Below the title bar, you find, horizontally arranged, the symbols for
the Type of Construction.
The first four types of construction (from left) are identical for all
elements.
• Measurement,
• Connection element,
• Re-calculate from memory, and
• Theoretical element.
Note
Constructed Elements: Contents for this topic catalogue.

Regardig the input of nominal values, find detailed information in the topic
Input of Nominal Values for Elements
07.04.07 v3.0 135

Elements
On the left side, you find the icons for Type of Calculation (Gauss,
minimum zone element etc.)
On the right hand side, you can see the icons for the Programming
Help (measure automatic, tolerance etc.).
Graphics of Measurement: When clicking this button, the

window "Measurement display" additionally displays the symbol of
the element you are currently measuring during the measurement.
You may do without the optical representation when you

have activated the button "Measurement voice comment.
Only when activating "Automatic Element finish", the window

"Measurement display" shows the number of points you have
entered in the text box "No. of Points".
Moreover, these buttons are all furnished with speech bubbles and
are self-explanatory.
In the central area, you can input information about
• the name of the element; Mitutoyo makes a suggestion, e.g.
circle, but you can input any name describing the actual
element. If you click the arrow at the end of the input field, you
will get a list of all names of this element type you have entered
so far.
• the memory number: The program automatically stores and
uses subsequent numbers. If it is necessary for you to store the
element in a different memory number, you can overwrite the
suggestion.
• the number of points: If you wish to have a statement about the
form of the element, it is necessary to enter the minimum
number of points.
the bottom area contains the usual buttons (Ok, cancel, etc.).
10.3 Measurement and Probe Radius Compensation

If you probe the part with a ball, you only know the co-ordinates of the ball centre.
From these, we calculate the element. Then, it is compensated by the probe
radius. GEOPAK must know on which side the material is situated so that the
direction of the probe radius compensation is correct (inside or outside). This
information comes from the probing direction. This is determined as follows:
CNC-CMM
• In manual mode, the control communicates the probing
direction, which has been driven with the joystick.
• In the CNC mode, the probing direction is fixed with the driving
command.
Manual CMM
136 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
• By probing from the first measurement point, the current

position is continuously read so that the probing direction is
determined. When you go beyond a determined distance
(dummy distance), the position is taken over and will be
converted in the probing direction together with the
measurement point.
At CMMs with a fixed probe, you have to take into account that after the
first measured point of an element you drive in the opposite direction of
the material because otherwise the probing direction will not be correctly
recognized and an incorrect compensation is realized.
10.4 Point / Constructed Points (Overview)
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Point".
Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar ("Element /
Point").
In the subsequent dialogue window "Element Point", there are
summarised all the types of construction of points allowed by
GEOPAK (for further details, please also refer to Elements:
Overview).
For details regarding the first four types of construction please refer
to Type of Construction.
Symmetry-Element: Using this symbol you can calculate the symmetry

point from two elements. You confirm and get to the selection window
Symmetrie-Element Punkt.
You can create the Connection Element Point using the

position co-ordinates of known elements or
the measurement points of these elements.
For detailed information refer also to the topics
Connection Elements General
Connection Element "From Meaured Points""
Intersection-Element: Using and confirming this symbol you can have the
intersection of two elements calculated. For detailed informaton about this topic,
refer to "Intersection Element Point".
Three Possibilities of Measurement

For the measurement of points, you have three options:
Point (uncompensated): Here, you see the co-ordinates of the probe

centre. Later on, e.g. during the distance calculation, GEOPAK will automatically
perform the probe-radius compensation.
07.04.07 v3.0 137

Elements
Compensated Point: When this option is selected, compensation is

performed as follows:
• Manual mode: Compensation is performed along one of the co-
ordinate system axes.
• CNC-mode: Compensation is along the probe direction.
CNC mode means that the “CNC ON” command was
carried out. This means that also with a CNC CMM in joystick
mode, the compensation is realized along the co-ordinate axis
(as in manual mode) if the command has not yet been carried
out.
Point Direction: With this option, only the co-ordinate in probe direction is
indicated. This is the direction where probe radius compensation is performed, as
well.
In the polar co-ordinate system, probe radius compensation is carried out radially.
For details regarding the options available in the symbol block on the right-hand
side of the dialogue window please refer to Programming Help.
Option contour; Intersection Element, Nominal values
Contour
Minimum and Maximum Point .

Intersection Element
You can only use this function with the GEOPAK part program editor.
To edit an intersection of a cylinder with a surface, click the button

"Intersection element" in the dialogue "Element Point" in the GEOPAK part
program editor.
Read also the topic
"Intersection Cylinder / Freeform Surface".
Nominal Values
The cooperation between CAT1000S and GEOPAK makes it necessary

that GEOPAK managed the nominal values from CAT1000S. GEOPAK also
works with these data. You inform in detail under the themes Pre-define nominal
values for elements and Nominal values: Three Options .
10.5 Sphere
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Sphere". A
sphere can be calculated only from a minimum of four measured points which
must not all be located on a plane.
Sphere").
138 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
In the subsequent dialogue window "Element Sphere", there are

summarised all the types of construction of spheres allowed by (for
further details, please also refer to Elements: Overview).
If the sphere is calculated from measured points, several

methods of calculation come into consideration (for further details,
please refer to Type of Calculation).
For more information refer also to the topic "Fit in Element Sphere
Nominal Values

10.6 Circle
Using this function you create a new element of the type "Circle". A circle
can be calculated only from a minimum of three measured points that must not
be located on a line.
Circle").
In the dialogue window "Element Circle" there are summarised all
the types of construction of circles allowed by GEOPAK (for further
details, please refer toElements: Overview).
If the circle is calculated from measured points, several
Normal case
As a rule, the program calculates a plane from the measured points
• followed by checking, which base plane this plane comes
closest to.
• This is the plane where the points are projected (Automatic
projection).
• The circle is calculated.
Problem cases
If the circle with its measured points is located diagonally in space,
• automatic projection could be carried out in the wrong plane.
• In this case, you can predetermine the projection plane.
07.04.07 v3.0 139

Elements
• Regardless of the location of the measured points, projection

will then take place in this plane.
No projection
XY-Plane
YZ-Plane
ZX-Plane
Automatic projection plane
Set measuring level to zero: You activate this symbol in cases where you
intend to measure the circles at different levels, without wanting to have any
spatial components, e.g. for distance measurement.
Hint
If you don't activate this symbol, the measuring level is maintained. Thus
you can connect several circles to form an axis in space.
We recommend automatic projection. Caution is advisable in performing

"forced projection" into a plane. When changing the plane, make sure
that the changeover of the plane is made by this symbol. It is possible
that you get the message that the circle cannot be calculated.
Nominal Values
The cooperation between CAT1000S and GEOPAK makes it necessary that

GEOPAK managed the nominal values from CAT1000S. GEOPAK also works
with these data. You inform in detail under the themes Pre-define nominal values
for elements and Nominal values: Three Options.
10.7 Constructed Circles: Overview

In the dialogue "Element circle" you have various possibilities to construct circles.
You can determine a "Connection Element Circle".

We recommend, however, to consult also the topics
Connection Elements General and
Connection Element Point .
The function Fit in Element Circle you use when working with a circle with a
pre-defined diameter or when you want to fit in this circle between two lines or a
contour.
To create an Intersection Element Circle, there are three

options available. If you want, for example, to measure a circle in a measured
plane, you will apply the function via the cylinder symbol. If, instead, you want to
know which diameter a cone or a sphere has at a certain position, you will click
on one of these symbols.
140 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
10.8 Inclined Circle

Usually the circles are projected to one of the basic coordinate planes. If
problems occur due to the position of the circle (e.g. inclined position of a bore fit)
it is possible to measure an "Inclined circle".
The element "inclined circle" consists of a plane and a circle. First you have to
define the plane on which the circle is positioned. Proceed as follows:
measure the plane or
call a plane already measured from the memory.
You will choose this alternative if more than one circle is to be
measured in this plane.
To open the "Element Inclined circle" dialogue box choose
Element / Inclined circle from the menu bar or
click on the corresponding icon.
In this dialogue box make the requested settings.
For further information, refer to the topic "Automatic Circle Measurement".
Default setting of the icon
If this icon is not available in the toolbar, proceed as follows:

Ö Make a default setting in the PartManager by choosing "Settings /
Defaults for programs / CMM / GEOPAK" from the menu bar.
Ö In the Settings for GEOPAK dialogue box choose the tab "Menus"
button.
Ö In the dialogue box choose the "Inclined circle" radio button.
Like the "Inclined circle" you could also click the options "Ellipse" and/or
"Automatic hole measurement". In case you should want to do this, all three
symbols would be available in the GEOPAK main window.
Also refer to the topic Menus.
Nominal Values

10.9 Selection of Points Contour

You have loaded a contour and want to calculate an element on this contour (or
part of this contour). For this purpose you need, as a rule, only a part of the
contour points. This is why you have to make a selection. For the selection of the
points, you use the graphics. Make sure that this is activated.
Example for the calculation of a circle
Ö Click on the element symbol,
Ö in the following window and on the "Recalculate from

Memory" symbol and confirm.
Ö In the "Circle - Recalculate / Copy from Memory" window, you

click on the symbol (contour).
07.04.07 v3.0 141

Elements
Ö Select a contour
• either from the list or ...
• by mouse-click (the mouse changes to a reticle) in a

contour graphic on your screen. You confirm.
The "Selection of Point Contour" window appears. At the same time,
the mouse pointer again changes to a reticle.
Point selection using the mouse
With the left-hand mouse button depressed, you select in the
contour graphics all the areas you want to use for calculating, e.g. a
circle. You can click single points, or you summarise points to form
blocks (keep mouse button depressed). The areas selected are
shown in colour (in "red" as shown in the picture below").
In the window "Select points from contour", the co-ordinates of the

points are shown as blocks. A block number is assigned to each
selection.
Select ranges
Sie können bestimmen, in welchem Koordinatensystem die Anzeige bzw.
Eingabe erfolgen soll.
For this, activate the following buttons:
Cartesian co-ordinate system
Cylindrical co-ordinate system
Spherical co-ordinate system
In the left columns, the start co-ordinates are shown or input.
In the right columns, the end co-ordinates are shown or input.
Below the line "Selected Blocks" you decide via the symbols
which blocks you want to use for the calculation.
Delete a block (selection).
Using this symbol you call up all contour points required for the
calculation of the element in question.
You delete all points (blocks).
142 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Exact point selection

Ö Activate the function "Point selection".
Ö Click the button "Add block".

Ö In the left field, enter the number of the contour point at which the
selection shall start.
Ö In the right field, enter the number of the contour point at which the
selection shall end.
The graphics immediately shows your selection.
10.10 Ellipse
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Ellipse". An ellipse
can be calculated only from a minimum of five measured points. You can also
have the ellipse calculated as intersection of a plane with a cone or a cylinder.
Ellipse").
• It is possible that you do not see the symbol in the icon bar.
• You can again reactivate the symbol function via the
"PartManager" program and the menu functions "Settings /
Presetting Programs / CMM / GEOPAK".
In the dialogue window "Element Ellipse" there are summarised all
the types of construction of ellipses allowed by GEOPAK (for further
Inform yourself in detail under the topic Intersection Element Ellipse .

Nominal Values

10.11 Cone
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Cone". A cone can
only be calculated from a minimum of six measured points which must not all be
located in one plane.
Cone").
In the dialogue window "Element Cone" there are summarised all
the types of construction of cones allowed by GEOPAK (for further
07.04.07 v3.0 143

Elements
If the cone is calculated from measured points, several

Hint
There is no automatic cone measurement. Using the CNC measurement
you can, however, generate the cone with several automatic circle
measurements.
If you need also the radius or the diameter of the cone for the protocol of your
elements (cones), proceed as follows:
Ö Use the symbol to the left to call up the dialogue "Define

and calculate variable“.
Ö Under "Variable name", enter in the text field opposite:
• For the radius: CO [x].R
• For the diameter: CO [x].D
To have these values also in the protocol, click in the dialogue "Print Format
Specification" on the option "formula calculation", if applicable also in "File
Format Specification".
Nominal Values

10.12 Cylinder
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Cylinder". A

cylinder can only be calculated from a minimum of five measured points which
must not all be located in one plane.
Cylinder").
In the dialogue window "Element Cylinder" there are summarised all
the types of construction of cylinders allowed by GEOPAK (for
further details, please refer toElements: Overview).
If the cylinder is calculated from measured points, several
144 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Hint
Automatic measurement is possible. The strategy is, however, limited. Should
this be not enough for you, we recommend that you carry out single automatic
element measurements.
Error message
The occurrence of the error message "Cylinder not calculable" or the calculation
of the cylinder in the wrong position can be caused by the algorithm not having
the starting value for the calculation. This situation can be remedied by the
function "Input of Nominal Data for Elements".
Directional sense
The directional sense for the cylinder is defined by the probing strategy in such a
way that the direction of the axis runs from the first measurement point to the last
one.
Should you want to define the directional sense independently of the probing
strategy, GEOPAK enables you to do that using in the "Element Cylinder"
dialogue the
If you do not see the symbol in this dialogue ...

Ö Click in the PartManager menu bar on "Settings / Default Settings
Programs / CMM / GEOPAK".
Ö In the subsequent window "Settings for GEOPAK", click on
"Dialogues" ...
Ö and then click the option "Dialogue Cylinder - Pre-define direction" in
the "Dialogues" window.
Nominal Values

for elements and Nominal values: Three Options .
07.04.07 v3.0 145

Elements
10.13 Probing Strategy Cylinder/Cone

The cylinder algorithm operates iteratively (recurring step by step). It starts with a
first approximation and tries to improve it in a way to achieve the minimum. If this
works out correctly, the improvements will continuously grow smaller very shortly.
As soon as they are less than 10^-9 (i.e. numerically zero), the cylinder (cone) is
calculated. In this case one would say that the itineration is converging.
Depending on the data, the number of steps is different; in most of the cases it is
ranging between 6 and 15.
Maximum Number of Steps
It happens that the first approximation does not come close enough to the final
result. The improvements will then vary instead of continuously growing smaller,
and they will never reach zero. The itineration does not converge. In order to
avoid endless calculations in these cases, we have defined a maximum number
of steps after which itineration will stops without result.
Circular Plane
Hence it is the first approximation that is the critical issue in terms of iteration.
The direction is essential. In a "normal case" we recommend to place the first
three points on a circle which is approximately perpendicular to the cylinder.
GEOPAK then assumes the direction of the first circular plane as the first
approximation for the cylinder axis direction. As a result, itineration will start.
Surface of second order
If iteration fails to converge, then GEOPAK tries another assumption for the first
approximation, the calculation of a second order surface. In this case the values
are determined from the surface parameters. There is, however, a minimum of 9
points (an increased number is even better) required.
The calculation is the better the more irregularly the points are
distributed on the surface. For that reason you should not position the
points on two circles or along single surface lines.
So if you want to make use of the "second order surface" option, you should
capture as many meas. points as possible and distribute them evenly over the
whole cylinder surface.
Should both attempts come to no result, GEOPAK will try a third time. Assuming,
this time, that the two first points are located along a surface line. Should this
attempt equally fail, the message "..not calculable" will be output.
Predefine Direction
The fact that as from Version v2.3 the user is able to predefine the cylinder
direction can be regarded as a further remedy to overcome the problems
mentioned above. It is expected that this will distinctly increase reliability of the
calculations. For details refer to the topic Input of Nominal Data for Elements.
Hint
Up to Version v2.2, the order for the 2nd and 3rd attempt was inverted.
Starting from v2.3 it will conform to the present description.
146 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
10.14 Line
Using this function, you create an element of the type "Line". A line can be
calculated only from a minimum of two measured points.
Line").
In the dialogue window "Element Line" there are summarised all the
types of construction of lines allowed by GEOPAK (for further details
please refer also to Elements: Overview).
If the line is calculated from measured points, several methods
of calculation come into consideration (for further details refer also
to Type of Calculation).
Recognising the projection plane
As a rule, the program calculates a plane from the measured points and the
probe directions.
• It is then checked which base plane this plane comes closest to.
• This is the plane where the points are projected (Automatic
projection).
• The line is calculated.
Problem cases
If the line with its measured points is diagonal to space,
• automatic projection could take place in the wrong plane.
• In this case you can predetermine the projection plane.
• Regardless of the location of the measured points, projection
will then be realized in this plane.
No projection
XY-plane
YZ-plane
ZX-plane
Automatic projection plane
We recommend automatic projection. Caution is advisable in performing

"forced projection" into a plane. When changing the plane, make sure
that the changeover of the plane is made by this symbol. It is possible
that you get the message that the line cannot be calculated.
07.04.07 v3.0 147

Elements
Nominal Values

10.15 Constructed Lines

You have five different options to construct a line. You can find detailed
information by clicking onto the relevant options.
Symmetry Element Line. The dialogue offers you for the 1st
and 2nd element the elements line, cylinder and cone respectively.
Tangent. First, select the circle at which the tangent is to be

placed. Then decide if the tangent is to be placed to the circle from
a point or if you want the line to be a common tangent of two circles.
Shift-Element Line: Using this option, you create a line that

runs parallel to the selected line and through the selected point.
Intersection Element Line . An intersection line can only be

determined by two planes. The direction of the lines is defined by
the direction vectors of the two planes using the "Right-hand rule"..
Connection Element Line. For additional information about the

Connection Elements you should also consult the topic Connection
Elements General .
10.16 Plane
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Plane". A
plane can be calculated only from a minimum of three measured points or
defined as a symmetry plane.
Plane").
In the "Element Plane" dialogue window are summarised all the
types of construction of planes allowed by GEOPAK (for further
details refer also to Elements: Overview).
For details regarding the first four types of construction, see the
topic Type of Construction.
Several methods of calculation are available in cases where
the plane is calculated from measured points (for details see topic
Type of Calculation).
Changing the type of calculation
You can have the element calculated in a way different from the originally set
method.
Proceed as follows
Ö Click on the symbol,

Ö select the type of calculation,
148 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Ö confirm, and ...

Ö select the original plane in the following window (e.g. "Plane,
Recalculate / Copy from Memory").
Defining the direction vector
In a measured plane, the direction vector always points out of the material.
When you have the plane calculated as a connection element, the information of
the material side is not available. In this case, the direction vector always points
Ö from the origin
Ö to the plane.
Hint
For a connection plane located close to the origin, you are well advised to
shift the origin prior to the calculation and reset it upon completion of the
calculation, to make sure that you always get the same direction.
For details describing methods of creating the "Symmetry Element Plane", cf.
Two Ways for Symmetry Element .
Nominal Values

for elements and Nominal values: Three Options .
10.17 Step Cylinder
With this function, you create two elements of the type "Cylinder", which
have a common axis but different diameters. A step cylinder can be e.g. a
graduated spindle.
In the same way you entered for all the other elements a name and a storage no.,
you can do that for each one of the two cylinders. If you confirm the "Element
Step Cylinder", you will directly come to the measurement of the first step of the
cylinder. You can also manually measure the first step of the cylinder or with the
automatic elements you know.
If all points for the first step are recorded, click on the "Element Finished"
icon. You come to the measure mode for the second step of the cylinder (see first
step). Click again on the "Element Finished" icon and arrive at the calculation of
the step cylinder.
The axes of the two cylinders are identical.
10.18 Contour
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Contour". A
contour comprises a number of points in an ordered array. The GEOPAK
program can use the contour points for calculating an element (for details see the
example shown under Selection of Points Contour).
Ö You either click on the symbol (see above) or use the menu bar
"Element / Contour".
07.04.07 v3.0 149

Elements
In the dialogue window "Element Contour" there are summarised all

the types of construction of planes allowed by GEOPAK (for further
details please refer also to Elements: Overview).
For details concerning the first two types of construction see Type of
Construction.
For further details see under
Contour Connection Element
Load Contour.
Middle Contour .
Load Contour from External Systems .

For details regarding the topic "Calculation of an Element on a Contour"
see topic Selection of Point Contour
10.19 Surfaces
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Freeform
Surface". This function generates the connection between GEOPAK and
CAT1000S.
Surface").
You come to the dialogue window "Element Surface".
Ö In the text boxes, you enter your element name or the memory
number in the usual manner.
Ö In addition, using the symbols you can cause a sound output and a
graphical assistance to be activated.
There are two ways to create a new element, i.e. by means of a
measurement or
by using a connection element.

If you opt for the measurement, click on the symbol and confirm with
OK.
Important
A "Connection element freeform surface" consists of measurement points
of other elements whose measurement points have actually been
measured before. So if you want to create a connection element, you can
only use measured elements. Furthermore, the material side of the
measured element must be known.
150 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
The material side is not known of points that have not been measured
compensated and of elements that have been calculated only from
contour points without probe direction (see example ill. below).
CAT1000S is automatically started, that is either ...

• with an already existing model, or ...
• with the "Load Model" dialogue window, in case no model is
available. As soon as a model has been loaded into CAT1000S
the program will automatically return to GEOPAK, in order that
you can enter measure mode and tolerances.
While the measurement is running you can freely change, according to the
specific requirements of your measuring task, from CAT1000S to GEOPAK
and vice versa using for this purpose the status line.
10.20 Angle Calculation

By means of the function "Angle", you may calculate the angle between two
elements. Activate the function (dialogue window) via the menu bar "Elements"
and the function "Angle", or choose a shorter way by clicking on the symbol
in the toolbar.
GEOPAK calculates the angle in the plane and its 3 projections.
You Can Input The Following Addendum Conditions:
Calculation of the angle by probing the material sides
Calculation of the angles via the direction vector
This input only influences:
Measured planes
Measured straight lines. That is possible only if the straight lines
were measured in the same driving plane. Otherwise, calculating is
realised through the direction vectors.
Furthermore, you can select between
the calculated angle
its complementary angle of 180° ("Explementary Angle")
its complementary angle of 360°
Again, the result is a geometrical element of the type "Angle". Directly after this,
you can make a nominal-actual comparison of values.
07.04.07 v3.0 151

Elements
Pay Attention: The angle projections depend on the co-ordinate system.
10.21 Calculation of Distance

With the function "distance", you can calculate the distance between two
elements. Activate the function (dialogue window) via the menu bar "Elements"
and the function "Distance". You may also choose the shorter way via the symbol
displayed in the icon bar.

On principle, the result is a spatial distance.
GEOPAK Win calculates the distance as sum and as vector.
• The distance is always positive.
• The distance vector is directed from the first towards the second
output element. Its vector components are signed.
You Can Input The Following Addendum Conditions:
Calculation of the radius of the output elements concerned. This
input produces an effect not only on circles, cylinders and spheres
involved, but also on not compensated measuring points. Here the
respective probe radius is added or subtracted.
Projection plane, in which the calculated distance ought to be
situated. This input is ineffective on planes concerned, i.e. are in no
case projected.
• A projection is practical, e.g. if you calculate the distance
between a circle and a straight line, which are situated in the
same plane of drawing, but probed in another measurement
position.
The result is a geometrical element of the type "distance". Directly after this, you
can make a comparison of nominal and actual values.
Attention: The vectorial distance depends on the co-ordinate system.
Distance comprising calculation of radii
For circles, GEOPAK calculates the geometric distance between the circle
centres and includes the radii in the calculation of this geographic distance. The
resulting distance is decomposed into its components in a way that a²=
ax²+ay²+az².
Thus, the distance components (see sketch below) are defined by the points of
intersection of the "straight line through the circle centres" with the circles. In the
example of the sketch below, these are the components 1 and 2.
You do not get the component 1a. For the Y-value, this statement applies in
exactly the same way.
152 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
1 = X-component
2 = Y-component
10.22 Distance along Probe Direction

Basically, the function is used in cases where points from a CAD system are to
be compared.
Example
Nominal points exist, e.g. of a freeform surface from a CAD system. The
normal line directions in the surface points directions are given, as well.
However, only the deviations arising perpendicular to the surface are to
be determined.
Proceed as follows
Ö You can activate the function via the menu "Element/Distance along
Probing Direction" and come to the corresponding dialogue window.
Ö You form a theoretical point and measure the corresponding point at
the workpiece.
Ö You enter the two points in the dialogue window.
The result is automatically displayed after the "Distance".
The distance along probing direction can be negative, as well. Material is
lacking in such a case.
10.23 Type of Construction

In the GEOPAK way of thinking, select the element you want to get first, then
select how this element must be built. Therefore, the dialogue windows for the
elements contain icons describing the different construction methods (cf. also
Elements). Some of these icons differ from one element type to the next;
however, the first four icons are the same for all types.
Determine the element by measurement.
Calculate an element from the positions (locations) of other elements, e.g.

the pitch circle diameter out of the centres of several circles.
"Re-calculate from memory" means:
07.04.07 v3.0 153

Elements
• The position of the element has been previously stored in a

different co-ordinate system.
• Now the element is recalled from memory and its position is
calculated in the actual co-ordinate system.
• You can also change the way of calculation: press e.g. the
button for "minimum zone element", if the element originally has
been calculated as a Gauss element.
You can also define any element as a "theoretical element"; this means
that you input the nominal values by keyboard.
For different elements, further types of construction are possible; these are
shown by different icons and separately explained for each element type.
10.24 Type of Calculation

For some types of elements you can select between four different methods of
calculating the resulting element parameters, if more than the minimum number
of points has been taken. Usually, these different ways of calculation are giving
different results.
Gauss: The program calculates an "average" element; this element is

situated within the points in such a way that the distances of the single points to
both sides are roughly the same (or, more accurately: the sum of the squared
distances is minimised).
Minimum Circumscribed Circle: the program calculates the smallest circle

that contains all the points. This circle is always defined and unique; it is either a
circle through two points, if these two points are opposite to each other, or a
circle determined by three points. These three points form an acicular angle
triangle.
Maximum Inscribed Element: the program calculates the largest circle that
can be situated within the points. This is not always unique (e.g. in the case of an
elliptical hole) which means that there may be more than one solution. Three
points forming an acicular angle triangle always determine it.
154 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Minimum Zone Element: the program calculates an element that is situated

in the middle of two ideal elements. These two ideal elements contain all points in
between them, and they are calculated in such a way that this zone is the
smallest possible. The circle may have the same centre as the maximum
inscribed or the minimum circumscribed circle, or may even be different from
both. In this latter case, two points determine the inner and two other points the
outer circle. The radius or diameter output by GEOPAK is the average value of
the two circles.
It depends on your measurement requirements which calculation to select. The

most common calculation is according to Gauss criterion. When using this, all
points have the same influence on the result, whereas for the other cases, only
the outermost or innermost points determine the result.
Hint
As to opt for which type of calculation, find detailed information in the
topic Enveloping or Fitting-in Element.
10.25 Enveloping or Fitting-in Element

As regards lines and planes, a frequently asked question is which type of
calculation is the most suitable.
From the illustration above you can see that for lines and planes, always the
enveloping element is useful. With this method you receive the line (plane)
represented by the blue line. If you opted for the fitting-in element, you would
receive the line (plane) (red line) that lies in the material.
Hint
This also applies to the case of two parallel edges forming a groove. Also
in case that a feather key is to be fitted in this groove, you should use the
enveloping element to limit the material free space (see ill. below).
07.04.07 v3.0 155

Elements
10.26 Positive Direction by Vector

Background
In GEOPAK, all properties of the elements are automatically calculated. These
properties are usually location, direction, and other features specific to the
element. For the elements line, plane, cylinder, and cone the direction in space
plays a significant role. Since calculation of angles between elements takes the
so-called "positive direction" into account, and as alignment procedure also uses
this positive direction to determine the axis in space or within a plane, this
positive direction must be defined in such a way that reproducibility from one
execution of the part program to the next is possible. Therefore, GEOPAK uses
the following definitions of the positive direction for the elements.
Definition for the Elements

For a measured line, the positive direction is the direction from the first to the last
point. In the example below, the points have been taken as 1, 2, and 3; therefore,
the positive direction is from 1 to 3.
If this line is used for an axis alignment of the x-axis, the axis gets the same
direction as the line.
With the circle and the ellipse, the "Positive Direction" always is parallel to the
direction vector of the projection plane. In our example below, the X/Y plane is
the projection plane. The "Positive Direction" is indicated by Z+'.
156 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
In case of a cylinder, the "positive direction" goes from the first to the last
measured point, along the axis of the cylinder.
In the case of a cone, the "positive direction" runs from the apex into the opening
of the cone (cf. picture below).
In case of a plane, the vector pointing out of the plane gives the "positive
direction". The vector of a measure plane always points away from the material;
the order / sequence of measured points does not affect the direction (cf. picture
below).
10.27 Re-calculate Elements

For the form tolerances straightness, flatness, and circularity you can blank
measurement points and re-calculate the form tolerance after opening the
graphic.
Ö You activate the form tolerance required (see, e.g., under
Straightness). It is not necessary to activate the graphic symbol in
the respective dialogue windows.
Ö You confirm and get the graphics displayed.
Ö You click on the symbol and come to the window "Re-

calculate without Selected Points".
Ö Using the symbol you mark in each case the point with the
biggest distance towards the inside (Min.) or towards the outside
(Max.).
The marked points appear on the graphics in red.
Ö In case you have clicked one point or several points in

excess, you can cancel the markings by this symbol.
When you delete the marked points with "OK", the element will be re-
calculated. The results will be displayed to you immediately.
07.04.07 v3.0 157

Elements
This command is not to learn.
10.28 Input of Nominal Values for Elements

Task
The interdependence of CAT1000S and GEOPAK requires that GEOPAK
administrates the nominal data of CAT1000S and works with these nominal data.
A differentiation needs to be made between nominal data for the elements and
nominal data for the co-ordinate systems.
For detailed information regarding the nominal data for the co-ordinate systems,
refer to the topic Disable Change of Co-ordinate System.
Prerequisite
To be able to use these options, you first have to get active in the PartManager.
Go to the menu functions "Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / GEOPAK
configuration, then go to "Dialogues" and click the option "Element dialogue".
Now, the elements can be pre-defined.
The following elements are supported
Intersection element point (X-Min, X-Max, Y-Min, Y-Max, Z-Min, Z-
Max)
If the nominal value of the point is given, the yellow marked buttons
in the picture below are disabled. The nominal data is used. The
calculated result is the point with the smallest distance to the
nominal point.
Nominal direction of element plane

If the nominal value is given, the direction of a measured plane or a
connection plane is calculated and the nearest solution to the
nominal axis is used.
158 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Fit in element circle between two lines

If the nominal value of the centre position of the fit it circle is given,
the nearest calculated position is used. The yellow marked buttons
in the picture below are disabled. The calculated result is the circle
with the smallest distance to the centre of the nominal circle. The
diameter of the nominal element is not evaluated for this calculation.
Hints
In all supported elements, you get to the corresponding dialogues
by clicking the symbol (left).
Confirm to get back to your element dialogue.
The symbol is shown as pushed-in when you have selected a direction.
These nominal data can be defined in three different ways:
Input of direction by given element
Input of direction
Input of nominal data for the nominal element
For detailed information as regards the individual possibilities, go to the topic
"Three Input Options".
10.29 Nominal Values: Three Input Options
For an introduction to this topic, refer to the topic

Input of Nominal Values for Elements
Selection of direction by given element

You can define the direction of the element with measured elements that are, for
example, in a parallel position or have a similar direction. All elements having a
defined plane axis are admissible (see example ill. below),
e.g. a plane with several holes. First, you would have to determine the hole axes
and use these axes to determine the direction of the cylinder.
Input of direction
The most used option is to define the direction by using angles. The X-, Y- and Z-
values are the smaller, enclosed angles between the direction vector and the
axes.
07.04.07 v3.0 159

Elements
Input of nominal data for the nominal element

With this option, the nominal data required for calculation are entered for each
element. Depending on the element, these nominal data may, for example, be
diameter, distances, angles or lengths. You will find the corresponding selections
in the nominal data dialogues pertaining to the elements (see ill. below).
10.30 Free Element Input

When you want to open an element in the GEOPAK dialogues, you would open,
as a rule, a list with all the elements available. Even in the part program editor,
such a list is shown to you as dependant on context.
There are, however, cases where this is not sufficient. For example, when you
are creating a subprogram. The elements of the main program to be called are
then unknown.
In this case you can enter, via the function "Free Element Input",
type, name and number of the element that you want to use.
160 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
This input is possible whenever you see this sign [..] in an element
list.
With a double click on this line (including the (..) characters), you
open the "Free Element Input" window.
This window is self-explanatory.
10.31 Element Toothed Gear
With this function, you measure the element "Gear". The element "Gear"
consists of entries you have realized in the input dialogues of GEARPAK.
Ö In the GEOPAK learn mode, click either on the icon (see above) or
take the way via the menu bar "Element / Gear".
The dialogue "Element Gear" will be displayed.
In the text fields, you will see, as usual, the element names
respectively the storage number.
Entries for the Protocol Data
The inputs in the "Designation", "Drawing Number." and "Comment" fields are
output together with the toothed gear protocol. Your toothed gear protocol will be
automatically completed with the operator name and the time of measurement.
Protocol Output
In the "Protocol Output on" section, you determine how your toothed gear
protocol must be output.
The protocol output will be automatically realized.
If you select the screen for the protocol output, the default browser (e.g. Internet
Explorer) will be started after the toothed gear measurement, and the
measurement results will be displayed.
When selecting the protocol output with a "Printer", the system prints out the gear
protocol on your standard printer as long as you have not changed the default
printer.
When you select the protocol output "File", it is necessary to indicate a file name
and a directory.
Ö Click on the "Select File" icon.
07.04.07 v3.0 161

Elements
The "Select File" input window will be opened.

Ö Select a directory, in which your protocol file must be stored.
Ö Enter a name with that your protocol file must be stored.
Ö Click on the "Save" button.
The "Select File" input window will be closed and the file name of
your protocol file will be displayed on the left besides the "Select
File" icon.
Start Measurement
If the "Start Measurement" check box is activated, the part program will be
automatically created according to your inputs in GEARPAK and the
measurement will be started.
If the check box is not activated, after the automatic creation of the part
program, the measurement will not be started.
You can have a look at your part program in the GEOPAK Editor and realize the
measurement of the toothed gear later.
Ö If you have finished your inputs and selection, activate the OK
button.
Your toothed gear will be measured.
If you have not activated the check box of the protocol output, no toothed
gear protocol will be output. This means that your toothed gear will only
be measured.
It is possible to output the protocol afterwards with the "CMM /
GEARPAK / Gear Evaluation" function in the PartManager.
10.32 Calculation
10.32.1 Calculation according to Gauss
In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, you optionally have four methods
for the execution of your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of
Calculation ). The only method that is always clearly defined is the Gauss
method. If no other method is specified, (the Chebychev, for example, is meant
for the definitions of geometrical errors according to the ISO 1101) you select the
Gauss method.
Gauss: The program is calculating an average element. The differences

are largely cancelled out (compensation element).
In the graphics, you also get a value that is called standard deviation or spread.
162 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
10.32.2 Minimum Zone Element

In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, you have four methods to
execute your measurement tasks (see details of topic Type of Calculation ). One
of it is the "Minimum Zone Element".
Minimum Zone Element: The program is calculating an average element,

among a few features, which is geometrically perfect. This couple of features
keeps the distance to a minimum but includes all measured points (Chebychev).
10.32.3 Enveloping Element

In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, there exist four methods to
of it is the "Enveloping Element Zone Element".
Enveloping Element: The program encloses the measured points by a

smallest geometrically perfect feature (contact element at outside measurement).
10.32.4 Fitting-in Element

In the "Elements (for example) Circle" windows, you have four methods to
of it is the "Fitting-In Element".
Fitting-in element: The program triggers the measured points by a biggest

perfect feature (contact element at internal dimension).
10.32.5 Spread / Standard Deviation

Introduction
In the circularity, straightness and flatness graphics, GEOPAK displays a value
(standard deviation), which is designated by "Std. Dev. * 4". The same value can
be displayed in the graphics of elements as "4s".
07.04.07 v3.0 163

Elements
Degrees of Freedom:
The degrees of freedom are important for the calculation of the standard
deviation. This depends on the min. number of the necessary measurement
points, i.e. from the type of element:
Type of element Min. number of points Degrees of freedom
Line 2 Number of points - 2
Circle 3 Number of points - 3
Plane 3 Number of points - 3
Sphere 4 Number of points - 4
Cylinder 5 Number of points - 5
Cone 6 Number of points - 6
Calculation of standard deviation step-by-step:

Ö Sum up the square deviations: Measured point – calculated element
for all measured points.
Ö Divide the "Sum of all deviation squares" through the degrees of
freedom and
Ö calculate out of it the square root.
The result is the standard deviation.
The graphics mentioned above display the quadruple value of it.
10.33 Carbody Elements

10.33.1 Hole Shapes: Introduction
For the measurement of vehicle bodies – particularly in the automotive industry –
a range of further elements is required in MCOSMOS. For these hole shapes,
you find the following elements apart from the "Inclined circle":
Square
Rectangle
Slot
Triangle
Trapezoid
Hexagon
Drop
These elements are particularly used for measuring punched holes. First of all,
the position and axis direction are important when working with these elements.
Length values are not separately tolerated due to the high precision of the
punching processes. However, they are also output in the protocols.
As for the inclined circle, you first have to measure the surface (see example
illustration below of measurement point display) and second, the element. You
can also call up an already known surface from the memory.
For hole shapes you also have the option to measure the surface with any
number of points. When measuring the actual element, however, you can only
measure a defined number of points (for detailed information, refer to the topic
Differences to Inclined Circle).
164 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Further topics
Symmetry Axis and Width
How to Work
Tolerance Comparison / Position Tolerance
Nominal Values
with these data. You inform in detail under the themes
Pre-define nominal values for elements and
Nominal values: Three Options .
10.33.2 Differences: Hole Shape - Inclined Circle

To get to the dialogues, either use the symbol bar and click on the relevant
symbol or use the menu "Elements / Hole shapes" and then on the Element.
07.04.07 v3.0 165

Elements
For measuring the hole shapes (example dialogue, right), the system only uses
the minimum required number of points
The elements and their respective number of measurement points:
Foursquare 4
Rectangle 5
Long hole 5
Triangle 5
Trapezium 6
Hexagon 6
Drop form 6
The elements are automatically finished after measuring these points. You
cannot measure more points. Therefore, no form deviations are possible and no
different modes of calculation.
There is no button "Autom. element finished".
There are no buttons for the calculation mode.
It is also not possible to enter a "Number of points".
Further topics
166 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements

How to Work
Tolerance Comparison / Tolerance Position
10.33.3 Hole Shapes: Symmetry Axis and Width

The hole shapes all have at least one symmetry axis and one width perpendicular
to the symmetry axis (see example illustrations below; from top left: trapezium,
drop form and hexagon).
W 1, 2 or 3 = are each the widths or heights

Symmetry axis: The direction is defined as follows:
Triangle From the ground line to the opposite corner.
Trapezium Perpendicular to the parallel sides in direction from the
bigger to the smaller side.
Drop form From the big to the small circle.
Other punched hole The sequence of the first two measurement points
shapes determines the direction of the symmetry axis.
Centre point:
The centre point is positioned on the symmetry axis in the two hole ends.
Further topics
Differences to Inclined Circle
How to Work
Tolerance Comparison / Position Tolerance
07.04.07 v3.0 167

Elements
10.33.4 Hole Shapes: How to Work

When working with hole shapes, you measure the points in a certain sequence
and at given positions (see ill. below): The forms are composite forms. We have
either to deal with angles, or lines changing into circle arcs. According to the
requirements of the task, the angles are not included in the protocol.
When measuring long holes and drop forms, be careful not to interfere
with the circle arcs when measuring the line with the measurement
points as this would lead to wrong results. The same applies vice versa,
i.e. do not get into the lines when measuring circle arcs.
In the learn mode, the representation in the display shows you where to probe
(see example ill. below).
Further topics
168 v3.0 07.04.07

Elements
Tolerance Comparison / Tolerance Position
10.33.5 Hole Shapes: Tolerance Comparison / Position

Tolerance Comparison Element
With any one of the hole shapes you can execute a "Tolerance comparison
element" (ill. below; for detailed information also refer to the topic Dialogue
Tolerance Comparison Elements).
You can only tolerate the position of the centre and the direction of the axis. To
tolerate the measurement of a hole shape, you can use a variable (for detailed
information, also refer to the topic GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes ).
Position Tolerance
You can execute a position tolerance with any one of the hole shapes (ill. below;
for detailed information, also refer to the topic Position).
To apply the Maximum Material Condition (MMC), select a label in the text box
next to the symbol.
Further topics
How to Work
07.04.07 v3.0 169

Constructed Elements
11 Constructed Elements
11.1 Constructed Elements: Contents
Connection Elements
Connection Elements, General
Connection Elements "From Measured Points"
Connection Element Point
Connection Element Line
Connection Element Circle
Connection Element Ellipse
Connection Element Sphere
Connection Element Cylinder
Connection Element Cone
Connection Element Plane
Connection Element Contour
Connection Element Freeform Surface
Intersection Elements
Intersection Element Line
Intersection Element Point
Intersection Point: Extras
Intersection Point: Contour with Circle, Line, Point
Intersection Element Circle
Intersection Element Ellipse
Intersection Cylinder / Freeform Surface
Symmetry Elements
Symmetry Element Line
Symmetry Element Line
Symmetry Element Point
Fit in Elements
Fit in Element Sphere
Fit in Element Circle
Further Constructed Elements

Shift-Element Line
Tangent
Minimum and Maximum Point
11.2 Connection Elements

11.2.1 Connection Elements, General
You use the Connection Elements option in cases where, e.g.,
you intend to create a hole pattern from centres of circles.
170 v3.0 07.04.07

You can also draw a line through adjacent circles.
Or you wish to determine the straightness of a cylinder axis by

measuring several superimposed circles.
Special importance is attached to the option which allows you

choose between single and group selection (for further details refer to "Single
Selection" and "Group Selection".
The connection element is determined in the ...
current co-ordinate system and in
the selected projection plane.
Follow this procedure
To access the dialogue window of the connection element that you want to form,
click ...
Ö the
corresponding symbol in the icon bar (see picture).
Ö In the "Element Circle, etc." window, click on the symbol (see

picture).
Ö Or adopt a different method using the "Menu bar / Element / Circle,
etc.".
Ö In any case, for the present example you have to confirm "Element
Circle" in the window.
Hint
To see how to proceed in the dialogue windows "Connection Element
Circle (Single and Group selection)", refer also to the subjects "Single
Selection" and "Group Selection".
"From Measured Points" (left symbol) refer to Connection Element "From
Measured Points"
07.04.07 v3.0 171

11.2.2 Connection Element "From Measured Points"

In the dialogue window "Connection Element Circle, etc.", you can use the
symbol (left, above) for your decision to form the connection element from
measured points. You can calculate a connection element also from the local co-
ordinates, which have been established for the elements used. For the elements
such as Circle, Sphere, and Ellipse, this is, in each case, the centre of the circle.
Hint
These options are applicable to both Single selection and Group
selection.
Option not active
The topic "Connection Elements, General" shows examples where you do not
activate the option "From measured points". The connection elements concerned
pass through the centres of circles. A further example, used for the geometrical
inspection of rotary tables, would be a "Connection Element Circle" through the
centre of several spheres.
Option active
You activate this option in cases where you wish to determine the connection
element from measured points instead of using centres.
Example: On a cylinder, you have measured several circles at different heights
(see picture below). Using these measurement points you can calculate a
cylinder.
172 v3.0 07.04.07

A connection element formed this way includes all features of a measured

element (measurement points and material side).
Probe radius compensation:
The measured points are probe centres. From these, the new element is
calculated against which – in the second step – the probe radius is compensated.
For this, GEOPAK uses the probe radius with which the first element was
measured. The result is only valuable when the relevant elements where
measured with the same probe radius.
In the learning mode you are therefore warned when two relevant probe
radii differ by more than 0.01 mm.
11.2.3 Connection Element Point

You can form the Connection Element Point from the
local co-ordinates of known elements, or
from the measurement points of these elements.
For further details, refer also to the topics
Connection Element "From Measured Points"
11.2.4 Connection Element Line

You can form the Connection Element Line from the...
07.04.07 v3.0 173

local co-ordinates of known elements.

Should you have to define, e.g., a line by the centres disposed
adjacent or above each other, you form the Connection Element
Line.
For this purpose, you are not allowed to activate the symbol
"From Measured Points".
Measurement points of these elements.
If you want to connect two lines with each other (picture below,
red Line), you will have to activate the symbol.

11.2.5 Connection Element Circle
In the "Element Circle" dialogue you can decide for one out of four
calculating methods ("Type of Calculation").
You can form the Connection Element Circle from the...

local co-ordinates of known elements.
An application frequently used for the Connection Element Circle

is a hole pattern.
In this case you are not allowed to activate the symbol "From
Measured Points".
Measurement points of known elements.

11.2.6 Connection Element Ellipse

You can form the Connection Element Ellipse from the

174 v3.0 07.04.07

11.2.7 Connection Element Sphere

You can form the Connection Element Sphere from the

11.2.8 Connection Element Cylinder

You can form the Connection Element Cylinder from the
You can form a cylinder using, e.g., the measurement points of

several superimposed circles.

11.2.9 Connection Element Cone

You can form the Connection Element Cone from the
You can form a cone using, e.g., the measurement points of several
superimposed circles.

11.2.10 Connection Element Plane

You can form the Connection Element Plane from the
from the measurement of these elements.
You can form a plane using, e.g., the measurement points of two
lines. This, however, is based on the understanding that the lines
have been measured in one plane. (Picture below).
07.04.07 v3.0 175

1 = Line in ZX plane
2 = Line in YZ plane
11.2.11 Contour Connection Element

Using the function "Connection Element Contour" you can connect single
contours to form a common contour. This function is suitable also for copying a
contour. You can use this function to your advantage, e.g., in cases where you
create a "Contour with Offset". You would then have the original together with the
"new contour" for comparison purposes. You can also overwrite and existing
contour.
Of great importance is the option which allows you to choose between

the Single or Group Selection (for details please refer to the topics "Single
Selection" and " Group Selection").
The general contour is located in the ...
actual co-ordinate system and in the
selected projection plane.
Procedure
You come to the dialogue window "Contour Connection Element" by
Ö clicking on the symbol in the toolbar.
Ö In the window "Element Contour", click on the symbol (picture

left).
Ö Or select via the "Menu Bar / Element / Contour".
Ö In any case, you must confirm in the "Element Contour" window.
Opened / closed contour: Change status
You can use this function to connect the first and the last contour point of a
contour. The contour is assigned the status "closed contour". In this case, the
button is displayed as pushed.
If the connection between the first and the last contour point is interrupted, the
contour is assigned the status "opened contour".
Hint
For details as how to proceed in the dialogue windows "Contour
Connection Element (Single or Group Selection)", please refer to the
"Single Selection" and "Group Selection".
176 v3.0 07.04.07

11.2.12 Connection Element Freeform Surface

The Connection Element Freeform surface is always formed from the
measurement points of known elements.
Example: You can form an Element Freeform Surface from the measurement
points of two lines.
Prerequisites
GEOPAK and CAT1000S
If you want to form the Connection Element Freeform Surface, you must use
GEOPAK and CAT1000S.
GEOPAK provides CAT1000S with the required measurement points.
CAT1000S performs the actual evaluation.
Measurement points
The elements used to form the new Connection Element Freeform Surface may
only contain actually measured points.
By "actually measured points" we understand in this case: points determined by a
probing of the work piece.
Do not use the following elements to form a Connection Element Freeform
Surface:
Theoretical elements
Intersection elements (elements point, line, circle, ellipse)
Symmetry elements (elements point, line, surface)
Tangent
Move element (element line)
Fit in element circle or sphere
Minimum or maximum point of a contour (element point)
Connection elements not calculated from measurement points.
Do not use the following measurement points to form a Connection Element
Freeform Surface:
Measurement points from the Element Point that was not measured as a
"compensated point".
For a
Connection Element
calculated from measurement points, observe the following: The probe
directions are defined from the calculated element.
Contours
If you want to use contours for the Connection Element Freeform Surface, these
may not be compensated contours, as the compensation is taken on from
CAT1000S.
For more details, refer to the topics
Connection Elements General
07.04.07 v3.0 177

11.3 Intersection Elements

11.3.1 Intersection Element Line
To create an intersection line from two planes, use the menu "Element"
and click on "Line" and in the subsequent dialogue onto the symbol (see above).
Alternatively, you can use the tool bar.

In the dialogue "Intersection Element Line"
select one plane each in the First and in the Second Element and click on Ok.
The sense of direction of the determined line follows the "Right-hand rule" (see ill.
below).
The right-hand rule as per the example above

1 Plane 1
2 Plane 2
NV1 Normal vector 1 (thumb)
NV2 Normal vector 2 (index finger)
1S Sense of direction of line after intersection of plane 1 with plane 2 (middle
finger)
178 v3.0 07.04.07

2S Sense of direction of line after intersection of plane 2 with plane 1 (the

planes intersect in reverse sequence, therefore also the sense of direction of the
intersection line is reversed).
If you click on the empty line (in the ill. above underlaid in blue), you get to the
dialogue "Free Element Input ".
For information about the topic "Loops " click on the term.
11.3.2 Intersection Element Point
To be able to construct an intersection element point, use the menu bar

and click on "Elements / Point" and in the subsequent dialogue onto the symbol
(see above).
Alternatively, you can use the tool bar.

The dialogue "Intersection Element Point" is basically similar to the other
intersection elements. However, the Intersection Element Point offers
substantially more options (see ill. below) than, for example, the line (only two
planes).
If you click onto the empty line (...) you get to the dialogue "Free Element Input ".
For information about the topic "Loops " click onto the term.
Several intersection options at a glance
PlaneLine CircleCone CylinderEllipse
Plane Error S S o L S mAS mA L
Line S S S/L S mAS mA S / L
Circle S o L S / L S/M L L L
Cone S mA S mAL S mAS mA L
CylinderS mA S mAL S mAS mA L
Ellipse L S/L L L L Error
S = Intersection
L = Perpendicular
S / L = Intersection or perpendicular, if there is no intersection (ill. below)
07.04.07 v3.0 179

The line does not intersect with the circle. The perpendicular is calculated.
S o L = Intersection or perpendicular can be selected
SmA = Intersection with axis
S / M = Intersection or middle, when there is no intersection (ill. below)
The circles do not intersect. The middle is calculated.

For more information refer to Intersection: Extras (Contour; Point-Sphere; Circle-
Plane).
11.3.3 Intersection: Extras

For the general statements you should first consult the topic Intersection
Element Point.
Extra: Contour
If an intersection element is a contour, the contour must be defined as the first
element using the symbol.
Ö Select your contour from the first list via the arrow symbol.
Ö Select the second element from the second list.
You can only intersect contours with lines, circles or points. When
projecting a point onto a contour, inform yourself thoroughly under the
topic
Intersection: Contour with Circle, Line, Point
In all other cases you will receive an error message. Via the min./max.-
symbols (ill. below), you select the intersection points.
180 v3.0 07.04.07

Hints
In case of more than one intersection point (e.g. also in case of intersections of
circle/line; circle/circle; circle/plane), you can select your desired point of
intersection via the symbols (ill. above). You can decide on one point each with
the biggest or smallest X-, Y- or Z-co-ordinate.
If you have entered a nominal value for the element "Point", the system chooses
the point of intersection with the smallest distance to the nominal value. The
symbols (see ill. above) are not relevant for establishing a nominal value. For
more information refer to the topic Enter Nominal Values for the Elements .
Extra: Point / Sphere

Intersections are not possible for these elements. However, the perpendicular is
offered as results.
Extra: Intersection Circle / Plane
Up to version 2.2, the centre of the circle was automatically projected onto the
plane. As from v.2.3 you have the possibility to have the piercing points of the
circle circumference line through the plane calculated as intersections (see ill.
below).
For this, click on the symbol.
07.04.07 v3.0 181

11.3.4 Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point)

You can calculate intersections also by using the element combinations "Contour
/ Circle", "Contour / Line" and "Contour / Point". If, in case of the combination
"Contour / Point", the point is not positioned on the contour, the point projected
onto the contour is calculated as the intersection.
Note
The projection of a point onto a contour is defined as the shortest distance
between the point and the contour.
Ö Click on "Element Point" in the toolbar, confirm and the

"Element Point" window is displayed.
Ö In this window, click on the "Intersection" symbol in "Type of

Construction" and confirm.
The "Intersection Element Point" window is displayed.
Insert intersection points as contour points into a contour
Ö In the tool bar "First element", click on the contour symbol

when this button is not yet active.
Ö You select a contour in the list box "First element".
Ö In the tool bar "Second element", you click on the element symbol
that you want to intersect with the contour (e.g. line, circle and
point).
Ö Select an element in the list box "Second element".
Ö You either click on "Insert element point as contour point" or

on "Insert all of the intersection points".
For further details, see the topic
11.3.5 Intersection Element Circle

You use the function "Intersection Element" via the cylinder symbol
whenever you want to calculate a circle in a measured plane. The diameter of the
circle is identical with the cylinder diameter (see picture below).
The information as to whether it is a bore or a shaft is taken over by the cylinder.

This is of importance for the application of MMC.
182 v3.0 07.04.07

Use the "Intersection Element" function via the cone symbol when you
want to know
at which level the cone has a determined diameter
which diameter a cone has at a determined place.
Via the following symbols...
• Given diameter
• Distance from the apex of the cone
• Distance from the XY-plane
• Distance from the YZ-plane
• Distance from ZX-plane
You use the function "Intersection Element" via the sphere symbol when
you want to know
at which level the sphere has a determined diameter, or ...
which diameter a sphere has at a determined place.
• Given diameter
• Distance from the pole of the sphere
• Distance from the base plane
• Distance from the XY-plane
• Distance from the YZ-plane
• Distance from the ZX-plane
11.3.6 Intersection Element Ellipse
For an ellipse, the cylinder or the cone serves as an intersection element (2nd
element). Click onto the symbol and confirm.
In the result field and in the protocol you find, apart from the data about the
centre, the big and the small diameter, also the angles that include the big
semiaxis with the co-ordinate axes (see ill. below).
07.04.07 v3.0 183

11.3.7 Intersection Cylinder / Freeform Surface
You can only use this function with the GEOPAK part program editor.
Start
If you want to edit an intersection of a cylinder with a surface, click the

button "Intersection element" in the dialogue "Element Point". You get to the
dialogue "Intersection element Point".
Dialogue "Intersection element Point"
Select from the list box any one of the already measured cylinders.
Then select a surface from the list box.
The button "Loop counter" is active when a loop is open in GEOPAK.
11.4 Symmetry Elements

11.4.1 Symmetry Element Line
The symmetry line of two lines is their median line. The smaller angle is
bisected.
Often, the symmetry line is found between two parallel edges.

You can also use the axes of cones or cylinders as first or second element.
11.4.2 Symmetry Element Plane: Two Ways

You have possibilities to create symmetry elements in the "Element Plane"
dialogue window.
184 v3.0 07.04.07

Symmetry Element of two Planes
In the "Element Plane" dialogue window, click on the symbol and come to
the corresponding "Symmetry Element Plane" dialogue window. Enter the planes
under "First or Second Element" and confirm.
Hint
The symmetry plane is in the joint material or the joint gap between the
starting planes respectively.
In the above illustration, the symmetry planes are in the joint material.
In the above illustration, the symmetry plane is in the joint gap of the starting
planes.
In the above illustration, the symmetry plane is in the opening angle between the
starting planes.
In the above illustration, the symmetry plane is in the joint material of the starting
planes.
Exception
The above illustration shows the symmetry plane in the gap of the joint material
or in the joint material.
07.04.07 v3.0 185

Possibly, both starting planes have been probed almost in parallel and from the
same direction. In this case you should call up one of the starting planes from the
memory and go the dialogue "Recalculate from memory" and click on the option
"Change direction" (symbol left). This is how you will get again two planes
with a joint mass or a joint gap respectively.
Symmetry Element of two Points
In the "Element Plane" dialogue window, click on the symbol and the
corresponding "Symmetry Element Plane" dialogue window appears. Enter the
points under "First or Second Element" and confirm.
Remember that a mouse-click on the area [..] allows you to change to "Free
Element Input".
Hint
The vector direction of the plane is defined by the direction from the first to
the second point.
11.4.3 Symmetry Element Point
The symmetry point between two points is the mid-point between the two
points.
You can also use the elements circle, ellipse and sphere as 1st and 2nd element.
For the calculation of the symmetry point, GEOPAK uses the element mid-points.
The diameter of the elements has no influence on the result.
11.5 Fit in Elements

11.5.1 Fit in Element Sphere
Fit in Element: As an additional element, we suggest you to fit in a cone a
sphere with a given diameter.
Ö By clicking on this symbol and confirming, you get to the "Fit in
Element Sphere" window.
Ö Here, you enter the diameter of the sphere and select the cone
where the sphere must be fitted in.
The result is an element sphere with the location of this sphere
being in the cone.
11.5.2 Fit in Element Circle

Use the "Fit in Element" function in case...
you have a circle with a specified diameter, or ...
186 v3.0 07.04.07

you intend to fit this circle in between two lines or a contour.

In the case of two lines, there are four possibilities (see picture below)
The four sectors are defined by the positive directions (+) of the lines. This
explains the symbols (picture below) in the "Fit in Element-Circle" window.
In case of a contour, you must select the range in which you intend to fit in the
circle (for details refer to "Selection of Points Contour").
11.6 Further Constructed Elements

11.6.1 Shift-Element Line
With this option you create a line that runs parallel to the selected line
(first element) and through the selected point (second element).
11.6.2 Tangent
Via the icon, you come to the “Tangent“ window. First, select the circle
where the tangent must be placed. Then you decide …
whether the tangent must be placed at the circle from a point or
whether …
the line must be a common tangent of two circles (see

four icons on the left).
Since in the two cases, more tangents are possible, you have to
select one via the icons (above). You can also imagine the small
circle of the two circles as a point.
07.04.07 v3.0 187

The designation of the tangents results of the contact point with the second circle
out of direction of the first circle (see our example above):
1 Tangent inside right
2 Tangent outside left
3 Tangent outside right
4 Tangent inside left
If you want the invert the direction of the tangent, you have to invert the order of
the circles. You have to take into account that …
... tangent 2 becomes the tangent right outside and …
... tangent 3 becomes the tangent left outside.
11.6.3 Min. and Max. Point

If, e.g. for fabrication of eyeglasses, you want to know which size must have the
blank, you can use the min-max function in GEOPAK. The function is used,
among other things, to evaluate the greatest extension of a contour in the minus
and plus values of X, Y and Z.
With this function, you also can – for alignment of a co-ordinate system – set the
part on "0" (origin) at an extreme value. All subsequent positions are relative to
this extreme value.
Notice
The extreme values are even evaluated (interpolated) if the point itself has
not been measured.
Ö Click on the point symbol in the toolbar because the extreme

values will be stored as point elements.
Ö In the following "Element Point" window, click on the "Min/Max

of Contour" symbol in the "Type of Construction" line and confirm.
Ö In the "Min/Max of Contour" window, select at first a contour.
In the symbol boxes of the adapted contour, you see

that it is also possible to evaluate the extreme values outside the
contour (see red points).
With this function, you determine the point on the contour,

which is the nearest to the origin.
188 v3.0 07.04.07


which is the farthest to the origin.
If you will choose specifically the first or the last point of a

contour you click one of the symbols.
Ö Click on one of the symbols (optionally) and confirm.
The point is displayed in another colour on the graphics.
Position of the Point
In the picture below, we have evaluated e.g. the extreme value outside a
gearwheel (above right side).
To locate the co-ordinates already shown in the picture, you continue as follows:
Ö Click in the element graphics on the symbol (left side).
Ö Via click on the green point, you first get the point
no. in a rectangular box.
Ö Through click on the right mouse button on this rectangular box, you
get a list from which you can, e.g. call your information (picture
below).
Ö Through click e.g. on the Y co-ordinate, you get the requested value
(picture below).
07.04.07 v3.0 189

12 Automatic Element Recognition

12.1 Automatic Element Recognition
12.1.1 Introduction
With this function it is for some of the elements no longer necessary to select an
element to measure a workpiece. You measure a number of points and the
element is automatically determined. The CMM records the individual
measurement points with the probing direction. When the element has been
found, it is graphically represented in the dialogue "Automatic element
recognition" (in the ill. below, see the line after two measured points).
Furthermore you get an acoustical message and a further representation in the
window Element Graphic.
In case that a point has been measured that is positioned too far outside the
element being measured, the element that has been previously detected in the
part program is stored and this last point is disregarded (see ill. below) – this is
done in the manual mode as a manual command and accordingly in the CNC-
mode. You can either use this last point as your first point for the new element
search or you can stop the measurement.
12.1.2 Further Options

You can use the three elements first detected to initiate an automatic alignment
(also refer to the topic Settings).
You can also automatically learn the clearance height, i.e. according to the
surface alignment (see also the topic Settings).
You can also automatically call up the tolerance comparison for all stored
elements (see also the topic Settings).
190 v3.0 07.04.07

12.1.3 Activating the Function

After you have activated the function in Settings and the CMM is idle, you can
just start to measure in the manual mode. The function with all options and the
dialogue gets active.
Alternatively you can use the menu "Elements / Automatic element recognition".
12.2 The Dialogue: Symbol and Information Boxes

Toolbar
In the toolbar of this dialogue (ill. below), you can opt for the default automatic
element recognition (symbol left). Alternatively, you can pre-define an element
which would mean a manual execution of all measurement processes up to the
"Element finished", in order to be able to store an element (part program).
To switch off the automatic element recognition, you must do this in the
PartManager in Settings.
In this toolbar, the symbols are activated or hidden. The symbols are operative
when an element can be calculated from measurement points.
Information box
An information box (ill. below) informs you what has happened or what needs to
be done respectively.
Fields for results

In other fields for results you find the latest relevant results of the element
recognition (length, diameter, angle etc.).
12.3 The Dialogue: Important Functions

With the automatic element recognition we provide you with a range of functions
for a user-friendly control of the measurement process according to your
individual requirements.
07.04.07 v3.0 191

A click on this symbol deletes the last measurement point. This function
also applies for the last element that has been automatically learnt/stored.
With a click on this symbol you accept and store the recognised element
with all measurement points in the part program.
With a click on this symbol you store the recognised element with all
points excluding the last one. The last point is used for the next element. With the
automatic element recognition activated, this is also executed automatically.
A click on this button and the dialogue disappears. If there are

already measurement points in the memory, a safety inquiry appears.
After recognition of the first three elements, you can initiate an automatic
alignment using this symbol (for detailed information, refer to Patterns for
Alignment ).
Following the surface alignment, a clearance height can be

automatically set. This is always the Z-axis. The height can be put manually in
the text box next to the symbol. You can also define the clearance height already
in the Settings.
The automatic call-up of the tolerance comparison you can

either determine in this dialogue or already in the Settings.
The symbols from left to right:
No tolerance comparison
Tolerance comparison directly after recognition of an element
Tolerance comparison of all elements after ending the functionality
With this symbol you can on or switch off the audio output.
12.4 Settings
The special options of the Automatic Element Recognition include
the automatic alignment
the automatic setting of a clearance height and
the automatic call-up of the tolerance comparison.
You can use all three options via the settings. To get to the respective dialogue,
use the PartManager via Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / GEOPAK
configuration / Automatic element recognition (see ill. below).
Activate or finish the function in the dialogue top left.
192 v3.0 07.04.07

Capture Range
You use the capture range to determine the accuracy range within which points
of an element shall be recognised. Points outside the range (red arrow in ill.
below), initiate a new process for element recognition (for this, already refer to
Automatic Element Recognition ).
Angular Range
You use the angular range to determine the accuracy range of the probing
direction. The probing direction of each measurement point is very important for
determining an element. This is why points for which the probing direction is not
within the defined angle (red arrow in ill. outside angle "α") are no longer used for
determining the element. (see also already in Automatic Element Recognition ).
These points initiate a new process for element recognition.
Use the options for the tolerance comparison to decide for either
• no or
• a direct tolerance comparison (after storing an element) or
• the tolerance comparison of all elements after finishing the
functionality.
07.04.07 v3.0 193

12.5 Special Cases / Limitations

Special Cases with the Joystick
With the joystick you have the possibility to perform two of the functions directly
without the necessity to use the dialogue. The advantage of this is that you need
not switch between joystick and keyboard.
Joystick----- Keyboard (dialogue)
CANCEL-----
START-----
Hint
When the display in the dialogue shows 0 and you push the START button, the
dialogue is closed and the functionality is finished.
This action corresponds to activating the symbol left.

You can use the GOTO-buttonto additionally learn interim positions that are also
stored. You can activate this function only via the joystick.
Limitations
The element point cannot be automatically learnt (if only one measurement point
has been measured, this may always belong to another element). This applies in
the same way for a line with only two measured points (with a third point, always
a circle could be recognised).
The elements ellipse, inclined circle, sphere and step cylinder
cannot be recognised with this function.
Cone and cylinder must be measured in circles.
All elements are only calculated acc. to Gauss.
The element names are given by GEOPAK.
During an automatic element recognition, no probe change is
possible.
Hint
For the SpinArm, certain driver settings are required (AutoDummy=1 und
MouseModeAvailable=0)
194 v3.0 07.04.07

Carbody Measurement
13 Carbody Measurement
13.1 Carbody Measurement: Introduction
For a carbody measurement, two identical systems measure the workpiece (ill.
below).
Identical in this context means:
Two CMMs are working with our software MCOSMOS,
each CMM has an own PC, and
the PCs are connected via a network.
The fact that the measurement is performed by two CMMs means a considerable
saving of time for the body measurement.
The part programs can be learnt from either the Master CMM or from the Slave
CMM. Analogous, one of the PCs is declared the Master PC and the second
computer the "Slave PC". The programmes can be started either from the Master
PC or from a third PC using the RemoteManager.
The measurement results are – like known from MCOSMOS – measured. If you
wish to use the measurement results of both CMMs to create a joint protocol, the
data can be transferred between the PCs (for detailed information, refer to
Retrieve Element Data ). The protocol is output on the Master PC.
The part programs can be synchronised. The Synchronisation is partly
automatic. The two machine controllers that are linked with each other via
hardware components perform the collision control between the overlapping
measurement ranges of the two CMMs.
07.04.07 v3.0 195

Carbody Measurement
But also the software contains features to exclude the occurence of a collision.
After you have defined your probe system, a virtual cuboid is positioned around
the probe to prevent collisions. Only after a probe has left an overlapping section,
the second probe can move into this section.
Starting with version 2.4, we have furthermore established an "Element

Container". In this container you can gather measurement points (applies
principally for GEOPAK). As required, these measurement points can – e.g. for
the carbody measurement – be transferred between the two PCs.
Further Topics
Setup Parameters
Monitoring: Data Transfer
Start Part Program
Synchronisation of Part Program
Retrieve Element Data
Element Container
Joint Co-ordinate System
Transfer Co-ordinate System
13.2 Settings
Server or Client
To be able to work with a DualArm system, you must first adjust some defaults
(PartManager / Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / DualArm).
196 v3.0 07.04.07

Carbody Measurement
After a new installation, the DualArm functionality is not available. To activate this
functionality, use the option buttons of the dialogue and click on either "Server"
for the Master PC or on "Client" for the Slave PC.
Ö When clicking on "Server", a preset port is displayed. The port
number must be the same on both PCs.
Ö When clicking on "Client", you must additionally enter the network
address of the other computer (Master PC).
Confirm and the "Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)" is initialised. This TCP
enables the data transfer between Master and Slave PC.
Always start the Master PC first and then the Slave PC.
Hint
In the "PartManager Settings" dialogue box, choose the "General" card
and choose GEOPAK repeat mode in the "Autostart" box. In this case the
repeat mode will automatically be started when starting the PartManager.
It is not necessary to select a part.
07.04.07 v3.0 197

Carbody Measurement
13.3 Volume Compensation for Carbody Measurement

If a compensation of plane deviation usually results in determining the Z-offset,
this procedure is not always possible when using a DualArm system. In these
cases, the compensation needs also to be possible in the X- or respectively Y-
axes.
Therefore, the "Automatic monitoring" is always deactivated in such systems
(Dialogue GEOPAK settings). To get to this dialogue, go to the PartManager and
proceed via the menu Settings / Defaults for programs / GEOPAK / GEOPAK
settings /Other.
Hint
The option "Automatic monitoring" can also be deactivated for the
"standard" CMM.
A prerequisite for the volume compensation in the X- or respectively Y-axis is that
your system also includes the functionality. To get to the dialogue, go to the
GEOPAK learn mode / menu Settings / System and then to the function. As
opposed to the "standard" volume compensation (see the topic Volume
Compensation), this is in general an offset to a Z-spindle (see ill. below) and not
in particular the offset of the z-spindle to the Z-axis.
In fact, you can enter the offset to any axis. For detailed information, refer again
to the topic Volume Compensation.
Hint
You will not get to this dialogue in the repeat mode if the offset data have
already been changed in the ProbeBuilder or in the probe data
management.
13.4 Monitoring: Data Transfer

After completion of the "Settings" GEOPAK offers the possibility to check the
TCP with its functions (e.g. "Send"). In the learn mode, this function is always
available, in the repeat mode only when the part program has not yet been
started.
Start GEOPAK on the Master PC and click in the menu bar on Settings / DualArm
Socket Monitor. A dialogue of the same name appears.
Then start the Slave PC,
Ö start GEOPAK
Ö and click in the menu bar on Settings / DualArm Socket Monitor.
198 v3.0 07.04.07

Carbody Measurement
If in the Socket Monitor of the Slave PC the button "Send" is

activated like on the Master PC, you have performed the settings
correctly.
Now you can carry out a test by sending measurement results from one PC to the
other. The function "Element Container" is operative also without TCP.
Hint
If the TCP/IP – connection is interrupted GEOPAK tries to restore the
connection automatically.
13.5 Start Part Program

Start the part program for the carbody measurement via the menu bar/Program
and click on the function. Use this function on your Master PC to start a part
program on the Slave PC. You can also use the function to check if the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is active or not (for the topic "TCP", also
refer to the topic "Carbody Measurement: Introduction"). The part program on the
Slave PC is then started without a further dialogue. The "Joint Co-ordinate
System" is automatically loaded on both PCs.
What you need to know
A part can have several part programs, i.e. separate for the two PCs. If there is
only one part program, the part name is also the name of the part program.
To the end of a part program, a message with the content "Synchronisation" is
sent to the other PC. If, for example, a part program on a Slave PC is finished, a
confirmation of the end of the synchronisation is sent to the Master PC and vice
versa.
In the text box "Timeout" which you can activate by clicking on this symbol,
you can enter a timeout limit for the part program until synchronisation in
seconds.
13.6 Synchronisation of Part Program

The part programs on both PCs (Master and Slave PC) must be synchronised.
This is achieved using the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). To get to the
function "Synchronisation of part program", go to the GEOPAK learn mode and
use the menu bar / Program.
13.6.1 Synchronisation is nessecary

The synchronisation is mandatory. If, for example, in a certain section both
CMMs measure only from different sides, useful results are only possible when
using the synchronisation.
A synchronisation is also possible during an active part program. In this case,
both PCs use the same synchronisation command in the active part program. To
recognise the exact synchronisation point, a label must be set in the part
program. In the dialogue "Synchronisation of part program" you enter a
meaningful text (e.g. "Position XYZ reached"). This label must be used by the
part program on both PCs.
07.04.07 v3.0 199

Carbody Measurement
13.6.2 Both Part Programs should be Finished

The situation may occur that the part program on the Slave PC finishes earlier
than on the Master PC. Therefore, an automatic synchronisation takes place at
the end of each part program. This simply means that the part programs on the
two PCs are not finished until also the final synchronisation is finished on both
PCs.
Hints
While a PC is waiting for a synchronisation, a window appears "Waiting
for synchronisation". Additionally, the name of the label is displayed.
With a click on the button "Cancel" you can stop the synchronisation. A
corresponding window appears for confirmation. A cancellation could, for
example, be required when another part program is executed or the
communication has been interrupted.
If you receive no feedback during the timeout limit, you receive the
message "Command cancelled after timeout ".
13.7 Retrieve Element Data

The function "Retrieve element data" is used for transferring data between
Master and Slave PC using the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP). The data
refer to the "Joint Co-ordinate System". If this has not been defined, the
workpiece co-ordinate system is used.
The Master PC retrieves the data, the Slave PC sends the data, if available. The
Master PC waits until the data are available. In case of an error, the PC that has
retrieved the data receives a message. Also the Slave PC can retrieve data.
Hints
Use the text box for "Number of elements" to retrieve measurement
results of more than one element. You would just need to enter a number
bigger than 1.
The dialogue furthermore provides for defining a timeout in

seconds. If you receive no feedback from the second PC during this
timeout period, an error message appears.
200 v3.0 07.04.07

Carbody Measurement
13.8 Element Container

The element "Container" is only used to gather measurement points. It depends
on the respective part program, for which calculation of an element the
measurement points are needed at a later time. Apart from the carbody
measurement, the element "Container" can also be used in the GEOPAK basic
geometry.
Regarding the carbody measurement, find an example in the table below: The
measurement points of an element have been determined on two CMMs, but
have been gathered and calculated on one PC.
Master PC Slave PC
Element container 1 Element container 5
Meas. 5 points Meas. 5 points
Element finished Element finished
Request element (Container 5 as 2) No action
Send element (Container 5)
Connection element cylinder (container 1+2)
13.9 Joint Co-ordinate System

The current co-ordinate system can be stored as a joint co-ordinate system not
dependent on how the co-ordinate system has been defined. You must simply
ensure that the alignment is the same on both CMMs.
Example
Three spheres have been measured. The centres of the three spheres are used
for this alignment as follows:
A plane through the three centres is used for the spatial alignment.
A line from the centre of the first sphere to the centre of the second
sphere is used for the alignment of the X-axis.
The origin of the first sphere is the centre of the joint co-ordinate
system.
Hints
It is, however, a prerequisite that the spheres have been measured on
both CMMs in the same way and at the same positions. Otherwise, the
co-ordinate system would not be a "joint" co-ordinate system.
The co-ordinate system is stored in the GEOPAK learn mode, i.e. in the
corresponding menu to which you get via the menu bar / co-ordinate
system and with a click on the function "Send actual co-ord. system".
13.10 Transfer Co-ordinate System

You can transfer a co-ordinate system from one CMM to the other. A new
alignment on the second CMM is not required.
For transferring the current co-ordinate system, there are two functions available
together with the corresponding dialogues:
Send ... or
07.04.07 v3.0 201

Carbody Measurement
Retrieve co-ordinate system.

If there is no "Joint Co-ordinate System", you get an error message. To get to the
dialogues, go in the GEOPAK learn mode to the menu bar / Program and click on
the relevant function. The retrieved co-ordinate system is stored as the current
co-ordinate system. The part program is not continued until this has been
completed.
202 v3.0 07.04.07

14 Graphics of Elements
14.1 Contents: Graphics of Elements
Task
Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window
Further Components of the "Graphics of Elements" Window
Graphic Limits
Changing the representation
Selelct Elements
Element Information
Rotate
Contour View
Display Subelements of a Contour
Circles as Partial Circle Display
Contour Point Selection by Keyboard
Multi-Colour Contour Display
Contour Display as Lines and/or Points
Learnable Graphic Settings
Display of Graphic Window
Options of the "Graphics of Elements"
Show Hidden Elements
Recalculate Straightness, Flatness and Circularity
Print Graphic during Learn and Repeat Mode
Store Section of Graphic Display in Learn Mode
Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with "Autoscale"
Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with a "Scale Factor"
Define Scaling
Print Graphic in Repeat Mode
Define Label Layout
Flexible Graphic Protocols
Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points
Compare Points
Parallelism Graphics
14.2 Graphics of Elements - Task

The graphics of elements is used as a graphic support for your measurement
tasks with GEOPAK. The window is available in the single and learn mode as
well as in the repeat mode.
The components of the graphics of elements window are:
a toolbar
the range of the graphic representation in the window
the "Graphics" pull-down menu with its functions in the menu bar
The "Graphics" Pull-Down Menu
You find the "Graphics" pull-down menu in the menu bar. In this menu, you can
only activate functions if the graphics of elements window is also activated. In this
case, all the other menus are deactivated.
Further topics
Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window
Further Components of the "Graphics of Elements" Window
07.04.07 v3.0 203

Options of the "Graphics of Elements"

Changing the representation
Select Elements
Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points
Element-Information
Rotate
Recalculate Straightness, Flatness and Circularity
Compare Points
Parallelism Graphics
14.3 Toolbar in the "Graphics of Elements" Window

In the toolbar, you find the following buttons for functions you frequently use in
the "Graphics" pull-down menu.
Zoom: Zoom graphics clip
Reset zoom
Moving: Move graphics clip
Graphical element or point selection(this function is only in the single or

learn mode available)
Element information Display element information
Rotate: Rotate the graphic

Display Option
Top view (XY-plane, line of sight towards the Z-axis)
Side face (YZ-plane, line of sight towards the X-axis)
Front view (ZX-plane, line of sight towards the Y-axis)
3D- view
Element Graphics Options
With this function, you can change the representation of the graphics of
elements through further options. (See "Element Graphics Options Window")
Learnable graphic commands: If you click this symbol, you can store in
another window of the part program commands such as "Current View Settings",
"Print Window" and "Close Window". However, the commands in the learn mode
must not be imperatively carried out. This function is only in the single or learn
mode available.
Hint
If you click in the learn mode on the "close window symbol" of a
graphic window, the command "window close" will written into your part
program. If this part program runs off in the repeat mode, then this window
is closed automatically.
Print graphics: If you click this symbol, a printout of the current window
contents with the usual log data is created.
204 v3.0 07.04.07

Hint
The "Reset Zoom" function is only possible if you’ve activated the auto
scale (see " Element Graphic Options").
14.4 Further Components of the Graphics of Elements

Window
Further components of the graphics of elements window are:
Further graphics status line in the lower window margin
Co-ordinate system view (in the window below, left side)
Origin of co-ordinate system
Auto grid with measures
You can activate/deactivate the display of these components in the "Element
Graphic Options" window.
14.5 Graphic Limits

If you want to input the "Pan" and/or "Zoom" command
numerically, use this function (menu bar "Graphics / Graphic Limits").
Contrariwise, you can read in this window, which changes you have made via the
"Pan" and/or "Zoom" functions.
14.6 Changing the representation of the graphics of

elements
Zoom
If you click on this symbol, you can select and zoom a clip of the graphics
of elements through simple click.
Ö Press the left mouse button.
Dragging the mouse you determine the increased area (red
rectangle)
Reset Zoom
to reduce the element graphic to the original size back...

Ö you click on the symbol or
Ö with a double click into the graphics of elements.
Moving
When pressing the left mouse button, you can move the displayed
graphics clip in the window.
14.7 Select Element

If you want to select geometric elements, the graphics of elements is in the
selection mode.
That means, the mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair and you can click
on the elements.
07.04.07 v3.0 205

The function "select element" is only active, if you are in a function,

which expected an element as input (e.g. recalculate from memory,
intersection element, connection element, etc.).
Proceed as follows:
Ö In the graphics, click on one element or more.
The selected elements are displayed in red in the graphics.
As soon as you’ve selected and confirmed, the "Select Element"
mode of the graphics of elements is automatically reset.
If you select two elements, you must note the following:
With the right mouse button, you determine whether the next
element to select should be the first or the second element.
The current option number (1 or 2) is indicated in the mouse pointer.
14.8 Element Information

With this function, you get an information display for the elements.
Proceed as follows:
Ö Click on the "Element-Information" icon to change to the

"Element-Information" mode.
The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair indicating the

letter "i".
Ö Click on the element you want to get an info about it.
The information-field contains information of the element. In the
result field, you get further information to the corresponding
element.
If you click on an info-field with the right mouse button, you can add
further information in the information-field. Furthermore, you can
delete the info-field or mask out the element.
You can have the hidden elements indicated again. To do so, click
in the "Graphics" pull-down menu on "Display Hidden Elements".
Hint
You can move the info-fields. Click on the info-field, keep pressed the left
mouse button and move the info-field.
The information-fields are only indicated for a moment. For example, the
information-fields get lost after rotation of the co-ordinate system.
Hide elements
Ö Click with the right mouse button into the info field of the element
you wish to mask out.
The context menu is shown.
Ö Click on the "Hide Element" function".
Show elements again
Masked out elements will be shown again, if you click on "Graphics / Show
Hidden Elements".
206 v3.0 07.04.07

Delete all labels

If you want to delete all labels of the graphic window, click in the menu bar on
"Graphic" and activate the function "Delete all labels".
Hint
You can delete a single label, by clicking with the right mouse button into
the label and activate in the context menu the function "Delete label".
14.9 Rotate
In the 3D view, you can change to the "Rotate" mode.
Proceed as follows:
Ö Click on the "3D-View" in the toolbar in the "Graphics of

Elements" window.
Ö Click on the "Rotate" icon.

The mouse pointer is displayed as an arrow in this mode.
Ö Click on one of the three co-ordinate axes of the represented co-
ordinate systems that are displayed and move the mouse to the
right or to the left.
The graphics is rotated in positive or negative direction around the
selected axis.
Hint
It is favourable to rotate in the normal (no zoom) graphics and with the
"Auto Scale" setting in the "Elements Graphics Options" window because
after the rotation, the graphics is automatically resized in the window.
14.10 Contour View

This function allows different contour-related views to be adjusted in the graphics
of elements. For instance, you can have displayed a single contour including all
elements created within this contour (so-called sub elements).
This is how you get to the "Contour View" window:
Ö Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
Or use the menu bar:
Ö Click into the graphics of elements, in order to activate the "Graphic"
function in the menu bar.
Ö Click on "Graphic / View Contour" in the menu bar.
This window offers you the following possibilities:
Contour Selection
Partial Circle Display ON and OFF
Point Selection by Keyboard
Display Contour as Lines and/or Points.
07.04.07 v3.0 207

The settings you make in the " View Contour" window are for all or single contour.
These settings enable you to suppress or show parts of contours in the graphics
of elements.
14.11 Display Sub Elements of a Contour

To change the display of contours, follow these fundamental steps:
First find out whether you want to view a specific contour or whether
all contours are to be displayed.
Then adjust whether and which further geometrical elements are to
be displayed.
Display contour and its sub elements
Of a contour you wish to view, in the graphics of elements, only the contour itself
and its sub elements, in other words, the elements which were created by means
of this contour (fitted-in circle, etc.).
Ö Activate the check box "Only Active Contour".
Ö Choose a contour from the list box.
Above the contour selected, there appear the number of points the
contour contains, the plane in which plane the contour was created
and whether it is an open or closed contour.
Ö Activate the check box " Only Contour Subelements" within the area
"Geometric Elements".
Selecting "All" causes the contour and all geometric elements (circle, line, etc.) to
be displayed, irrespective of whether or not these elements have been created by
means of the selected contour. If "None" is selected, only the active contour will
be displayed.
14.12 Circles as Partial Circle Display

Larger part programs containing numerous elements may cause the graphics of
elements to become unclear and complex. Moreover, sometimes you may
require only partial information on elements (e.g. only on that part of the circle
which runs through a contour) for the graphic view.
208 v3.0 07.04.07

Hint
To generate an inlaid circle, use the button "Fit in Element" in the "Circle
Element" dialogue.
Using the "Partial Circle Display" function it is possible to display only that part of
a circle which runs on the contour. The part beyond is masked out. This is based
on the premise that the circle is a sub element of a contour.
Mask-out circle elements of contours
Activate the "Partial Circle Display" function, in order to mask-out those parts of
circles which do not run on the contour. This is generally based on the condition
that the circle in question is a sub element of a contour.
You get the following graphics of elements:
14.13 Contour Point Selection by Keyboard

A contour consisting of many points located close to each other makes it difficult
for the mouse to catch the desired contour point. When selecting a point with the
mouse, you always get the point located closed to the mouse pointer, when you
have pressed the left mouse button.
Ö Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of elements

icon bar.
function in the menu bar
Ö Activate the function "Point Selection by Keyboard".
To select contour points using the keyboard, it is necessary
that the "Point Selection Contour" window is open.
To open the "Point Selection Contour" dialogue, you use, for instance, the
"Element Circle" dialogue with "Fit in Element" activated. You confirm and the
dialogue "Fit in element Circle" will be opened. After your inputs in the dialogue
"Fit in element Circle" you confirm again.
07.04.07 v3.0 209

Ö Click with the mouse into the graphics of elements to make sure that
the following keyboard inputs do not apply to the open dialogue, but
to the graphics of elements.
This action has to be repeated, whenever you click with the
mouse into the dialogue, for instance, to undo the last point area
selection, as all subsequent keyboard inputs would again be related
to the dialogue. At the beginning, the mouse pointer is always
positioned onto the first contour point.
Ö Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the desired
contour point.
Ö Operate the Enter key to define the selected contour point as the
starting point of an area selection.
Ö Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the contour point
which you wish to define as the starting point of the point area to be
selected.
starting point.
Key Mouse pointer movement
RH arrow key, Moves mouse pointer to the next contour point
Arrow key above
LH arrow key, Moves mouse pointer to the previous contour point
Arrow key below
Ctrl + arrow key, For fast mouse pointer movement on the contour
Page up,
Page down
Pos 1 Moves mouse pointer to the first contour point
End Moves mouse pointer to the last contour point
Enter (first time) Start of selection
Enter (second time) End of selection
In the "Point Selection by Keyboard" mode, you can use the mouse for an
additional functionality, e.g. for zooming into the graphics. That would provide you
a more detailed view while selecting points.
14.14 Multi-Colour Contour Display

Within the graphics of elements, contours are always shown in white colour. If, for
instance, a measured contour is required to be compared to its nominal contour,
it might be difficult to distinguish these two contours in the graphics of elements.
The "Multicolour Mode" enables several contours to be shown in different
colours.
Ö Click on the " View Contour" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
Ö Click into the graphics of elements to activate the "Graphic" function
in the menu bar.
Ö Click on "Graphic / Contour in the menu bar.
Ö Activate the "Multicolour Mode" function.
210 v3.0 07.04.07

In the multi-colour mode, the contours are shown in five successive colours
(white, green, blue, cyan and magenta). If more than five contours are displayed,
the series of colours repeats cyclically in the specified order, beginning with
white.
Deactivate the multi-colour mode for contours
Deselect the "Multicolour Mode" in the "View Contour" using the check box. Then
all contours will appear in the default colour white.
14.15 Contour Display as Lines and/or Points

By default, contours are shown in the graphics of elements as a polygon. This is
an array of lines connecting the individual point co-ordinates of the contour. The
contour points co-ordinates themselves are not shown in this type of display.
Show Contour in Points Display
Perform the following steps if only the points of a contour are to be shown in the
graphics of elements:
Ö Click on the "View Contour" symbol in the graphics of elements

icon bar.
in the menu bar.
Ö Click on "Graphic / Contour View" in the menu bar.
Ö Activate the "View Points" function in the "Contour Display Mode"
area.
This type of view is advisable in conjunction with the function "Point Selection by
Keyboard".
The points - lines view is automatically activated during the selection of

points, irrespective of the setting in the "View Contour" dialogue.
14.16 Learnable Graphic Settings

You can open the window "Learnable graphic settings" only in the
GEOPAK part program editor, as the graphic settings are automatically stored in
the learn mode.
Ö Click on "Output" in the menu bar.
Ö In the drop-down menu "Output", click on "Learnable graphic
settings".
In the dialogue "Learnable graphic settings" you define the structure of the
graphic evaluation.
Define graphic type
Ö Open the list box "Define type of graphic" and select a graphic type.
Ö Select an element from the list box "Reference element".
07.04.07 v3.0 211

The list box "Reference elements" only lists elements that are used in
the part program and that can be used with the selected graphic type. In
case that multiple reference elements are possible, always enter either
the current or the nominal element.
Layout of the info windows

You can use the function "Define label layout" to load the number, position and
contents of the info windows of the graphic from a meta file. With this function,
the graphic is printed out in the repeat mode exactly according to the layout you
have defined in the GEOPAK learn mode.
Ö In the area "Define label layout", activate the function "Load layout
#".
Ö Enter the number of the layout to be loaded in the repeat mode into
the list box.
To load" Define label layout" is only possible when working with the
element graphic and the airfoil analysis graphic (MAFIS). If you select
another graphic type (e.g. circular runout), this function is deactivated.
For more information about this topic, refer to "Define Layout of Info Windows"
and "Display of Graphic Windows".
14.17 Display of Graphic Windows

Element graphic options
In the "Element graphic options" you determine which elements you wish to have
displayed in the element graphic. For details as to the operation of the buttons,
refer to the topic "Options of the "Graphics of Elements".
Display of the graphic windows
When deactivating the button "Auto scale", you can perform the settings
for the co-ordinates of the visual range. For this, enter the desired values into the
input fields of the areas "Minimum" and "Maximum".
Hint
The graphic origin is positioned in the left bottom corner of the graphic
window.
Setting of views
You can use the view buttons for setting the views, i.e. top view, side view, front
view or 3D view.
Co-ordinate mode
With the buttons "Co-ordinate mode" you determine if the co-ordinates of the
visual range are entered as cartesian co-ordinates, as cylinder co-ordinates or as
spherical co-ordinates.
212 v3.0 07.04.07

14.18 Options of the "Graphics of Elements"

You activate the "Element Graphic Options" window by clicking on the icon.
Or click on "Options" in the "Graphic" pull-down menu.
In the "Element Graphic Options" window, you can change the display of the
graphics of elements through further functions.
The window is divided in two parts:
Elements
In the left part of the window, you find the symbols of the different element types.
Here you determine, which elements must be displayed.
Further Functions
You can activate or deactivate the functions through mouse click on the
corresponding icon.
Auto scale: With the auto scale it is possible to view every inch of the
graphics and in full size in the "Graphics of Elements" window. We suggest to
always work with the activated auto scale.
Grid: With this function, you activate the automatic grid display with scale
labelling.
Origin: With this function, you enable to display the origin.
Probe position: With this function, you enable the display of the position of
the probe. The probe is only displayed in the graphics if it is located in the actual
windowing of the "graphics of elements". The probe is represented as a red
sphere in non varying size and is always well displayed.
Probe radius: With this function, you enable the display of the position of the
probe radius. A thin red circumference around the probe shows the actual
diameter of the probe. If the actual probe diameter in the graphic display is
smaller than the symbolic representation of the probe, the actual probe radius is
indicated as a thin black line within the symbolic representation of the probe.
Option Settings: With this function, you can opt for a graphic selection of
elements. So you can click on elements in the "Graphics of Elements" window
and measure for example the angle or the distance between elements. If a
desired measurement task can’t be utilised appropriately, these elements are not
displayed at graphic selection.
Symmetry axis: With this function, you display the symmetry axes for the
elements such as circle, cylinder, cone and ellipse.
Co-ordinate system: With this function, you enable the display of the co-
ordinate system.
Flags: With this function, you get an information display for the elements.
Information for the actual element: With this function, you enable the display
of the status line (operator indicator line).
07.04.07 v3.0 213

14.19 Recalculate Straightness, Flatness and

Circularity
Hints on beforehand:
While this chapter exclusively treats the description of the dialogues and graphics
of elements, we give detailed information to these subjects under straightness,
flatness and circularity.
Task: You can mark and remove meas. points in the graphics for the
straightness, flatness and circularity with the mouse pointer. After the
corrections, you can recalculate the form deviation.
How to display the graphics window (e.g. straightness)
Ö Select the "Straightness" in the "Tolerance" pull-down menu under
"Form Tolerance" or
Ö click on the "Straightness" tool for evaluation.
Ö In the "Straightness" window, you click on "Show Straightness

Diagram".
14.19.1 Elements of the Graphics Window:

Toolbar
Graphical display in the left part
Numerical evaluation in the right part
Toolbar in the "Straightness" Window
Zoom graphics clip
Reset zoom
Move graphics clip
Graphical element or point selection
Display element information
Recalculate without selected points
Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon, you can store, in
another window, commands in the part program such as
• "Actual Graphics Settings",
• "Print Window" and
• "Close Window".
Hint
Print graphics: If you click on this icon, a printout of the current window
214 v3.0 07.04.07

14.19.2 Delete Measurement Points and Recalculate

Proceed as follows (two methods)
Graphical:
• Click on the "Recalculate without Selected Points" button.
• The mouse pointer changes to a cross-hair pointer.

• In the graphics, you select by mouse click the points that are
not supposed to be included in the recalculation. After that, you
confirm in the window "Recalculate without Selected Points".
Numerical:
• You can realize this selection also without graphic support

in the "Recalculate without Selected Points" window.
For that, click on the "Select Min. Point " and/or "Select Max.
Point " buttons and confirm.
Hint
Straightness, flatness and circularity over all meas. points are always accepted,
namely
• in the field for results,
• in the standard printout,
• if necessary in the file output and
• in the statistical analysis
Note that the function "Delete Measurement Points and

Recalculate" is not learnable
14.20 Print Graphics during Learn and Repeat Mode

This function enables you to print the displayed graphic windows directly from the
learn and repeat modes. Furthermore you can define and store the layout of the
labels.
Ö Click on the "Print Graphics" symbol in the icon bar of the

graphic window you want to print.
Ö Click on the graphic window you want to print.
The drop-down menu "Graphic" is displayed as active.
Ö Click on "Graphic / Print" in the menu bar.
Print graphic in learn mode
Ö Activate the function "Print now".
Ö Confirm your input.
The graphic is immediately printed.
Print graphic in repeat mode
Ö Activate the function "Learn print command".
Ö Confirm your input.
07.04.07 v3.0 215

Now, the settings in the area "Define label layout for print command" are
important.
Adapt graphic to the set paper format

In the area "Magnification" you set the required scaling.
For detailed information, refer to the topic "Autoscaling or Manual Scaling".
Label layout in the learn mode
You can use the function "Define label layout for print command" to store the
number, position and contents of the labels of the graphic in a meta file.
Therefore, the graphic is printed in the repeat mode exactly like it has been
learned in the learn mode. For detailed information, refer to the topic "Define
label layout".
Close window
Activate this function if you want to close the graphic window after completion of
the part program command.
Hint
14.21 Store Section of Graphic Display in Learn Mode

The graphics of elements shows, for instance, all elements. For your
measurement protocol it may, however, be advisable to record only one element
or a section clipped out from the graphics.
Ö Use a zoom tool to enlarge the desired area of the graphics.

If the set blow-up of the graphic window is to remain
unchanged, you will have to turn the auto scale function in the
"Elements Graphics Options" to OFF. An element added with
autoscale switched ON causes the zoom to be reset.
Ö Add the element informations to your element.
Ö Choose a view, e.g. "3D View".
Ö Turn the graphics to the desired position.
Ö Open the window "Learnable Graphic Commands".

Ö Activate the option "Current View Settings" in the "Learnable
Graphic Commands" window.
In cases where you also want the graphics to be printed out:
Ö Activate the "Print Window" option.
216 v3.0 07.04.07

Ö Confirm your settings in the "Learnable Graphic Commands"

window.
Activating the option "Current View Settings" causes the settings of the
"Elements Graphic Options" to be stored as well.
14.22 Learn Graphics of Elements Printing with

"Autoscale"
The auto scale function causes the current printout of the graphics for elements
to be fitted into the paper size set by default.
Ö Activate the "Print Window" option".
The "Auto scale" mode is shown as activated in the dialogue
window.
Ö Confirm your settings.
The command is then entered into your part program.
14.23 Learn Graphics of ElementsPrinting with a "Scale

Factor"
This function allows surface and form comparisons between elements of different
printouts to be made using the same scaling.
Ö Activate the "Print Window" option.
The "auto scale" mode is shown as activated in the dialogue
window.
Ö Click on the symbol "Adjust Scaling".

The "Print Graphic" dialogue is opened as well.
Ö Activate the "Define Scaling Factor" option in the "Print Graphic"
dialogue.
Ö Enter the scale factor into the input box.
Ö Confirm your settings in the "Print Graphic" dialogue.
Ö Your scale factor is shown in the "Learnable Graphic Commands"
window.
Ö Confirm your settings in the "Learnable Graphic Commands"
dialogue.
The command is entered in your part program.
14.24 Define Scaling

In the windows "Print graphic" and "Learnable graphic commands" you can:
Switch to the mode "Auto scale".
Adjust manual scaling.
07.04.07 v3.0 217

Switch on auto scale

When working with the auto scale function, the complete graphic is adjusted to
the paper format settings, reduced or zoomed-in. The complete graphic is printed
on the set paper format.
Ö Activate the option "Auto scale".
All possibilities to a manual input of the scaling factor are inactive.
Enter scaling factor
Ö Activate the option "Define scaling".
Ö Enter the scaling factor into the input field.
To make sure that your graphic fits into the paper format you have set,
you should enter a scaling factor that is smaller than the "recommended"
maximum enlargement shown in the learn mode.
14.25 Print Graphic in Repeat Mode

You can only use the print command of graphics in the repeat mode when you
have deactivated the function "Close window". With this setting, the graphic
windows in the completed part program remain open.
After completion of the part program, you can either
Ö click on the printer symbol of the graphic window,

Ö or click into the graphic window you wish to print.
The drop-down menu "Graphic" is displayed as active.
Ö Click in the menu bar on "Graphic / Print"
In this dialogue you can enlarge or reduce the graphic for your print-out in the
flexible protocol. For detailed information about this topic, refer to the topic
"Define Scaling".
14.26 Define Label Layout

You have the possibility to store the info windows of the graphic together with
their number, position and contents. The settings of the learn mode are then at
your disposal in the repeat mode.
Ö Activate in the section "Print mode" the function "Learn print
command".
Ö Activate the function "Use current layout as #".
Ö Confirm the proposed memory number.
Hint
A memory number 1 indicates that no layout has been defined so far, as
the memory numbers are incremented by 1 each.
Overwrite memory numbers
Open the list box "Use current layout as #" and select one of the already existing
memory numbers.
Loading of a label layout
Ö Activate the function "Load layout #".
218 v3.0 07.04.07

Ö Enter into the input field the memory number of the layout you wish
to load.
Not defining the label layout
Ö Activate the function "Disregard labels".
The settings of the info windows of the learn mode are not taken on
by the repeat mode.
Do not use memory number 0. The biggest memory number is 65535.

The label layout can only be defined for the element graphic and the
airfoil analysis graphic.
Close graphic window

Activate the option "Close window" if you want to have the graphic window closed
after the part program command has been executed in the repeat mode.
Hint
14.27 Flexible Graphic Protocols

To open the dialogue window "Store graphic for template" click on the
symbol (left) of an opened graphic window, e.g. "Graphics of elements".
Alternatively you can use the menu bar "Graphic / Store graphic for template".
With this function you can prepare graphics in the learn mode for the printout in
the flexible protocol.
Background
It is not possible to print graphic windows directly out of the GEOPAK learn mode
into the flexible protocols. For this, you need to store the graphic windows
temporarily as a file. The definition as to which files are printed out, you find in the
templates.
In the input field "Names" of the dialogue "Store graphic for template" you enter a
name of the graphic that is as "telling" as possible. You can also dispose of nine
view numbers. Depending on the template with which you want to print, you have
to select the view number. You know these view numbers (picture on the right)
from the ProtocolDesigner. For detailed information on this program and further
directions for use and Online Help refer to ProtocolDesigner.
The inputs in the input fields "Name" and "Comment" are, subject to a relevant
template, included in the flexible protocol.
Hint
In contrast to the GEOPAK edit mode, you need not select a graphic type,
because in the learn mode, the function "Store graphic for template" is linked to
the graphic.
For more information, refer to " Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK
Editor"" and "Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic".
07.04.07 v3.0 219

14.28 Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor

In order to print-out graphic windows like, for example, "Graphics of elements” in
the repeat mode, the function "Store Graphic for template” is required.
Background
templates.
To get to the function and the corresponding dialogue use the menu bar and the
menu "Output".
In the part program, this function should always be between the commands
"Open protocol” and "Close protocol”.
In the command "Open protocol”, always ensure that you have selected
the correct template. For detailed information, refer to the topic
Templates of Graphic Windows.
For further information, also read the topic Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible
Protocol.
14.29 Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points

Via the "Recalculate Element from Memory" function it is possible to calculate
new elements out of contour points. For that the "Select Points from Contour"
function of the graphics of elements is available. By this, single points are not
marked and selected, but rather blocks of points.
The "Select Points from Contour" Window is displayed:
Ö Select an element.
Ö Click on the "Memory Recall" icon and confirm.

Ö In the "Recalculate / Copy From Memory" window, you select the
contour out of whose contour points the element is supposed to be
recalculated. In addition, you select the view and confirm.
The "Select Points from Contour" window appears.
In the "Select Points From Contour" mode, single points are not marked and
selected. Now, you can mark and select blocks of points.
A block always has a start and an end point. Start points and end points are
labelled through little reticles. All points between the start and end mark are
selected and represented in red in the graphics. If you move a label, the points
are no longer displayed in red. The labels of the block are displayed in blue. In
the status line of the graphics of elements, the actual data of the point are
indicated under the moved label.
Proceed as follows
Set a block
Ö You set the labels by clicking on a point.
Ö This point is the start label.
Ö The end label is set where you release the mouse button again.
Ö It is also possible to re-utilize and move a label that has already
been set with the mouse.
220 v3.0 07.04.07

Connect two blocks

If you move a label (tag) of a block to the label of a second block,
both blocks are connected.
Delete a block
You click on a label with the right mouse button. The block is
deleted.
Further Buttons in the "Select Points from Contour" Window
With the "Select All" button, the whole contour is marked.
If you want to delete all blocks, click on this button.
If you this click on this button, you only delete one block. You always delete
at first the block that is next to the start point of the contour.
If you click on this button, an empty block is inserted. You can manually
input for example co-ordinates if you already know the exact values. Or you can
input e.g. variables. This function especially concerns a part program editor.
14.30 Compare Points

Task: With the comparison of points, you get an overview of the position
deviation of several elements. The elements can either be points, circles, ellipses
or spheres.
Program run
The elements are designated as actual elements and must be
completely filed in a sequence in the memory.
Ö Input the nominal positions as theoretical nominal elements. These
must also be completely filed in a sequence in the memory. Nominal
elements must always be of the same type as the actual elements.
Ö Click on "Compare Points" in the "Output" pull-down menu.
Ö In the "Compare Points" dialogue window, you define the elements
to be compared and the number of the elements. In this dialogue,
you determine whether the actual points and the tolerance diameter
must be displayed in the graphics. Furthermore, you select here a
• scale factor or the
• auto scale.
Ö The "Compare Points" graphics window appears.
• The graphics shows the largest and smallest distance of the
actual element(s) to the nominal element(s).
• Furthermore, the text that you’ve input before in the dialogue
Elements of the "Compare Points" Graphics Window
Toolbar
Toolbar in the "Compare Points" Graphics Window
Zoom graphics clip
07.04.07 v3.0 221

Reset zoom
Move graphics clip
Rotate the graphic

Display Option
Front view(ZX-plane, line of sight towards the Y-axis)
3D view
Learnable graphic commands: If you click on this icon, you can store in
another window commands in the part program such as
• "Close Window".
Hint
14.31 Parallelism Graphics

Task: For the parallelism of a projected line to a projected reference line, you can
also have a graphics display.
How to get displayed a parallelism graphics
Ö Select the "Parallelism" in the "Tolerance" pull-down menu under
"Orientation" or
Ö Click on the "Parallelism" tool for evaluation.

The "Parallelism" dialogue window appears. Here, you determine
the actual line and the reference line. Furthermore, you enter the
reference length, the projection plane and the width of tolerance.
A graphical display is not possible with a cylindrical width of
tolerance.
You can realize further settings for the parallelism if you click
the "Further Tolerance Options" button.
Ö In the "Parallelism" window, you click on "Show Parallelism

Diagram".
222 v3.0 07.04.07

Now, you can click the "Parallelism Diagram Settings" button

to realize further settings for the parallelism graphics. You can
change the scale in the "Parallelism Diagram Settings" window. You
determine whether the points in the graphic representation must be
connected.
Ö Confirm your settings in the "Parallelism" window to indicate the
Parallelism Graphics.
Elements of the "Parallelism" Graphics Window
Toolbar
Toolbar
Zoom graphics clip
Reset zoom
Move graphics clip
• "Close Window".
Hint
If you click in the learn mode on the "close window symbol" of a graphic
window, the command "window close" will written into your part program. If this
part program runs off in the repeat mode, then this window is closed
automatically.
Hint
The parallelism is calculated out of the difference of the largest distance
minus the smallest distance to the reference line.
If the reference length has been selected shorter than the measuring
range of the line, only meas. points within the reference length are
calculated.
Exception: If the reference length = 0.0 had been entered, the gauge
length of the line is inserted.
07.04.07 v3.0 223

Nominal and Actual Comparison
15 Nominal and Actual Comparison

15.1 Table of Contents
Clicking on the topics in the below table, you will obtain the required information
about this subject.
Tolerances: General
Maximum Material Condition
Tolerances in Detail
Straightness
Flatness
Roundness
Scaling of Tolerance Graphics
Position
Position of Plane
Position of Axis
Calculate Absolute Position Tolerance
Concentricity
Coaxiality
Parallelism
Parallelism: Example
Perpendicularity
Angularity
Symmetry Tolerance Point-Element
Symmetry Tolerance Axis-Element
Symmetry Tolerance Plane-Element
Runout Tolerance
Axial Runout
Circular Runout
Tolerance Variable
Tolerance comparison "Last Element"
Tolerance comparison element
Tolerance comparison elements dialogue
Set control limits
Contours
General
Pitch
Comparison (Vector Direction)
Best Fit
Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit
Bestfit within Tolerance Limits
Graphic Display
Bestfit Values
Tolerance Width
Form Tolerance Contour
Tolerance Band Editor
Define ToleranceBand of a Contour
Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour
Tolerance Band Contour
Filter contour/element
224 v3.0 07.04.07

Further Items
Example: Element Circle
Further Options
Origin of Co-ordinate System
15.2 Tolerances: General

15.2.1 Definition
GEOPAK allows you to carry out tolerance comparisons to DIN ISO R
1101 and 7684, taking into account the "Maximum Material Condition" (MMC; see
symbol above left).
The tolerance tables to DIN 16901, DIN 7168 and ISO R 286 are integrated
within our program, as a standard feature, to be used as a basis for calculation.
This means that, in addition to the nominal value, you have to enter the tolerance
field (type). The actual limits are displayed to you immediately.
There are further trade-specific tables, e.g. for wood or plastic processing
industries, you can create or use.
Furthermore, it is possible to stop the program run due to the results of the
tolerance comparison (see below).
15.2.2 Two tolerance characteristics

We differentiate between two tolerance characteristics.
Tolerances related to a single element only.
• You can activate this first group by clicking on the button
"Tolerances" in the dialogues where these elements are
defined.
• It is possible that you use the symbol disposed in the tolerance
bar.
• Still a further option is via the menu "Tolerances" and the
subsequent functions. "
Tolerances related to the position of two elements to each other.
This second group can be activated only via the tolerance bar.
For the various tolerances see under "Tolerances in Details".
15.3 Maximum Material Condition (MMC)

15.3.1 Definition/Applicability
The MMC allows to extend a given tolerance zone if
a shaft is out of its admissible maximum size, or
a bore is out of its admissible minimum size.
According to ISO 8015, the MMC is to be applied where the appears in the
drawing. There exist, however, national standards (e.g. in the USA: ANSI Y
14.5M) that differ from this regulation.
If the stands on its own, the tolerance extension is taken only from the
element itself.
07.04.07 v3.0 225

A further means that an additional extension can be taken from a different

element. This is shown, by the way, with an additional letter, e.g. .
15.3.2 The MMC in GEOPAK

Case 1: The MMC is allowed only for the element
Continue as follows
Ö Measure element
Ö Tolerance diameter
Ö Call position tolerance
Ö Activate
Ö If the tolerated element has no own diameter, a reference mark
must be selected in the following text box.
This would be the case with a point but not with a circle.
Case 2: The MMC is allowed also for a reference element
Proceed as follows
Ö Measure reference element
Ö Tolerance diameter of reference element
Ö Via the symbol in the "Further Tolerance -Options" dialogue

window, enter the respective datum label (in most cases a single
letter, such as A, B, C ...).
Ö Measure element
Ö Tolerance diameter of element
Ö Call position tolerance
Ö Activate
Ö Activate
Ö In the subsequent text box you select, via the arrow, the datum
label from the list.
15.4 Tolerances in Detail

Following is a breakdown of all tolerances. By mouse click you get to every single
topic.
Last Element: You tolerance directly the element that was last.
Element: You select the element in the dialogue window "Tolerance

Comparison Element".
Straightness
Flatness
Roundness:
226 v3.0 07.04.07

Position
Concentricity
Coaxiality
Parallelism
Perpendicularity
Angularity
Symmetry Tolerance Point Element
Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element
Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element
Simple Runout Tolerance
Tolerance Comparison Contours

In case MMC is allowed with the individual tolerances, please see for details
under "Maximum Material Condition".
15.5 Straightness
15.5.1 Definition
As far as straightness is concerned,

you can calculate it numerically, or
have its run shown graphically.
Ö In any case, click on the symbol (left on top) and come to the
"Straightness" window.
Ö Select the desired line under "Element".
Ö Enter the admissible geometrical deviation in the "Tolerance Width"
text box.
The result is displayed in the result box.
Hint:
For theoretical lines, intersection lines, symmetry lines and lines
determined by two points only, geometrical deviation is not defined.
15.5.2 Graphical Representation

In the "Straightness" window, activate the symbol (on the left).
Via the symbol (on the left) the "Settings for the Straightness Graphics"
window is displayed. Here, you can select any setting other than the default.
For details refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics.
07.04.07 v3.0 227

Further Options
Via this symbol, you come to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance
Options".
Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see detailed
information under this topic).
Connection of Points
"Connection of Points", that's what you normally do. When probing manually,
however, the connecting lines may cause confusion, particularly when the points
have not been measured in correct order. It is recommended that you do away
with the connections.
15.6 Flatness
15.6.1 Definition
As far as flatness is concerned...

have its run displayed in a graphic.
Ö In any case, click on the symbol (left on top) and come to the
"Flatness" window.
Ö Select the desired plane under "Element".
Ö Enter the admissible geometrical deviation in the "Tolerance Width"
text box.
The result appears in the result box.
Hint:
With theoretical planes, symmetry planes and planes determined by three
points only, geometrical deviation is not defined.

In the "Flatness" window, activate the symbol (on the left).
Via this symbol (on the left), you come to the window "Settings for the
flatness graphics". Here you can select any setting other than the default.
For details refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics.
Further Options
Via this symbol, you come to the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue
window.
Using this symbol, you control the functionality "Loops" (see details this
topic).
"Connection of Points", that's what you normally do. When probing manually,
however, the connecting lines may cause confusion, particularly when the points
have not been measured in the correct order. It is recommended that you do
away with the connections.
228 v3.0 07.04.07

15.7 Roundness
15.7.1 Definition
As far as roundness is concerned,

have its run displayed graphically.
Ö In any case, click on the symbol (top left) to get to the "Roundness"
window".
Ö Select the required circle under "Element".
Ö Enter the permissible geometrical deviation into the "Tolerance
Width" text box and click OK..
The result is displayed in the result box.
Hint:
For theoretical circles, intersection circles, fitted-in circles and circles
determined by three points only, geometrical deviation is not defined.

Activate the symbol (on the left) in the "Roundness" window.
The symbol (on the left) leads you the window "Settings for Roundness
Graphics". Here you have three options to choose from:
Actual roundness scaling
Tolerance zone scaling
Nominal value with
• Upper tolerance
• Lower tolerance
For details, refer to the topic Scaling of Tolerance Graphics.
Further Options
This symbol leads you to the dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options".
Using this symbol you govern the "LOOP" functionally (for details refer to
detailed information regarding this subject).
"Connecting points" is the normal case for you. When probing manually, the
connecting lines, however, may cause confusion, particularly when the points
have not been measured in correct order. We recommend that you do away with
the connections.
07.04.07 v3.0 229

15.8 Scaling of Tolerance Graphics

15.8.1 Roundness Scaling
Roundness "Settings for Roundness" windows allows you to

choose from three options.
Actual Roundness Scaling (Default Setting)
If you decide for this option, you can retrace the exact run of the circle in the
graphics (see FIG. below).
In this graphics, however, you do not see whether the points are located within
the tolerance width. This is caused in the present setup by the fact that the points
with minimum and maximum distance define the green field.
Hint
This is applicable accordingly to straightness, flatness, runout tolerances
and parallelism, too.
Consequently, the points are always located within the green field, even if
roundness does not comply with the specification. The roundness figures can be
seen from the result box, the protocol or from data output.
By clicking on the symbol (on the left) in the "Further Tolerance Options"
window = you can report the roundness figures to a statistics program. This
applies equally to the following options.
Tolerance Zone Scaling
Using this option you establish that the green field in fact agrees with the
tolerance zone. The width of this tolerance zone is already entered in the
"Roundness" window. In the graphics you can realise whether the circle is
located within the roundness tolerance (see FIG. below. You can see that the P1
and P40 values are the same as in the figure above for "Actual Roundness
Scaling".
Hint
This is applicable accordingly to straightness, flatness, runout tolerances
and parallelism, too.
230 v3.0 07.04.07

With large or very small deviations, you may, under certain

circumstances, not be able to retrace the run of the form. In this
case, you should resort to the "Actual Roundness Scaling"
function.
Nominal Value Scaling with Upper and Lower Tolerance

To find out whether the circle with its geometrical deviation is still within the
dimensional tolerance, you can perform the scaling operation using the nominal
value and the tolerance limits (Upper / Lower Tolerance). As a result, you see
here with this option, in addition to the figure above, a blue circle. This is the
nominal diameter circle.
The green field is defined by the nominal value and the upper and lower
tolerance you have entered.
It is possible (see FIG. above) that one or more points are located outside the
green field, roundness, however, is in line with the specification. This can be seen
from the result box, the protocol or from data output.
Hint
This is applicable accordingly to straightness and flatness, but not to
runout tolerances and parallelism.
15.8.2 Straightness/Flatness Scaling

Contrary to "Roundness Scaling", these two cases do not allow to check for
dimensional tolerance. You may, however, input an Upper and a Lower
Tolerance. The upper limit is the one located prior to the material, the other one is
located in the material.
07.04.07 v3.0 231

15.9 Position
15.9.1 Definition
Using the function "Position" you determine whether the positional deviation of a
point is still within tolerance.
Ö You click on the symbol in the tolerance bar
Ö In the
next step you select, via the symbols, the element type whose
position must be tolerated. You need to know that for points (e.g.
piercing point "Cylinder axis through plane") the material side is
unknown and that therefore the "Maximum Material Condition
(MMC) can not be applied directly.
The structure of the subsequent line is almost identical with the one
for the drawing entries. In addition, help bubbles explain the
individual symbols.
Ö Your drawing tells you whether the tolerance zone is circular

or flat. If circular, you activate the symbol.
Ö In the next text box you enter the width of your tolerance zone
or you make your last entries using the arrow.
Ö If the use of MMC is allowed, you activate the symbol.
If the use of MMC with a reference is allowed , you activate

the symbol.
For details about the principles of MMC, please refer to the topic
Maximum Material Condition.
Example 1
As an example we take the case of a "Point of intersection of cylinder axis and
plane".
Ö You tolerate the cylinder diameter.
Ö You assign a datum label to the cylinder diameter via the

dialogue window "Further Tolerance Options" .
Ö Then you can apply the MMC in the dialogue window with respect to
position, concentricity and symmetry of the point of intersection. You
recognise this when the text field (Max. Material Condition Element)
is active.
Example 2
For this example we take the case of a "Cutting circle of cylinder jacket and
plane".
Ö You tolerate the circle diameter.
Ö Then you can apply the MMC in the dialogue window with respect to
the position, the concentricity and the symmetry of the point of
intersection, without necessity of an entry into a text field.
232 v3.0 07.04.07

Example 3
For this example we take the case of a "Position of a symmetry line in a groove".
Ö You tolerate the groove width as the distance.
Ö You assign a datum label to the groove width via the dialogue
window "Further Tolerance Options" .
Ö Then you can apply the MMC in the following dialogue window with
regard to the "Position axis element", parallelism etc. of the
symmetry line. You recognise this by an active text field (Max.
Material Condition Element).
In case of a flat tolerance zone – the symbol is not activated - you can
input only one co-ordinate.
In case of a circular tolerance zone (the symbol is activated)...

Ö first select the plane where the tolerance zone is located, and ...
Ö then the co-ordinates of the location.
Ö In this case, you can enter the nominal position either in the
cartesian or the polar system.
Ö Choose the type of co-ordinate system using the known symbols.
15.9.2 Take over the actual value

In the left near the coordinate buttons you find an element button. By a
click on this button you can take over the value of the element that you want to
tolerate.
In case of a spatial tolerance zone (symbol on the left is activated), enter

three co-ordinates. To determine the type of co-ordinate system, use the symbols
(picture below, left-hand column).
In case of polar co-ordinates, you can, in addition, determine your working plane
using the symbols (picture above, right-hand column). The help bubbles provide
you with additional information.
Further Options
Options".
Click on the symbol left to find detailed information about the topic
"Determine Position Tolerance" with the option "Calculate absolute".
07.04.07 v3.0 233

15.10 Position of Plane
You can only realize a tolerance of the position of a plane that is

approximately parallel to one of the base planes.
You get the function via the “Tolerance” menu. In the following dialogue window
Ö select the plane in which you want to realize a tolerance and
Ö enter the width of tolerance.
Next, you decide in which tolerance direction (main direction

and in parallel to which base plane) the tolerance range extends to. Enter the
nominal position of the plane in the text field X, Y or Z.
Further proceeding depends on whether your tolerance zone is round or
rectangular.
Rectangular Tolerance Zone
In this case , enter the co-ordinates of the left lower and the right
upper edge.
Round Tolerance Zone
In this case, enter the co-ordinates of the centre and the diameter of
the tolerance zone.
For more details, see also the topics "MMC " and "Further Tolerance Options".
15.11 Position of Axis
You can only realize a tolerance of the position of an axis element that is
approximately parallel to one of the principal axes.
You get the function via the tolerance menu. In the following dialogue window
Ö first, you decide whether the actual element is a line, a cone or a
cylinder.
You can display the elements in the list.
The further parameters depend on whether you have a round or plane tolerance
zone.
Round Tolerance Zone: The example of a bore of which the axis runs
approximately parallel to the Z-axis, you look on the axis from top (see picture
below).
234 v3.0 07.04.07

1 = Tolerance diameter
Ö First, select the X/Y plane and then enter the X and Y co-
ordinates.
Ö Finally, enter the co-ordinates of start and end point (see picture
below).
1 = start point
2 = end point
Ö If you select another plane, proceed in a similar fashion.
Plane Tolerance Zone: By means of the example of a line in the X/Y plane that
runs approximately parallel to the X-axis we explain, which parameters to enter
(see picture below).
1 = start point
2 = end point
3 = Width of tolerance in error direction
The position of the axis is indicated through the Y value.
The error direction is the Y direction, too.
07.04.07 v3.0 235

Ö Therefore, for this example, select under “Print Preview“ (patch of a

surface) as error direction the Y-axis in the X/Y plane.
Ö In the text field, enter the nominal of the position of the line.
Ö In our example, enter the X values for the start respectively the end
point.
Ö If you select another error direction, proceed in a similar fashion.
For more details, see also the topics "Max. Material Condition(MMC)" and
"Further Tolerance Options".
Click on the symbol left to find detailed information about the topic
"Determine Position Tolerance" with the option "Calculate absolute".
15.12 Calculate Absolute Position Tolerance

For the position tolerances you can use the option "Calculate absolute" in
certain cases to simplify the input of the nominal co-ordinates.
The illustration below shows four bores (cylinders in top view and the points of
intersection of the cylinder axes with the plane). The nominal co-ordinates differ
only in the signs. This hole pattern has two symmetry axes (X- and Y-axis).
You can either tolerate
the position of the points or
the position of the cylinder axes.
In both cases you can enter the same nominal co-ordinates with the option
"Calculate absolute" for all four bores, i.e. absolute (x = 6.0 and y = 4.0). This is
useful for the loop repetitions.
For the position of an axis, as compared to the position of a circle, you

additionally enter start and end point. When calculating the position tolerance,
their signs remain valid also when carrying out an absolute calculation.
236 v3.0 07.04.07

15.13 Concentricity
Definition
With the function "Concentricity" you check whether the location of the centre of a
circle agrees with the location of a reference circle (centre of circle).
Proceed as follows:
In the first
step, using the symbols, select the element of which position must be
toleranced.
Hint
For points (e.g. piercing point "Cylinder Axis through Plane") the material
side is unknown and therefore MMC cannot be directly used.
Ö Click in the tolerance bar on the symbol (on the left) and the
"Concentricity" dialogue window appears. The structure of the top
line (below the header) follows roughly the one for the drawing
entries. In addition, help bubbles explain the individual symbols.
Ö In the first text box, enter the diameter tolerance zone.
Example of a solution
For this purpose, we take the case "Cylinder Axis through Plane".
Ö You tolerance the diameter of the cylinder.
Ö Via the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window,

allocate a datum label to the cylinder diameter.
Ö In the "Concentricity" dialogue window, you can then use MMC also
with the "Point" element. This is shown by the fact that the centre
text box in the top line is active.
With the elements circle, ellipse and sphere, the first {bmc N_TOL_M.BMP}
relates to the element itself. This is why the input of a datum label is not required.
As for the rest, you proceed as described under the topic "Maximum Condition".
Further Options
Options".
15.14 Coaxiality
Definition
With the "Coaxiality" function, check the position of two axes to each other. It is
important for the input that the axes are approximately parallel to a main axis of
the co-ordinate system.
Ö Proceed as described in detail of the topic "Concentricity" and
"Maximum Material Condition".
07.04.07 v3.0 237

Ö Click in the tolerance bar on the symbol (on the left) and
come to the "Coaxiality" dialogue window. The structure of this line
roughly follows the one for the drawing entries. In addition, help
bubbles explain the individual symbols.
Hint
As start or end point enter one co-ordinate, each of the range of which
checking must be performed (see picture below).
This is what applies for our example (the reference axis shows as the Z axis
upwards):
Start point =0
End point =5
The direction of the reference axis influences the signification of start

and end point.
If the reference axis, opposite to the Z axis shows downwards, the following input
is correct:
Start point = -5
End point = 0
Further Options
window.
Using this symbol, you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this
topic).
15.15 Parallelism
With the function parallelism you check the location of two axes to each other. It
is important for the input of the reference lengths that the axes or planes are
approximately parallel relative to a main axis of the co-ordinate system.
238 v3.0 07.04.07

Ö In the tolerance bar you click on the symbol (on the left) and
come to the "Parallelism" dialogue window.
First, you have to select your actual and your reference element. The subsequent
inputs depend on these elements. Thus, we differentiate between four initial
situations:
The parallelism of an axis relative to a reference axis
The parallelism of an axis relative to a reference plane
The parallelism of a plane relative to reference axis
The parallelism of a plane relative to a reference plane
For the four cases, proceed as follows:
Ö First, select your actual or reference element in the window
"Parallelism".
Ö The next line is adapted to suit for the drawing entry. Here, in this
line you enter the figures from your drawings.
Ö If MMC is allowed, see details under "Maximum Material Condition".
By a mouse click on this topic, you obtain the latest information about each of the
four initial situations.
Graphical Representation
If the actual element is a measured line, you can have parallelism also
graphically displayed. The procedure is similar to the one described in detail of
topic Parallelism Graphics.
You inform yourself about this theme with click on Parallelism: Example .
Further Options
Via this symbol, you come to the "Further Tolerance Options"
dialogue window".
Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see
details of this topic).
15.16 Parallelism: Example

For the parallelism of a line with a reference line, the system also provides a
graphic.
The following example in the illustration below shows the parallelism of the line
(3) to the reference line (2) as a reference. The graphic clarifies the way of
calculation:
In addition to the measurement points P1 to P4 of the tolerated line (line 3), two
additional points P5 and P6 are generated that have been calculated at the
distance of the input reference length on the line (line 3).
07.04.07 v3.0 239

The parallelism results from the difference between biggest and smallest distance
to the reference line. If the selected value of the reference length is shorter than
the measurement range of the line, only the measurement points positioned
within the reference length are included in the calculation.
Exception:
If the input for the reference length is 0.0, the reference length is inserted
for the measurement length of the line.
These results are included in the graphic which is also
available in form of a printout:
15.17 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Axis
Ö The tolerance symbol (on the left) appearing on a drawing

indicates that the tolerance zone concerned is a circular one. You
click the symbol in the dialogue window.
In the following text box, there appears the width of the tolerance
zone.
Ö If MMC is allowed, details can be seen under "Maximum Material
Condition".
Ö If the tolerance zone is flat, you have to enter additionally the
drawing level where it is defined.
Finally you must enter over which length parallelism has to be maintained
(reference length).
15.18 Parallelism of an Axis to a Reference Plane

(reference length).
15.19 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Axis

(reference length).
240 v3.0 07.04.07

15.20 Parallelism of a Plane to a Reference Plane

Hint (applies to rectangular tolerance zone only)
For the input of the reference lengths, it is important that the two planes
are approximately parallel to any of the base planes, the reason for this
being that the reference lengths can only be entered parallel to the co-
ordinate axes.
Ö To complete the previous steps (for details cf. "Parallelism" and
MMC) additionally enter which length parallelism has to be
maintained (reference length).
Ö With the diameter symbol not activated (on the left), enter
the diameter of the range which must be toleranced.
Ö With the diameter symbol activated, select the axis along which
parallelism must be maintained, and ...
enter the reference lengths in the other two axes.
15.21 Perpendicularity
With the perpendicularity function, check the location of two axes relative to each
other. It is important for the input of the reference lengths that the axes or planes
are approximately parallel relative to a main axis of the co-ordinate system.
Ö In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol (on the left) and the
"Perpendicularity" dialogue window is displayed.
First, you have to select your actual and your reference element. The subsequent
inputs depend on these elements. Thus, we differentiate between four initial
situations:
Perpendicularity of an axis to a reference axis
Perpendicularity of an axis to a reference plane
Perpendicularity of a plane to a reference axis
Perpendicularity of a plane to a reference plane
In the four cases, proceed as follows:
Ö First, select your actual or reference element in the
"Perpendicularity" window.
Ö The next line is adapted to suit for drawing inputs. Here, you enter
the figures of your drawings.
Ö If MMC is allowed, refer to details of topic "Maximum Material
Condition".
By a mouse click on this topic, you obtain the latest information about each of the
four initial situations.
Further Options
window.
Using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this
topic).
07.04.07 v3.0 241

15.22 Perpendicularity of an Axis to a Reference Axis

Ö Since the tolerance zone is flat, you must show, in addition, in which
drawing level it is defined.
Ö Finally, you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be
15.23 Perpendicularity of an Axis to aReference Plane
Ö The presence of the diameter symbol (on the left) in the

drawing indicates to a circular tolerance zone. Click the symbol in
the dialogue window.
The next text box shows the width of the tolerance zone.
Ö If MMC is allowed, refer to details of topic "Maximum Material
Condition".
Ö If the tolerance zone is flat, you must show, in addition, in which
drawing level it is defined.
Ö Finally, you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be
15.24 Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Axis

Hint (applies to rectangular tolerance zone only)
For the input of the reference lengths it is important that the plane is more
or less parallel to any of the base planes, the reason for this being that the
reference lengths can only be entered parallel to the co-ordinate axes.
Ö To complete the previous steps (for details cf. Perpendicularity") you
additionally enter over which length perpendicularity has to be
Ö In case the symbol (on the left) is activated, enter the

diameter of the area to be toleranced.
Ö In case the symbol is not activated, select the axis along which
perpendicularity has to be maintained, and ...
enter the reference lengths for the other two axes.
15.25 Perpendicularity of a Plane to a Reference Plane

Finally, you must enter over which length perpendicularity has to be maintained
(reference length).
15.26 Angularity
Definition
With the angularity function, check the location of an
• Axis relative to an axis,
• Axis relative to a plane,
• Plane relative to an axis,
242 v3.0 07.04.07

• Plane relative to a plane.

Proceed as follows
Ö In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol (on the left) and
come to the "Angularity" dialogue window.
Ö First, select your respective actual and reference

element.
Ö In the line below, enter the width of your tolerance zone.
If MMC is allowed, refer to "Maximum Material Condition" for more details.
Ö In the bottom text boxes, enter nominal angle and reference lengths.
Ö If your actual element features an axis (cylinder, cone

or line) you have to click the drawing level where the angle must be
maintained.
Further Options
window.
By using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of this
topic).
15.27 Symmetry Tolerance Point Element

With this function you check the location of an element relative to a symmetry
element. Prior to realize the tolerance check itself, you must
measure the two elements and use them to calculate ...
the symmetry element. This, in turn, becomes the reference
element.
Proceed as follows
come to the "Symmetry Tolerance Point-Element" dialogue window.
Ö By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window, select
your actual and reference element.
If the reference element is only point-based – unlike a line or a
plane - you still have to preselect the direction along which deviation
must be calculated. (Symbols "Projection" de-activated, symbols
"Tolerance Direction" activated).
If the symmetry location is given by an axis, the projection plane
where deviation is must be calculated.
If the symmetry location is given by a plane, deviation will be
automatically calculated perpendicularly to this plane.
The value determined is double the deviation from this location.
According to your drawing, you also have to input, in addition to the above, the
tolerance width. For details concerning MMC cf. Maximum Material Condition.
07.04.07 v3.0 243

Further Options
window.
topic).
15.28 Symmetry Tolerance Axis Element

With this function, check the location of an element relative to a symmetry
element. Prior to performing the tolerance check itself, you must...
measure the two elements and use them to calculate ...
the symmetry element. This, in turn, becomes the reference
element.
Proceed as follows
come to the "Symmetry Tolerance Axis-Element" dialogue window.
Ö By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window, select
your actual and reference element.
If the reference element is point-based, deviation will be calculated
only at this point. It is not necessary to enter start and end points.
If the reference element is an axis, the start and end point for the
actual element must still be entered. If possible, the actual element
should be parallel to one of the co-ordinate axes. Start and end
point correspond to the co-ordinates in this axis. For comparison
see also the topic Coaxiality.
According to your drawing, you also have to input, in addition to the above, the
tolerance width. For details concerning MMC, refer to Maximum Material
Condition .
Further Options
Via this symbol, the "Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window is

displayed.
topic).
15.29 Symmetry Tolerance Plane Element

With this function, check the location of an actual element relative to a symmetry
element. Before realizing the tolerance check, you must ...
measure the two elements and use them ...
to calculate the symmetry element. This, in turn, becomes the
reference element.
If possible, the planes should be paraxial in order to enter in a
reasonable way the reference lengths and the toleranced direction.
244 v3.0 07.04.07

Proceed as follows
Ö In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol, and the "Symmetry

Tolerance Plane-Element" dialogue window appears.
Ö By using the symbols in the top line of the dialogue window you
select your reference element.
If the reference element is a point, the position comparison is
carried out only at this point. Therefore, no further data is required.
If the reference element is an axis, you must enter, in addition, the
start and end point of the area to be measured (for details
concerning this topic refer to Coaxiality).
If the reference element is a plane, you have to
• input the direction ...
• and, for the other axes, the corner points of the area (see
picture below; the toleranced direction is the Z-axis).
X1 = Start X
X2 = End X
Y1 = Start Y
Y2 = End Y
According to your drawing, you have to input, in addition to the above, the
tolerance width. For details concerning MMC, refer to Maximum Material-
Condition .
Further Options
window.
topic).
15.30 Runout Tolerance

With the "Runout Tolerance" function, check both the radial and axial runout of
your workpiece.
07.04.07 v3.0 245

Ö First, you have to define the axis of rotation. This can be the axis of
a cone or a cylinder, or an axis that has been defined as a
connection line through several circle centres.
Ö In the tolerance bar, click on the symbol and come to the

"Runout Tolerance" dialogue window.
Ö Now, you must differentiate between a
axial runout – you measure a plane - or a
radial runout. This involves the measurement of a circle or a
cylinder.
Hint
For further details, refer to the subject Axial Runout.
If you have measured a cylinder your result will be equal to the total
radial runout.
Ö For this purpose, optionally click on one of these symbols.
Depending on your selection, find the following elements in the list.
Ö By a mouse-click on one of these elements (on the

left), select as reference element the element that determines your
axis of rotation.
Ö Enter the admissible tolerance range in the bottom tolerance box.
Hint
For the axial runout, you additionally need the diameter of the shaft
(reference diameter) whose surface you have measured.
Using the symbols you can have the radial and axial runouts also
in a graphics. For details refer to the topics "Roundness", "Flatness" and "Scaling
of Tolerance Graphics".
Further Options
Further Tolerance Options" dialogue window.
Loops" (see details of this topic).
15.31 Axial Runout

As far as axial runout is concerned, one distinguishes, as a rule of principle,
between "Simple Axial Runout" and "Total Axial Runout". The reason for this is
that for the limitation of a plane you have to enter a reference diameter in addition
to the rotational axis.
Simple Axial Runout
For Simple Axial Runout, a plane is defined by points located on a circular path
(circle made up of red dots in the line drawing below). This circular path should
be located centrally around the reference axis. Consequently, the reference
diameter (in red) is the diameter of this circular path. It is not the cylinder
diameter.
246 v3.0 07.04.07

In the present case, the two points P13 and P14 are not measured points.
Determined by GEOPAK, they define the axial runout since they represent the
maximum deviations.
Total Axial Runout
For Total Axial Runout, a plane is established by points which can be located on
several circular paths. For example, the whole end face of a cylinder can be
captured this way. To capture the edge of the end face as well, you have to enter
the reference diameter which is, in our example below, the diameter of the
cylinder.
In this case, the points P25 and P26 are not measured points. Determined by
GEOPAK, they define the axial runout since they represent the maximum
deviations.
Hint
For axial runout calculation, all measurement points are used, no matter
which reference diameter has been entered..
15.32 Circular Runout

A circular runout calculation in GEOPAK does not only include the measurement
points of a circle but also two additional points which are positioned on the
circumference of the calculated circle, because a situation may occur in which the
measurement points are all positioned inside a pre-defined tolerance zone, but
not the whole circle.
Although the example illustration below is not representative for a circular runout
measurement, the number of measurement points = 4 is quite usual. The
measurement points on the horizontal and on the vertical axis are still within the
tolerance range. Nevertheless, the tolerated circle does not meet the required
circular runout, because both points on the bisector of the angle are outside the
tolerance range. Although they were not measured, they belong to the calculated
circle.
07.04.07 v3.0 247

Diameter and position of the calculated

circle also depend on the selected
mode of calculation.
15.33 Tolerance Variable

You can also realize a nominal-to-actual comparison of calculated values. You
come to the function and the dialogue via the menu bar "Tolerance / Variable...".
In addition, by clicking on the symbol in the following dialogue, you have

all other possibilities of the nominal-to-actual comparison e.g. the transmission to
STATPAK, etc. (see details of Further Tolerance Options).
15.34 Tolerance Comparison"Last Element"

This function usually deals with a nominal-to-actual comparison as in GEOPAK-3;
but you can, in this case and independently to the type, access the last measured
element.
To this subject, also see details under Tolerance Comparison Elements
Dialogue".
15.35 Tolerance Comparison Element

In this dialogue, you click on the element, of which you want to have a nominal-
to-actual comparison. Confirm and the dialogue for example "Tolerance
Comparison Element Cylinder" will appear. If you have measured several
elements of one type, the proposal in the dialogue has always reference to the
last measured element of the selected type.
Read also:
Tolerance Comparison Elements Dialogue
Free Element Input
15.36 "Tolerance Comparison Elements" Dialogue

With this nominal-to-actual comparison, it is possible to check all element
characteristics (position, direction, size, form) in only one dialogue. According to
element type, the dialogue windows are, in part, differently constructed.
248 v3.0 07.04.07

The dialogue will appear for example

via the menu bar "Tolerance / Tolerance Comparison Elements /
Last Element or Element". Finally, if you click only on the "Element",
you can choose in the following window the type of element, for
which you want to realize a nominal-to-actual comparison (see in
addition details under "Tolerance Comparison Element".
However, you can also click on the symbol in the element

window. After the measurement, the dialogue automatically opens.
Ö Via the symbol you select, which characteristic you want to

check in this dialogue.
Absolute Values
If, for the co-ordinates, you are only interested in the absolute value and
not in the sign, click on the symbol.
15.36.1 Tolerance Class
or some values, you have the possibility instead of entering upper and
lower tolerance limits, to input a tolerance class. Then, GEOPAK calculates out of
nominal value and tolerance class the corresponding limit values and displays
them in the inactive text boxes.
In the tolerance classes, pay attention to the use of capitalization

and small letters.
Instead of using the given tolerance classes, you can create your own
characteristic tables. A helper program will be delivered during installation.
15.36.2 Polar Co-Ordinates

For the position of an element, you can select in the dialogue whether you
want a Cartesian or a polar evaluation (see symbols in the dialogue, bottom left).
In the cylinder co-ordinates, at first, you get the radius in the XY plane. If
you want the analysis in another plane, click several times on the symbol.
With the spherical co-ordinates, at first, you get the Phi angle in the XY
plane and the Theta angle to the Z-axis. If you want the analysis in another plane,
click several times on the symbol.
Further Input Options
For round elements you can, in addition, determine via the

symbols whether you want to input the diameter or the radius.
07.04.07 v3.0 249

During the learn mode of GEOPAK you can click on the respective icon of
the element (e.g. line on the top left of the dialogue box) to accept the measured
actual values in the "Nominal Value" column as proposal. The actual values are
rounded up to one digit after the comma, for the unit "Inch" to two digits after the
comma. In the GEOPAK editor the values are set to 0.00.
Options
For the form of some elements, you can also have a graphic chart. Settings
for this graphic
By clicking on the symbol, you can realize different settings to the graphic
in the following window.
Via the symbol, you get further options e.g. the transmission to STATPAK,
the possibility to cancel etc. (also see details under Further Tolerance Options).
By using this symbol you control the functionality "Loops" (see details of
this topic).
15.36.3 Position
If you click on one of the symbols you can currently switch over
from
"Tolerance single co-ordinates" to
"Tolerance Position" and vice versa.
You can only use this option if the elements can be tolerated with "position
tolerance" (e.g. you can't use the element line).
About "Tolerance Position" you inform yourself with a click on the topic.
15.37 Set Control Limits

With this function (menu bar "Tolerances / Set Control Limits ..."), you can prompt
a warning already before arriving at the tolerance limit. The control limit is a
single value is and is indicated in percent of the tolerance zone. If an actual value
is outside of the control limits - however within the tolerance – the following
happens:
The value is represented in another colour as red or green in the
result field as well as in the protocol.
With the corresponding setting of the format, the feature is printed
out, respectively is written into the output file. Significant are the four
dialogues "File Format Specification", "Change File Output Format",
"Print Format Specification", "Change Print Format"). You come to
these dialogues via the menu bar "Printout.
A definite IO-condition will be set (see details in the "io_con_e. pdf"
respectively "io_con_g.pdf" document on our Homepage or on your
MCOSMOS-CD).
250 v3.0 07.04.07

15.38 Contours with Tolerance Check

15.38.1 Contours: General
With the "Tolerance Comparison Contours" function, check the geometrical
deviation of an actual contour from a nominal contour. Nominal and actual
contour must be stored in the GEOPAK working memory before the comparison
itself is realized. Moreover, the contours must be available in the same projection.
As a rule, the nominal contour is provided by a CAD system.
15.38.1.1 Tolerance Comparison Contours
Clicking on the symbol in the icon bar, you come to the "Tolerance
Comparison Contours" dialogue window.
Ö In the text boxes, "Nominal" and "Actual", select from the lists
your contours which are, in fact, already available. The nominal
contour can already be a measured contour (for details cf. Load
Contour ). Or load your contour from an external CAD system (for
further details regarding this topic cf. "Load Contour from CAD
System").
Ö Enter into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a "1", if not
already proposed.
15.38.1.2 Tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs

If you want to execute tolerance comparisons with multiple contour pairs, enter
into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a number bigger than "1".
If you want to compare, for example, three nominal contours with three actual
contours, then enter into the input field "Number of nom/act pairs" a "3".
Similar to the loop mode, the memory numbers are counted upwards and the
memory number of the selected contours is used as the start number
According to the input example, the following pairs are created.
Pair 1: (4)act1 / (1)nom1
In order that the tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs

can be executed, all contours must be existing with the relevant
memory numbers. Furthermore, all used contours must be
positioned in the same projection plane.
Your further action is divided into the following sections

Pitch
Best Fit
07.04.07 v3.0 251

Tolerance Width
topic).
15.38.2 Pitch
By making inputs in "Pitch"...
you first of all define the points from where measurement must take
place;
in the next step, by Vector Direction, enter the direction along
which the distance from the opposite contour is measured.
The pitch specifies the distance where the individual comparisons are carried out.
The points at which the nominal and actual comparison is carried out are, in most
cases, not identical with the contour points of the actual respectively the nominal
contour points. This is why they are interpolated (cubic curve). This means that
even the areas between the points are calculated. According to your task, you will
opt for one out of six "pitches".
Constant pitch: Uniform distance on the nominal contour.
Comparison only at nominal points: A comparison is realized at each

point of the nominal contour.
Comparison only at actual points: A comparison is carried out at each

point of the actual contour.
Hint
This form is not recommended, as it takes a great deal of time. It is
because of the vector direction that the program has to calculate the point
through which the perpendicular goes to the actual point (see picture
below).
1 = Actual contour
2 = Nominal contour
Constant angular pitch: The comparison takes place in a constant angular

pitch relative to the co-ordinate system origin.
Constant pitch (1st co-ordinate): Here, use a uniform distance on the

nominal contour, to be more exact, in the 1st co-ordinate
Example
In the ZX projection, you obtain a uniform distance in the Z-component
with this setting.
252 v3.0 07.04.07

Constant pitch (2nd co-ordinate): Here, use a uniform distance on the

nominal contour, to be more exact, in the 2nd co-ordinate
Example
In the ZX projection, you obtain a uniform in the X component with this
setting.
Except for nominal and actual points, enter a constant value in the
respective text box below the symbols.
15.38.3 Comparison (Vector Direction)

Between nominal and actual distance is calculated. Four possibilities are
available (see below). The most frequent application is the "Comparison
Perpendicular to Nominal Contour". This is the comparison that Mitutoyo offers in
the default.
Comparison perpendicular to nominal contour: A perpendicular on the

contour is formed using the comparison point.
Comparison through origin: A line through the origin of the co-ordinate

system is using the comparison point.
Comparison along first axis: This comparison makes available the

following possibilities:
• YZ-Contour parallel to Y-axis
• ZX-Contour parallel to Z-axis
• XY-Contour parallel to X-axis
• RZ-Contour parallel to R-axis (radial plane of section)
• Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Phi-axis (completed representation)
• YZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis
• ZX-Contour parallel to X-axis
• XY-Contour parallel to Y-axis
• RZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis
• Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Z-axis
Circles between nominal and actual contour: A perpendicular to the
nominal contour is created through the reference point. Then, the biggest
possible circle is created with its centre located on the perpendicular. The circle
diameter is then limited by two contour points.
Hint
In certain cases, the circle centre may leave the perpendicular in order to
allow the creation of a bigger circle. In this case, three contour points limit
the expansion of the circle (see ill. below).
07.04.07 v3.0 253

15.38.4 Bestfit Contour

Definition and Criteria
The best fit function rotates and shifts a set of co-ordinate values (points of the
actual contour) in such a way that it fits "best" into another group of given co-
ordinates (points of the nominal contour).
The best fit follows the Gaussian criterion requiring that the sum of
the distance squares is minimal.
This means that the distances of the actual points are calculated
from their respective nominal values, and then are squared and
summed. The "best" location is reached when this sum is as small
as possible.
The best fit is based on the nominal-actual comparison. Should the latter
not be possible, the best fit is possible neither.
For further information, refer to the topics
Degrees of Freedom Bestfit ,
Bestfit within Tolerance Limits and
Use Bestfit Values .
15.38.5 Degrees of Freedom for Bestfit

Generally, the actual values can be rotated and shifted as you want. Thus, you
can achieve the best result. For this, operate the functions
"Horizontal",
"Vertical",
"Rotate".
Click either on one of the three symbols, or on two or even all three symbols. The
best fit will be automatically made. The result can be seen from the graphical
representation.
If only one rotation is allowed, said rotation is carried out around the origin of the
actual co-ordinate system.
254 v3.0 07.04.07

The results are graphically and numerically shown in the "Tolerance Comparison
Contours" window. Here, you see the abbreviations where UD is Upper
Difference; LD = Lower Difference; MD = Mean Difference). In addition to the
above, via various symbols in this window, you have following possibility
In particular via the information symbol, you have the possibility to set
information flags.
Ö Click on the symbol
The mouse changes to a reticle.
Ö Click on the position in the graphics where you want to set the
information or flag.
Ö With a further click on the flag (keep the mouse button pressed) you
can drag the flag to a different position.
Ö Clicking with the right mouse button on the flag, you can, among
other things, delete the flag.
Using the "Learnable Graphic Commands" symbol, you can preset that the
windows are printed out or applied in the repeat mode. You must activate this
function already in the single mode, since, being in the repeat mode, you will
have no more influence.
Also see the topic:
15.38.6 Bestfit within Tolerance Limits

15.38.6.1 Introduction
In addition to the degrees of freedom at bestfit (dialogue

"Tolerance comparison contours"), Mitutoyo provides an additional function for
optimising the bestfit.
This is the option "Bestfit within tolerance limits". To get to the dialogue, go
to the menu bar / Tolerance / Tolerance comparison elements / Contour.
The actual contour shall be completely within the tolerance range after the bestfit.
In case that this is not possible, the deviations outside the tolerance range should
be as small as possible. As opposed to the standard, the Gauss criterion is not
applied. The tolerance range can be defined in the dialogue for the tolerance
comparison as well as in the Tolerance Range Editor.
Tolerance comparison without bestfit (l) and bestfit on nominal contour
07.04.07 v3.0 255

15.38.6.2 Alignment in Two Steps:

1st step
First, the actual contour is fitted in the middle of the tolerance range under
consideration of the set degrees of freedom.
Bestfit in the middle of the tolerance range.

2nd step
Now, the actual contour is gradually moved until it is completely positioned within
the tolerance range. If the ideal position cannot be achieved, the bestfit is
terminated when overstepping is at a minimum.
Bestfit within tolerance limits

See also the topics:
Bestfit: Graphic Display
Bestfit: Degrees of Freedom
15.38.7 Bestfit within Tolerance Limits: Graphic Display

See the following graphic display windows for how the function "Bestfit within
Tolerance Limits" optimises the results:
256 v3.0 07.04.07

Symmetric tolerance limits: Bestfit on nominal contour (l) and bestfit within
tolerance limits
07.04.07 v3.0 257

Asymmetric tolerance limits: Bestfit on nominal contour (l) and bestfit within
tolerance limits
Hints
To activate the function, at least one of the options for the degrees of freedom
must have been clicked.
The system supports all GEOPAK modes.
The function has no influence on part programs already existing.
There are no changes regarding the output of results.
See also the topics:
Bestfit: Degrees of Freedom
15.38.8 Bestfit Values

15.38.8.1 Use for Tolerance Comparisons of Contours
The optional "Bestfit" changes the position of the actual contour. The bestfit
values contain the shift and turn value for the new position of the actual contour
and are recorded in the result line and in the graphics. For processing these
values, the result file “MCOSMOS\TEMP\ CtCmpRes.res” must be loaded. Then,
the variables CntrBFShift1, CntrBFShift2 and CntrBFTurn are defined.
15.38.8.2 Different Applications

Another actual contour shall be shifted to the position of the "Actual
contour with bestfit".
• Shift of the contour by the BF shift values
• Turn of the contour by the BF rotation value
258 v3.0 07.04.07

• This action can be performed in a function call-up of "Shift/turn

contour".
The "Actual contour with bestfit" shall be shifted back into its initial
position.
• Turn of the contour by the negative rotation value of the bestfit.
• Turn of the contour by the negative turn values of the bestfit
• This action must be performed in two separate function call-ups
of "Shift/turn contour".
A contour to be measured shall automatically be positioned in the
position of the bestfit.
• The measurement co-ordinate system is shifted to the position
of the actual contour of the bestfit.
• Shift of the co-ordinate system by the negative movement
values of the bestfit.
• Turn of the co-ordinate system by the negative turn value of the
bestfit.
• This action can be performed in a function call-up of "Shift/turn
co-ordinate system".
A contour that is available as a GWS-file shall be in the BF position
after loading.
• The measurement co-ordinate system is temporarily shifted to
the position of the actual contour of the bestfit.
• Shift of the co-ordinate system by the shift values of the bestfit.
• Turn of the co-ordinate system by the turn value of the bestfit.
• Loading the GWS-file(s).
• Turn of the co-ordinate system by the negative turn value of the
bestfit.
• Shift of the co-ordinate system by the negative shift values of
the bestfit.
The following graphic shows the influence the sequence of the individual actions
(shift, turn) has on the final result. The end positions of the arrow (3.) are
different. Shifts are performed with a positive x-value and turns by 90 degrees.
15.38.9 Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor)

15.38.9.1 Definition
An enlarged scale is used to visualize the deviations of the actual contour from
the nominal one. Consequently, the deviations are displayed in a scale larger
than the scale used for watching the nominal contour.
07.04.07 v3.0 259

• The upper, the lower tolerance and the tolerance width

determine the scale.
• The difference from upper and lower tolerance is related to the
length of the nominal contour.
15.38.9.2 Three examples

Example 1: The nominal contour is 1000mm and the difference from upper and
lower tolerance is 0.1 mm. If, in this case, you take a tolerance width of 5 %, this
will yield a scale factor of 500.
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would be equal to about 10 mm.
lower tolerance is 0.1 mm. If you take in this case a tolerance width of 5 %, this
will yield a scale factor of 2,5.
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would also be equal to about 10 mm.
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would be equal to about 4mm.
With regard to tolerances the lower tolerance is, as a rule, in the material,
the upper tolerance is outside.
Define tolerance band with nominal contour
If you want to use the tolerance band of the loaded nominal contour, activate
this button. You have already created the nominal contour with the tolerance
band using the functions "Tolerance band editor" or "Tolerance band contour".
The input fields "Upper tol." and "Lower tol." are shown inactive and an input of
the tolerance limits is not possible.
15.38.9.3 Offset
An overmeasure contour around the nominal contour is created with the offset.
Then, the calculated deviations no longer refer to the nominal contour but to the
overmeasure contour. The reference direction is not influenced by the offset.
Example:
A slot is limited by inside and outside contour. The distance between the contours
(i.e. the slot width) is 52 mm. The tolerance comparison shall be used to examine
the deviation of the slot width from the nominal measurement 52 mm +-0.025
mm.
The inside contour serves as the nominal contour, the outside contour as the
actual contour.
260 v3.0 07.04.07

When carrying out the comparison with an offset (overmeasure) e.g. of 52 mm

and a tolerance of +-0.025 mm, a significant deviation is visible.
Compared with that, no deviation is visible in the graphic when applying the
onesided tolerance of 51.998 mm and 52.032 mm.
The result of the numerical evaluation shows no difference between the two
processes.
15.38.10 Form Tolerance Contour

The form tolerance of a measured contour to a reference contour is determined
according to DIN 7184 in connection with DIN ISO 1101 as follows:
First, the maximum deviation between both contours is determined
(see in the illustration below the radius of the red circle as a dotted
line).
This radius amount is doubled (diameter of circle).
The value of the diameter includes all deviations when the centre of
the circle is moved on the reference contour.
• Reference contour (black)

• Nominal contour (green)
• Ideal circle (blue; part of the constructional drawing)
• Circle with biggest deviation (red)
Use the function "Line form tolerance" to calculate this value.
Determine line form tolerance
A prerequisite for this function is that you are already using contours
in your part program.
Ö Load a measured contour (nominal contour).
07.04.07 v3.0 261

Ö Load an ideal contour (reference contour).
Use the symbol "Loop counter" to control the functionality "Loops" (for
detailed information, refer to this topic).
The symbol "Further tolerance options" offers further possibilities, for

example, how to perform transfers to STATPAK or how to abort a part program
when the measurement results are outside the tolerance limits, etc. (for more
details, also refer to the topic Further Tolerance Options).
If you activate this symbol you can have a form tolerance chart displayed.
Enter the value of the tolerance limit into the input field "Tolerance width".
Bestfit
The best fit is carried out prior to the evaluation of the line form tolerance. The
best fit position of the contour is calculated only temporarily and is not stored. For
details, refer to the topic Best Fit Contour.
15.38.11 Tolerance Band Editor

The tolerance band editor makes it possible to specify various widths of tolerance
ranges within a nominal contour.
Every contour point can be assigned a lower and upper tolerance limit, which can
be stored in the GWS file. In case a contour nominal-to-actual comparison is
performed, the measured contour can be compared to the nominal contour and
its tolerance limits.
The tolerance band editor can be called only in the learn mode.
Define tolerance range of a nominal contour

Ö Load a nominal contour.
Ö Click in the menu bar on "Tolerance / Tolerance Comparison
Elements / Tolerance Band Editor".
Ö Select a nominal contour.
The Tolerance band dialogue is shown.
Ö Define the contour tolerance range.
For details refer to the topic "Define Tolerance Band of a Contour" and "Edit
Tolerance Band of a Contour".
15.38.12 Define Tolerance Band of a Contour

15.38.12.1 Define uniform tolerance range
Your intention is to define a uniform tolerance range, i.e. all contour points have
the same upper and lower tolerance limit.
Ö Click on the "Constant Distribution" symbol.

Ö Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the area "Start of Tolerance
Range".
Now no entries are possible in the "End of Tolerance Range" area.
262 v3.0 07.04.07

Mark tolerance range

Ö Use the mouse cursor to mark the contour point where the tolerance
range is to start.
A blue cross is shown.
Ö Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the mouse pointer to
the contour point where the tolerance range is to end.
While dragging with the mouse, a second blue cross is shown.
Ö Release the mouse button at the end of the tolerance range to be
defined.
The defined tolerance range is shown marked with a red frame in
the graphics of elements.
15.38.12.2 Define proportional tolerance range

You wish to define a tolerance range having a tolerance range start width and a
tolerance range end width. This means: the tolerance width continues changing
from the tolerance range start to the tolerance range end.
Ö Click on the "Proportional Distribution" symbol.

Now it is possible to make entries in the areas "Start of Tolerance
Range" and "End of Tolerance Range".
Ö Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the areas "Start of Tolerance
Ö Continue as described under "Mark Tolerance Range".
For further information on this topic refer to Tolerance Band Editor and Edit
Tolerance Band of a Contour.
15.38.13 Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour

Relate tolerance range to the whole contour
Click on the selection symbol in order to relate the entries from the areas
"Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of Tolerance Range" to the whole contour.
Delete defined tolerance ranges of the whole contour
Click on the dust bin symbol to delete your tolerance ranges of the whole
contour.
Enter tolerance limits using the mouse
Click on the pipette symbol to take the tolerance ranges by means of the
mouse into the input boxes of the areas "Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of
Tolerance Range".
Ö Click with the mouse cursor on a contour point within a tolerance
range.
Once the "Proportional Distribution" symbol is activated, the

upper and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered into all
input boxes.
07.04.07 v3.0 263

Once the "Constant Distribution" symbol is activated, the upper

and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered only into the
input boxes of the area "Start of Tolerance Range".
Once you have entered the required values, press again the pipette
symbol in order to switch this function off. Should you click, by mistake,
into the graphics of elements, the values entered would be changed.
Show all elements in the graphics of elements
While defining a tolerance band of a contour, only the current contour is

shown enlarged in the graphics of elements. If you wish to watch all elements,
click on the symbol "Show Elements in Background".
For further information on this topic refer to Tolerance Band Editor and Define
15.38.14 Tolerance Band Contours

A variable tolerance band can be defined in learn or repeat mode by a nominal
contour and two limiting contours. These contours can also be generated by a
CAD-system.
Ö When you are in the GEOPAK learn mode, go to the menu bar and
click the function "Tolerances / Tolerance comparison elements /
Tolerance band contour".
Ö In the dialogue window "Tolerance band contour", select a contour
from the list box "Nominal contour".
With this function you have the possibility to define the following types of
tolerance limits (see also ill. below).
Tolerance limits from two different limiting contours (a).
Tolerance limits from a limiting contour which is mirrored (b).
264 v3.0 07.04.07

Tolerance limits from a limiting contour and a constant part as a

tolerance limit (c).
Ö Use these symbols to activate or deactivate the

relevant type of tolerance limits.
Ö Select the required contour to define the tolerance limit.
Ö Confirm your inputs with "OK".
The created tolerance band is stored together with the nominal
contour. The data also remain available when the nominal contour is
stored in a GWS-file.
When loading a nominal contour, the tolerance limits are restored so
that a tolerance comparison of the contour with variable tolerance
limits is immediately possible.
Ö In the dialogue window "Tolerance Comparison Contours"

activate the function "Tolerance band defined by nominal contour" in
the section "Tolerance width.
For more information, also refer to the topics Tolerance Width (Enlargement),
Tolerance Band Editor, Define Tolerance Band of a Contour and Edit Tolerance
Band of a Contour.
15.38.15 Filter Contour / Element

To get to the dialogue "Filter element", go either to the menu "Element" and then
click on the function, or go to the menu "Contour". The elements "line", "circle",
"sphere" and "contour" can be filtered. Depending on which element you select,
the corresponding type of filter is suggested. If you have, for example, measured
the contour as a circle, you can select the Gauss filter (Circle).
07.04.07 v3.0 265

15.38.15.1 Regular Contours

When filtering a contour (menu bar "Contour / Filter Contour") in GEOPAK, a
smoothing effect is realized. We offer you a Gauss low-pass filter where the high
frequency parts will be suppressed. Depending on application, you should
distinguish:
For round contours, you should use the Gauss Filter / Circle, for
oblong contours, the filter via the line.
When using the Gauss-filter, you must in any case enter the
"Run in / run out"-value.
Ö Select the filter via the list in the "Filter Contour" window.
15.38.15.2 Irregular Contours

For contours to which it is almost impossible to assign a Gauss-filter due to their
irregular forms, you will select the "Robust-Spline-Filter".
This option allows you filtering for contours and for

Automatic Circle Measurement and the
Automatic Line Measurement.
When the Robust-Spline-filter is selected, the text field for the "Run in / run out"-
entry is deactivated.
15.38.15.3 Automatic Circle Measurement

For the automatic circle measurement a filter can be selected when the scanning
symbol is active (see ill. below).
The "cut off wave length" is calculated with p, the circle diameter and on the
basis of 50 UPR (undulations per revolution). It must be stated for every filter.
The pre-set UPR-size is 50. The formula used internally by GEOPAK is then:
266 v3.0 07.04.07

Cut off wave length = p * Circle diameter / UPR
15.38.15.4 Automatic line measurement

For the automatic line measurement (ill. below) the "cut off wave length" must be
entered.
Pre-set are the Gauss-filter and a "cut off wave length" of 1.0.
The measurement unit is limited to millimetres.
Further information
For detailed information about what must be observed when filtering
peaks of a measured contour, refer to the documentation "Filtering
of peaks of a measured contour" on your COSMOS-CD /
DOCUMENTATION / SCANPAK.
Under the file name "SI_contour_filtering_g.pdf" (German) or
"SI_contour_filtering_e.pdf" (English) respectively.
15.39 Further Items

15.39.1 Nominal-Actual Comparison, e.g. "Element Circle"
You have measured a circle and want to realize a nominal-actual comparison. To
call this function, you have two possibilities:
Ö Click into the menu bar "Nominal Actual Comparison Elements /
Element and come to the "Nominal Actual Comparison" dialogue
window.
Ö Select via the evaluation tools (toolbar on the lower display margin).
Click into the icon and the "Nominal Actual Comparison"

dialogue window appears.
Ö By clicking on the characteristics (e.g. diameter), you can determine
whether the displayed characteristic has to be tolerated or not. You
notice that inputs are possible in one case, in the other case the
cells are disabled. With one click, e.g. on the co-ordinate X, you
activate or deactivate the cells.
If you want to tolerate the position in another mode of co-ordinate system, click
on one of the symbols on the left (e.g. cylindrical co-ordinate mode ). After
that, the position of the element is directly converted. Normally, the polar
representation is referred to the plane XY; i.e., third axis is the axis Z. If you want
to relate the representation to another plane, click a second or third time on the
corresponding type of co-ordinate system.
07.04.07 v3.0 267

With "circular" elements, you can select whether you want the
diameter or the radius for the comparison of nominal and actual
values. The selection is carried out through two symbols below on
the left side of the chart (for example diameter ).

With tolerances of positions, it is possible that the sign of the
position (e.g. value X) is important. On the other hand, it happens
that the sign is troubling, since by the simply mathematical
comparison an error is located that is twice as large as the value of
the position.
Via the symbol in the heading of the dialogue window, you can
determine whether the sign is enabled or not: If you click on the
symbol, the sign is disabled.
Instead of numerical values, the tolerance limits can also be

determined by table codes (e.g. H7). Activate each time the symbol
before going to the "type" column. The cells of the numerical values
(columns "Upper" and "Lower Tolerance Limit ") are deactivated.
Input the so-called "Identifier" for the tolerance class into the text
field.
Exit the text field either with a "TAB" or with one click into another box.
Then the numerical values from the tolerance chart are entered into the
boxes "Upper" and "Lower Tolerance".
If you want to carry out further actions after the nominal actual comparison,
confirm via the symbol. A dialogue window appears "Further Options of Nominal
Actual Comparison".
Here, the following options are at your disposal:
abort the part program if one value is excessive and/or too small;
transfer the suitable feature to STATPAK or CAT1000S (for
CAT1000S, only position tolerances are possible)
define the feature as reference for a
assign to the feature a position number for the continuous
numbering and a sequence in the first sample test
assign to the feature a further identifier (e.g. drawing grid square) for
easier finding.
Additionally, you can also determine whether values of positions (positions) have
to be tolerated in the current or in the origin co-ordinate system.
15.39.2 Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison

If you want further actions after the comparison of nominal and actual values,
click e.g. in the "Comparison of Nominal and Actual Values: "Element Circle"
dialogue window on the symbol. Below the headline "Further Options in the
Nominal Actual Comparison" you can then...
.. abort the part program if the upper tolerance limit is exceeded; or
...
268 v3.0 07.04.07

... abort the part program if the lower tolerance limit remained under.
This is only valid for bilateral tolerance, not for form and
position tolerances.
... transfer the feature to STATPAK. For this, first of all a name
must be assigned to the feature. As soon as at least one character
is input for a name, the symbol "Report to Statistic Program" is
activated. In addition, the feature name can be only input for the
protocol.
You may also transmit position tolerances to CAT1000S. The values are
recorded there and can be consulted for calculations (e.g. Best Fit)
Additional Information:
• the position number; you can use it if you, e.g. execute the
measurement for an initial sample. In the program of initial
sample report of Mitutoyo, the features are classified according
to this number, before printing. This allows you to carry out the
measurement in another order than the features are required in
the report
• a further designation; this can be, e.g. the grid square of a
larger drawing, so that the feature can be easily found.
• a reference identification; this is used if the MMC may be
applied. Here, it is sometimes specified in the drawing that the
MMC can also be applied for a reference element (e.g. ' A ').
Where it is possible, in GEOPAK, to use the MMC you also can
input this reference identification. During the input, you get a list
of the references already defined.
15.39.3 Origin of Co-ordinate System

Normally, GEOPAK always converts the positions and directions into the current
co-ordinate system. With the development of a new function, we want to keep at
your disposal, at the end of a long part program, the possibility to tolerate the
positions in the original co-ordinate system.
The Situation
You have a long part program and change the co-ordinate system
several times.
You want to execute all nominal-actual comparisons only at the end.
You want to tolerate the positions in your original co-ordinate
system that actually is no longer at your disposal.
Hint
In the "Further Options for Nominal Actual Comparison"

dialogue window, click on the symbol on the right and activate for
tolerance of the positions the "Origin of Co-ordinate System". The symbol
on the left side always signifies the actual (last) co-ordinate system.
This is only valid for positions. Diameter or radius are independent from
the co-ordinate system.
07.04.07 v3.0 269

Print and File Output
16 Print and File Output

about this subject.
Output
File Format Specification
Standard or Special File Format
Change File Output Format
File Format End
Print Format Specification
Change Print Format
Finish Printer Output
Form Feed
Printing according to Layout Head Start
Protocol Designer
Protocol Archive
External Printing
External Print Format Change
External Print Format End
Output Text
Export Elements
Layout for Surface
Store Contour in ASCII-File
Open Protocol
Change Protocol
Close Protocol
Protocol Output
Print Preview (Page View)
Flexible Graphic Protocols
Flexible Graphical Protocols and Graphics
Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor
Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol
Templates of Graphic Windows
Types of Output
Dialogue for Protocol Output
Export Contour
Compare Points
Scale and Print Graphics
16.2 Output
For the "Output" of measured data, GEOPAK always proposes two ways. You
can output the data on a printer, and/or store the measurement results in a file. In
GEOPAK, these functions are accessible with the menu bar and the "Output"
menu.
If you need a printed report, you are going to opt for the printer as
output media e.g. if you need documents for the archives. GEOPAK
uses the printer having been determined as default printer in your
Windows system (see details under "Printer Settings").
• If you want to use a different printer, you first must select this
printer as default in Windows.
270 v3.0 07.04.07

• Printing is done page by page.

• The format of the data can either be the one predefined by
GEOPAK or your own format. For further details, refer to Print
Layout".
The output of data in a file (storing) is always in ASCII. You will
prefer this solution if you need the data for further processing, e.g. in
some other programs. To do so, use the "File Format Specification"
function. However, you can change the output format via the
"Change File Output Format" function.
It is also possible to print the ASCII-file; however, there is no
formatting information.
You can use both ways, printer output and storage as ASCII file, independently
during the learn mode of the part program. These parallel functions will meet all
your requirements.
Please consider in advance which data you need to be printed or stored

before starting the learn mode.
The data are recorded from the moment you switch the corresponding
format on (e.g. "Print Format Start").
16.3 File Format Specification

In this dialogue (menu bar "Output / File Format Specification") you determine,
e.g. the name of the output file, where to store it and which information it must
include (head data, formula calculation, etc.).
Output File
In the "Output File" text field, you can enter a complete file name
including drive and path (according to Windows conventions a max.
of 255 signs).
• If possible, select "signifying" file names. It will be easier to find
them again. If you enter only one file name, this file will be
automatically stored. You will find the file in the MCOSMOS/exe
directory having been created at the installation of MCOSMOS.
• If you enter one fixed file name, the output file will be
overwritten each time you execute the part program.
• If you want to store all files, you must change the file name
each time you execute the program.
For further information concerning this subject, please refer to
your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents", folder
"GENERAL", file "UM_string_code_g(e).pdf.
If you have already created one or more output files, you can use a
list of suggestions; this list appears when you click the arrow
symbol. From this list, you can choose a file by clicking with the
mouse.
07.04.07 v3.0 271

If you click on the icon, you get a dialogue window (Windows

conventions) so that you can easily find files in the different
directories.
Append
Also click on the "Append" check box. In this case, the new data are
always appended to the existing file. Otherwise, the file is simply
overwritten.
Output
You can click as many boxes as you want, with the corresponding options. Thus,
you meet all requirements for your output file.
For information on whether and how to choose "Standard" or any special formats
refer to the topic Standard or Special File Format.
16.4 Standard or Special File Format

File format
Beginning from Version 2.2, the "Start of File Format" dialogue includes as an
extension the section "File Format". Here you can make your choice using one of
the radio buttons for "Standard" or any other formats. This enables you to create
ASCII files in several formats for a variety of part programs without having to
change the default setting.
272 v3.0 07.04.07

Standard
Clicking "Standard" causes the default setting made in the "Settings GEOPAK"
dialogue of the PartManager to remain unchanged. To get to this dialogue, use
the "Menu bar / Settings / Default Settings Programs / CMM / GEOPAK". The
format file name's length is limited to 40 characters.
Special format
In order to get a special format, click the second button. Use the arrow key to
select your format from the list.
This is what you should know:
• The list is derived from already existing format files.
• The last preceding input is suggested.
• After reinstallation the GEOPAK-3 format is suggested.
• The "Mitutoyo GEOPAK-3" and "Mitutoyo GEOPAK" formats
are always shown. They refer to the file GEOASCII.INI and the
sections [GEOPAK-3] and [Geopak-Win] respectively.
The other optional formats are derived from files with the extension GAF =
GEOPAK-ASCII format. The file name without this extension is in each case the
name that is shown in the list. The format has to be described in this file. In order
for this to be implemented, we recommend that you contact the Mitutoyo Service.
The GAF file has to be stored in the MCOSMOS-INI directory.
07.04.07 v3.0 273

16.5 Change File Output Format

Before starting the output, you must have specified under " File Format
Specification" what you want to output in the file.
During the execution of the part program, you can change the items that must be
in the file by the "Change Output Format" function. Thus, you can add other items
to your file or delete.
Activate the "Change Output Format" function via the menu bar and the "Output"
pull-down menu.
16.6 File Format End

Via this function (menu bar "Output"), you finish the data output to file. Now, you
can either use this file for other purposes, or even start a new file (cf. under File
Format Specification). Thus, it will be possible to place in order the data – sorted
according to "Geometrical Elements", "Tolerances", etc. – in different files and to
store it.
You do not have to finish the output explicitly; when you leave the program, the
output file will be automatically closed. The data are stored.
16.7 Print Format Specification

Activate these functions in GEOPAK via the menu bar and the "Output" menu.
Select the "Print Format Specification" function.
When using this function and the following dialogue window, you define which
items (measured results) will be printed.
In the description fields, you can define the text for the headlines
and footers. The printed protocol has a headline and a footer printed
on every page. Font and size of type is defined for the whole
protocol.
Notice that GEOPAK writes, in any case, the version number and
the part program term into the headline. The footer includes the
current page number.
Texts that have once been input are automatically stored. Via the
arrow key, you can activate and use later again the texts that have
once been input. In the protocol, the texts are right justified. To
realize your protocols, cf. under Print Layout.
In the logo file description field, input the path and file name of the
bitmap of your logo.
Instead of typing the file name, you can also click the icon. If
you click on the icon, you get a dialogue window (Windows
conventions) so that you can easily find and activate your file in the
different directories. It is supposed that you have stored your logo
as a bitmap (*.BMP) file in a directory.
If you choose a logo, it automatically appears in the dialogue. In the
protocol, you can see how your logo appears above the protocol
head. The file can be in JPG or BMP format.
By clicking in the "Head Data" check box, you can have the head
data of the part printed on the first page of the protocol. You can
define the head data in the PartManager via the menu bar "Settings
/ Head data". These data may be the drawing number, the part
name, the customer information, and others.
274 v3.0 07.04.07

Ö When using the other check boxes, you can select which
information will be printed on your protocol.
You will always get the
• name of the operator and the
• date and time of start printing.
You must know
Recording starts as soon as you confirm the input of the "Print
Format Specification" by "Ok".
The selected data are recorded until you finish the part program or
stop the output with the "Print Format End" function via the menu
bar "Output".
A page is printed as soon as it will be full.
If a page is full, it will be automatically printed. You can watch the
percentage in the status bar besides the user name (at the bottom
of the page).
Via the "Form Feed" function (menu bar "Output") you can get the
printout even if the page is not yet full.
Via the "Change Print Output Format" function, you can change print
options without stipulating a new printout format.
You can only use one printout format until activating the "Print
Format End" function.
16.8 Change Print Format

This function is same as "Change File Output Format".
16.9 Print Format End

Via this function (menu bar "Output"), you finish the data output to file. Now, you
can either use this file for other purposes, or even start a new file (cf. under File
Format Specification). Thus, it will be possible to create different protocols –
sorted e.g. according to "Geometrical Elements", "Tolerances", etc. –.
You do not have to finish the output explicitly; when you leave the program, the
protocol output will be finished and the current page printed (even if the page is
not complete).
16.10 Form Feed

Via the "Form Feed" function (menu bar "Output") you can get the printout even if
the page is not yet full.
16.11 Printing according to Layout Head Start

MCOSMOS proposes a default layout for your print report. If this format is not
satisfactory, you can create your own report. The layout is realized in another
program (see details under the topic ProtocolManager The structure of the log
heading is stipulated in the layout file and cannot be changed on your own. If you
want, you can have an adjusted layout from the Mitutoyo service.
07.04.07 v3.0 275

If you want to use the layout file, you must tell it GEOPAK, this means via the
"Print Layout" (menu bar "Output") function. This function also allows printing out
several reports in only one operation.
Hint
The "Print Layout" function is utilised appropriately at the end of the part program
because all nominal-to-actual comparisons will be listed in the report.
As a standard, Mitutoyo delivers several possibilities for the layout, e.g. the initial
sample report according to VDA guidelines.
Proceed as follows
Ö If you have, for example created several layout files and activated
them already once, you will find these in a list. To do so, click on the
arrow key on the right of the text field.
Ö If you want to make the selection that MCOSMOS offers,

click on the symbol in the following "Open" dialogue window, first
search - according to Windows conventions - the directory in which
MCOSMOS is installed on your computer.
Under "*/MCOSMOS/Layout" you will find the files proposed from
Mitutoyo and those you have created.
Hint
For further information about the layout, please refer to your MCOSMOS-
CD-ROM under "Documents", folder "GEOPAK", files "dia_lay_g(e).pdf"
and "UM_user_def_g(e).pdf" and folder "GENERAL", file
"print_lay_2_0_g(e).pdf".
16.12 ProtocolDesigner
By means of this ProtocolDesigner it is possible to create user-defined protocol
models. Then, you can use them in GEOPAK and CAT1000S for printout. To
create this model, you will not have to start at first GEOPAK or CAT1000S.
Click either
in the menu bar of the PartManager on "Tools" and then on the
function or
in the menu bar of GEOPAK on "Output" and after that on the
function.
The same is valid for CAT1000S.
So, the ProtocolDesigner is a tool to create protocol models or to change them. If
you select the ProtocolDesigner menu entry, first the "Open Protocol Models"
dialogue is opened. In this dialogue, you may - in order to create a model,
Ö either select an existing model or
Ö enter a new name in the "File Name" text field.
The models must be located in the LAYOUT sub-directory of MCOSMOS.
276 v3.0 07.04.07

If you load a model from CAT1000S in the ProtocolDesigner of GEOPAK

- or vice versa -, you will get an error message "Expression Error" in the
subsequent window. GEOPAK doesn’t support the data that are used in
CAT1000S. This is the same when you proceed this way in the
PartManager.
Hint
Consider that you have to use at least 7 head data fields in order to use
our example models.
For further information how to work with the "ProtocolDesigner" in GEOPAK and
CAT1000S, please refer to your MCOSMOS CD-ROM under "Documents", folder
"GENERAL", file "UM_flexprot_e(g,f).pdf".
You will also find a complete user’s manual of the "ProtocolDesigner" program
under "protocoldesigner_e(g).pdf" on your MCOSMOS CD-ROM. Click on
"Documents / GENERAL".
The complete online help of the ProtocolDesigner is installed on your computer
depending on the operation system e.g. under "WINNT / system32", this means
under "CMBTL800.HLP" in German and under "CMBTL801.HLP" in English.
16.13 Protocol Archive

In this window (menu bar "Output / Protocol Archive"), you enter the folder in
which MCOSMOS stores all the files relevant for a subsequent protocol. The data
can be administrated or printed via the Protocol-Manager. See details under the
topic ProtocolManager.
16.14 External Printing

If you activate this function, proceed in the following dialogue the same way as
explained under "Print Format Specification".
16.15 External Print Format Change

explained under "Change Print Format".
16.16 External Print Format End

explained under "Print Format End".
16.17 Output Text
Activate the "Text Output" function via the symbol or via the menu bar and
the "Output" menu.
If you want to output additional information in your protocol (see icon on

the left), click on the printer symbol.
This is also valid for the ASCII file.
07.04.07 v3.0 277

You may enter

a defined text, which, each time, is the same when you print it or
another text at each part program execution. Then, GEOPAK

will stop at each execution and asks you to enter your text.
You can enter a variable in the text (date etc.). For further information concerning
this subject, please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents",
folder "GEOPAK", file UM_string_code_g(e).pdf.
The input text will be analysed and prepared. In the line under the description
field is shown, which text will be written into the protocol respectively into the file
after the "Preparation of Data".
Assign position number to a text
You can assign a number to entered texts (attributive features) using the input
field "Position number".
In output protocols (e.g. initial sample report), you can use position numbers to
define the sequence of the output data. This is how you can directly position input
text in the protocol.
In the case of identical position numbers, first the input text and then the
relevant tolerance comparison are output.
16.18 Export Elements

This function has been designed to enable you to export elements into different
CAD formats (DXF and IGES) or into the DMIS-format respectively.
You get to this dialogue via the menu bar / Output and then by clicking the
function.
In the upper part of the text box you can enter the "Output file" or search
for Windows conventions using this symbol. In the latter case, the subsequent
dialogue offers all three options (see ill. below) in the list "File type".
Hints
After the conversion to DMIS, IGES or DXF, all elements are stored in the
cartesian co-ordinate system.
278 v3.0 07.04.07

If the part program has been generated with the program "Pure DMISPAK", the
function "Export elements" provides no correct DMIS format.
16.19 Layout for Surface

The "Layout for Surface" window (menu bar "Output" and then the function) has
to do with the dialogue you originally know from CAT1000S. In CAT1000S, the
different views of the parts or the models will be provided with a name in the
"Labelling" line. In GEOPAK, you can’t edit in this line, although it is the same
dialogue. You only can call the layout commands having been generated in
CAT1000S and change with some options.
If you have opened the dialogue, you will see in the "Labelling" line the names of
the views, which you have already allocated in CAT1000S.
You can ask for a list of the different views of the part, you actually work with
in GEOPAK, via the arrow symbol (see picture below).
Ö Click on the view you want (in our example "top view").
Ö You can rotate the part and
Ö print out the view.
With the different options, you can

Ö print the graphics,
Ö print the list of the measured points,
Ö Stop CAT1000S after having printed and,
Ö if you have opened the info. windows in the selected view, you may
automatically "Re-sort" these.
In the following description fields
drawing no. and
the two comment lines
you can display the default of CAT1000S via the arrow symbol. It is possible
to edit in these lines in contrast to the "Labelling" (see above).
16.20 Save Contour in ASCII File

With the "Contour Save" function, you can store contours as ASCII file that
means as a text. Activate this function via the menu bar and the "Output" pull-
down menu.
07.04.07 v3.0 279

In the "Contour Save" dialogue window in the list field under "Select Element",
you will find the contours you have measured so far. It is a part of the List of
Elements . Here, the number of contours is not limited.
Ö Click the contour you want to store. If you do not see it in the
displayed zone, you can use the scroll bar to view the whole list.
Ö Now enter the name of the file in the "Contour File" field together
with the path where you want to store the contour.
Ö You can also click on the icon and store the file in the
following dialogue window (Windows conventions).
The file names must get the extension <.gws>. Otherwise, the program does not
recognise the special information contained in the file. The three letters g, w and
s come from "GEOPAK-Win Scanning".
Once you have stored the contour in such a file, you can use e.g. Word- or
Notepad to read, print, or modify the data. It is also possible to edit in these text
files (according to Windows conventions).
16.21 Open Protocol

To access this function and the corresponding dialogue, go to the menu bar and
the "Output" menu.
This function and the subsequent options "Change Protocol Format" and "Close
Protocol" enable you to control the output of tolerance comparisons and
elements. For initial detailed information refer to "Protocol Output" .
Hint
Remember right from the beginning that for the control of the print output you
have always to follow this order:
• Close protocol
• Change protocol format
• Close protocol
Printing, however, is also performed automatically at the end of the part program.
The "Open Protocol" dialogue offers you four options under the heading "Output
Options".
It is your decision as a user what print-out option you take:
all tolerance comparisons,
the tolerance comparisons outside the control limits,
tolerance comparisons outside the tolerance limits, or
all elements.
Using this dialogue you also make your decision for one of the "Output Types".
In contrast to the function File Format Spezifikationthe option "head

data" does not stand to the decree in this dialogue. So that you can input
the head data, you must use the option Inout Head Dataor Set Head
Data Field.
280 v3.0 07.04.07

16.22 Change Protocol

This dialogue (Menu bar / Output / Change Protocol Format) allows you to make
changes to the output format previously selected in the dialogue "Open Protocol".
You have four options. It is your decision as a user
what print-out option you take:
all tolerance comparisons,
the tolerance comparisons outside the control limits,
tolerance comparisons outside the tolerance limits, or
all elements.
16.23 Close Protocol

Using this function (Menu bar / Output) you finish the current print output.
After finishing you can, of course, open a new protocol (for details refer to "Open
Protocol"). Thus it is possible to generate various protocols - designated e.g., by
"Geometric Elements", "Tolerances", etc.
When you leave the program, the protocol output is closed and the protocol
printed out.
16.24 Protocol Output

To get to the dialogue "Protocol output" in GEOPAK (learn mode, repeat mode or
edit mode), use the menu bar / Output / Protocol output.
By means of the "Protocol Output", you can create protocols. You can select a
template and the type of output.
Hint
The template is either a layout or a print template for your protocol.
Path
Enter the path to the template folder into the list box.
Select an available template folder using the button "File

name" or use the input field to enter the path.
You can create a new template file by saving, for example, own
templates. For this, also use the button "File name".
When creating a new template folder, this folder must be listed in the
directory "Layout". Otherwise you get an error message.
Template
In the list box "Template", all templates of the selected directory are
listed.
After the installation of MCOSMOS is completed, the folders
GEOPAK\Mitutoyo and CAT1000S\Mitutoyo contain some examples
of templates you can use.
If you select a template, a preview of the template will be displayed.
07.04.07 v3.0 281

Number of Copies
In the "Number of Copies" list box, you define how many copies you
want to output.
In the list box, you see how many protocols have been
requested at last.
In which form the protocols are printed or stored is explained in the "Types of
Output".
Sort order
After you have assigned the position numbers, you can use the list box "Sort
order" to define if and how the tolerance comparisons shall be sorted.
16.25 Types of Output

By means of the radio buttons, which are listed under "Output" on the right side of
the dialogue window, you determine the output format. The following radio
buttons are available:
Printer
If not set before, output is done on the current printer. If, in the
ProtocolDesigner, you have selected another printer for a layout,
this will be used to print the protocol.
For this topic, see details under "ProtocolDesigner". On your
MCOSMOS-CD-ROM you will find also a complete user’s manual
under "protocolldesigner_g(e).pdf". Click on "Documents" and
"GENERAL".
Print to File
If you select this option, a PRN file (preprint process) will be
created. The condition for this is a postscript printer driver able to
create graphics for a device-independent printing.
Rich Text Format
If you make this option, a file will be created in RTF format. Then,
you can open this file in a text-processing program and if necessary
adapt it.
Hint
The RTF documents will be created according to the Microsoft specification
"Version 1.5". Not all software makers comply with this specification. So it may
happen that the created RTF documents will be badly displayed by the text-
processing programs.
But, out of the ..\MCOSMOS\Layout directory, you can select layouts that have
been optimised for Word.
HTML Format
If you output a protocol in HTML format (without Muli-Mime), several
files will be created by default. For example, the pictures are stored
in a separate file. If you want to send your measurement protocols
(e.g. as email or on CD rom), you should use the Multi-Mime-HTML
format.
Adobe PDF-Format
A PDF document will be created that you can read, print and edit
(but editing is limited) with the free of charge "Acrobat Reader" of
Adobe.
282 v3.0 07.04.07

Multi-Mime-HTML-Format
This format is qualified for sending measurement protocols. With
Multi-Mime-HTML format in contrast to simple HTML, only one file
will be created.
XML-Format
This format is partially still in the making. XML is meant to offer you
multitudinous possibilities for processing your measurement data.
Output in Formats of Graphic Data File
• Bitmap
If you make this option, you get one or several bitmap files,
independently to the size of your protocol.
• JPEG graphics
If you make this option, you get one or several JPEG files,
independently to the size of your protocol.
• Metafile (EMF)
If the output must be in the Metafile format, you get one or
several Metafile files, independently to the size of your protocol.
Hint
These graphic data files are suitable for a problem-free integration of your
measurement data in presentations.
List Box for File Names
In the list box bottom right, you enter the file name of the protocol.
16.26 Print Preview (Page View)

This preview option is a "Real Data Print Preview". This means that there are no
global values displayed such as those shown, e.g., in the ProtocolDesigner. What
is displayed are the values obtained from the measurements you have just
performed.
You access the dialogue (picture below) in the GEOPAK learn mode through the
"Menu bar / Output / Protocol Preview".
07.04.07 v3.0 283

So it is possible for you to verify your protocol once more before printing. If your
protocol is alright, you will not have to leave the print preview again. You select
your template from the list and confirm. As a result, you obtain a screen-filling
preview from where you can print directly.
In addition to the above, it is possible to store the print preview or to email

it to your customer. For this purpose, you customer needs only a small program
that he can get from you without paying license fees. You find this "invoice.ll"
program on your MCOSMOS – CD.
All other symbols in this preview window are ballooned, so you can see right on
the spot what function is concerned.
16.27 Flexible Graphic Protocols

To open the dialogue window "Store graphic for template" click on the
symbol (left) of an opened graphic window, e.g. "Graphics of elements".
Alternatively you can use the menu bar "Graphic / Store graphic for template".
With this function you can prepare graphics in the learn mode for the printout in
the flexible protocol.
Background
templates.
284 v3.0 07.04.07

In the input field "Names" of the dialogue "Store graphic for template" you enter a
name of the graphic that is as "telling" as possible. You can also dispose of nine
view numbers. Depending on the template with which you want to print, you have
to select the view number. You know these view numbers (picture on the right)
from the ProtocolDesigner. For detailed information on this program and further
directions for use and Online Help refer to ProtocolDesigner.
The inputs in the input fields "Name" and "Comment" are, subject to a relevant
template, included in the flexible protocol.
Hint
In contrast to the GEOPAK edit mode, you need not select a graphic type,
because in the learn mode, the function "Store graphic for template" is linked to
the graphic.
For more information, refer to " Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK
Editor"" and "Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic".
16.28 Flexible Graphic Protocols and Graphic

16.28.1 Print Graphic
Ö Activate the function "View number".
The function "For table" is deactivated.
Ö Select view number 1, as the protocol output of Mitutoyo templates
is performed via "view number" 1 as a standard.
Ö Activate the function "Print graphic" if you wish to print out the
graphic immediately after having confirmed the dialogue with "OK".
After clicking the option "Print graphic", the dialogue "Protocol
Output" opens.
Ö In this case, you select in the dialogue "Protocol output" the
template you require for your flexible protocol.
To avoid problems with graphics of older measurements, these

view numbers and the connected data are deleted upon each
program start.
Print graphic as a table in the flexible protocol

Ö Activate the function "For table".
The function "View number" is deactivated.
Thus, the graphic is not printed in a single frame but is included in a table in the
flexible protocol. The advantage of printing graphics within a table is that any
number of graphics can be printed, i.e. irrespective of whether you wish to print
out 1 or 100 graphics, you can always use the same template.
Positioning the graphic in the flexible protocol
If you enter a number in the input field "Position number", you can position the
graphic in the flexible protocol. We recommend that you reserve position
numbers for this purpose in your part program in order to avoid a doubling of
position numbers in the flexible protocol.
07.04.07 v3.0 285

Change size of graphic in the flexible protocol

If you activate the function "Define scaling", you can enlarge or reduce the
display size of the graphic in the flexible protocol to scale.
You can use this function to fit the graphic into the frame of the template. In case
that the graphic is bigger than the frame, only that part of the graphic is displayed
that fits into the frame.
Values below zero reduce the graphic size.
Values bigger than zero enlarge the graphic size.
16.28.2 Edit graphic

The function "Store graphic for template" automatically stores all graphics as a
meta file. To edit the graphic with the graphic programs Corel Draw, Micrografx
Designer or AutoCAD, click on the button "Edit graphic".
The button "Edit graphic" is only active when a graphic editor has been set in the
PartManager under "Settings / Defaults for programs / button PartManager /
Editor Tab".
16.28.3 Layout of info windows in the learn mode

You can use the function "Define layout of info windows for print command" to
store the number, position and contents of the info windows in a meta file.
Therefore, the graphic is printed in the repeat mode exactly the same way as it
has been learned in the learn mode. For detailed information, refer to the topic
"Define Layout of Info Windows".
Info windows can only be defined for the element graphics and
the airfoil analysis (MAFIS).
For detailed information refer to "Protocol Output" and "Types or Output".
16.29 Flexible Graphic Protocols in the GEOPAK Editor

In order to print-out graphic windows like, for example, "Graphics of elements” in
the repeat mode, the function "Store Graphic for template” is required.
Background
templates.
To get to the function and the corresponding dialogue use the menu bar and the
menu "Output".
In the part program, this function should always be between the commands
"Open protocol” and "Close protocol”.
In the command "Open protocol”, always ensure that you have selected
the correct template. For detailed information, refer to the topic
Templates of Graphic Windows.
286 v3.0 07.04.07

For further information, also read the topic Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible
Protocol.
16.30 Tolerance Graphics in the Flexible Protocol

Positioning the graphic in the flexible protocol
You can position the graphic in the flexible protocol when you enter a number into
the input field "Position number". We recommend to reserve position numbers for
this purpose to avoid a doubling of position numbers in the flexible protocol.
Change size of graphic in the flexible protocol
If you activate the function "Define scaling", you can enlarge or reduce the
display size of the graphic in the flexible protocol to scale.
Values below zero reduce the graphic,
values bigger than zero enlarge the graphic.
Example: Print-out tolerance graphic "Flatness" in the flexible protocol.
Ö In the dialogue window "Open protocol" you select for example the
template "Flatness".
Ö Select from the list box "Define graphic type" the type "Flatness".
Ö Select from the list box "Reference element" an element that shall
be represented in the tolerance graphic.
Ö Confirm the "Loop counter", when you want an output of

elements with a tolerance graphic within a loop.
Ö In the input fields "Name" and "Comment" you enter the text that
you want to be output in the flexible protocol.
Ö Activate the function "View number".
The function "For table" is deactivated.
Ö Select view number 1, because the Mitutoyo templates regularly
output the protocols via the "View number 1".
Ö Activate the function "Close window" when you want to close the
graphic window in the repeat mode.
Example: Print tolerance graphic "Flatness" as a table in the flexible
protocol
Ö Select in the dialogue window "Open protocol" the template
"Mitutoyo Graphic output in a table.mte".
Ö Follow the steps 2 to 5 of the above example.
Ö Activate the function "For table".
The function "View number" is deactivated.
For details, refer to the topic Templates of Graphic Windows.
16.31 Templates of Graphic Windows

For information about which graphic window requires which template, see the
table below:
07.04.07 v3.0 287

Graphic window Template

Graphics of elements ELEMGRAPHIC
Tolerance graphic
Straightness STRAIGHTNESS
Flatness FLATNESS
Roundness CIRCULARITY
Parallelism PARALLELISM
Circular Runout CIRCULARRUNOUT
Axial Runout AXIALRUNOUT
Compare Points COMPAREPNTS
Tolerance Comparison Contour TOLCOMPCONTOUR
16.32 Dialogue for Protocol Output

With the dialogue for the protocol output, it is possible to enter additional data in
the protocol. These can be e.g.
data concerning the part,
data concerning the user or
data concerning the customer.
Via the "Template" list box, you select the layout you want.
Hint
The template is a layout or a manuscript for your protocol.
The selected ProtocolDesigner template must have been related to a

user-defined input dialogue (edl file). You can relate a user-defined input
dialogue only in the ProtocolManager program. For further information
on this subject refer to the topic ProtocolManager
An example for a layout with a dialogue is the "Initial Sample Report of 1998" that
you can find in the list box.
Hint
For a better orientation, a preliminary drawing of the selected layout is
automatically displayed.
16.33 Transfer Contour into an External System

Whenever you export a contour to an external system, you always load an ASCII-
file. In particular, external systems are, for instance ...
• CAD-Systems,
• Programming places,
• Part programs for machine-tools.
Ö You click on the menu "Output" and the function "Export

Contour" in the menu bar within the GEOPAK main window.
You get to the window "Export Contour".
288 v3.0 07.04.07

Ö Using the arrow in the top list box, you select the contour you
want to export.
Ö You specify, in the format type list box, the format of the ASCII-
file you want to export.
Ö You use the text box "Contour File" to save by ...
• Entering the file name, or ...
• ...you select a folder via the symbol. You can also

overwrite an existing file.
Ö In the bottom section of the window you define whether
• you want to accept the driver defaults, or whether...
• the contour data in the ASCII-file is to be available in millimetres
or inches.
Further functions
In case the external systems differentiates between the two contour forms
2D contour or...
3D contour - this depends on the properties of the driver - an alternative

selection is possible. The question is whether the contour output will be
performed in a projected way.
It is, off course, possible to re-import (read-in) an exported file.
16.34 Compare Points

Task: With the comparison of points, you get an overview of the position
deviation of several elements. The elements can either be points, circles, ellipses
or spheres.
Program run
The elements are designated as actual elements and must be
completely filed in a sequence in the memory.
Ö Input the nominal positions as theoretical nominal elements. These
must also be completely filed in a sequence in the memory. Nominal
elements must always be of the same type as the actual elements.
Ö Click on "Compare Points" in the "Output" pull-down menu.
Ö In the "Compare Points" dialogue window, you define the elements
to be compared and the number of the elements. In this dialogue,
you determine whether the actual points and the tolerance diameter
must be displayed in the graphics. Furthermore, you select here a
• scale factor or the
• auto scale.
Ö The "Compare Points" graphics window appears.
• The graphics shows the largest and smallest distance of the
actual element(s) to the nominal element(s).
• Furthermore, the text that you’ve input before in the dialogue
07.04.07 v3.0 289

Elements of the "Compare Points" Graphics Window

Toolbar
Toolbar in the "Compare Points" Graphics Window
Zoom graphics clip
Reset zoom
Move graphics clip
Rotate the graphic

Display Option
Front view(ZX-plane, line of sight towards the Y-axis)
3D view
• "Close Window".
Hint
16.35 Scale and Print Graphics

The function "Learnable Graphic Commands" enables the settings for the graphic
evaluations of the below items to be stored in the GEOPAK Part Program Editor.
Element Graphics
Tolerance Graphics
• Straightness
• Flatness
• Circularity
Parallelism
Airfoil analysis
Circular Runout
Compare Points
290 v3.0 07.04.07

Tolerance Comparison Contours

You decide whether the print graphics is printed out with an automatic or
adjustable scale factor.
Add learnable graphic command to part program
Ö Click in the menu bar on "Output / Learnable Graphic Commands".
Ö Select a graphic type from the list box "Define graphic type".
Ö In the list box "Reference element", select an element that shall be
displayed and evaluated in the selected graphic.
Hint
When several reference elements are possible, always select the current
or the nominal element as the reference element.
All elements are displayed in the element graphics. Therefore the
Element Selection list box is disabled in case you select the element
graphics.
Activate the "Print Window" option, when the graphics is to be printed in the
repeat mode.
Ö Activate the "Print Window" option, when the graphics is to be
printed in the repeat mode.
Only open graphic windows can be printed. In order for the
element graphics to be printed, it is necessary that in the repeat
mode the function "Window / Element Graphics" in the menu bar is
activated.
To print the rest of the graphic windows it is necessary that the
diagram symbol is activated in the corresponding nominal-to-actual-
comparison.
Ö Adjust the way your graphics is to be scaled in the printout.
Ö Activate the "Close Window" option, when the graphic window which
was followed in performing the part program command in the repeat
mode, has to be closed.
Ö Upon confirmation of your settings the part program command
"Learnable Graphic Commands" will be transferred into your part
program.
07.04.07 v3.0 291

CMM Movements
17 CMM Movements
about this subject.
Machine Movement
Five Axes Movement
Move CMM along an Axis
Circular Movement
Drive Manually to Point
Manual Measurement Point
Joystick in Workpiece Co-ordinate System
Define Clearance Height
Safety Plane: Task / Procedure
Safety Plane: Further Details
Measurement Point
Measurement Point with Direction
Direction Entry via Variables
Groove Point
Measurement Point with Imaginary Point
Measurring Point on Circular Path
Probing of Edge Point
Automatic Line Measurement
Automatic Plane Measurement
Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement
Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue
Automatic circle measurement
Automatic cylinder measurement
Automatic Hole Measurement
Scanning
Scanning of Known Elements
Scanning in YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z Planes
Element finished
Delete last measured point
Stop
Turn Rotary Table
Deflection
Trigger Automatic
Rotary Table Themes

Rotary Table Types
Rotary Table: Calibration Method
Index Table: Calibration Method
Save Rotary Table Position
CNC Parameters
292 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
Set up CNC Mode

Measurement Speed
Movement Speed
Safety Distance
Measurement Length
Positioning Accuracy
Optimized Movement
Change CNC parameters
High Precision Measurement
Calculations: Best Fit

Best Fit: Definition and Criterion
Two Purposes
Best Fit with a Fixed Number of Points
Best Fit with a Variable Number of Points
Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit
Tolerance and MMC for Best fit
Graphics for Best fit
Minimum / Maximum Calculation
Best Fit
17.2 Machine Movement

Before you want to move co-ordinate measurement device, you first have to
switch from joystick to CNC mode. For this, proceed via the menu bar
"Measurement" and select the function "CNC on/off". The status line shows the
current status (light spot next to the CMM symbol).
Procedure
You can either click the icon, which is located in the tool bar for the
machine (left margin) or select via the menu bar "Measurement / Move Machine".
In both cases you get the dialogue window "Move CMM".
On the left side, you see the icon. If you want to move the
machine to a specific position, click here and input the co-ordinates
of this position. By a click on the arrow on the right end of the input
fields, you can recall the last inputs. Furthermore you can define
variables (e.g. store Z) in the "Formula Calculation"; then you can
use these variables for the input.
Now you can select which Types of Co-ordinate Systems you want
to use; at any time, you can click on the corresponding symbol.
A click on the icon enables you to move the machine

according to the actual position.
The in-home position depends on the construction of the

machine; it is the position where it goes after power up.
Depending on the actual position of the machine, these
movements can lead to a collision.For the in-home movement, the
machine moves along the spindle axis first, then the two other axes
together.
07.04.07 v3.0 293

CMM Movements
If you need the actual position of the machine in your input window
(e.g. because you only want to change one of the values), click on
the icon ; then you get the actual position in the selected
mode.
17.3 Move CMM along an Axis

Through this function, it is possible to proceed the probe in an axis. Enable the
function via the menu bar "CMM / Move Along Axis".
Just enter the value of the target co-ordinate in the axis. The input is
only possible in Cartesian.
If you want to display the data of the point where the probe
is now situated, click on the symbol.
Normally, the program supposes moving along an axis in the part co-ordinate
system, but shifting to the machine co-ordinate system is possible. Proceed as
follows:
Ö Keep the dialogue window "Move Along an Axis".
Ö Click on "Co-ordinate System" in the menu bar and in the pull-down
menu on "Determine Co-ordinate System".
Ö In the following dialogue window, choose in the upper icon

bar the symbol "CMM Co-ordinates" and confirm through "Ok".
This way, you overwrite the co-ordinate system.
17.4 Five Axes Movement

As opposed to moving a probe head in three axes (e.g. PH10), you can move in
five axes with the REVO probe heads. This means that the three machine axes
and the two rotary probe head axes move simultaneously towards the target
point. Compared to the previous indexable probes, the advantage lies in that the
machine needs not to be moved first before moving the probe head. This
simultaneousness saves time.
The functionality requires a UCC2 machine control. To get to the dialogue, go to
"CMM / Move in five axes". For basic information, refer to the topic Move Co-
Ordinate Measurement Device .
In addition to the known dialogue "Move CMM" and analogical to the axis, enter
• the A-angle (0 to 180 degrees) and the
• B-angle (-180 to 180 Grad).
When rotating the B-angle, the machine control decides whether the
rotation turns to the left or to the right, i.e. you have to make sure that
there are no obstacles in any of the two directions of rotation.
294 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
17.5 Circular Movement

The "Circular Movement" function serves the purpose of getting the probe on the
quickest way from the start to the end point. You access the dialogue through the
"Menu bar / CMM / Circular Movement". This function can be used in the CNC
mode only.
There are two methods offered for the "Circular Movement" function.
Method 1
This method (Default Setting) is used to approach three points.
Perform the following steps:
Ö First determine in the "Circular Movement" window which co-
ordinate mode you want to use.
Ö Enter the co-ordinates of start, pass through and end point, and
then click OK.
It is also possible, however, that you use the CMM symbol to enter the
current CMM position.
In any case, the CMM with the probe first moves from the current
position to the start position.
1 = Start point
2 = Pass through point
3 = End point
Movement commands issued by CAT1000P as "Circular Movement" within an

element measurement cycle will be stored automatically in the part program.
The centre of the circle must be located within the CMM volume.
Use this symbol to change to "Method 2".

Method 2
This method allows you to determine the movement path by
Driving plane,
Radius,
07.04.07 v3.0 295

CMM Movements
Start and End angle,

Driving direction (using the symbols: to the left or to the right) and
Centre of circle.
For the centre of circle you select (see above) the co-ordinate mode or the
CMM's current position. This is, of course, based on the assumption that you
(can) move the probe precisely to the position which is to become the centre of
circle.
This "Method 2" is not for use in space, but only in the driving planes XY,
YZ and ZX. The angles refer to the first axis of the base plane. The
centre of the circle must be located within the CMM volume.
Use this symbol to change to "Method 1".
17.6 Drive Manually to Point

Drive to a certain position
If you wish to measure at a certain position of the part with a manual CMM you
can make use of the function "Drive manually to point". To open the dialogue box
choose "Machine / Drive manually to point" from the menu bar.
Make the following entries:
Ö the coordinates of the desired position
Ö the precision to reach the position (in the "Capture range" text box of
the dialogue box).
In the Cartesian mode simply click on the icon to determine the axes to be
considered. This option is available in the Cartesian mode only. In the polar mode
the influence of the individual axes is extremely high so that it is useless to select
a single value.
Display window
After confirmation a window indicating the determined coordinates on the right
will be displayed.
The numbers in blue on the left indicate the distances of the nominal
positions along the machine axes.
It is possible to jam two axes each and to drive in one axis only.
If the "Capture range" of the axes has been reached the digits are
displayed in green.
The window disappears as soon as the numbers for every selected
axis are green.
17.7 Manual Measurement Point

You can see the “Manual Measurement Point” function in the part program and in
the “CMM” menu of the editor. In learn mode, this command is automatically
ended. This means,
for each element that you record at a manual CMM, and
296 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
at a CNC-CMM for elements that are measured in manual mode

(before the “CNC ON” command).
Hint
It is possible to reuse the manual measurement point function in an
element. For example if you want to realize a change of probe between
the measurement points.
17.8 Joystick in Workpiece Co-ordinate System

Use this function (menu bar / CMM /& Joystick in workpiece procedure) to move
the probe in the workpiece co-ordinate system, however subject to the condition
that you have already activated this option in "PartManager / menu bar / Defaults
for programs / GEOPAK / Menues".
You should know
Of course, you can only use the function in manual mode with a
joystick.
This mode is possible in learn, relearn and repeat mode.
The function is not learnable.
But you can use the function also when the co-ordinate system has
not been fully defined.
The functionality requires that you have an appropriate control and a CMM.
Hint
If the joystick mode in the workpiece co-ordinate system is active and thus
changes the co-ordinate system, a warning message is returned. You can
close this message with a click on this warning window. The CMM
continues working in the background.
17.9 Define Clearance Height

Definition
The clearance height is a height, where the machine will drive to automatically
before and after measurement of each element. This will avoid in many cases,
the need to add intermediate positions between elements.
Procedure
Activate "CMM / Clearance Height" via the menu bar.
In the following dialog, click the symbol (left) to define the clearance
height in the text box (right).
You define the axis in which axis to move via the axis symbols (in the
picture it is the X axis) The selected axis is displayed.
To get help, you can call the actual machine position via the symbol.
Deactivate the clearance height by clicking once more on the symbol.
07.04.07 v3.0 297

CMM Movements
Move Clearance Height

The clearance height is always automatically driven between two elements. But
you can also drive the machine to the actual clearance height whenever you
want. This can be useful, e.g. for tests. Then, click on the function “Move
Clearance Height” in the “CMM” menu. This procedure has the same effect as
Move CMM in an Axis.
17.10 Safety Plane: Task / Procedure

Task
The error height is meant to be the height that you drive in case of a machine
error, for example at a collision. In opposition with the clearance height, several
error heights can exist. This function is mostly used in part programs for palette
operation or for shifts without any attendance. The error height ensures that, for
example in case of a collision at a part, the measurement passes on to the next
part.
That is why you must define the error height in a way that the CMM is able to
• duly terminate the "Collision Measurement" and
• the next part can unobstructedly be driven
To ensure this, it may be useful to define several clearance heights. In case of an
error, the safety planes defined in the part program are worked off according to
priority. If, for example, the safety planes 1-3 have been defined, these are
worked off in the sequence 3, 2, 1. The safety plane definitions need to be
consecutive and may not have gaps (e.g. 4, 2, 1 is not possible).
Procedure
Activate the function via the "CMM / Error Height“ menu bar.
You can define the error heights at the symbol. The numbers are
automatically counted (upwards) and displayed.
You can change the last defined error height.
You can delete the last defined error height.
For security, you should reduce the Movement Speed(in the dialog
below on the left).
For detailed information about this topic, refer to Safety Plane: Further
Details.
17.11 Safety Plane: Further Details

One co-ordinate axis per safety plane
For each defined safety plane, the co-ordinate axis is selected for which a co-
ordinate value is given that shall be approached in case of an error. If, for
example, the co-ordinate value 50,0 has been given for the co-ordinate "Z", the
machine moves to Z=50,0 in case of an error, but X and Y remain unchanged.
For simple parts which are only measured in one view (e.g. circuit boards or flat
punchings), the above input at the beginning of the part program is sufficient.
298 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
If measurement takes place in a further view which usually also entails a change
of the probe and the co-ordinate system, this normally requires the definition of a
further safety plane. After conclusion of the measurements in this view, this
safety plane needs to be redefined.
Move to probe system
The approached co-ordinate value refers to the defined probe. Furthermore, the
system moves to the corresponding probe after it has reached the safety plane if
a rotary probe system is used. I.e., the current probe is moved to safety plane.
The probe offset, however, corresponds to the offset of the defined probe in the
safety plane command.
The procedure for defining a co-ordinate system number is analogous to the one
described above. The corresponding co-ordinate system is downloaded and
movement takes place accordingly.
Parallel to probe axis
Usually, a safety plane is approached parallel to an axis of the workpiece co-
ordinate system. When using a rotary probe system, movement may also take
place parallel to the probe axis. This is, for example, required in case of an
inclined bore for the measurement of which the co-ordinate system is not
changed. For this, activate the option "Parallel to probe axis". Then, the probe
moves alongside the probe axis (that corresponds approximately to the bore axis)
and to the defined co-ordinate value.
If, however, a collision occurs while the safety planes are worked off, the pallet
mode stops.
17.12 Measurement Point
You can make the machine probe a point either by the joystick box; for this,
press the "MEAS"-button, then move the machine to the part. The other way is
via the keyboard, either the icon on the left margin, or via the menu bar
"Measurement / Probing Point" as soon as you have activated an element. Then
you get the corresponding dialog window.
Normally, there are two possibilities to define a measurement point.
17.12.1 Quick Overview

1. Point on the surface: Here, the theoretical touch point on the surface of the
part is given, and the travelling direction. This works in nearly all cases, even if
you use a probe with a different diameter, as the probe size is taken into account
when measuring.
1 = stylus ball radius

2 = theoretical touch point
07.04.07 v3.0 299

CMM Movements
3 = travelling direction
4 = safety distance
2. Probe centre: Here, you specify the location of the probe centre a certain
distance away from the surface point. In addition, the probing direction is also
required.
1 = start position
2 = travelling direction
3 = change over point
17.12.2 Details
Point on the surface:
Ö Enter the co-ordinates for the theoretical touching point, or
Ö Select the data from the list box, where the last ten inputs are stored
and offered to you when clicking on the arrow or
Ö take the actual position of the machine by clicking the icon.

The program knows the Safety Distance and the probe diameter and uses them
to calculate the movement.
1 = movement speed
2 = measurement speed
During the input of the co-ordinates, you can select between three Types of Co-
ordinate Systems . Just click on the icon for the type of co-ordinate system you
want. GEOPAK always starts with the Cartesian co-ordinate system.
300 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
After input of the probing point, GEOPAK needs the direction of probing. For this,
you have two possibilities:
Input of angles: this input is done in the prompt fields besides the symbol .
Here, you enter the angles of the probing direction with the axes X, Y, and Z.
The angles can be input through one of the following three methods:
Ö key the values in, or
Ö select a value out of the list boxes, which appear after a click on the
arrow besides the input box, or
Ö click on the icon; this makes the direction of the probing vector
pointing into the opposite direction, e.g.: X=90° becomes X=270°.
Input of a Target: Here, a target point, which can even be situated in the part,
gives the direction. It is not necessary that the probe can reach the target; this
target is only taken to calculate the direction.
1 = measurement point
2 = imaginary point
The co-ordinates of the target are entered in the lower input boxes. If you select
the input by target, the icons and the corresponding input fields are inactive.
For the input of the targets, you can also select the Types of Co-ordinate
Systems (cf. above).
Note
A click on the icon shows the actual position of the probe; this
position means the co-ordinates in the part co-ordinate system, and it is
immediately transformed to the selected co-ordinate system type.
Centre of Probe: In this case, you do not input the theoretical touch point,
but the point in front of the material where the machine switches from movement
speed into measurement speed.
For the input of this point, you can also select one of the three Types of Co-
ordinate Systems (cf. above).
Laser probe
For working with a laser probe, refer to the topic Measurement Point
(Laser) .
07.04.07 v3.0 301

CMM Movements
17.13 Measurement Point (Laser)

For the topic "Measurement point (probing point)" you must always differentiate
between point measurement and scanning measurement. For point
measurement, proceed as described by the topic Measurement Point. When
working with a laser probe, this dialogue is extended by the functions
"Surface mode" or
"Edge mode" respectively.

To switch between the surface and the edge mode, use the tool bar (see ill.
below). However, a change between a surface and an edge measurement must
in any case be announced to the machine control before starting a new
measurement.
You can also use a joystick for probing.

For detailed information about measuring with a laser probe, refer to the topic
group Laser Probe "WIZprobe".
17.14 Measurement Point with Direction

Define the measurement point (probing point) via the menu bar
"Measurement" and the "Measurement Point (Probing Point)" function. You can
also click on the symbol in the tools for machine. You come to the corresponding
dialogue window.
In order to determine the measurement point, you have three options (see details
of topic Measurement Point ). One of the possibilities is the following.
Measurement point with direction: At this procedure, you do not have a

theoretic workpiece. Select a centre of probe with direction in which the probe
must move.
Enter the data for a centre of probe with direction in the upper three
input fields, or
From the list boxes, select the data which has been recorded here
over the last ten measurements, or
302 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
select the data of position of machine via the symbol
1 = start position
2 = movement direction
3 = centre of probe with direction
You can choose one of three Types of Co-ordinate Systems hereafter.
Cartesian Co-ordinate System
Cylinder Co-ordinate System
Sphere Co-ordinate System

You still must enter the direction in which the system of probe has to move. You
can do that in the input fields beside the symbols {bmc N_VECCHG.bmp}. Here,
you determine the angle of the probing direction to the axes X, Y and Z.
You have three possibilities:
Enter the values you want, or
Select a value from the pull-down list fields, or
Click on the symbols {bmc N_VECCHG.bmp} and change the
direction vectors of the X, Y or Z components if you want probing
into the opposite direction. Example: X=0° is becoming X=180°.
17.15 Direction Entry via Variables

Apart from the possibility to enter fixed angles or components of the direction
vector, you can also enter values via variables. In this case please observe that
all components of the direction value are defined via variables and
the sum of the squared components is 1.
17.16 Groove Point

Differently from the touch trigger system, which records a measurement point at
the first contact with the part, you can drive with a scanning probe e.g. in a v-
formed slot so that the ball is fitting at the same time to the two flanks (see
pictures below).
07.04.07 v3.0 303

CMM Movements
Start of probing
Contact and change of direction
Groove point
The probing must always be vertically realized to the Z-axis. It is always

the centre of probe that is output.
You get this function via the "Menu Bar / CMM / Measurement Point
(Probing Point)". Click on the icon on the left in the following dialogue. Cf. the
topic Measurement Point with Direction
17.17 Measurement Point with Imaginary Point

You determine the measurement point (probing point) via the menu bar
"CMM" and the function "Measurement Point (Probing Point)".
You also can click on the symbol in the tools for machine. You obtain the
corresponding dialogue window.
In order to determine the measurement point, you have three options (refer to
detailed information Measurement Point). One of the three possibilities is the
following.
304 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
Measurement point with imaginary point: When proceeding this way, you
determine the direction by means of a centre of probe with direction and an
imaginary point. Normally, you measure the origin of the element.
1 = Measurement Point
2 = Imaginative Point
Proceed as follows
Ö Enter the data for a centre of probe with direction in the upper three
input fields, or
Ö Choose data from the list fields which have been recorded over the
last ten measurements or
Ö
Ö Enter the data for the imaginary point in the lower three input fields.
When applying this procedure, the symbols (direction

vectors) are inactive.
In the basic configuration, you see the co-ordinate initials X, Y and
Z.
Even now, you can select one of the three Types of Co-Ordinate Systems .
Cylinder Co-ordinate System

Start position as a proposal
You can also select the start position that you have already entered by
clicking on the symbol. In this case the co-ordinates of the start position for
travelling to the imaginary destination are taken over. You will use this option
when you intend to change only one co-ordinate, for example. As, however,
GEOPAK calculates the probing direction from the difference of the co-ordinates,
at least one co-ordinate needs to be changed.
17.18 Measuring Point on Circular Path

When measuring round workpieces with a bulge, the position of the bulge may be
unknown. You can use the function " Measuring Point on Circular Path " to move
the probe on a circular (see ill. below) to determine a measurement point on the
bulge.
07.04.07 v3.0 305

CMM Movements
1) Start point of the circular movement

2) Probe vector vertical to radius
3) Measure point
4) Centre
5) Radius
6) Start angle
7) Axis of co-ordinate system (dependent on
driving plane)
Ö But first you have to call up the dialogue "Element point" and to go
to "Type of construction" to select
"Measure".
Hint
You should deactivate the option "Measure automatic" because
otherwise you will get the dialogue "Measurement point" which is
superfluous and which you will then have to click away.
Ö In the dialogue "Element point", click "OK" to activate the desired
function in the menu "CMM".
The dialogue "Probe measurement point on circular" is almost identical to the
dialogue "Circular Movement (Method 2)". When probing a measurement point
on circular, there is only a start and no end angle.
As soon as the function is active, the CMM moves parallel to the selected
movement plane. When the probe touches the targeted object, the measurement
point is recorded and the probe moves back to the position at which it has started
the circular movement.
Limitations
You can only use this functionality when your CMM is equipped with one of the
following ROM version numbers:
• UC200 ROM version v3.5 or higher
• UC300 ROM version v6.6 or higher
• UC400 and UC500 ROM: any version number
The minimum radius required for a circular movement is 1 mm.
306 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
17.19 Probing of Edge Point

If you want to probe an edge point at a thin sheet, you can realize this in
GEOPAK with a special probing strategy. This strategy can also be applied if the
sheet you want to measure is bent compared with the model or the learnt part.
Near the edge point on the sheet, one or several probing processes will be
executed. The height of the real edge probing will be calculated out of these
preceding probing processes (surface points). It is possible to independently
adapt the safety distance from the general setting, separately according to your
required edge and surface point(s).
Ö Select the element "Point".
Ö In the CMM pull-down menu, click on the "Edge Measurement"
function.
The following dialogue is divided in "Edge Point" and "Surface Point".

Representation for all Options of the Edge Measurement
1 = Edge point; 2 = Measurement Deepness; 3 = Edge Point Probing

Direction
Representation for the "1 Surface Point" Option
1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point; 2 = Surface Point Probing Direction

At the "1 Surface Point" option, the height will be adjusted.
Representation from top
1 Surface Point
Red Point = Preceding Probing Point
07.04.07 v3.0 307

CMM Movements
2 Surface Points
1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point; 2 = Min. Edge Distance

If there exist two surface points, not only the height but also the direction of the
edge probing will be adjusted.
3 Surface Points
1 = Distance Edge/Surface Point; 2 = Min. Edge Distance

If there are three surface points, also a lateral bending of the sheet will be
compensated.
17.20 Automatic Line Measurement

To open the dialogue box
click on this icon in the "Element Line" dialogue box or

choose "Machine / Autom. element measurement / Line" from the
menu bar or
click on this icon in the tool bar on the left margin of the
GEOPAK main window.
Start point
In the "Automatic line measurement" dialogue box enter the coordinates of the
start point (depends on the type of coordinate system).
Angle
This is the angle between the line in measuring direction and the first axis of the
direction plane, i.e. if you enter an angle of 0 or 180 degrees you will achieve the
opposite measuring direction (see following picture).
308 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
Probing
Choose the "Probing" icons if you wish to probe

in the driving plane
along the driving direction
to the right or to the left.
On the right side of the dialogue box the selected probing mode will be displayed
(see example in the picture below).
See also information on the subject "Scanning of Known Elements".

See also "Filter Contour".
17.21 Automatic Plane Measurement

At the automatic plane measurement, the driving strategy is the same as in the
automatic circle measurement. That means the measurement points will be
distributed on a circle. The probing is done vertically to the driving plane.
You get the function via
the symbol in the CMM tools, or via

the menu bar "CMM / Autom. Element Measurement / Plane", or via
the symbol out of the "Element Plane" dialogue.
With the symbols, you determine whether you probe by moving up

or down (in positive or negative plane direction).
07.04.07 v3.0 309

CMM Movements
17.21.1 Circular
If you can make a rotation with your CMM, you should activate this (see
symbol) if you measure the base of a circumferential groove. You avoid
intermediate positions that would be necessary if you would drive on straight
lines.
If you can move from a meas. point to the next one without a collision, the
straight way is the fastest and shortest.
17.21.2 Slot Width

If your CMM is not able to make a rotation, you should input, in case of a
circumferential groove, a slot width (see symbol). This slot width indicates how
much place is available for moving around. GEOPAK then calculates the driving
ways between the probing positions, this means
out of this slot width,
out of the actual ball diameter and
out of the safety distance.
The number of the calculated intermediate positions is always the smallest
possible. It depends essentially on the number of meas. points and the slot width.
See also information on the subject "Scanning of Known Elements ".
17.22 Automatic Circle Measurement

You can use the "Automatic Circle Measurement" if you measure a circle or an
ellipse. As part measurement, you can use the "Automatic Circle Measurement"
also for a cylinder, a cone or a sphere.

the menu bar "CMM / Autom. Element Measurement / Circle", or via
the symbol out of the "Element Circle" dialogue.

Input the circle parameter that means the nominal diameter for the diameter. The
ball diameter and safety distance are automatically calculated by GEOPAK.
The option "Direction to the left or to the right" is only relevant if you
only measure the part of a circle.
17.22.1 Circular
If it is possible with your CMM to make a rotation, you should activate this
(see symbol) if you measure an outer circle (bolt). You avoid intermediate
positions that would be necessary if you would drive on straight lines.
At an inner circle (bore hole), the straight way is the fastest and shortest.
310 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
17.22.2 Slot Width

If your CMM is not able to make a rotation, you should input, in case of an
outer circle, a slot width. This slot width indicates how much place is available for
moving around. GEOPAK then calculates the driving ways between the probing
positions, this means
out of this slot width,
out of the actual ball diameter and
out of the safety distance.
The number of the calculated intermediate positions is always the smallest
possible. It essentially depends on the number of meas. points and the slot width.
17.22.3 Thread Pitch

If you want to measure the position of a thread hole, click on the symbol and
input the thread pitch.
If the symbol is not activated, the CMM will drive on the same height. That would
falsify the position (see pictures below). If you have input the thread pitch, the
probing always takes place under the same conditions. This way, a good position
determination is possible.
Without thread pitch
With thread pitch

See also "Filter Contour".
Automatic circle measurement with thread pitch
For the automatic circle measurement with thread pitch the movement of the 3rd
axis depends on different parameters
Clockwise or counter clockwise selection
Sign of the thread pitch
The table below shows how an automatic circle measurement with a selected
thread pitch works in the XY plane.
Sign of thread pitch Clockwise or Movement of 3rd axis
value Counter clockwise
Positive Counter clockwise Z value increases
Positive Clockwise Z value decreases
Negative Counter clockwise Z value decreases
07.04.07 v3.0 311

CMM Movements
Negative Clockwise Z value increases
17.23 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement

With this function and the relevant dialogues we provide you with the advantages
of the Automatic Circle Measurement also for the measurement of inclined
circles: The part program is shorter, easier to change and learn.
In particular, you can use this function to measure the surface and within the
surface the inclined circle with only one part program command.
Furthermore it is easier to distribute the measurement points on the circle more
evenly.
Graphical presentation
The illustration below (lateral cross-section) gives you an overview of the
graphical presentation of the surface and circle measurement.
The numbers 1 to 6 show the sequence of actions.
At position 2, the surface measurement is finished.
Position 3: Start into the hole.
Circle measurement at positions 4 and 5.
Position 6: From here you can move to clearance height.
a: Circle diameter
b: Circle centre
c: Approach height
d: Approach depth
e: Edge distance
f: Surface normal
g: Diameter for surface measurement
h: Safety distance
For how to proceed further, find detailed information in Automatic Inclined Circle
Measurement: Dialogue .
312 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
17.24 Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement: Dialogue

17.24.1 Surface and Circle
In our example for the topic Automatic Inclined Circle Measurement

we assume that both surface and circle are measured. You have taken this
decision already in the dialogue "Element inclined circle" (Menu
bar/elements/inclined circle) using the symbols for "Measurement" and
"Automatic measurement" (see above).
In the following dialogue (excerpt in ill. below), you perform the settings that are
already known to you from the automatic circle measurement.
Additionally required are details about approach height and approach depth.
17.24.2 Inner and outer circle
As opposed to the automatic circle measurement, you must use

vectors in this dialogue to define the starting position of the circle measurement
on the surface. The origin for this vector is the circle centre. With the end angle
you define where the last measurement point is taken (end angle 0 = end angle
360 degrees).
These data are not required for the inner full circle.
17.24.3 Edge distance and plane vector

For the plane measurement you additionally require the distance to the edge and
the vector for the angularity of the plane (see dialogue excerpt below). This
vector is perpendicular to the plane.
07.04.07 v3.0 313

CMM Movements
17.24.4 Further elements possible

The option buttons in this dialogue (dialogue excerpt below) are deactivated in
learn mode. In the edit mode you must decide between:
Not connected with a plane Select this option when measuring

anything other than an inclined circle (e.g. cylinder, sphere, cone).
Plane still to be measured (see above under "Plane and circle").
Plane is complete. In this case, a plane exists and only the circle
must be measured.
Hint
When editing a part program, it may become necessary to change one of
these options, e.g. switching from "Plane is complete" to "Plane still to be
measured".
17.25 Automatic Cylinder Measurement


the menu bar "CMM / Automatic Cylinder Measurement / Cylinder ",
or via
the symbol out of the "Element Cylinder " dialogue.

For the automatic cylinder measurement, GEOPAK presets the following
strategy:
Measurement is made - parallel to the driving plane – of the circles
you preset by the "Number of Steps" (minimum 2).
If you want to determine the number of points for each single circle,
you must divide the total number of points (see in the dialogue
window leftover) through the "Number of Steps".
314 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
The measurement of the cylinder begins on the height of the co-

ordinate (first step) you entered. The last step will be measured by
the variation in elevation higher or deeper.
If higher or deeper will be indicated by the driving
direction.
Since the direction of axis of the cylinder always corresponds to the
direction of the first up to the last meas. point, you also determine
the direction of axis of the cylinder through this driving direction.
If this given probing strategy is not sufficient, don’t use the "Automatic Cylinder
Measurement" function but rather use for example the "Automatic Circle or Line
Measurement".
Problem
The driving strategy in GEOPAK differs from that in GEOPAK-3 to the

extent that the last position is situated at another place. This can lead to
– with GEOPAK-3 part programs converted to GEOPAK - a collision of
the following driving command.
Problem Solving
You can select a GEOPAK-3 compatible driving strategy by activating the

symbol in the dialogue. You activate the symbol via the "PartManager / Settings /
Defaults for Programs / CMM / GEOPAK / Dialogues" and to the end the "Display
Button for GEOPAK-3" function.
Scanning with five axes
When using a REVO probe head in connection with a UCC2 machine control, the
"five-axis-method" is applied for scanning an inside cylinder. If your CMM is
appropriately equipped, this method is always called up for scanning an inside
cylinder. You cannot decide the method in the dialogue and there are no
additional entries required.
17.26 Automatic Hole Measurement

17.26.1 Optical Measurement and UMAP
With an automatic hole measurement, usually an element, e.g. a circle, is pre-
measured optically in order to measure it in the next step with our micro probe
(UMAP).
To get to the function and to the dialogue use the menu bar / CMM / Automatic
element measurement / Hole. The topic is based on the Automatic Circle
Measurement. For example, always a full circle is measured etc.
Two options are available:
Enter the co-ordinates yourself (input co-ordinates) or
Use the co-ordinates from an element measured before. In this
case, the icons for the elements Point, Circle, Ellipse or Sphere are
active.
07.04.07 v3.0 315

CMM Movements
17.26.2 Measurement withPre-measured Element

First click the option "Use co-ordinates from element". In the next step you
determine the driving plane. As the pre-measurement has been performed
optically, i.e. in 2D only, you still need to enter the third co-ordinate.
Furthermore you can decide if the diameter from the pre-measured element shall
be used or not. For the point, the given diameter naturally makes no sense. For
the ellipse you enter the smaller diameter to avoid collisions. For the circle, you
can usually use the given diameter.
If you want to measure in more than one section (number of steps), enter the
required number in the text box and push the TAB-key on your keyboard.
Only then, you can select the height difference and the driving direction. The
procedure corresponds to the procedure of the Automatic Cylinder Measurement
(see full circle etc.).
17.27 Scanning
For the scanning, you have further options via the menus "Measurement Point:
Two Possibilities“ and "Measurement Point with Direction". Meantime, you should
be sufficiently familiarized with these two topics.
Open or closed
For scanning, it is important if you have an open or closed contour. If the

contour is closed, click the symbol. Then, scanning is terminated as soon as the
CMM has reached the starting point.
With an open contour, deactivate the symbol and determine via the target point
the zone you want to record. In this case, you have multiple possibilities to finish
a scanning (the following example with a scanning in the X/Y plane.
Ö Enter the X as well as the Y values of the target point. The scanning
is only terminated if the X as well as the Y co-ordinates have been
reached.
Ö Enter the X value and activate the symbol "Ignore Second

Axis". The scanning is terminated as soon as the value of the X co-
ordinate has been reached.
Ö Enter the Y value and activate the symbol "Ignore First Axis".
The scanning is terminated as soon as the Y co-ordinate has been
reached independently from the X value.
It is also important to know if you operate with a measuring or a switching probe
system. If you work with a measuring probe system, you must input the scanning
speed (1-20 mm/sec) and the Deflection of the probe.
17.28 Scanning of Known Elements

Scanning with a "Measuring Probe" is possible for the four elements
Line,
Circle,
Cylinder and
Plane.
316 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
Provided your CMM has a controller capable of measuring known elements, it is

possible to perform measurement at a scanning speed of up to 100mm/sec.
Known elements are elements that you can find in your technical drawings by
their properties (diameter, position etc.).
On principle, the scanning of the above mentioned elements is subject to the
same conditions as described in the following chapters
Automatic Line Measurement ,
Automatic Circle Measurement ,
Automatic Cylinder Measurement ,
Automatic Plane Measurement .
Click on the scan symbol in the

respective "Automatic Element Measurement" dialogues. Enter the scanning
speed in the adjacent text box. For the optimum scanning speed refer to your
records regarding the probing system and the CMM.
In order to obtain an optimum result, enter a minimum of 50 points into

the text box designated "Number of Points".
Setting the approach and after-run for scanning

During scanning, errors may occur in the start and end area. You can use the
input fields "Run in" and "Run out" to define an area in which no scanning takes
place. While moving within the area "Run in", the probe is not yet scanning. While
moving in the area "Run out", the probe is not scanning while it is moved away
from the scanning area.
The selected measurement range is expanded by the run in and the run out. Your
measurement task should consider this to avoid a collision while the probe is
moving.
Hint
For scanning circles, surfaces or cylinders enter angles for run in and run
out. For scanning lines, enter the value as a length.
Scanning of cylinders
For the scanning of cylinder it is assumed that you know that only solid cylinders
can be measured.
Provided your controller has the "Scanning of Known Elements" option,
measurement will take place in spiral form. Otherwise, superimposed circles will
be measured.
17.29 Scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and Phi Z Planes

If you scan with an open contour in the other planes and want to "Ignore Axis"
(see details of topic "Scanning" for the target point, you should respect the
following axis co-ordinations:
1st axis 2nd axis
YZ Y Z
ZX Z X
07.04.07 v3.0 317

CMM Movements
1st axis 2nd axis

RZ R Z
Phi Z Phi Z
You select the RZ scanning if you work with rotating and symmetrical profiles.
This can be, e.g. bottles or mouthpieces of trumpets. The driving plane is
determined through the Z axis and the starting point (picture below).
You decide for Phi Z scanning if you move a circle on the one hand, but at the
same time must record different heights (see picture below). The circle is lies
symmetrically around the Z axis. The radius is indicated through the starting
point.
17.30 Element finished

With this function (menu bar "CMM / Element Finished"), you tell GEOPAK that
the actual element is finished and no other measurement points are expected. At
this moment, the calculation of the elements will be realized.
If, after calculation, you notice that the element had incorrect points or if
you still want to measure other points, you can delete the command via the
symbol. Then, you automatically return to the element measurement.
If you know in advance how many points you want to measure, you can
already activate this in the element dialogue with the "Aut. Element Finished"
symbol. This way, after having reached the number of points to be measured, the
measurement is terminated and the calculation is automatically executed.
318 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
17.31 Delete Last Meas. Point

With this function, you can delete the respective last measured point in
single/learn mode as well as in repeat mode. This can only be done if the CNC
mode is deactivated.
You can start this function via the symbol or the menu bar "CMM / Delete
Last Measured Point".
17.32 Stop
Via this function that you can activate either via the symbol or the menu
bar "CMM / Stop", it is possible to stop the CMM in case of a crash.
This is the same function that you have on your joystick ("R.STOP").
17.33 Turn Rotary Table
In case you have a rotary table, the corresponding dialogue gives you
several possibilities. You access the dialogue through the "Menu bar / CMM/
Turn Rotary Table".
It is your decision to choose either an
absolute angle of rotation, or
a relative angle of rotation.
Click on the symbol "Absolute Rotary Angle" and enter into the text box
below an angle the table rotates to. Using the hand symbols you determine the
sense of rotation.
Click on the symbol "Relative Rotary Angle" and enter into the text box
below an angle by which the table is to rotate. Entering a positive angle causes
the table to go round to the right, entering a negative angle causes it to go to the
left.
In any case, when the table rotates watch whether there are workpieces
on the table and where precisely they are located..
For measurement the symbol "Co-Ordinate System" should always be activated

(depressed) in order to make sure that the co-ordinate system of the workpiece
automatically rotates, as well. This function is usually not switched off unless the
rotary table is set up.
Manual mode using the joystick box
Mitutoyo rotary tables can also be turned manually using the joystick box. The
controller transmits the end position to GEOPAK. In the learn mode this table
rotation is stored in the part program as "Turn Rotary Table Absolute".
07.04.07 v3.0 319

CMM Movements
The controller does, however, not transmit the sense of rotation. Therefore
GEOPAK determines the shortest travel. In cases where this method should not
practicable (due to fouling conditions with the workpiece), the rotary table has to
be turned under software control.
See also information on the subject "Scanning with the Rotary Table:Introduction
".
For further basic information about place and position of the rotary table, refer to
the topic Rotary Table Types .
17.34 Deflection
To be sure having a contact with the workpiece, the measuring probe works with
a so-called deflection. The control minds that the deflection does, at each point of
the part, not go beyond the limits of the defined values in a dialog. As for a
spring, a better deflection corresponds to a better probing of the part.
On principle is valid: The deflection must be the same as the probe

calibrated one.
Notice
According to the actual status of development, a deflection between 0,25 and 1
mm, depending on the connected probe system, is possible.
Feature for SP600 and SP25
When you have swivelled the SP 600, this is influencing the own weight of the
probe pin so that going backwards to 0 is not possible any more. Here, we have a
"Pre-Guiding". By this means, the maximum deflection is reduced.
17.35 Trigger-Automatic
You use the trigger automatic with optical systems that give a signal when
running over a border. For exact measurement it is important that the
measurement recording is always realized in the same direction (clear - dark or
dark -clear). This is why every second signal is ignored.
Enable / disable the trigger automatic by clicking on the symbol in the

“CMM” menu.
This function is only activated if you have input it into the INI.file.
17.36 Rotary Table

17.36.1 Rotary Table Types
For measuring complex workpieces, GEOPAK supports the rotary table and the
index table (measurement point recording in certain angle distances). In order to
achieve high precision measurement results, the positions and alignments of
these rotary tables must be calibrated.
320 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
In case of mechanical changes of the probe configuration or in case of

changes of the rotary table position, the rotary table must be calibrated
again.
Rotary table
During rotation, these rotary tables approach an infinite number of positions. If
you are working with the Mitutoyo rotary table MRT320, you can simultaneously
rotate and measure.
Also refer to Rotary Table: Calibration Method.
Index tables
The index tables approach a defined number of positions. They cannot rotate
during the measurement process. In general, index tables are only used to define
the position of the workpiece to assure a better measurement process.
Also refer to Index Table: Calibration Method.
17.36.2 Rotary Table: Calibration Method

To measure a rotary table, proceed as follows:
Ö You are working with a CMM co-ordinate system
Ö Place a ball on the rotary table
Ö Measure the ball
Ö Rotate the table to another position, but do not select the option
"Also rotate co-ordinate system". Refer also to Rotate Rotary Table.
Ö Measure the ball again.
Ö Rotate the table to another position but do not select the option
"Also rotate co-ordinate system".
Ö Measure the ball again.
Ö Rotate the table back to the start position but do not select the
option "Also rotate co-ordinate system".
Ö To connect the balls measured above with the element "Unprojected
Circle" use the CMM co-ordinates. Also refer to Connection Element
Circle .
Ö Save the table position with the circle generated. See also Save
Rotary Table Position.
To ensure that you are using the correct driver for the rotary table, close
MCOSMOS and restart.
17.36.3 Switch Rotary Table: Calibration Method

To measure a switch rotary table, proceed as follows:
Ö Use a CMM co-ordinate system.
Ö Position three masterballs on the table to produce a triangle.
Ö Measure the three masterballs.
07.04.07 v3.0 321

CMM Movements
Ö Connect the three results to an unprojected plane. Also refer to

Connection Element Plane.
Ö Define the plane generated as a XY-plane. Also refer to Alignment
for Plane .
Ö The masterball measured first is the origin. Also refer to Create
Origin.
Ö The second masterball serves to set the X-axis. Also refer to Axis
Alignment through Point.
Ö Save the co-ordinate system you have generated as archive co-
ordinate system 1001.
Ö Repeat the above named steps for each of the positions of the
switch rotary table. The numbers for the archive co-ordinate system
are incremented after each position by 1 (e.g. 1002, 1003, 100n).
To ensure that you are using the correct driver for the switch rotary table,
close MCOSMOS and restart.
17.36.4 Save Rotary Table Position

This function is required to save the central position of the rotary table with the
aim to ensure high precision measurement results with GEOPAK.
Also see Rotary Table: Calibration Method.
In case of mechanical changes of the probe configuration or in case of a

changed rotary table position the rotary table must be calibrated again.
17.37 CNC Parameter

17.37.1 Installation of CNC Mode
You have determined the probe and the co-ordinate system. Via the menu bar
"Measurement" and the function "CNC Parameters and CNC Enabled", you come
to the corresponding dialog window. Here, you are prompted to input the required
values for the measurement task.
For CNC mode you need information to the following items (also see the dialog
window):
Movement Speed
Measuring Speed
Safety Distance
In the following dialogue window, you can change all settings at the same time.
322 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
17.37.1.1 Enter values
If you want to enter values for the single positions, click on the CMM
symbol.
Characteristic features
For the movement and the measurement speed, you have two specific values.
You can select between the
max. value or the
default. The default value for the measurement speed (probing speed) is
the value able to realize the max. accuracy. If your part program is determined to
function on different CMMs with different properties, you should select the default
setting.
Continue with values
But if you want to continue single parameters, click on the symbol.

In addition to "CNC Parameters...", you can read in the headline of this dialog
window "... and CNC ON". If you confirm your inputs, the part program is stored
according to your specification. In repeat mode, CNC mode is enabled.
In the pull-down menu "Machine", you also find the "CNC Parameter" functions.
With this dialog, you can change one or several parameters in the actual
program. The "CNC Parameters" dialog window compared with the "CNC
Parameters and CNC ON" dialog window is extended by some parameters:
Measuring Length The measuring length is the max. length of a
CMM’s moving speed to probe a part.
Positioning Accuracy Die The positioning accuracy describes the
distance between probe and intermediate position. If the probe
came to the intermediate position with this distance, the CMM
continues to the next position.
Smooth off edges for an optimized movement
If you think that you can avoid stops that are caused by interim
positions, inform yourself by reading the topic Optimized Movement
.
Smooth off edges for an optimized scan
The probe moves from one measurement point to the next on a
circular path. The scan movement is uniform as there are no sudden
turnarounds.
In the status line of the GEOPAK main window you see, next to the symbol for
the CMM a LED symbol, which shows the status of operation.
Green: CNC-mode off
Yellow: CNC-mode on
Further Options
We inform you about further options for the CNC mode with the following terms
"Clearance Height" and "Error Height".
17.37.2 Measuring Speed

The measuring speed is the speed with which the CMM is moving to probe the
part.
The "Minimal" or "Maximal Measuring Speed" depends on the CMM
and the probing system.
07.04.07 v3.0 323

CMM Movements
On principle is valid: The lower is the measuring speed, the more

exact is the measurement. Yet, steady measurement could
unnecessarily prolong the measurement time. For an optimal
measurement speed respecting both "Accuracy" and "Measurement
Time" refer to documentation of CMM. The optimal speed is 3
mm/sec.
17.37.3 Movement Speed

With the movement speed, the co-ordinate measuring machine (CMM) moves
between the measurement points. Normally, the movement speed is specified.
But, if you work with a heavy probing system it may happen that you must reduce
the speed.
You have to pay special attention to new machines with a movement

speed between 600 and 1000 mm/sec. These movement speeds require
a much higher braking distance, otherwise the probe can be damaged.
17.37.4 Safety Distance

The safety distance is the distance between the theoretical probe point on the
surface of the piece and the point where the CMM changes from movement
speed to measurement speed.
If the measurement points are directly probed (Scanning,) and you have
a too small safety distance, you risk collisions if the contour shows and
distinct irregularities.
17.37.5 Measurement Length

The easurement length is the maximal length of a CMM moving in measurement
speed in order to probe a part. This avoids that wrong measurement results are
possible.
Example: The parts to be measured are located on a palette. If there are missing
one or more parts, the CMM would measure the next part on the palette and you
would get wrong measurement results. You can avoid this by entering a
determined measured nominal length.
17.37.6 Positioning Accuracy

The positioning accuracy is used when there are several movement commands
in the buffer of the machine. It defines the point of movement of the machine
where the controller considers the target as "reached" and starts moving towards
the next target. It does not affect the accuracy of the measurement.
324 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
1 = destination A
2 = intermediate position B
3 = destination C
4 = positioning accuracy
5 = work piece
You should know:
If you select a high value, the part program executes faster than
with a small value.
The value is used in all cases when there are subsequent
movements of the machine.
17.37.7 Optimized Movement

The function "Optimized of movement by rounded corners" has been designed to
achieve a faster measurement operation. The underlying principle is
that the CMM needs no longer to approach the interim positions
precisely – as a precise approach always means a short stop,
but that a circle radius can be entered so that the CMM can, for
example, move around corners on a shorter path without stops (see
ill. below).
The above illustration shows the circle radius (red dotted line), the two interim
positions (X) and the shortened movement path (>).
As the illustration below shows, also the interim positions in front of a
measurement point need not be approached.
Notes
The size of the radius depends on your workpiece, on the interim
positions and on your CM M and must be defined for each individual case.
You can only use this functionality when all hardware requirements are
met.
07.04.07 v3.0 325

CMM Movements
17.37.8 Change CNC Parameters

In case you want to change, during CNC run, the parameters e.g. measurement
speed or movement speed, click on this function (menu bar "CMM / CNC
Parameters").
In the following dialogue window, you can change all settings at the same time.
Enter values
If you want to enter values for the single positions, click on the CMM
symbol.
Characteristic features
For the movement and the measurement speed, you have two specific values.
You can select between the
max. value or the
default.
The default value for the measurement speed (probing speed) is the value able to
realize the max. accuracy. If your part program will be determined to function on
different CMMs with different properties, you should select the default setting.
Continue with values
But if you want to continue with single parameters, click on the symbol.
Enter further Parameters
The "CNC-Parameter" dialogue window has been upgraded with four further
parameters compared with the "CNC Parameters and CNC on"
Measuring Length The measurement length is the max. length of a
CMM’s measurement speed to probe a part.
Positioning Distance The positioning distance describes the
distance between probe and intermediate position. If the probe
came to the intermediate position with this distance, the CMM
continues to the next position.
Optimized Movement
Smooth off edges for an optimized movement
If you think that you can avoid stops that are caused by interim
positions, inform yourself by reading the topic Optimized Movement
.
Smooth off edges for an optimized scan
The probe moves from one measurement point to the next on a
circular path. The scan movement is uniform as there are no sudden
turnarounds.
You will opt for the High Precision Measurement if
• the probe (MPP/SP) shall have stopped swinging after the
deflection
• before the first measurement shall be taken.
In the status line of the GEOPAK main window (bottom left) you see, next to the
symbol for the CMM a LED symbol, which shows the status of operation.
Green: CNC mode off
Yellow: CNC mode on
326 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
Further Options
We inform you about further options for the CNC mode with the following terms
"Clearance Height" and "Safety Plane".
17.37.9 High Precision Measurement

Strategy
High precision management is a probing strategy available for scanning probes
MPP/SP. The scanning is performed in a way that the probe stops for a short
time while it is still in the deflected position (for detailed information, also refer to
the topic Deflection). Only then, the measurement point is established by the
machine control.
Explanation
Upon contact of the probe with the workpiece, the CMM is braked down - this
causes vibrations. By activating the option "High precision measurement", the
data are only taken after the vibrations have stopped.
Advantage
The advantage of this procedure lies in that measurement results are no longer
influenced by vibrations. Naturally, this procedure prolongs the measurement
process but is more precise. Therefore it is up to you to weigh up the two
possibilities before deciding on which solution you choose.
General rule:
You should first calibrate the probe according to the method that shall be
used for the measurement.
17.38 Calculations: Best Fit

17.38.1 Best Fit: Definition and Criteria
At best fit, a group of co-ordinate values (points) is rotated and shifted in a way
that it suits "best" into another group of specified co-ordinates.
These specified co-ordinates are nominal values; the others are
designated as "Real Value" or "Actual Values".
Always one actual and one nominal value build a couple of points.
The best fit is based on the analogy of the Gauss criterion. This
criterion requires that the sum of the squares distances is small.
This means that the distances of the actual values are calculated
from their corresponding nominal values, and then they are squared
and summed up. The "best" fit can be reached, if the sum is minute.
For a best fit, you need at least two couples of points.
Bestfit with tolerances
As the sum of the tolerances is minimised with the Gauss criterion, some
individual values might be outside the tolerance range. For this reason there is
the possibility of the "bestfit with tolerances".
If you click this option, GEOPAK proceeds as follows:
• First, the bestfit is calculated according to the Gauss criterion.
• Then GEOPAK checks if all values are inside the tolerance. If
yes, no further action is required.
07.04.07 v3.0 327

CMM Movements
• If individual values are outside tolerance, the complete point

pattern is moved again until the point with the furthest outside
position lies on the tolerance boundary.
• If other points which previously were inside tolerance are now
outside tolerance, the part is considered scrap.
• Because the tolerance limits are playing a role here, you can
also use the MMC. For this, find detailed information
underMaximum Material Condition (MMC) .
Reference point
The option Reference Point is only active if the bestfit shall be done by "rotation".
The rotation is usually done around the origin. If this is not desired, you can use
this option to define a centre of rotation.
Notice
You can access the results of best fit (rotation and movement) as described in
formula calculation under the topic"Table of Operands".
Further topics
Two Purposes
Bestfit with Fixed Number of Points
Bestfit with Variable Number of Points
Degrees of Freedom with Bestfit
Tolerance and MMB with Bestfit
Graphics with Bestfit
Minimum/Maximum Calculation
Contour: Bestfit Inside Tolerance Limits
Bestfit Surface
17.38.2 Two Purposes

A best fit can do duty for two different purposes:
for evaluation if an alignment of points are together within a
tolerance (see also "Tolerance and MMB at Best Fit", "Graphic at
Best Fit"), or
You can determine a co-ordinate system (see "Create Co-Ordinate
System with Best Fit ").
Program Run
The process is different according to
whether you have a fixed number of actual points (see "Best Fit with
Fixed Number of Points " to which are assigned nominal values or
whether the number of the couple of points is variable (see "Best Fit
with Variable Number of Points").
17.38.3 Best Fit with Fixed Number of Points

Program Run:
Ö You measure the elements representing their actual values.
Ö In the pull-down menu, you select "Co-Ordinate System / Best Fit".
Ö In the "Best Fit" window, activate the "Single Selection-Criterion"
and select the degrees of freedom (see "Degrees of Freedom for
Best Fit ").
328 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
Ö Confirm with "OK" and come to the "Best Fit Elements" window of
the elements you have measured. These elements have a fixed
point.
Ö In this window you select an element and press the symbol.

The element you have selected is transferred to the window
"Expected Values" which only contains the selected elements.
When the element is transferred, GEOPAK prompts you under "co-ordinates" to
input the nominal values for the element. The element and the nominal value are
indicated in the window "Best Fit Elements".
Ö If you have, by mistake, transferred an element into the

"Selection" window, you can remove it again with the symbol.
Notice
Even if you have measured lots of elements you can make a clear and short
element list for selection. You only display the type you need, the others are
filtered. To do so, you disable the element symbols above the element list.
Immediately after your "OK"
the calculation is realized, and
in the protocol there are data about how much mm you have moved
respectively rotated your elements.
17.38.4 Best Fit with a Variable Number of Points

With a variable number of couples of points it is not possible to enter the nominal
values before. Example: A sub-program for rims with 4 or 5 fixing holes. In this
case, the nominal values are not entered for each element but the allocation is
realized via other elements that are input as "Theoretical Elements".
Program Run
Ö You define the theoretical elements to which you have assigned
nominal values.
These theoretical elements must have sequenced storage numbers
and must be of the same type.
Ö You measure the actual elements in the same order and
completely store them.
Ö You select in the pull-down menu “Co-ordinate System / Best Fit ".
Ö In the "Best Fit" window, activate the "Group Selection". For the
remaining preference possibilities refer to "Degrees of Freedom for
Best Fit ".
Now, a selection window in which you can
• select the first nominal and respectively actual element as well
as
• the number of your couples of points, is displayed.
With "OK", you start the calculation and the result is recorded.
17.38.5 Degrees of Freedom for Best Fit

Definition
Generally, the actual and nominal values can be moved and rotated as you like it.
Thus, you get the best result. To do so, activate the "Rotate & Shift" function.
07.04.07 v3.0 329

CMM Movements
In some cases, you optionally can only rotate or shift (see "Only Rotate" or " Only
Shift ").
Details
With the buttons below this selection you can modify once again the degrees of
freedom. Thus, if for example a movement is only possible in one direction or if a
rotation can only be carried out around one determined axis.
The selection in the top row facilitates the input.
If only one rotation is allowed, you can also enter the rotation point around which
rotation shall be realized. If there is no input, rotation is effected around the origin
of the actual co-ordinate system.
17.38.6 Tolerance and MMC for Best Fit

For a judgement "OK / NOK" a tolerance is necessary. You can input this
tolerance in the first window "Best fit". The position of the single actual values is
checked after the best fit against this tolerance limit.
Only for single selection
In case that not points, but circles are taken for the best fit calculation, it is also
possible to apply the MMC, if allowed. Then the individual tolerance limits are
expanded by the difference to the maximum material size. You inform the
program about this by clicking the check box "MMC".
In the window for the nominal values you must additionally input the maximum
material size of the diameter, which is:
The smallest allowable size of a hole;
The largest allowable size of a boss.
17.38.7 Graphics for Best Fit

For an evaluation of the result of the best fit calculation, a graphical
comparison can be activated by the symbol.
In the graphics, you can see the nominal points and the actual points, either
before or after the calculation.
The distances between the nominal and actual positions are
enlarged; you can either input or automatically set the scale factor.
The tolerance for each position is also displayed.
If an actual value is further away from its nominal than twice the
tolerance, it is not displayed. Only an arrow shows the direction
where the actual value lies. This is to avoid long lines crossing the
whole of the drawing.
17.38.8 Calculation of Minimum-/Maximum

On principle, you can calculate all defined element features with this function.
This function allows, for example to determine from a number of circles the
biggest or the smallest diameter. You have two possibilities: Single- orGroup
Selection.
Ö Activate the function via the menu bar "Calculation / Minimum <->
Maximum".
After termination of the calculations you have different values at
your disposal.
330 v3.0 07.04.07

CMM Movements
You can access these values in the formula calculation (see details
in topic "System Variable in Formula Calculation").
17.38.9 Best Fit

This topic is relevant to CAT1000S only
Background
The best fit calculations take a lot of time. The point cloud as a whole is shifted
and / or rotated until the optimal state will be achieved.
For the criterion for the „optimal" state we take the Gauss criterion.
This means that the sum of the squared distances comes to a
minimum.
The deviations are the distances of the actual points to the ideal
surface.
Process
The process moves on step by step:
After each step, the assignment of the actual points to the individual surfaces is
redefined.
The steps are executed until the achieved improvements fall below a certain limit.
Dialogue "Best Fit"
In CAT1000S
To activate the dialogue "Best fit" use the menu bar / Measure / Best fit" or
click this icon.
In GEOPAK / Learn mode
Activate the dialogue "Best fit for surface" via the menu bar / Tolerance /
Best fit for surface or click this icon.
Options in the Dialogue "Best Fit"
You can determine for the best fit
• whether CAT1000S can shift and rotate in all directions (this will
result in the smallest deviations), or
• whether only defined axes are allowed.
If only the rotation is allowed, you can also type in the point around which the
rotation takes place.
This point is called the reference point.
This is especially useful if the origin (this is the point of rotation) is located far
from the actual part. This is mainly true for parts, which are defined in a RPS (car
co-ordinate system).
The results of the best fit are displayed in the graphic protocol and in the
standard protocol.
Confirm best fit
If you activate the check box for "Confirm best fit calculation", the dialogue
"Accept best fit results" is shown after the best fit.
In this dialogue you can either accept or cancel the results of the best fit.
If you accept the best fit results, the results of the current best fit are
stored.
07.04.07 v3.0 331

CMM Movements
If you cancel the best fit results, the current best fit is not stored and
the results of the best fit executed before the last best fit are
restored.
The option "Confirm best fit" is stored in the GEOPAK CMM learn mode.
See further details under "Normal or Extended Precision".
332 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
18 Programming Tools
18.1 Programming Help Contents
Clicking on the topics in the below list, you will obtain the required information
about this topic.
Programming Help
Measurement Graphic / Measurement Sequence
Variables and Calculations
Definition of Variables
Input of Formula
Global and Local Variables
Input of Variables
Yes/No Variable
Store Variables to File
Store Variable in INI-File
Load Variable from INI-File
Load Variables from File
Transfer Actual CMM Position into Variable
Actual Temperature in Variable
Settings for Temperature Compensation
Check Temperature
Temperature Warning
Definition of String Variables
Input of String Variables
Store String Variables
Load String Variables
Store Text Variable in INI-File
Load Text Variable from INI-File
Formula Calculation
Overview: Operators and Functions
Scale factor
18.2 Programming Help

There are some functions designed to make easier for you generating an
effective part program.
Automatic Measurement: If you need the automatic element measurement,

just click on this icon (for example Circle). Then the automatic element
measurement window appears, immediately after you confirm the element. Thus,
it is not necessary to activate this function explicitly. The button remains pressed
if you activate the element again.
Automatic element finished: As soon as the required number of

measurement points has been taken,
• the element is considered to be ready and no more data points
are expected,
• the element is calculated and stored.
07.04.07 v3.0 333

Programming Tools
This only makes sense if you know in advance how many points you
need. If you want to keep measuring until you have reached the limits of
your element, you should deactivate this function. In this case, you
should use the icon "Automatic element finished" to tell GEOPAK that
the measurement has been finished.
Measurement Graphic: After you have activated the function, the element
you measure is continuously presented in the window "Measurement display".
Acoustic action: If you want, a voice can tell you what to do next; this is
especially useful for manual machines, or during manual alignment.
Tolerate: this button activates the tolerance-input window immediately after

you have confirmed the element window. In this case, you do not have to activate
the function explicitly.
Loop counter: Within a loop, the element memory number can be

automatically incremented for each execution by pressing this button. If you want
to store the element into the same memory number, do not use this button.
No projection: If you do not want the element to be automatically projected

into the plane it is nearest to, you should press this button.
18.3 Measurement Graphic / Measurement Sequence

You have four options for activating the measurement graphic:
Ö Click on both symbols:

The element and the number of the measured and of the expected
measurement points are displayed (see ill.).
Ö Click on the graphics symbol only:

The element and the number of the measured measurement points
are displayed.
Ö Click on none of the symbols:
The number of the measured measurement points is displayed.
Ö Click only on the symbol "Aut. element finished":
The number of the measured and of the expected measurement
points are displayed.
334 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
18.4 Variables and Calculations

In addition to the possibilities GEOPAK offers in connection with the geometrical
calculations, you can define – according to requirements - your own variables
and perform calculations. You can use the variables wherever GEOPAK expects
a numerical value. GEOPAK makes your work easier offering a list of the
variables, which you have defined before.
Ö Activate the "Define Variable and Calculate" dialogue window

via the symbol of the toolbar on the right of screen margin.
Ö By mouse-click, open the list box beside "Names of Variable".
Ö Click on "Your" Variable.
GEOPAK accepts this variable as input value.
Variables generally have three major advantages:
You can perform calculations, which are not programmed in
GEOPAK, e.g. the calculation of a the area of circle out of the
diameter, and ...
You can use variables (without other calculations) to edit flexible
part programs. This means that you only have to write a single part
program for similar parts that only differ in some measurements
For example, when calculating sealing rings having different
diameters: here, only one part program for different diameters is
sufficient if the diameter is defined as variable.
Variables can also be read in a file or output into a file. This way,
you can exchange data with other programs
18.5 Definition of Variables

In addition to the possibilities GEOPAK offers for the geometrical calculations,
you can define – according to your requirements - your own variables and
perform calculations. You can use the variables wherever GEOPAK expects a
numerical value.
Ö Call the function "Formula Calculation" via the symbol or the

menu "Calculate" and come to the "Define and Calculate Variables"
dialogue window.
Ö Input the name you want for your variable (maximum 18 characters)
into the line with names of variables.
An expressive term makes easier finding the correct variable again
and increases the readability of your part program.
You should try to find a method which makes sense (also see topic )
Hint
For detailed information, also refer to the topic Global and Local Variables
.
Decimal Places
As the next step, define in the dialogue window "Define Variable and Calculate"
how many decimal places you need for this variable. The calculation will be done
with the best possible accuracy, but for the
• protocol,
• tolerance and the
• comparison queries
07.04.07 v3.0 335

Programming Tools
only the number of decimal places you have defined is taken into account.
You should know
When calculating with decimal fractions, there is always a small

truncation error. This truncation error makes it nearly impossible that a
real number "exactly" accepts a value desired.
If you perform a query of a calculated value for equation with a number,
the computer will always inform you that the values are different because
normally, to make an example, they differentiate around 10*E-18.
However, this difference is not important for a normal application. The
operator however, wants figures with such a small difference to be
treated as "Equal".
You can find details in the topic Table of Operators and Functions .
18.6 Variables: Input of Formula

In the next description field, you can input just a number or a complete formula.
In each case, GEOPAK immediately displays the result on the right
(besides the text field) of the formula.
If a calculation cannot be performed, the result is shown as "-".
See which operandi and operators are allowed in a formula in detail
under the topic Table of Operators and Functions
Upper and lower case letters are of no importance.
Hint
For detailed information also refer to the topic Global and Local Variables
.
Include Element Characteristics
Ö If you want to include the characteristic of a measured element into
the calculation (e.g. the diameter of a measured circle), first click on
the list box "Elements" (at bottom left) with the elements already
defined
Ö Then, click on the text field "Feature". Here, select the characteristic
of the element.
Ö When clicking on the symbol, this element characteristic is

accepted in the input field for the formula.
If the calculation is making sense, the result is immediately
displayed.
In this dialogue window (top on the right), you find the symbol . You
can undo as many steps as you want.
336 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
18.7 Global and Local Variables

You can use the variables as global or local variables. The global variables are
valid in the complete part program, i.e. in the main program and all subprograms.
You can use the function "Local definition" (see ill. below) to define that certain
variables are only operative in a part of the part program. If, for example, a
variable is defined as a local variable in the main program, this variable is
unknown in a subprogram. Therefore, a variable that has been defined in a
subprogram may have the same name as a variable in the main program and
does not, for example, overwrite a global variable of the main program. It is used,
however, in the sub-program.
This means that the variable locally defined in the subprogram has a higher
priority than the global variable.
18.8 Input of Variables

This function allows you to enter variables in the running part program by means
of a dialogue box.
To open the "Input variable" dialogue box click on this icon or choose
"Calculate / Input variable" from the menu bar.
In the "Input variable" dialogue box, proceed as follows:
Simple input: Click on this icon if you wish to enter one

variable only.
• In the Text for dialogue text box enter the dialogue text. The
dialogue text describes the information to be entered in a part
program dialogue.
• Make your entries in the Name of variable, Suggestion, Lower
limit, Upper limit and Decimals text boxes. Make sure to use a
significant name of variable.
Hint
.
07.04.07 v3.0 337

Programming Tools
Select DialogDesigner files
From dialogue file: Click on this icon if you wish to enter

several variables in a dialogue box.
• In the Filename text box type the file name or...
• ... click on this icon to choose from the displayed .udl files
that you have created before.
You will find more detailed information in the file "Specifications
for Layout Dialogue Boxes" (dia_lay_e.pdf) on the MCOSMOS
CD-ROM.
• As it is possible to create several dialogues in one file enter the
name of the dialogue in the "Name of dialogue" text box.
You can enter up to 18 characters for the variable name. All letters, digits
and the underline are admissible. The variable name may not start with a
digit.
18.9 Yes/No Variable

This function is the simple version of the "Input variable" dialogue box. E.g. if you
wish to determine before a measurement that the measuring results are to be
printed, choose "Calculate / Yes/No variable" from the menu bar.
Make your entries in the Text for dialogue and Name of variable text boxes.
Hint
.
18.10 Store Variables to File

If you need the contents of the variables beyond the actual program run you
should use the function "Store Variables to file" (menu bar "Calculate / Store
Variables to file"). In the following window, you enter the file for the variables, so
all defined variables at this moment are stored.
18.10.1 Enter name of file for variables

Ö Click the button "Select file".
Ö Select a folder and/or file.
Ö Confirm your selection by clicking the button "Store".
The path with the file name of the file for variables is displayed in
the input field "File for variables".
Note
You can also enter the name of the file for variables manually in the input
field "File for variables".
338 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
Attach variables or overwrite file for variables
When you activate the graphical checkbox "Attach", the variables are
attached to the end of the file for variables. This is useful when the function
"Store variables to file" is used in a loop, as otherwise the file for variables is
overwritten with the variables.
18.10.2 Store filter to variables
With activating the graphical checkbox "Filter for storing", you activate a
filter that allows only certain variables to be stored into the file for variables.
Ö Enter your filter into the input field "Filter for storing".
In this input field, you may use these wild cards: star (*) and
question mark (?).
Example:
Use in a part program the variable names SCOORX, SCOORY and
SCOORZ, for example, for a start point. To store these three variables,
enter the string "?COOR*" in the input field "Filter for storing".
Define variable name
Make sure that you define meaningful names for your variables. Meaningful
names will allow you to immediately recognise content and task of the variable
and will facilitate the filtering of the variables.
For information about how to define variables names, go to the topic "Input
Variable".
18.11 Store Variable in INI-File

You can store the variables in INI-files. An INI-file is an ASCII-file in a special
format, like for example:
:
[SectionName]
VariableName=1
:
To get to the function, go to the menu bar / Calculate. In the following dialogue
window you can decide
which variable is to be stored into the file,
and you select the INI-file.
After selecting this file you can have the existing INI-sectors
displayed by clicking the arrow.
After selecting the sector you can have all INI-variables displayed.
Hints
Non-existing files, sectors or variables are created.
The variables in the text box at the top and the INI-variables may have
different names.
The contents of the variables are assigned to the contents of the INI-
variables.
07.04.07 v3.0 339

Programming Tools
18.12 Load Variable from INI-File

You can load the variables from INI-files. An INI-file is an ASCII-file in a special
:
[SectionName]
VariableName=1
:
window you can decide,
which variable shall be loaded from the file.
Select the INI-file.
Hints
different names.
The contents of the variables are assigned to the contents of the INI-
variables.
In this dialogue window you can also opt for the Local Definition of
Variables.
18.13 Load Variables from File

You can reload all variables as you have stored them before. Only enter the
name of the file.
Load variables with a filter
If you want to load only a single variable activate the symbol. Enter, for
example the name of only one variable. Only the one you have selected is loaded
(e.g. var1). Or you enter a wildcard (e.g. var*). In this case, all variables
beginning with "var" are loaded.
Hint
.
18.13.1 Load variables from a file section
Ö If you want to load variables from a certain section of the file

for variables, activate this symbol.
Ö Write the line number in the input field "Load starting with line
number".
Ö Write the number of lines into the input field "Number of lines" to
define how many lines shall be read out from the file for variables.
340 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
You should be very familiar with the structure of the file for
variables to be able to use this function.
18.13.2 Attention with Definition

Before defining variables you should take care of giving names that make sense.
Here an example:
• In a sub-program you want to load the jumping-off point via X, Y
and Z out of a file without overwriting other variables when
loading.
• If you have named these variables XCoor, YCoor and ZCoor,
you would have to write three loading instructions.
• But if you have designated them CoorX, CoorY and CoorZ, you
can load them with one instruction, namely Coor*.
For information about how to define the variable names, go to the topic "Input
Variable".
18.13.3 Calling Variable from File

You can wait for a variable file of another program.
Click this symbol to make sure that the next program run really waits for
this current information. The file is then deleted after reading.
Click this symbol, if you want to select a variables file only while the
program run takes place. Then during the execution of the part program the run
of the part program is stopped and you can select a variables file in the file
selection dialogue "Load Variables from File".
18.14 Transfer Actual CMM Position to Variable

With the help of this function you can transfer the position of the CMM and/or the
position of the round table to variables.
Click on the symbol or use the menu bar with the functions "Calculate /
Actual Position in Variable".
In the following dialog window input the names of the variables into the text
boxes.
Furthermore, you can read in this position either in the actual part co-
ordinate system (de-activated symbol) or in the machine co-ordinate system
(symbol activated).
Hint
When entering the name of the variable, you can use either a name
already existing, or a new one. If you use a new name, a new variable will
be created.
07.04.07 v3.0 341

Programming Tools
Be careful when entering the name. Any typing mistake you make
causes a new (wrong) variable to be created under this name and possibly you
then use this variable.
Hint
.
18.15 Actual Temperature in Variable

To record the workpiece temperature it is possible to connect 1 - 8 temperature
sensors to the control system.
In order for you to record and, if necessary, document temperature variations in
the part program, these variations can be loaded into variables (refer also to the
subject Formula Input). Make the following entries in the "Current Temperature
into Variable" dialogue from the "Calculations" menu:
Name the variable and make your choice which temperature you want to take.
The calculation temperature is recorded at every part program start.
GEOPAK assumes that temperature remains unchanged while the
program is running.
The average value from all available sensors is shown in the
"Machine Position" window. This allows the part program to check
that the calculated temperature is still valid.
You can also make your decision for the average temperature of
selected sensors. In this case one button is active for each
connected sensor.
If you want to know the CMM's current temperature values at the three axes, you
will have to click, at your option, on one of the buttons in the lower section of this
dialogue. The CMM will use these temperatures automatically to compensate for
its own temperature dependence.
For information on this subject refer to Temperature Compensation and,
if a manual CMM is of interest to you, to the subject Temperature Compensation:
Manual CMM.
Hint
.
18.16 Settings for Temperature Compensation

18.16.1 Introduction
In cases where you wish to compensate for workpiece expansion or shrinkage,
you have to pay special attention to a reference point. Our picture below is an
example showing a workpiece held by a fixed stop (hatched). Expansions are
possible only in the direction of the arrow. The reference point is marked with X.
342 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
The workpiece can also be bolted (see picture below).
As a general rule, the reference point is always the point whose position remains
absolutely the same despite material expansion or shrinkage.
Make sure that the reference point of a rotary table that is

required to be turned coincides with the centre of the table..
18.16.2 Settings in the dialogue

To access the dialogue, go to the "Calculate" menu and the "Settings for
Temperature Compensation" functions. The dialogue is divided into for sections.
Activate temperature compensation of the workpiece
It is up to you whether you want to activate the temperature compensation of the
workpiece or not.
Temperature coefficient
You make your decision for or against a change. If your decision is positive, enter
the coefficient or choose the workpiece material.
For detailed information also refer to the topic Temperature Coefficient: Select
from List
07.04.07 v3.0 343

Programming Tools
18.16.3 Define calculation temperature

You have the choice of these two options:
Use initial temperature
Part programs that have been generated by versions before v2.4
are working with this option.
Periodical update of temperature
The standard setting is 10 seconds for fluctuations of temperature of
more than 0.1 degree Celsius.
Setting the calculation temperature
When you know the temperature of the workpiece but you have no
temperature sensors, enter your known calculation temperature
here.
Calculation temperature
You choose the average temperature of either all available sensors or selected
sensors (for details refer to the subject Current Temperature into Variable).
Reference point for compensation
To change the reference point, proceed as follows:
Enter the workpiece co-ordinates, or ...
Take the current CMM position by clicking on the symbol.

Re-editing is possible.
Where a rotary table is available, you can also choose the rotary
table position.
18.16.4 Apply temperature compensation to movements

If you should approach the same co-ordinates in spite of an expansion of the
workpiece, e.g., you will get to results which possibly do not agree with the
measurement job order (see picture below). To compensate for this fault, select
the option "Apply Temperature Compensation to Movements".
In this example a circle is measured in XY - plane.

Before the expansion the measuring height is about -4.999.
After the expansion the measuring height lies with -5.000
In order to be able to activate this option, you must have indicated the reference
point.
Also refer to the topic Check Temperature .
344 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
18.17 Check Temperature

To check the temperature, use the options on the right hand side of the dialogue
Settings for Temperature Compensation. This, however, requires that you have
first decided to "Use start temperature" or to "Update temperature periodically ".
Check Minimum and Maximum of Calculation Temperature
Activate this option with a click on the button and enter the upper or lower limit.
Wait until inside limits
Into the text box next to the button "Wait until inside limits" you have to enter a
waiting period in minutes. In case that the temperature leaves the admissible
range, GEOPAK displays a Temperature Warning during the waiting period. If the
temperature is not within the admissible range during this waiting period, an error
is set in the repeat mode and the part program is usually aborted.
The function can only be activated when you have first opted for "Periodically
update temperature".
Set error if out of limit
By selecting this option, you will immediately get an error message in the repeat
mode when the limits are exceeded.
Hint
In the learn mode, you get a warning in both cases. You can ignore the
warning to proceed working, as in the learn mode you are only starting by
creating a part program. This hint also applies to the two following
options.
Check Deviation of Current Temperature from Start Temperature
In this section you enter the admissible deviation from the start temperature. As
regards the other options, refer to the information above.
Check Min. and Max. Temperature of all selected CMM Scales
In this box, a button is available for each axis. By clicking a button, all other
options are activated.
The minimum and maximum temperature values depend on the CMM used.
Although you can see the values in the learn mode, the values are not included
into the part program.
If you want to execute the part program without warnings or error

messages, but with documented extreme temperatures, you can assign
these data to specifically defined variables (for more detailed
information, refer to the topic
Other GEOPAK Variables
.
18.18 Temperature Warning

In the dialogue "Settings for temperature compensation" you can check the
temperature. The dialogue "Temperature warning" appears in the repeat mode
when a temperature to be checked leaves its admissible range.
07.04.07 v3.0 345

Programming Tools
This dialogue closes automatically when

the waiting period has expired or
when the temperature moves back into its admissible range before
the end of the waiting period.
When the temperature does not reach its admissible range or when you click on
"abort", an error is set (for detailed information, refer to the topic "Check
Temperature").
18.19 Definition of String Variables

This function allows you to change character strings or to "remember them for
reuse", e.g. you can make use of this function if you wish to determine a file
name.
Ö To open the "Define string variable" dialogue box click on

this icon or choose "Calculate / Define string variable" from the
menu bar.
Ö In the Name of string variable text box enter a name to define the
variable (18 characters max.).
A significant name makes it easy to find the correct string variable
and improves the legibility of your part program (see also chapter
Store variables to file/Load variables from file).
You will find further information in the file "UM_string_code_e.pdf". The file you
find in the MCOSMOS directory "Documentation \ files \ geopak".
Hint
.
18.20 Input of String Variables

This function allows you to enter string variables in the running part program by
means of a dialogue box.
To open the "Input string variable" dialogue box click on this icon or
choose "Calculate / Input string variable" from the menu bar.
In the "Input string variable" dialogue box, proceed as follows:
Simple input: Click on this icon if you wish to enter one

variable only.
• In the Text for dialogue text box enter the dialogue text. The
dialogue text describes the information to be entered in a part
program dialogue.
• Make your entries in the Name of string variable, Input length
and Suggestion text boxes. Make sure to use a significant name
of string variable.
346 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
Select Dialog-Designer files
From dialogue file: Click on this icon if you wish to enter several string
variables in a dialogue box.
• In the Filename text box type the file name or...
• ... click on this icon to choose from the displayed .udl

files that you have to create before.
For further information concerning the Specifications for Layout
Dialogoe Boxes, please refer to your MCOSMOS CD-ROM
under "Documents", folder "GEOPAK", file "dia_lay_e.pdf".
• As it is possible to create several dialogues in one file enter the
name of the dialogue in the "Name of dialogue" text box.
You can enter up to 18 characters for the variable name. All letters, digits
and the underline are admissible. The variable name may not start with a
digit.
Hint
.
18.21 Store String Variables

You make use of this function if you need the contents of string variables for
further purposes. To open the "Store string variables" dialogue box choose
"Calculate / Store string variables" from the menu bar and enter the file for the
string variables. All string variables defined at this time will be stored.
18.21.1 Enter name of file for variables

Ö Click the button "Select file".
Ö Select a folder and/or file.
Ö Confirm your selection with a click on the button "Store".
The path with the file name of the file for variables is displayed in
the input field "File for variables".
Note
You can also enter the name of the file for variables manually into the
input field "File for variables".
Attach string variables or overwrite file for variables
When you activate the graphical checkbox "Attach", the string variables
are attached to the end of the file for variables. This is useful when the function
"Store string variables to file" is used in a loop, as otherwise the file for variables
is overwritten with the string variables.
07.04.07 v3.0 347

Programming Tools
18.21.2 Store filter to string variables
With activating the graphical checkbox "Filter for storing", you activate a
filter that allows only certain string variables to be stored into the file for
variables.
Ö Enter your filter into the input field "Filter for storing".
In this input field, you may use these wild cards: star (*) and
question mark (?).
Example:
Use in a part program the variable names SCOORX, SCOORY and
SCOORZ, for example, for a start point. To store these three string
variables, enter the string "?COOR*" in the input field "Filter for storing".
Define string variable name
Make sure that you define meaningful names for your string variables. Meaningful
names will allow you to immediately recognise content and task of the string
variable and will facilitate the filtering of the variables.
For information about how to define string variables, go to the topic "Define String
Variables".
18.22 Load string variables

You can reload all string variables as you have stored them before. For this, you
need only enter the name of the file.
Basically you must know that two different formats can be read in:
Format with names of string variables
Format without names of string variables
18.22.1 Load string variables with a filter
If you want to load only some individual string variables or groups of

variables, activate this symbol.
The filter function has different effects:
The file to be read already contains the name of the string variable.
Only the string variables, which correspond to the filter, are read.
The file to be read does not contain the name of the string variable.
In this case the filter represents the first part of the name to be
defined for the string variable.
If you do not preset a filter, "STR" will be used as default string variable. The
second part is an incremental counter (upwards) starting with zero.
Example for Use load filter with names of string variables
A file of string variables with the following contents exists:
• Text1=First Text
• Text2=Second Text
• Info1=First Information
• Info2=Second Information
The "Text*" filter will be set.
The following string variables are read:
• Text1=First Text
348 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
• Text2=Second Text
Example for Use load filter without names of string variables
A file of string variables with the following contents exists:
• First Text
• Second Text
• Third Text
• Fourth Text
The "Text*" filter will be set.
The following string variables are read:
• Text0= First Text
• Text1= Second Text
• Text2= Third Text
• Text3= Fourth Text
18.22.2 Load string variables from a file section
Ö If you want to load string variables from a certain file section

of the file for variables, activate this symbol.
Ö Enter the line number into the input field "Load starting with line
number".
Ö Enter the number of lines in the input field "Number of lines" to
define how many lines are to be read out of the file for variables.
You should be very familiar with the structure of the file for
variables to be able to use this function.
18.22.3 Wait for file with string variable

Click on the Wait for file icon to wait for a file of string variables of another
program.
Click this symbol to make sure that the next program run really waits for
this current information. The file is then deleted after reading.
Click this symbol, if you want to select a variables file only while the
program run takes place. Then during the execution of the part program the run
of the part program is stopped and you can select a variables file in the file
selection dialogue "Load Variables from File".
Hint
.
18.23 Store Text Variable in INI-File

You can store the text variables in INI-files. An INI-file is an ASCII-file in a special
:
07.04.07 v3.0 349

Programming Tools
[SectionName]
VariableName=1
:
which variable shall be loaded from the file,
and you select the INI-file.
Hints
different names.
The contents of the text variables are assigned to the contents of the INI-
variables.
18.24 Load Text Variable from INI-File

You can store the text variables in INI-files. An INI-file is an ASCII_file in a special
:
[SectionName]
VariableName=1
:
which text variable shall be loaded from the file.
Select the INI-file. After selecting this file you can have all existing
INI-sectors displayed by clicking the arrow in the following text box.
Hints
The text variables in the text box at the top may have different names.
The contents of the INI-variables are assigned to the contents of the text
variables.
For detailed information also refer to the topic Global and Local Variables.
18.25 Formula Calculation
You come to the dialog "Define Variable and Calculate" via the symbol or
the menu bar "Calculate / Formula Calculation".
Ö In the text box "System Parameters" of the dialog you determine the
list selection for...
• Results of Min/Max Calculation
• Results for Best Fit
• Probe Data
• CNC Parameters
350 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
Ö In the list box on the bottom right, you search for a corresponding
component.
Ö For acceptance, click on the symbol.

The component you selected appears on top of the text box.
Over the symbol "Undo" you can make each action again
annulled. That is especially then helpful if you deleted mistakenly
formula entries.
Details about parameters can be taken from the topic "Table of Operators and
Functions"
Hint
.
18.26 Operators and Functions

18.26.1 Overview: Operators and Functions
Beginning from Version 2.2, this topic appears in our Online Help in an updated,
re-organised form, sectioned into several parts. For fast access to the chapter
required, click on one of the following titles.
Arithmetic Operators Minimum Maximum
Relational operators Best Fit
Logical Operators Other GEOPAK Variables
Constants Date and Time
Trigonometrical Functions Examples
Arithmetic Functions Result of Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons
Operator Precedence Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison
Basic Geometry Elements Nominal-to-Actual Comparison of Last
Element
GEOPAK Probes Result of All Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons
GEOPAK Rotary Table Data Measurement Points
GEOPAK Elements: Hole
Shapes
18.26.2 Arithmetic Operators

Operator Description
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
^ Exponential
18.26.3 Relational operators

< Less than
07.04.07 v3.0 351

Programming Tools
<= Less than or equal to
> Greater than
>= Greater than or equal to
= Equal to
<> Not equal to
Result of logical operations (comparison)

Operato Relation between operand 1 and operand 2 Result
r
< operand 1 is less than operand 2 1
< operand 1 is greater than or equal to operand 2 0
<= operand 1 is less than or equal to operand 2 1
<= operand 1 is greater than operand 2 0
= operand 1 is equal to operand 2 1
= operand 1 is not equal to operand 2 0
>= operand 1 is greater than or equal to operand 2 1
>= operand 1 is less than operand 2 0
> operand 1 is greater than operand 2 1
> operand 1 is less than or equal to operand 2 0
<> operand 1 is not equal to operand 2 1
<> operand 1 is equal to operand 2 0
18.26.4 Logical Operators

AND Logical AND
OR Logical OR
NOT Logical NOT
Result of logical operations (Boolean operators)

Operator Operand Operand Result
1 2
AND 0 0 0
AND 0 <>0 0
AND <>0 0 0
AND <>0 <>0 1
OR 0 0 0
OR 0 <>0 1
OR <>0 0 1
OR <>0 <>0 1
NOT 0 - 1
NOT 1 - 0
18.26.5 Constants
Spelling Description
352 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
PI Pi (3,14159)
E Euler’s constant (2.71828...)
18.26.6 Trigonometrical Functions

The trigonometrical functions expect the angles to be specified in degrees as
parameters and produce them (inverse functions), in turn, in degrees.
SIN Sine
COS Cosine
TAN Tangent
ASN Inverse sine
ACS Inverse cosine
ATN Inverse tangent
18.26.7 Arithmetic Functions

LG Logarithm (base 10)
LGN Natural logarithm (base e)
SQR Square
SQRT Square root
SGN Sign
ABS Absolute value
INT Truncation
FRC Fraction
RND Round
MIN Minimum
MAX Maximum
DEG Conversion from radiant to degree
RAD Conversion from degree to radiant
F2C Conversion from °F to °C
C2F Conversion from °C to °F
GAUSSR Gaussian distributed random value in range of ± argument
AND
RAND Gaussian distributed random value in range of ± argument
18.26.8 Operator Precedence

Operator precedence from the highest to lowest
Unary -, NOT
EXPONENT
SGN, ABS, INT, FRC, RND, MIN, MAX, DEG, RAD, SQR, SQRT, SIN, COS,
TAN, ASN, ACS, ATN
*, /
+, -
AND
07.04.07 v3.0 353

Programming Tools
Operator precedence from the highest to lowest

OR
<, <=, >, >=, =, <>
The operator precedence can be changed by ‘()’.
18.26.9 Basic Geometry Elements

PT Point
CR Circle
EL Ellipse
CO Cone
CY Cylinder
LN Line
PL Plane
SP Sphere
DI Distance
ANG Angle
Element components
The values of the element features depend on the unit (inch or mm).
X,Y,Z Location
I,J,K Direction (cosine format)
A,B,C Direction (a,b,g)(angles in degrees)
RcylXY, Cylindrical co-ordinate system, radius
RcylYZ,
RCylZX
RSph Spherical co-ordinate system, radius
PhiXY, Cylindrical & spherical co-ordinate system,
PhiYZ, angle j
PhiZX
ThetaX, Spherical co-ordinate system, angle J
ThetaY,
ThetaZ
H Only cylinder, height
L Length
R Radius of circle, etc. and large radius of
ellipse
D Diameter (same as radius)
Di Distance from origin (plane & line)
R2 Big radius of ellipse
D2 Big diameter of ellipse
CA Cone angle (degree)
ChA Half cone angle (degree)
Rng Range (form of element)
Sig Sigma
354 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
Ang Only for angle, calculated angle
XY,YZ,ZX Only for angle, projected angle
Di Only for distance, calculated distance
MaxNo Highest used element number
Example for element access:
Access the diameter of the circle with the memory number 3
CR[3].D
Access the X component (cosine angle) of the cylinder axis with the
memory number 8
CY[8].I
Further Element Data
General
CR.LastNo Returns the last handled element
number of a kind of element.
CR[1].NoOfPts Returns the number of points of the
specified element. This works with
each element.
18.26.10 GEOPAK Elements: Hole Shapes

Elementtyp Component Size of the hole
SQ W Width of the square
RE W Width of the rectangle
RE L Length of the rectangle
SL W Width of the slot
SL L Length of the slot
DR W Width of the drop
DR L Length of the drop
DR R Large radius=W/2 of the drop
DR R2 small Radius of the drop
TR W Length of the triangle
TR H Height of the triangle
TZ W Width of the trapezoid
TZ H Height of the trapezoid
HX W Width of a hexagon
HX W2 Width 2 of a hexagon
Like for the Basic Geometry Elements you can also enter the following variable
for the hole shapes.
Position:
Cartesian co-ordinates
Cylinder co-ordinates
Sphere co-ordinates
The same applies for the direction of the axis as an angle or in cosine format.
07.04.07 v3.0 355

Programming Tools
18.26.11 GEOPAK Probes

PRB Probe
Only the actual probe can be accessed.
Probe components
X,Y,Z Offsets
A,B Angles of rotary probe
R Radius of probe
D Diameter of probe
Rng Range (form)
Sig Sigma
Tree Number of probe tree
Num Number of actual probe
MaxNum Highest probe number used
NoOfDef Number of defined probes
MBall.D Master ball diameter
MBall.R Master ball radius
MBall.X Master ball X position
MBall.Y Master ball Y position
MBall.Z Master ball Z position
TreeOffs. Offset of actual tree in X to tree 1
X
TreeOffs. Offset of actual tree in Y to tree 1
Y
TreeOffs. Offset of actual tree in Z to tree 1
Z
Scanning probe components

PRB.Scan. Probe radius
R
PRB.Scan. Probe diameter
D
PRB.Scan. Range (form)
Rng
PRB.Scan. Sigma
Sig
Hint
All access functions which get the scan data work as follows:
If there is no scan data they return the "normal" data, means the data from
the probe calibrated in non scanning mode.
Example for probe access:
Access the diameter of the actual probe
PRB.D
356 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
Access the X offset

PRB.X
The following six probes 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8 are defined. Probe number 4 und 5 are
missing.
The following values are returned:
Prb.MaxNum = 8
Prb.NoOfDef = 6
18.26.12 GEOPAK Rotary Table Data

Syntax Description
RT Rotary Table
Syntax Description
Ang Current angle in degree
X, Y, Z Alignment position in machine co-ordinates
A, B, C Alignment direction in degree
I, J, K Alignment direction (Cosine format)
18.26.13 Minimum Maximum

These values are not available unless the minimum-maximum calculation
function has been performed previously ( Menu bar / Calculation / Minimum<-
>Maximum).
Minimum maximum calculation
MinMax Result of the minimum maximum calculation
Minimum maximum features

MinVal Minimum
MaxVal Maximum
Avg Average (mean)
Sig Sigma
MemMinElm Element number of the element with the minimum value
MemMaxElm Element number of the element with the maximum value
Minimum maximum components

X,Y,Z Location
I,J,K Direction (cosine format)
ElI, ElJ, ElK Direction of ellipse axis (cosine format)
A,B,C Direction (α,β,γ)(angles in degrees)
ElA, ElB, ElC Direction of ellipse axis (α,β,γ)(angles in degrees)
RCylXY, RCylYZ, Cylindrical co-ordinate system, radius
RCylZX
07.04.07 v3.0 357

Programming Tools
RSph Spherical co-ordinate system, radius
PhiXY, PhiYZ, PhiZX Cylindrical & spherical co-ordinate system, angle ϕ
ThetaX, ThetaY, Spherical co-ordinate system, angle ϑ
ThetaZ
R Radius of circle, etc. and large radius of ellipse
D Diameter (same as radius)
Di Distance from origin (plane & line)
R2 Small radius of ellipse
D2 Small diameter of ellipse
CA Cone angle (degree)
ChA Half cone angle (degree)
Sig Sigma
Ang Only for angle, calculated angle
XY,YZ,ZX Only for angle, projected angle
AngXY,AngYZ,AngZX Only for angle, projected angle, these terms only exist
for compatibility with the distance terms
DiXYZ Only for distance, calculated distance
DiX, DiY, DiZ Components of the distance calculation
Example for minimum maximum access:

Access the range of the x co-ordinates
MinMax.Rng.X
$$ access the maximum value of the diameter
MinMax.MaxVal.D
$$ access the element number with the maximum vector component
in x direction
MinMax.MemMaxElm.I
18.26.14 Best Fit

These values are not available unless a best fit has been performed previously
(Menu bar / Co-Ordinate System / Best Fit)
BestFit Result of best fit
Best Fit Components

X,Y,Z Offsets (translation)
A,B,C Angles (rotation) (a,b,g) (angles in degrees)
I,J,K Angles (rotation) (cosine format)
Example for best fit access:

Access the x component of the translation vector
BestFit.X
358 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
Access the rotation angle b

BestFit.B
18.26.15 Other GEOPAK Variables

SYS.UF Unit factor, 1.00 in mm mode, 25.4 in inch mode
SYS.RC Repeat counter
SYS.LC Loop counter
SYS.TC Temperature coefficient
SYS.SF Scale factor
CNC.SD Safety distance of CMMC
CS.Num Actual co-ordinate system number
Sys.IOBit[x] Status (0/1) of IO-Bit no x
x from 0 to 99
If you need a temperature maximum or temperature minimum, you can use one
of the following formulas.
Sys.TCalcMax Maximum calculation temperature (of workpiece)
Sys.TCalcMin Minimum calculation temperature (of workpiece)
Sys.TActMax Maximum actual temperature (of workpiece)
Sys.TActMin Minimum actual temperature (of workpiece)
Sys.TXScaleMa Maximum CMM x-scale temperature
x
Sys.TXScaleMin Minimum CMM x-scale temperature
Sys.TYScaleMa Maximum CMM y-scale temperature
x
Sys.TYScaleMin Minimum CMM y-scale temperature
Sys.TZScaleMa Maximum CMM z-scale temperature
x
Sys.TZScaleMin Minimum CMM z-scale temperature
Sys.TScaleMax Maximum of any CMM scale temperature
Sys.TScaleMin Minimum of any CMM scale temperature
18.26.16 Date and Time

Sys.Time.H current hour
Sys.Time.M current minutes
Sys.Time.S current seconds
Sys.Time.M current milliseconds
S
Sys.Date.Y year
Sys.Date.M month
Sys.Date.D day
Sys.Date.Do day of the year
Y
07.04.07 v3.0 359

Programming Tools
Week-days
Sys.Date.Do Week-day as per ISO 8601
W
Sys.Date.Do Week-day as per current user settings
Wu
Sys.Date.Do Week-day as per system settings
Ws
Week numbers
Sys.Date.W Week as per ISO 8601
Sys.Date.Wu Week as per current user settings
Sys.Date.Ws Week as per system settings
System Time
SYS.CT Current 'C' time, seconds from 1.01.1970 UTC.
Based on the ISO norm ISO 8601:1988 / EN 28601:1992 / before DIN

1355.
In Europe, all three possibilities are identical but in the USA, we have to
do with the following conditions:
• The first weekday is Sunday.

• The first week is the week of the 01.01 (according to ISO: the
first weekday is: Monday; first week is: the week containing the
04.01).
Hint
Should you wish to register the time required to run your part program,
you are well advised to take the difference between two system time
readings (SYS.CT).
18.26.17 Examples
Calculate the polar angle from circle centre to x axis and assign the
variable "Pangle" to it
Pangll=ATN(CR[1].Y/CR[1].X)
Calculate the area of the circle with the memory number 4
FL=Pi/4*SQR(CR[4].D)
Assign a value to variable var2
var2=3.00
Calculate double the amount of var2
var3=var2 * 2
360 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
18.26.18 Result of Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons

The Version 2.2 offers you a variety of new variables which allow you, for
instance, to obtain information on
the last nominal-to-actual comparison, or on
all nominal-to-actual comparisons of one measurement.
You can use the information about the last nominal-to-actual comparison as basis
for your decision as to how to proceed with the part program.
You access the dialogue "Define Variable and Calculate" through "Menu bar /
Calculate / Formula Calculation". This dialogue provides you the selection lists
under the heading "System Parameters (see fig. below).
You should differentiate between

a general statement as to whether or not the tolerance values have
been exceeded.
You obtain this general statement through

• the Last Feature (System Variable "Tol") ,
• the Last Element (System Variable "Tol.Cmd") or
• all Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons (System Variable "Tol.All").
each single value of a feature (current position, diameter, etc.)
However, to get these individual values, you should refer to a single
nominal-to-actual comparison only. From the system variables, you
should choose the option "Tol".
Hint
When you use one of the tolerance variables for the "Formula Calculation"
without having performed a nominal-to-actual comparison, the return
value will always be = 0.
18.26.19 Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison

You can make use of all values calculated as a result of a nominal-to-actual
comparison, using for this purpose the following table with the system variable
"Tol".
Spelling Description Value type
Tol.Actual Actual value Numerical
value
Tol.ActCrd Actual value of the first co-ordinate of position Numerical
1 tolerance or concentricity depends on the projection value
plane
Tol.ActCrd Actual value of the second co-ordinate of position Numerical
plane
Tol.ActCrd Actual value of the third co-ordinate of position Numerical
plane
07.04.07 v3.0 361

Programming Tools
Spelling Description Value type

Tol.Deviati Deviation Numerical
on value
Tol.LowerT Lower tolerance limit Numerical
ol value
Tol.Nomina Actual value Numerical
l value
Tol.OutOfS Value out of specification Numerical
pec value
Tol.PosNo Position number Numerical
value
Tol.RefCrd Reference value of the first co-ordinate of position Numerical
plane
Tol.RefCrd Reference value of the second co-ordinate of Numerical
2 position tolerance or concentricity depends on the value
projection plane
Tol.RefCrd Reference value of the third co-ordinate of position Numerical
plane
Tol.UpperT Upper tolerance limit Numerical
ol value
Tol.NomTol Nominal tolerance Numerical
value
Tol.LowerS Lower specification (nominal + lower tol) Numerical
pec value
Tol.UpperS Upper specification (nominal + upper tol) Numerical
pec value
You obtain the general statement in the variables "Tol.TolState",
"Tol.TolUpperState" and "Tol.TolLowerState" as per the following table.
Tolerance state
TolStat TolUpper TolLower
State State
Actual value beyond upper tolerance 2 2 0
Actual value between upper tolerance and 1 1 0
upper intervention limit
Actual value between upper and lower 0 0 0
intervention limit
Actual value between lower intervention 1 0 1
limit and lower tolerance
Actual value below lower tolerance 2 0 2
362 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
18.26.20 Nominal-to-Actual Comparison of Last Element

Should you want to obtain a general statement on all features of the last,
tolerance command you use for this purpose the system variable
"Tol.Cmd.TolStae". In doing this, the results will be presented in accordance with
the table "Tolerance state" (refer to Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison). In this
case, of all features of this element the worst result (highest number) will be
taken.
You have the following possibilities:
Spellin Description Value
g type
Tol.Cm Returns the state of the tolerance command. Toleran
d.TolSt ce state
ate
Tol.Cm Returns the state of the tolerance command as TolState , Toleran
d.TolUp but only for the upper tolerance. See also table below. ce state
perStat
e
Tol.Cm Returns the state of the tolerance command as TolState, but Toleran
d.TolLo only for the lower tolerance. See also table below.. ce state
werStat
e
18.26.21 Result of All Nominal-to-Actual Comparisons

You can use this variable at the end of a part program, if you want to know if all
dimensions of the part are within the tolerance or intervention limits (System
Variable "Tol.All."). In doing this, the results will be presented in accordance with
the table "Tolerance state" (refer to Last Nominal-to-Actual Comparison). In this
case, of all features of this element the worst result (highest number) will be
taken.
In addition, you can request summary information in line with the following
table.
Spelling Description Value

type
Tol.All.TolStat Returns the state of all tolerance commands Three-
e State
Tol.All.TolUpp Returns the state of all tolerance commands as Three-
erState TolState, but only for the upper tolerance. Cf. table State
below.
Tol.All.TolLow Returns the state of all tolerance commands as Three-
erState TolState, but only for the lower tolerance. Cf. table State
below.
Tol.All.MaxDe Returns the maximum deviation value over all Numerica
viation tolerance comparisons l value
(algebraic signs are observed, e.g. -0.007 is smaller
than +0.006.)
Tol.All.MinDe Returns the minimum deviation value over all Numerica
viation tolerance comparisons l value
07.04.07 v3.0 363

Programming Tools
Spelling Description Value

type
Tol.All.MaxOu Returns the maximum “out of spec.” value over all Numerica
tOfSpec tolerance comparisons l value
Tol.All.MinOut Returns the minimum “out of spec.” value over all Numerica
OfSpec tolerance comparisons l value
Tol.Count.No Number of tolerance comparisons Numerica
OfTol l value
Tol.Count.InT Number of the tolerance comparisons within the Numerica
ol tolerance l value
Tol.Count.InC Number of the tolerance comparisons within the Numerica
trl intervention limits l value
Tol.Count.OO Number of the tolerance comparisons out of the Numerica
C intervention limits (that is, between intervention limit l value
and tolerance intervention limit)
T tolerance limits l value
CUpper upper intervention limits l value
CLower lower intervention limits l value
TUpper upper tolerance limits l value
TLower lower tolerance limits l value
Remarks:
Tol.Count.InTol + Tol.Count.OOT = Tol.Count.NoOfTol
Tol.Count.InCtrl + Tol.Count.OOC + Tol.Count.OOT = Tol.Count.NoOfTol
Tol.Count.InCtrl + Tol.Count.OOC = Tol.Count.InTol
Tol.Count.OOCUpper + Tol.Count.OOCLower = Tol.Count.OOC
Tol.Count.OOTUpper + Tol.Count.OOTLower = Tol.Count.OOT
Every tolerance comparison is counted, that is, a part program command
"Tolerance comparison" can include more than tolerance comparisons.
18.26.22 Measurement Points

Probe diameter, probe radius
Returns 0.0 if it is no measured point
CR[1].PrbD Probe diameter used for the first
measurement point.
CR[1].PrbR robe radius used for the first measurement
point.
CR[1].MP[2].PrbD Probe diameter used for the second
measurement point.
CR[1].MP[2].PrbR Probe radius used for the second
measurement point.
364 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
Actual co-ordinates
The measurement points are not probe
radius compensated.
CR[1].MP[1].X Returns the X co-ordinate of a
measurement point in actual co-ordinate
system of an element.
CR[1].MP[1].Y Returns the Y co-ordinate of a
system of an element..
CR[1].MP[1].Z Returns the Z co-ordinate of a
system of an element.
CR[1].MP[1].A Returns the X angle of the probing direction
of a measurement point in actual co-
ordinate system of an element.
CR[1].MP[1].B Returns the Y angle of the probing direction
CR[1].MP[1].C Returns the Z angle of the probing direction
CR[1].MP[1].I Returns the X angle cosine of the probing
direction of a measurement point in actual
co-ordinate system of an element.
CR[1].MP[1].J Returns the Y angle cosine of the probing
CR[1].MP[1].K Returns the Z angle cosine of the probing
Machine co-ordinates
To get the values in machine co-ordinates
use the same syntax as above but use
"MMP" instead of "MP".
For example:
CR[1].MMP[1].X
CR[1].MMP[1].A
18.27 Scale Factor

If you know for example that a plastic part, after the injection moulding of
duroplastic material, shrinks by a certain percentage, you should enlarge the form
by this percentile. Use the "Scale Factor" function (menu bar "Calculate / Scale
Factor").
Example
When the part shrinks 5 per cent, enter 0.95.
Entering 1.00 means that the co-ordinates and dimensions remain
unchanged.
07.04.07 v3.0 365

Programming Tools
In most of the cases the scale factor is identical for all co-ordinates, for many
freeform surfaces, as well. Due to specific properties of workpieces produced e.g.
by an injection moulding process, it is quite possible that material shrinkage or
expansion is not identical in all directions.
In the following dialogue (with new functions being available as from Version 2.2)
you are offered a total of four options.
Scale all elements (including element point)
Clicking these option causes one scale factor to be entered for all three axes,
including the element point. This option can be used in most of the cases.
18.27.1 Scale only element point

Due to probe radius compensation, setting a different scale for each axis
makes sense only for the element point. Other elements (freeform surfaces)
would be calculated using the scale factor 1.0. In these cases, there would
not even be a warning.
The option "Different scale factor for each axis" cannot be used in
calculating formulae.
The "Undo" command is not supported. In the case of an error
occurring in the learn mode you would have to set the scale factor
once more.
Set scaling centre into origin

Clicking this option causes the scaling centre to be set into the origin of the
workpiece. This is not advisable for offset-defined co-ordinate systems (RPS
alignment, e.g. automotive parts).
366 v3.0 07.04.07

Programming Tools
In the present example showing any workpiece (2), the scaling centre (3) is not
located in the origin of the co-ordinate system (1).
18.27.2 Use scale factor for CAT1000S

For the "Scale only element point" option the button is deactivated. The same is
true in case you have not installed the dongle option for CAT1000S.
CAT1000S can assume the scale factor and the scaling centre only
in case it applies to all axes, i.e. when all elements are to be scaled.
Ö For points measured with different scale factors for each axis and
required to be transferred to CAT1000S, use Position Tolerance.
Please note that in this case it is your sole responsibility to define

the nominal values.
07.04.07 v3.0 367

Sequence Control
19 Sequence Control
about this subject.
Loops
Branches
Subprograms
Delete last step
Error While Executing Command
Comment line
Programmable stop
Show picture
Clear picture
Play sound
Send e-mail
Send SMS
Create Directory
Copy File
Delete File
Input Head Data
Set Head Data Field
Sublot Input
Set Sublot
Open/Close Window
Program call
IO Condition (IO Communication)
19.2 Loops
Definition
The loops are used to repeat the same or similar procedures several times in
succession. It happens that your measurement task requires, e.g. to save
measured elements in different element storage areas. For this purpose, we have
installed a counter, which is increasing the number of the element storage by
one at each loop flow.
All dialogues showing the symbol "Loop Counter" (on the left) provide you
direct access to the function "Loops".
Ö When you want to access the same element at each time the loop
is run, make sure that you de-activate the loop counter.
Ö When you want to access an additional element at each time the
loop is run, make sure that you activate the loop counter
If this is the case, the counter will increment by one at any flow in
progress, beginning from the number entered from time to time.
Symbol or Special Character
Via the symbol, the loop indicator can be immediately used in the
dialogues e.g. for tolerance comparisons, in the element storage or for storage of
contours.
368 v3.0 07.04.07

Sequence Control
It is also possible to realise free inputs via the special characters "@LC", e.g.
when
entering file names,
when entering formula calculation or even
when you input a text.
When using the special character "@LC", you must pay attention to use
capital characters without fail.
Procedure
Ö You come to the loop functions via the symbols or the menu
bar "Program / Beginning of Loop (End of Loop)".
Ö In the window "Beginning of Loop", you determine the "Number of
Executions".
This can also be realised through variables (see details of the topic
"Definition of Variables").
19.3 Branches
If, in an existing part program, you want to carry out individual instructions only in
certain conditions, you can do that via install "Branches". The branches can only
be created in the GEOPAK Editor.
Cf. details of topic "Branches" in the GEOPAK Editor.
19.4 Subprograms
19.4.1 Definition and Types
There are two reasons to apply sub-programs:
You want to divide up (structure) a long part program into blocks
making sense and giving a clear overview.
You want to hold self-repeating program runs in a sub-program in
order to use it again. In these cases, especially variables are
offered, with which you adapt an existing sub-program to the actual
situation.
Example: Sub-program for bore pictures with rims having four or five
bores.
Sub-programs are separated into two program types.
• Sub-programs, which are related to a parts
• Sub-programs, which can be used from several parts (global)
The creation and administration of the global programs is realised in the sub-
program management (see details in the PartManager under topic
"Administration of Sub-Program").
07.04.07 v3.0 369

Sequence Control
19.4.2 Create a Local Sub-Program

At the position where you want to create the sub-program activate the function
via
the menu bar "Program / Sub-Program" or via
the symbol of the toolbar in the main window of the

GEOPAK Editor.
Ö In the "Sub-Program Start" dialog window, click the "Learn" option
and possibly enter a speaking name easy to recall.
Immediately, all instructions in this sub-program are stored.
Ö Quit the sub-program via the symbol.
19.4.3 Using an already existing Sub-Program
Activate the symbol and inform the program via the radio buttons where
the sub-program is located (library etc.).
If you modify variables in the sub-programs you also modify them

for the main program.
Hint
To impede this, store the variables at the sub-program start. Before
terminating the sub-program, again load the variables.
19.5 Delete Last Step

With this function menu bar "Program (Delete Last Step"), you can remove the
last command of the part program and in most cases undo it. The last command
is displayed once again and you must confirm.
To undo also means:
You have changed the co-ordinate system.
You undo this change.
You will get the co-ordinate system again as before the change.
Exception
If you delete a probe change, it is not possible to directly undo this change.
Proceed as follows:
Ö Make one more probe change for the probe you want and
Ö delete this one again.
Then, you can continue measuring with the right probe and the
unnecessary probe change will not appear in your part program.
370 v3.0 07.04.07

Sequence Control
19.6 Error While Executing Command
When this dialogue appears - usually unexpectedly - there are four options
available:
Repeat command: If you select this option, the last used dialogue
opens. In this dialogue you can check again your last entries. The
measurements you have performed up to this stage are still valid.
Delete command: If you select this option, the command is neither
executed nor stored.
Store command: If you select this option, the command is stored
despite a faulty execution in the part program.
Repeat element measurement: If you select this option, e.g. in the
case of a collision, the last dialogue is displayed again.
However, the number of measurement points is completely reset to
0. Therefore, this option differs substantially from the option "Repeat
command" (see above).
This fourth option is particularly not recommendable for the
scanning of contours because this would mean the loss of all points
already measured.
19.7 Comment Line

If you want to add information to your part program, which do not concern the
measurement and will not appear in the test certificate, use the "Comment Line"
(menu bar "Program / Comment Line"). In the following "Comment in Part
Program" window, you can enter any text you want (80 characters max. per line).
19.8 Show Picture

With this function (menu bar "Program / Show Picture"), you can have a picture
for your actual measurement course.
Search for the picture via the symbol according to Windows conventions
and confirm. The picture will appear in the "Measurement Display" window.
07.04.07 v3.0 371

Sequence Control
If, in the following, you call an element and confirm, the picture will be
overwritten as a default setting in the "Measurement Display" window.
You can avoid this in the element window by clicking on the "Graphics of
Meas." symbol.
19.9 Programmable Stop

With the "Programmable Stop" (menu bar "Program / Programmable Stop"), you
can stop the part program run at a position and give some information or
instructions to the user through
a text,
a picture or
an audio file
Proceed according to Windows conventions.
19.10 Clear Picture

With this function (menu bar "Program / Clear picture"), you can clear a picture
that you have activated before (see details under "Show Picture"). By clicking on
the function, the picture in the "Measurement Display" window will disappear.
19.11 Play Sound

With this function (menu bar "Program / Play Sound"), you can play a sound
during the actual measurement course.
You determine the file by clicking on the symbol according to Windows

conventions.
Via the symbol above to the right ("Test") in the "Play Sound" window, you
can hear the file to the test.
19.12 Send E-Mail

Use this function (menu bar "Program / Send e-mail") to send an e-mail directly
out of GEOPAK.
For this, first install and set-up an e-mail program on your computer that supports
the MAPI interface (message application program interface), e.g. Outlook
Express, Mozilla Thunderbird.
Perform the usual entries:
Address, copies to further addresses (cc stands for carbon copy)
and subject, of max. 80 characters length each.
Maximum text length 480 characters.
372 v3.0 07.04.07

Sequence Control
Only one attached file per mail is possible.

Hint
Depending on the used e-mail programs (e.g. newer versions of Outlook)
you might possibly need to prefix an "SMTP:" to the actual e-mail
address.
Example:
SMTP:John.Q.Public@company.com.
This step is required if the e-mail can not be served despite a valid e-mail
address. Usually you will receive a message that one of your e-mail accounts had
not been able to send the message to this recipient.
19.13 Send SMS

With this function (Menu Bar "Program / Send SMS"), you can directly send a
SMS out of GEOPAK. Yet, before starting GEOPAK, the necessary settings must
have been realised before in the PartManager. For details, see the following
topics
Configuration,
Log Communication and
Address Book
Transmit CLIP
Hints
You only can select one receiver from the address book. For the text, you can
use 160 characters.
It is possible that the different providers accept not as much of characters.
19.14 Create Directory

With this function, you can create a new directory in a GEOPAK part program.
This is useful, if e.g. tasks are repeated in weekly periods. Certainly, you wish to
file the protocols of the results sorted by the week.
Ö In this case, first of all define a string variable, which you complete
with the text and the "week" system variable (see example below).
Str1 = Woche_@week
Ö Use this variable when entering the directory name in this function.
Ö Also use this variable in the "File Format Specification" function.
Hints
If this path does not yet exit, it will be created. Otherwise, nothing happens.
With this command, you also can create sub-directories.
When selecting a name for the directories, you have all possibilities of the string
coding at your disposal.
For further information concerning this subject, please refer to your MCOSMOS-
CD-ROM under "Documents", folder "GENERAL", file "si_io_comm_g (e).pdf".
19.15 Copy File

Call up the function via the menu "Program".
07.04.07 v3.0 373

Sequence Control
Use this function to copy the source file under a new name in another or a new
folder. The procedure follows Windows conventions.
If you use the option "Overwrite existing file ", no error message is
issued if the file already exists.
You can also use the option "Delete source file after copying".
A target folder must have already been created before copying.
Subfolders are not included in the copying.
Files can only be copied in learn and repeat mode and not in the
edit mode.
Use wildcards
For copying, only use asterisks ("*") as wildcards or you will receive an error
message.
You can use asterisks to copy one or more files. To identify the files to be copied
by wildcards, you can use the following combinations:
*
*.*
Name.*
*.file name extension
Hint
It is possible that error messages are displayed. However, these error
messages are self-explanatory (e.g.: "Most probably you have not the
required access rights" or "Invalid target directory").
19.16 Delete File

Call up the function via the menu "Program". Use this function to delete one or
more files.
In case that the files do not exist, no error message is issued.
As opposed to the repeat mode, you will get a safety inquiry in the
learn mode as to whether you really want to delete the file.
You cannot delete files in the edit mode.
If the option "Move to recycle bin" is active, all deleted files are
automatically moved to the recycle bin. If this option has not been
selected the files are irrevocably deleted.
Use wildcards
You may only use asterisks ("*") as wildcards or you will receive an error
message.
To delete one or more file you can position the asterisks at any position within the
file names.
Hint
It is possible that error messages are displayed. However, these error
messages are self-explanatory (e.g.: "Most probably you have not the
required access rights" or "Invalid target directory").
374 v3.0 07.04.07

Sequence Control
19.17 Input Head Data

Some functions automatically ask for head data, when this data has been
selected previously (e.g. "Beginning of File Format" or "Beginning of Print
Protocol").Other functions don't automatically ask for the head data, even if this
information might be required (e.g. the "Flexible Protocol Output" or "Statistics
Output into File"). Therefore, beginning from Version 2.2, the function "Input
Head Data" will be available.
Ö You call this function (Menu bar / Program / Input Head Data) at the
beginning of the part program and confirm in the following window.
In this way the part program executed the functions you have
entered in the dialog "HEAD Data Editor" earlier in the PartManager.
If you proceed this way, no further action will be required later with a
function asking for head data (e.g. Beginning of File Format). The
head data dialogue will not appear again.
The head data required for input is the information defined in the PartManager
with the option "Input Head Data before Printing" (for details, refer to the topic
"Head Data: Definition ", "Editor for Head Data: Overview" and Dialogue Window
"Editor for Head Data" ).
For Example a dialogue of the following type will appear:
If no head data is defined, no dialogue and no error message will show up.
If no head data with the option "Input Head Data before Printing"
is defined in the PartManager, no head data dialogue and no error dialogue will
show up.
19.18 Set Head Data Field

This part program allows you to set a head data field (for details, refer to the topic
"Editor for Head Data: Overview "). This is useful in case the head data is
required to be set through a part program functionality, e.g. through a text
variable.
To find out which head data field is to be set, the user has to enter the ID of the
head data field which he has set already previously in the PartManager (fig.
below; Menu bar / Settings / Head Data / New or Change).
07.04.07 v3.0 375

Sequence Control
You enter the ID and the new contents of the field.
You should know

If there is no ID, an error message will appear ("Head Data Field not
Existing").
In case the data is entered in the learn mode with variables, the
result will automatically be analysed and displayed under the input
line.
The existing ID's you have already set in the PartManager are
suggestions for the ID list field.
This command does not verify the "input type". If a number is
defined as input type and a character string is set, no error will be
displayed.
Should the length of the input text be longer than the defined input
length, the character string will automatically be reduced to the input
length.
If the "input type" reads "Extend list", the contents of this list will not
be added (for details, refer to Extend List ).
The new contents of the head data field is stored in the part's head
data. This means: even if GEOPAK is finished, the new contents will
be valid until it is replaced in the PartManager or changed by
another command.
19.19 Sublot Input

It may be necessary to specify sublot data already at the beginning of part
programs (e.g. for the flexible protocol output or the statistics). Beginning from
the Version 2.2, you can access this function through the "Menu bar / Program /
Sublot Input" and confirm in the subsequent window.
376 v3.0 07.04.07

Sequence Control
Depending on the sublot already defined in the PartManager (for details, refer to
General information on Sublot and the topics to follow), there will appear a
dialogue where you input the sublot. When in the PartManager a "Structured
Sublot" has been defined, a corresponding dialogue will be displayed (fig. below).
Otherwise only the sublot input with an input field will be displayed.
The dialogue "Structured Sublot" performs a self-check of its input data. For the
standard input, there is only a check for maximum length. If you enter less than
40 characters, the field will automatically be filled with blanks.
An error message will appear only in case the user has interrupted the input
("Sublot input was interrupted"). In the learn mode, there is no error message.
The command is not learnt.
Refer also to "Set Sublot".
19.20 Set Sublot

This function (Menu bar / Program / Set Sublot) allows you to set the sublot as a
whole or only a sublot field of a structured sublot.
If data is entered in the learn mode with variables, the result will automatically be
analysed and displayed under the input line. The remaining characters of every
sublot are filled with blanks.
You should also know
Structured sublot: In order to identify the sublot to be set, you
enter the number of the sublot field and the new contents of the
field. Should the sublot field to be set no exist, the screen shows an
error message ("Sublot not existing").
07.04.07 v3.0 377

Sequence Control
Set complete sublot: If the option "Set Structured Sublot" is

disabled the whole sublot will be set.
Default settings: If a structured sublot has been defined the default
setting of the option "Set Structured Sublot" is enabled. Otherwise
this function is disabled and can not be selected in learn mode.
Refer also to "Sublot Input".
19.21 Open/Close Window
To get to the function and the dialogue, use the menu bar / Program /
Open/close window. You can use the function to accelerate the part program
execution, i.e. you can switch off options to open them again at the end of the
part program.
A typical example would be to switch off the graphics of elements at the start of
the part program. After the execution of the part program you can switch on the
graphics of elements again to view the result.
The first option means that the current condition of the window remains
unchanged.
Use the second option to open windows.
Use the third option to close windows.

Hint
To achieve a quickest possible execution of the part programs, it is
particularly recommendable to switch off the graphics of elements and the
part program list.
19.22 Program Call

Program Name
With this function (menu bar "Program / Program Call"), you can call any external
program, and this according to Windows conventions in the "Program Name" text
field. Then, these programs will run in parallel to your part program.
If you only click on the clock symbol, the part program stops and only the
external program is running. Only if you close the external program, your part
program will start again.
Working Directory
In this text box you enter the folders (directories) that are required for the running
external program. Pay attention to the spelling of the directories and the rules of
the way of writing of directories (e.g. \PROG\DATA).
Program Parameters
If the external program requires further parameters, these are input, separated by
empty signs, in this text field.
378 v3.0 07.04.07

Sequence Control
19.23 IO Condition (IO Communication)

Introduction
Frequently, the IO condition is also called IO communication (Input-Output). It
makes possible that MCOSMOS may work together with other control systems.
To do so, electronic signals are exchanged. The communication can take place in
one or two directions.
Typical examples are
Automatic process control,
Pallet feeding device,
Robot control.
IO Cards
IO cards, also called EA cards, are Input / Output cards. In our case, we call them
digital input or output cards. That means, per signal, there are only two
conditions, logical "HIGH" (for the most part high tension) and logical "LOW" (for
the most part low tension).
To minimise the expenses when selecting IO cards, we offer some standard IO
cards, e.g. the "ME-8100-A".
Requirement
The "IO_COND.INI" must be available in the "INI" directory of MCOSMOS. You
find the file for the default setting on the MCOSMOS installation CD
(\OPTIONS\IO_COND). In this file, you have to define the name of the control file
(default setting "IO_COND.DAT"), and the type of card that you wish to use.
Furthermore, you will have to write a control file. This must also be available in
the "INI" directory.
Without these files, MCOSMOS will not execute an IO communication.
For further information concerning this subject, please refer to your
MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents", folder "GENERAL", file
"si_io_comm_g (e).pdf".
07.04.07 v3.0 379

Input Instruments
20 Input Instruments
20.1 Possibilities of Text Input / Data Name
It is also possible to enter defined variable information into all boxes in which you
normally make text inputs: Protocol headlines, commentary lines, text lines (e.g.
"Text to Printer"), as well as names of files, elements and variables.
Three important examples
If you want to output, for example the current time of day you can do
that over the output text by previously entering the text "Now it is
@time o’ clock". That leads for example to the output: "Now it is
13:45:48 o’ clock".
If you want to create your own ASCII-file with the results to each
program run, you can input in the learn mode with the "File Format
Beginning" function as file names for example "Result@RC.asc".
That leads after the first program run to "Result1.asc". Then to
"Result 2.asc" etc. RC stands for Repeat Counter and begins with
the number, that you input as an originally-protocol number namely
in the dialogue window directly after start of the repeat mode.
If you want to call variables within a loop via the loop indicator you
input as a variable name, e.g. var@LC. This leads in the first loop
flow to variable var1, in the second to var2 etc.
For further information about all possibilities of modifying the texts in the string
coding, please refer to your MCOSMOS-CD-ROM under "Documents", file
"UM_string_code_g(e).pdf".
Further possibilities of input:
Single Selection
Group Selection
20.2 Single Selection

In order to get, for instance, to a connection element, you first have to select the
elements used to build the connection element. You can determine these
elements via the single or group selection facility. Provided the elements are of
one type of elements and arranged one behind each other in the memory, you
are recommended to use the - undoubtedly faster - Group Selection.
In case of single selection, you have to
• proceed step by step, but it is up to you
• determine the sequence and
• to mix the types of elements.
There may, of course, occur situations where single selection is mandatory. This
is the case, for instance, when you use a line and have to pay attention to its
sense of direction.
Change selection
When you change from single to group selection - and vice versa - the following
two symbols are of utmost importance:
With mouse-click to group selection
380 v3.0 07.04.07

Input Instruments
With mouse-click to single selection

Our example
In our following example, the line is the connection element.
In the dialogue window "Connection Element Line", you are
presented, on the left-hand side, all elements build up to now.
Ö Via the
horizontal icon bar ("Available") you can decide by a mouse-click
which types of elements you want to watch and use or not.
Ö You click the elements selected to the right-hand side and

confirm.
With the connection element calculated using this method, you proceed in
the same way as with any other element.
You should know
In case of a measured element automatic projection into one plane
is possible, due to the fact that the material side is known.
In case of a connection element the material side is not known;
hence automatic projection is not possible. So you have to define
the projection plane.
For this purpose you have at the left border of the respective dialogue windows
"Connection Element ..." the planes XY, YZ and ZX.
20.3 Group Selection

In order to get, for instance, to a connection element, you first have to select the
elements used to build the connection element. You can determine these
elements via the single or group selection facility. Provided the elements are of
one type of elements and arranged one behind each other in the memory, you
are recommended to use the - undoubtedly faster - group selection.
In case of Single Selection you have to
• Proceed step by step, but it is up to you
• to determine the sequence or
• to mix the types of elements.
There may, of course, occur situations where single selection is mandatory. This
is the case, for instance, when you use a line and have to pay attention to its
sense of direction.
Change Selection
To change from single to group selection - and vice versa - you use the following
two symbols:
With mouse-click to group selection
With mouse-click to single selection

Our example
In our following example, the line is the connection element.
07.04.07 v3.0 381

Input Instruments
In the icon bar ("Available")

you select, e.g., the element "Circle" and decide in the text box "Number" how
many circles you want to use to build the connection element "Line".
Bear in mind that with the sequence of the circles you define the line's
sense of direction.
With the connection element calculated using this method, you proceed in the
same way as with any other element
You should know
In case of a measured element automatic projection into one plane
is possible, due to the fact that the material side is known.
In case of a connection element the material side is not known;
hence automatic projection is not possible. So you have to define
the projection plane.
For this purpose you have at the left border of the respective dialogue windows
"Connection Element ..." the planes XY, YZ and ZX.
382 v3.0 07.04.07

Special Programs
21 Special Programs
21.1 Special Programs (Contents)
ASCII-GEOPAK-Converter
Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS)
Settings for Export to DMIS
Import GEOPAK-3 Part Program
21.2 ASCII-GEOPAK-Converter
ASCII files always serve to enable a data exchange between computers when
the exchange between files of different formats is either not possible or not
required.
In particular, our ASCII-GEOPAK Converter serves to create a GEOPAK part
program from an agw-file (formatted ASCII file). The term "formatted" in this
context means that the command structure is prescribed (see example illustration
from the ASCII specification below). You will find this ASCII specification on your
MCOSMOS-CD under "Documentation / GEOPAK / pp_ascii_e.pdf".
Hints
The agw-files used in GEOPAK contain all part commands concerning GEOPAK
– but only these and no other internal commands.
Import
To convert an ASCII file to GEOPAK, proceed as follows:
Ö In the PartManager, click in the menu bar on CMM / ASCII-
GEOPAK Converter.
Ö In the subsequent window, pick the corresponding file following the
Windows conventions.
After you have clicked the file, GEOPAK generates a part program
using the commands.
Ö If the part program already exists, you get a corresponding message
and you must change the name of the part program.
07.04.07 v3.0 383

Special Programs
For generating and exporting a part program in ASCII format, i.e. as an agw-file,
find detailed information under the topic "Export Part Program".
21.3 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS)

21.3.1 Export in ASCII Format
GEOPAK (*.agw)".
21.3.2 Export in DMIS Format

(*.dmo)".
specification.
21.4 Settings for Export to DMIS

Before exporting part programs to DMIS (GEOPAK editor / menu bar / File /
Export / Export settings) you can perform specific settings.
When clicking the function, the dialogue window "Set initial environment" opens.
The settings you perform in this dialogue are saved in the file
"..\INI\DMISOUT.INI".
For Information about the possible settings read the topic "Settings for export
(DMIS)"
21.5 Import GEOPAK-3 Part Program

This function serves to import GEOPAK-3 part programs to, and make them
executable in GEOPAK. The complete process takes place in the background
and, in between, via an ASCII formatting.
Proceed as follows:
Ö In the PartManager, click in the menu bar on CMM and the
function.
Ö In the following window "Select file", follow the Windows
conventions to activate the file that shall be converted to a GEOPAK
part program and then click "Open".
384 v3.0 07.04.07

Special Programs
The file type must always be the type "PARTPRG". The maximum length
of the directory name is eight characters (DOS convention).
After conversion, the part programs are shown in the part list.
In the GEOPAK editor, you get all information about the part programs including
the comments. The comments refer to the settings either you have made in the
dialogue GEOPAK-3 GEOPAK Configuration or to Mitutoyo settings.
For converting further GEOPAK-3 part programs, use the dialogue for conversion
(see picture detail below).
You will find detailed information about this topic, also about its restrictions, on
your MCOSMOS-CD (documentation / GEOPAK) under the title
"si_geo_3_win_g.pdf" (German), "si_geo_3_win_e.pdf" (English) or
"si_geo_3_win_f.pdf" (French).
07.04.07 v3.0 385

Repeat Mode
22 Repeat Mode
22.1 Repeat Mode: Table of Contents
Introduction
Temperature Coefficient in Repeat Mode
Cancel Repeat Mode
Repeat Mode with Offset
Settings
Repeat Mode: Start Editor
22.2 Repeat Mode
You can use the repeat mode to execute a part program for the CMM. For
this, the following options are available:
The text box at the top of the initial dialogue is active when there is
more than one part program for a part.
Use the arrow to open the part program list and then click the
desired part program.
In the text box underneath, enter the number of executions. Decide
whether the data shall be stored for relearn or not.
The offset only plays a role if you repeat the part program more than
once.
Statistics
The results of the tolerance comparisons can be statistically evaluated. A

click on this icon activates the text box "Sublot".
In case that you forgot one or more features when creating the part
program, you can subsequently use the option "Only feature declaration" (see
icon to the left). In this case, also the statistics symbol must have been activated.
If both icons are active, no measurement values are transferred to the statistics
program.
You can also make your settings in the dialogue "Structured Sublot".
Measure in millimetres or inch.
Start protocol number
The start protocol number serves to specifically assign a protocol to a certain
workpiece. The start protocol number is incremented by the value 1 for each
multiple execution of the part program.
Situations may arise in which you will, for example, not want to start the protocol
again with "1" but in which you want to start again at the end of a previous series.
This is why this option is available in this dialogue.
Further topics
Temperature Coefficient
Cancel Part Program Repetition
386 v3.0 07.04.07

Repeat Mode
22.3 Temperature Coefficient in Repeat Mode

You will consider the thermal expansion of your workpiece by way of setting the
appropriate temperature coefficient. For this, either enter the required coefficient
or pick the material in the list.
You can also redefine the temperature coefficient in the part program by using
the function Settings for Temperature Compensation.
For detailed information also refer to the topic Temperature Coeffizient: Select
from List .
In the part list, you can also activate multiple parts for the repeat mode. The parts
are automatically processed one after the other.
If the number of repeats you have entered is bigger than the number of parts, the
repeat mode can be cancelled at any time.
Further topics
Introduction Repeat Mode
Cancel Repeat Mode
22.4 Cancel Repeat Mode

It is also possible to cancel the repeat mode.
Ö Before you cancel the repeat

mode, you must click the pause icon. Only then it is possible to
cancel.
You can also use the menu bar / Repeat / Pause program / Cancel.
Ö In the next dialogue window "Cancel part program repetition", select
the type of interruption you prefer using one of the three option
buttons (switch method).
• Only actual repetition
• All executions of part program
• All part program execution jobs
Only one type of interruption is possible.
Further topics
22.5 Repeat Mode with Offset

A certain number of corresponding parts is measured with only one part program.
For this, the parts are positioned at certain distances (offset), e.g. in a template or
on a pallet.
07.04.07 v3.0 387

Repeat Mode
You must create the part program in a way that the start position of a
part can be reached from the end position of the previous part.
Proceed as follows:
Ö In the upper part of the dialogue, enter the "number of executions" in
one row and the offset between the parts. You will find the offset
value in the documentation (drawings etc.) pertaining to your pallet.
Furthermore you can use the icons at the top left of the dialogue to
determine which machine axis is positioned parallel to the row.
Ö Activate the lower part of the dialogue by clicking the icon.

Here, you enter the total number of rows or columns that shall be
measured. Here, you also enter the offset between the rows.
For more information, refer to the topic Volume Compensation .
Further topics
Cancel Repeat Mode
22.6 Settings
In this dialogue you define the number of decimals that are assigned to the
graphic display of the machine position and of the last element measurement in
For the machine position, you set the minimum number of decimals. This number
is also used for the graphics of elements. The changed inputs will become
effective after a restart of the repeat mode. This setting has no effects on other
outputs, e.g. the ASCII output.
The setting is performed separately for millimetres or inch.
Confirm element finished

Manual measurements might entail some inaccuracies due to various reasons.
To protect you against resulting mistakes, we offer the option "Confirm element
finished". By clicking this option, a query is always displayed following the
measurement to confirm that your measurement is accurate.
22.7 Repeat Mode: Start Editor

When you are in the repeat mode you can also call up the GEOPAK editor.
388 v3.0 07.04.07

Repeat Mode
The editor starts and you can process the part program. Part program lines that
have already been executed are highlighted in orange. Within this highlighted
area you can process the lines but you can neither delete these lines nor add
new ones.
In the non-selected area you can apply all functions.
When leaving the GEOPAK editor you get automatically back to the repeat mode
and you can continue with the program.
07.04.07 v3.0 389

ROUNDPAK-CMM
23 ROUNDPAK-CMM
23.1 ROUNDPAK-CMM: Table of Contents
Task
Alignment
Steps
Dialogue "Pass Data to ROUNDPAK-CMM"
Analysable Elements
Not Analysable Elements
Error Messages
Learn and Repeat Mode
23.2 Task
ROUNDPAK-CMM is a program for the analysis of roundness that complements
the geometry module GEOPAK of MCOSMOS.
For the analysis of roundness usually a special CNC roundness testing
instrument is used in combination with the analysis software ROUNDPAK. With
huge workpieces, however, this combination can often not be employed because
the measurement range is not sufficient.
Therefore we have developed the program ROUNDAK-CMM. The combination of
ROUNDPAK-CMM and GEOPAK allows you to test roundness and cylindricity of
huge workpieces.
Prerequisite
For testing the roundness and cylindricity of huge workpieces with ROUNDPAK-
CMM and GEOPAK, you require a CMM with a scanning probe system.
23.3 Alignment
For the evaluation with ROUNDPAK-CMM you have to create the evaluation co-
ordinate system analogical to the measurement co-ordinate system of
ROUNDPAK. The axis of the element to be evaluated (e.g. cylinder) has to be
the Z axis of the co-ordinate system.
Working steps
Ö Create your standard workpiece co-ordinate system.
Ö Measure a circle near the bottom of your workpiece (see picture)
and calculate this circle as Gauss element.
Ö Measure a circle near the top of your workpiece (see picture) and
calculate this circle as Gauss element.
Ö Create a connection element line out of the centre points of the two
circles.
Ö Re-align your GEOPAK workpiece co-ordinate system. Use the
connection element line as Z axis of your ROUNDPAK Evaluation
Co-ordinate System (RECS).
Ö Now the elements to be evaluated in ROUNDPAK-CMM can be
measured.
390 v3.0 07.04.07

ROUNDPAK-CMM
23.4 Steps
Before you start working with ROUNDPAK-CMM you have to create the co-
ordinate system. See also "Alignment".
Working Steps
ROUNDPAK-CMM and GEOPAK are interacting. In simplified terms, the working
steps can be described as follows:
Ö You measure elements in GEOPAK. Part program commands are
created.
Ö If you want to use a filter you work either in GEOPAK or in
ROUNDPAK-CMM. If you use the filter in both programs the
evaluation is incorrect. If you want to compare the results of
GEOPAK and ROUNDPAK-CMM you have to use the filter in
GEOPAK.
The measurement data (measurement points, elements and part
program commands) are passed to ROUNDPAK-CMM.
The evaluation of the measurement data is performed in
ROUNDPAK-CMM.
The results can be output either in GEOPAK or in ROUNDPAK-
CMM.
• Graphics and results of ROUNDPAK-CMM can be used in
GEOPAK for the output. For example, ROUNDPAK-CMM
graphics can be used in the ProtocolDesigner in GEOPAK.
• However, the output of results is also possible in ROUNDPAK-
CMM without GEOPAK.
23.5 Pass Data to ROUNDPAK-CMM

Start
To get to the dialogue "''Pass data to ROUNDPAK-CMM" in GEOPAK, go

to the menu bar / Tolerance / Pass data to ROUNDPAK-CMM.
23.5.1 Working steps in the dialogue

All measured elements are listed in the "available" list.
07.04.07 v3.0 391

ROUNDPAK-CMM
Ö Select elements in the "available" list and pass these elements to

the "selected" list.
For this, use the arrow buttons.

By activating the check box in front of "Print the ROUNDPAK-CMM
report", the ROUNDPAK-CMM report is printed out after the
elements have been evaluated in ROUNDPAK-CMM.
Ö Under "Program name", enter the desired name of the ROUNDPAK-
CMM evaluation program. Furthermore define a directory. The
evaluation programs have the file name extension RND.
Ö Confirm with "'OK". All elements in the "selected" list are passed to
ROUNDPAK-CMM.
The main window of ROUNDPAK-CMM is opened.
23.5.2 Hide element types
You can use the buttons "line", "circle", "plane" and

"cylinder" as filters.
Example:
By deactivating the button "'circle"', all circles contained in the "available'" list are
no longer displayed. This option serves clarity when the list contains a great
number of elements. Furthermore, the circles are no longer displayed in the
window "Graphics of elements".
ROUNDPAK-CMM can only evaluate measurement data of elements that have
been measured in GEOPAK by means of a certain measurement strategy.
Related topics
Task
Steps
Analysable Elements
Not Analysable Elements
Error Messages
Learn and Repeat Mode
23.6 Analysable Elements

ROUNDPAK-CMM can only evaluate measurement data of elements that have
Examples
Example of elements that can be evaluated with ROUNDPAK-CMM.
392 v3.0 07.04.07

ROUNDPAK-CMM
Element Circle; horizontal to basic plane
Element Plane; horizontal to basic plane
Element Cylinder; measured spirally; perpendicular to basic plane
Element Cylinder; measured with circles, perpendicular to basic plane
Element Line; perpendicular to basic plane and parallel to axis of rotation
07.04.07 v3.0 393

ROUNDPAK-CMM
Element Line; horizontal to basic plane and with reference to the axis of rotation
23.7 Non-Analysable Elements

ROUNDPAK-CMM can only evaluate measurement data from elements that have
When using a measurement strategy that cannot be analysed with ROUNDPAK-
CMM, an error message is displayed.
Examples
Examples for elements that can not be evaluated with ROUNDPAK-CMM:
Element Plane, created by multiple points
Element Surface; created by scanning
Element Cylinder; created by multiple points
23.8 Error Messages

An error message is displayed in the following cases:
When the selected elements are not in a coaxial position.
394 v3.0 07.04.07

ROUNDPAK-CMM
When a selected cylinder is not in a perpendicular position to the

basic plane of the co-ordinate system.
When a selected plane is not in a horizontal position to the basic
plane of the co-ordinate system.
When a selected line is neither in a horizontal nor in a vertical
position to the basic plane of the co-ordinate system.
When the program ROUNDPAK-CMM does not recognize the
material side of an element.
These two cylinders are not in a coaxial position. In this case you get an error
message.
The two cylinders are in a coaxial position. These elements can be evaluated
with ROUNDPAK-CMM.
07.04.07 v3.0 395

ROUNDPAK-CMM
23.9 Learn and Repeat Mode

Learn mode
When you confirm the dialogue "Pass data to ROUNDPAK-CMM" with "OK", the
main window of ROUNDPAK-CMM opens. For creating an evaluation program,
ROUNDPAK-CMM uses the elements that have been passed from GEOPAK to
ROUNDPAK-CMM.
Close ROUNDPAK-CMM after you have completed defining the evaluations and
settings for the results and graphics.
Then you can print out the evaluations in GEOPAK with a template that also
supports the output of ROUNDPAK data.
Repeat mode
In the repeat mode, ROUNDPAK-CMM is started in the background with the
evaluation program of ROUNDPAK-CMM that you have created in the learn
mode. GEOPAK passes the elements to ROUNDPAK-CMM and the evaluation
starts.
396 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
24 SCANPAK
24.1 Scanning-Contents
Introduction
Measurement Methods: Overview
Start of SCANNING
Manual CMM
With Touch Trigger
With Fixed Probe
CNC Scanning
"Automatic Measurement" On
The Driving Strategies
Scanning in Phi-Z with Constant Radius
Open Contour
Start and End Position of a Contour as a Contact Point
With "Automatic Element"
Compensation of Radius of Probe (Scanning)
With Measuring Probe
Clamp axis with MPP
Thread Scanning with MPP10
Element Contur
Start in GEOPAK
Selection of Points Contour
Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point)
Contour Import/Export
Contents
Principles
Import Contour
Export Contour
Technical Specification
DXF Format
VDAFS Format
VDAIS (IGES) Format
NC Formats
Special formats
Error Messages
07.04.07 v3.0 397

SCANPAK
Manipulate Contour
Contents
Manipulate Contour
Scale Contour
Edit Contour Point
Mirror Contour
Move / Rotate Contour
Create Offset-Contour
Idealize Contour
Change Point Sequence
Sort Sequence of Contour Points
Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter
Middle Contour
Prepare Leading Contour
Activate Leading Contour
Scanning with Guiding Contour
Loop Counter
Scanning of a Nominal Contour
Define Approach Direction
Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy
Delete Contour Points
Delete Points of a Contour
Delete via "Single Selection"
Delete with the Co-Ordinates
Delete with Radius
Delete via an Angle Area
Reduce Number of Points
Delete Linear Parts of a Contour
Reduce Neighboured Points
Delete Point Intervals from Contour
Clean Contour
Delete Contour Loops
Delete Reversing Paths from Contour
Delete Double Contour Points
Min. and Max. Point
Automatic Element Calculation

Introduction
Tolerance Limits
Idealize
Permanency
Contour View
Display Sub Elements of a Contour
Circles as Partial Circle Display
Contour Point Selection by Keyboard
Contour Display as Lines and/or Points
398 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Contours with Tolerance Check

General
Pitch
Bestfit Contour
Degrees of Freedom for Bestfit
Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor)
Form Tolerance Contour
Tolerance Band Editor
Define Tolerance Band of a Contour
Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour
Filter Contour / Element
Dual Flank Scanning
Laser Probe
WIZprobe
Calibration
The Menu
Measurement Course
Scanning with Rotary Table

Introduction
Three Kinds
Stop Conditions
Clamp Axis
Manual Scanning by CMM
Scanning with "MetrisScan" (Laser)
Introduction
Program Run
Elements from Point Cloud
Edit Mode / Filter
Scanning with RenScanDC
Save and Export Contour

Save Contour
Save Contour in ASCII File
Select Contour
Transfer Contour into an External System
Load Contour
Load Contour from External Systems
Export to Surface Developer
24.2 Introduction
The option "Scanning" as part of our GEOPAK base program provides the
function that allows you to
scan contours and freeform surfaces
realise nominal actual comparisons with contours
calculate geometrical elements at the contour after scanning
import contours from or to import them to external systems.
07.04.07 v3.0 399

SCANPAK
In principle, all the functions comprised by the GEOPAK base program of are at
your disposal, from learn mode via the repeat mode to graphical representation
or output. This online help provides you, in particular, information on the specific
features of scanning. For your guidance, use the table of contents or the index.
24.3 Measurement Methods: Overview

Depending on CMM, probing system and the task to be performed, we offer you
a wide variety of methods to record a contour (for the listing of the individual
topics see the Table of Contents).
Manual CMM
Scanning with touch trigger probe
Scanning with fixed probe
CMM with CNC
Touch trigger Scanning
Scanning with measuring probe
In each of these cases, you have the possibility of selecting between
Measurement with specified start and end points. Using automatic
start and end, you can assure the repeatability, also in manual
mode.
Measurement without specified of start-end points. This option is
preferably used for single and learn mode. Perhaps you want to get
a first impression of the contour.
24.4 Start of SCANNING
In order to start the Scanning function, you have two possibilities

via the menu bar/Element and the "Contour" function
By clicking on the symbol (see above)
In any case, you get the "Element Contour" dialogue window.
24.4.1 Symbols
Measurement and theoretic element. Activate alternatively one of the
two symbols and confirm.
With "Measure", you come to the next dialogue window "Manual
Scanning" or CNC Scanning. The decisive criterion is the type of
CMM at your disposal, or whether you have activated the CNC
function.
Via the second symbol, you can load a theoretical contour (nominal
contour). In the following search window, you select your file
according to the known Windows conventions. This can be a file
with the "gws" extension. This is short for "GEOPAK-Win Scanning".
To find further formats, please proceed as follows:
Ö In the "Contour" window, open the file type list via the symbol.
Ö Select by mouse click from this list the file type required.
400 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
The contour is loaded into the conventional memory. It is recorded

in the element list, in the result box (information such as plane,
closed or open contour, number of measured points) and as a
graphics. This nominal contour is the pre-requisite for a comparison
of nominal and actual values.
Graphics of measurement and measurement with voice comment. You

can support the measurement process graphically and/or with a sound.
Automatic element finished. If you activate this symbol, also the element is
finished upon completion of the measurement.
It could, however, become necessary for you to carry out a probe

change or to interrupt the scanning operation because of an
obstacle. This would mean that you scan the contour in several
intervals. In these cases, you certainly do not want to
automatically finish the element.
Automatic Measurement. Whether this function is switched On or Off, is of

no importance when working with a manual CMM.
24.4.2 Scanning from the toolbar

In the main window of GEOPAK, on the left hand side, you find a toolbar,
comprising, in particular, the symbols.
CNC Scanning with touch trigger-type probe, and
finish CNC scanning.

By a click on these symbols, you can start or finish a measurement.
24.5 Manual CMM

24.5.1 Touch Trigger Probe
You measure using a touch trigger probe. For this purpose, you must
activate the symbol in the dialogue window "Manual Scanning".
If you want to work using a start and end point, you have to activate the
functions with the symbol. You can select between the three co-ordinate system
types (for details see under the topic "Types of Co-ordinate System"), and, in
each case, you
enter the values in the text fields, or
select the current position of the CMM by a click on the symbol.
24.5.1.1 Closed Contour
Below the "End Point", you can also select the "Closed Contour" by a click
on the symbol. The co-ordinates of the start point (end point = start point) are of
decisive importance.
The reason why the pitch is deactivated is because each point is stored when
measurement is carried out using a touch trigger probe.
07.04.07 v3.0 401

SCANPAK
24.5.1.2 Compensation of Probe Radius
By a mouse-click on the symbol (on the left) you cause the probe radius
compensation to be automatically performed at the end of measurement.
Via one of the three "Plane" symbols – in the present case, the YZ
plane is activated - you set the CMM to the plane in which compensation shall
take place.
24.5.2 Manual CMM: Fixed Probe

You measure using a fixed probe. For this purpose you must activate the
symbol in the dialogue window "Manual Scanning".
If you want to work using a start and end point, you have to activate the
functions with the symbol. In any case, you can
input the co-ordinates for the X, Y and Z axis into the text fields, or
select the actual position of the CMM by a click on the symbol.
24.5.2.1 Closed Contour
Below the "End Point", you can also select the "Closed Contour" by a click
on the symbol. The co-ordinates of the start point (end point = start point) are of
decisive importance).
With the fixed probe, points are continuously scanned. You determine the pitch in
millimetres in the corresponding text field.
24.5.2.2 Compensation of Probe Radius
When clicking the symbol (on the left), compensation of probe radius is
automatically carried out at the end of the measurement.
Via one of the three "Plane" symbols – in the present case, the YZ
plane is activated - you set the CMM to the plane, in which compensation shall
take place.
If the last contour point is recorded, the program is waiting for another trigger
signal of the foot switch. This position is used as a dummy point for definition of
direction of compensation (see picture below). The dummy point must be situated
on the "Not Material Side" of the tangent, which is passing through the last
contour point.
402 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
1 Start
2 Stop
3 Dummy point on the right side
4 Dummy point on the wrong side
24.6 CNC Scanning

24.6.1 CNC Scanning: "Automatic Measurement" On
With this method of scanning the measurement points, provides you with all
functions of the CNC Scanning dialogue. You can, for instance, decide in favour
of a driving strategy which best suits your particular measurement task, which
can, as the case may be, comprise measurements along the planes or on
rotating parts.
24.6.1.1 Procedure
Ö Start the function via the symbol in the main window of

GEOPAK.
Ö In the following dialogue window "Element Contour" make sure

that you activate, one after the other, the functions "Measure" and
Ö "Automatic Measurement".
Ö Via this symbol, you determine whether or not the element

must also be finished upon completion of the measurement.
Ö Confirm via "OK".
24.6.1.2 The CNC Scan Dialogue

In the GEOPAK learn mode, the following dialogue window "CNC scanning" is
automatically opened. Thanks to its symbols and balloon helps, this dialogue
window is widely self-explanatory.
In the GEOPAK editor, you can open the dialogue window "CNC scanning"
either by clicking the symbol or by clicking the function "CMM / Scanning" in the
menu bar.
You can scan, e.g., from the left or the right.
07.04.07 v3.0 403

SCANPAK
If you determine start and end point, you can, at your choice, work
using one of the three Types of Co-ordinate System:
For information about how to position the start and end point of a
contour on the workpiece surface, refer to the topic "Start and End
Position of a Contour as a Contact Point".
Cylindrical Co-ordinate System

In addition, see details under "Drive Strategies"
24.6.1.3 Pitch and Safety Distance

The pitch determines the distance between two measurement points. Smaller
pitches have a greater number of measurement points. Consequently, the
measurement operation becomes slower, but more accurate.
As in a scanning operation the pitch is considerably smaller than in the
measurement of geometrical elements, you also require a different safety
distance. The following general rule is applicable: As small as possible - as large
as required. (For details refer to the topic "Safety Distance").
Notice
The scanning speed and "Deflection" applies only to a measuring probe
(for details see the topic "Scanning with Measuring Probe").
For more information about scan functions, refer to the topics:
Drive Strategies
Open Contour
Start and End Position of a Contour as a Contact Point
Probe Radius Compensation (Scanning)
24.6.2 Driving Strategies
By selecting one driving plane, you define your driving

strategy.
• With the three planes XY, XZ and YZ, you determine in work
piece co-ordinates that scanning is carried out parallel to these
planes. The third co-ordinate remains always constant. It is
determined from the start point.
• Strategy of RZ: The driving plane is determined through the Z
axis and the angle Phi in the XY plane.. This co-ordinate - in the
present case the angle Phi - remains constant and is
determined from the start point.
This RZ strategy is used, in particular, for intersections on
rotating parts.
404 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
• Strategy of Phi-Z: The driving plane is determined through

the Z axis and a constant radius in the XY plane. So you can
scan contours on a cylinder surface. This co-ordinate - here the
radius R - determines the cylinder radius and is determined
from the start point.
What you must know
Activate this symbol only if you work with a MPP 4 or MPP 5. By a mouse-
click, you then clamp an axis. For details see under the topic "Clamp Axis with
MPP 4/5".
If you have selected a closed contour, start point = end point. Therefore the
co-ordinates of the end point are deactivated in this case (also see the chapter
"Open Contour").
With the direction vector you specify the direction where the probing is to
take place.
24.6.3 Scanning in Phi-Z with Constant Radius

The dialogue "CNC-scanning" particularly offers the option "Radius" for
GEARPAK. In addition to the usual PHI-Z-scanning, the radius can be specified
for a scanning probe system. Furthermore, probing from any direction is possible.
07.04.07 v3.0 405

SCANPAK
Background
With the normal Phi-Z-scanning, the constant radius is calculated from the start
point and the origin of the current co-ordinate system. With worms, however, we
have to work with an inclined probing surface and the program starts with
calculating the first probing point through the normal on the flank line (see ill.).
The resulting radius is established by activating the option in the dialogue.
1: Start point
2: Radius
Despite the varyingDeflection the scan can be executed on a constant radius.
24.6.4 Open Contour

Unlike manual scanning, in the case of CNC scanning you must always work
using a start and end point.
You can, at a time
Ö input the co-ordinates for the X, Y and Z axis into the text fields, or
Ö select the current position of the CMM by a click on the symbol.
When deciding in favour of an open contour, make sure that the symbol for the
closed contour is deactivated (for details refer to the topic "CNC Scanning:
"Automatic Measurement" On ").
Since, on its way to this axis, the scan can intersect several times the
other axis, but a stop should not be now, the axis must be "ignored". Which axis
must be ignored can be defined via the icons above. In the table below you see,
which axis must be the first or the second.
The symbols for the function "Ignore Axis" correspond

necessarily with your driving strategy (picture on the left), which you also specify
in the dialogue window "CNC Scanning".
406 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Ignore First Axis

Plane Ignore
XY X
YZ Y
ZX Z
RZ R
Phi-Z Phi
Ignore Second Axis

Plane Ignore
XY Y
YZ Z
ZX X
RZ Z
Phi-Z Z
24.6.5 Start and End Position of a Contour as a Contact Point

You can use this function to put the start and end position for "CNC-scanning" in
relation to the probe centre or to the workpiece surface.
The relation to the workpiece surface is useful when the part program is based on
an engineering drawing. If you wish to accept the current probe position as start
or end point, the relation must be established to the probe centre.
The end point of a closed contour automatically results from the first
point of the contour. That is why in this case no input for the end point is
possible.
Relate vectors to the workpiece surface
Ö In the section "Start point" and/or "End point", click on the

button "Point on workpiece".
The button "Probe centre" is deactivated.
Relate vectors to the probe centre
Ö In the section "Start point" and/or "End point", click on the

button "Probe centre".
The button "Point on workpiece" is deactivated.
24.6.6 CNC Scanning with "Automatic Element"

If you want to determine a contour e.g. with the function "Automatic Measure
Mode".
Ö start scanning (for details refer to the topic "Start SCANNING") and
Ö deactivate "Automatic Measurement" (symbol on the left) in

the window "Element Contour".
You immediately get the window "Measurement Display".
The toolbar on the left margin of the GEOPAK main window is
activated.
07.04.07 v3.0 407

SCANPAK
Ö Click on "Automatic Measure Mode" to get the corresponding

dialogue window and continue as usual.
24.6.7 Compensation of Radius of Probe (Scanning)

The compensation of radius of probe calculates from the contour of the
probe centers the contour on the surface of the part, this means independently of
the used probe system. The calculation is realized in the Scanning (driving)
plane.
You must know:
It is only valid for 2D contours.
The probing must always be realized perpendicularly to the surface
of the part.
Otherwise, a compensation of radius of probe is impossible because
inaccurate and incorrect results may occur.
Using of different probes doesn’t influence the calculation of a
correct contour with compensation of radius of probe.
When executing a probe radius compensation for contours with small

pitch in relation to the probe sphere diameter, some contour points may
possibly be deleted.
24.6.8 Scanning with Measuring Probe

The CMM control guides the measuring probe continuously along the contour. In
analogy to the fixed probe used with the manual CMM, you define, by means of
the pitch, at which distance the points are to be recorded.
24.6.8.1 Scanning Speed

The dialogue "CNC Scanning with Measuring Probe" gives you can also the
possibility of adjusting the scanning speed. For the optimum speed please refer
to your documentation regarding the probing system and CMM. A rule commonly
accepted says that the speed (mm/s) is to be set as low as possible in cases
where pronounced changes of direction are expected to occur frequently.
For details refer to the topic "CNC Scanning: "Automatic Measurement" On".
24.6.8.2 Deflection
The deflection can only be entered with a measuring probe. This is necessary
because a certain probing force is required so that the CMM can follow the
course of the contour. The probing force is proportional to the deflection of the
probe. Via the deflection, it is possible to influence the probing force.
With important changes of direction and a high probing force, you can get
problems. The probe can be e.g. too much accelerated (external angle). This
would lead to the error: “Out of Max. Deflection”. This tendency would still be
stronger with a smaller probe radius.
408 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
24.6.9 Clamp Axis with MPP

You have a probe of the MMP-4, MPP-5, MPP-100 or MPP-300 type. In other
words, you are provided with the function "Clamp Axis". Using this function
causes the CMM not to leave the co-ordinate of this "clamped" machine axis
while measurement is in progress. You must, however, have selected a driving
strategy for the driving planes XY, XZ or YZ. In, it is not possible to Clamping is
not possible with the strategies RZ and Phi Z
Ö Start Scanning as described in "Start CNC".
In the "CNC Scanning with Measuring Probe" window, the

symbol (left side) is activated in contrast to "Scanning with Touch-
Trigger Probe". You must click the symbol.
Make absolutely sure that the positioning of your part on the CMM is
made in such a way that the driving plane you selected is situated
parallel to a CMM axis.
For details regarding CNC Scanning see under the topic "CNC Scanning:
"Automatic Measurement" On"!
24.6.10 Thread Scanning with MPP10

The MPP10 is a probe
with an offset at the tip
and a scanning probe (for more details refer to CNC-Scanning:
"Automatic Measurement ").
The function "Thread scanning" is primarily used to define thread lengths (holes
and bolts).
To get to this dialogue, use "Menu bar / CMM / Thread scanning".
Proceed as follows:
Ö To be able to define the thread length, you have to enter the
nominal data of the work piece ("Unified thread" etc.) first. If the
thread is not listed, select "Input". In this case the text field "Height"
is activated and you can enter the corresponding value.
Ö Define the start point, the scanning direction and the approach
direction (also refer to the topic Measurement with Scanning Probe).
In the learn mode you can
• use the button "Machine position" as the start point.
• use the button "Suggest directions" for the directions to ensure
that the directions correspond to the fitting and swivelling
position of the current probe. As opposed to older versions of
GEOPAK, it is no longer necessary to create a separate co-
ordinate system. For the MPP10 settings, go via the "Rack
definition" to the dialogue "Port settings".
07.04.07 v3.0 409

SCANPAK
This illustration shows that there are six possible MPP10 probe directions
available.
Ö Under "Termination condition" you can define when you want to stop
the scan (input) or whether you want the CMM to automatically find
the thread end.
Ö If required, read information about "Pitch" and scan speed under the
topics for CNC scanning.
Ö With the option "Display thread in extra window" you have the
possibility to display the thread form. In the repeat mode the
program continues only after the window is closed.
Note
You can have an output of the results of the thread measurement, like for
example thread start or thread length, via the dialogue "Define variables
and calculate" (see also the picture below and for more details refer to
System Variable in Formula Calculation as well as to the topicTable of
Operators and Functions .)
24.7 Element Contour

24.7.1 Contour
Using this function, you create a new element of the type "Contour". A
contour comprises a number of points in an ordered array. The GEOPAK
program can use the contour points for calculating an element (for details see the
example shown under Selection of Points Contour).
Ö You either click on the symbol (see above) or use the menu bar
"Element / Contour".
In the dialogue window "Element Contour" there are summarised all
the types of construction of planes allowed by GEOPAK (for further
details please refer also to Elements: Overview).
For details concerning the first two types of construction see Type of
Construction.
For further details see under
410 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Load Contour.
Middle Contour .
Load Contour from External Systems .

For details regarding the topic "Calculation of an Element on a Contour"
see topic Selection of Point Contour
24.7.2 Selection of Points Contour

You have loaded a contour and want to calculate an element on this contour (or
part of this contour). For this purpose you need, as a rule, only a part of the
contour points. This is why you have to make a selection. For the selection of the
points, you use the graphics. Make sure that this is activated.
Example for the calculation of a circle
Ö Click on the element symbol,
Ö in the following window and on the "Recalculate from

Memory" symbol and confirm.
Ö In the "Circle - Recalculate / Copy from Memory" window, you

click on the symbol (contour).
Ö Select a contour
• either from the list or ...
• by mouse-click (the mouse changes to a reticle) in a

contour graphic on your screen. You confirm.
The "Selection of Point Contour" window appears. At the same time,
the mouse pointer again changes to a reticle.
07.04.07 v3.0 411

SCANPAK
Point selection using the mouse

With the left-hand mouse button depressed, you select in the
contour graphics all the areas you want to use for calculating, e.g. a
circle. You can click single points, or you summarise points to form
blocks (keep mouse button depressed). The areas selected are
shown in colour (in "red" as shown in the picture below").
In the window "Select points from contour", the co-ordinates of the

points are shown as blocks. A block number is assigned to each
selection.
Select ranges
Sie können bestimmen, in welchem Koordinatensystem die Anzeige bzw.
Eingabe erfolgen soll.
For this, activate the following buttons:
In the left columns, the start co-ordinates are shown or input.
In the right columns, the end co-ordinates are shown or input.
Below the line "Selected Blocks" you decide via the symbols
which blocks you want to use for the calculation.
Delete a block (selection).
Using this symbol you call up all contour points required for the
calculation of the element in question.
You delete all points (blocks).

Exact point selection
Ö Activate the function "Point selection".
Ö Click the button "Add block".

Ö In the left field, enter the number of the contour point at which the
selection shall start.
Ö In the right field, enter the number of the contour point at which the
selection shall end.
412 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
The graphics immediately shows your selection.
24.7.3 Contour Connection Element

Using the function "Connection Element Contour" you can connect single
contours to form a common contour. This function is suitable also for copying a
contour. You can use this function to your advantage, e.g., in cases where you
create a "Contour with Offset". You would then have the original together with the
"new contour" for comparison purposes. You can also overwrite and existing
contour.
Of great importance is the option which allows you to choose between

the Single or Group Selection (for details please refer to the topics "Single
Selection" and " Group Selection").
The general contour is located in the ...
actual co-ordinate system and in the
selected projection plane.
Procedure
You come to the dialogue window "Contour Connection Element" by
Ö clicking on the symbol in the toolbar.
Ö In the window "Element Contour", click on the symbol (picture

left).
Ö Or select via the "Menu Bar / Element / Contour".
Ö In any case, you must confirm in the "Element Contour" window.
Opened / closed contour: Change status
You can use this function to connect the first and the last contour point of a
contour. The contour is assigned the status "closed contour". In this case, the
button is displayed as pushed.
If the connection between the first and the last contour point is interrupted, the
contour is assigned the status "opened contour".
Hint
For details as how to proceed in the dialogue windows "Contour
Connection Element (Single or Group Selection)", please refer to the
"Single Selection" and "Group Selection".
24.7.4 Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point)

You can calculate intersections also by using the element combinations "Contour
/ Circle", "Contour / Line" and "Contour / Point". If, in case of the combination
"Contour / Point", the point is not positioned on the contour, the point projected
onto the contour is calculated as the intersection.
Note
The projection of a point onto a contour is defined as the shortest distance
between the point and the contour.
Ö Click on "Element Point" in the toolbar, confirm and the

"Element Point" window is displayed.
07.04.07 v3.0 413

SCANPAK
Ö In this window, click on the "Intersection" symbol in "Type of

Construction" and confirm.
The "Intersection Element Point" window is displayed.
Insert intersection points as contour points into a contour
Ö In the tool bar "First element", click on the contour symbol

when this button is not yet active.
Ö You select a contour in the list box "First element".
Ö In the tool bar "Second element", you click on the element symbol
that you want to intersect with the contour (e.g. line, circle and
point).
Ö Select an element in the list box "Second element".
Ö You either click on "Insert element point as contour point" or

on "Insert all of the intersection points".
For further details, see the topic
24.8 Contour Im-/Export / Contour Manipulate

24.8.1 Contents Contour Import/Export
Principles
Import Contour
Export Contour
Technical Specification
DXF Format
VDAFS Format
VDAIS (IGES) Format
NC Formats
Special formats
Error Messages
24.8.2 Principles
The following texts describes a function - meanwhile integrated in GEOPAK -
which was known before as program "TRANSPAK".
With this function it is possible to take over contours from external CAD systems
to GEOPAK. It's primary task is to read in contours for tolerance comparisons.
Condition for the measuring procedures in GEOPAK is that only the required
contour data (e.g. of any two dimensional contour) are included in the CAD files.
In general, it is only possible to read in formats which correspond to the technical
specifications determined in GEOPAK (for further information please refer to
Technical Specification).
No surface data and no dimensioning lines must be included in the data

file. The dimensioning lines are considered as lines to be measured by
the program.
414 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Precondition
The function "Import contour" must be activated by an entry in the dongle.
24.8.3 Import Contour

Procedure
Ö Click on this icon or choose "Element / Contour" from the

menu bar.
Ö Enter the contour name and the memory number in the dialogue
window "Element Contour".
Ö Click on the icon "Import contour" and confirm.

Dialogue window
Ö In the dialogue window "Import contour" choose the following
settings:
Ö The Type of format, e.g. VDAFS or IGES,
Ö The Contour file (CAD file) by choosing this icon.

Ö The unit of measurement of the file (default, millimetres or inch).
We recommend to use the default setting. If, however, the
determined unit in the CAD file is not correct you have to change it.
Ö The pitch: If you do not insert additional points, the initial and end
points of a line or of a sector of circle will be transferred only. The
distance between these two points is normally too large. Use the
function "Pitch" to insert additional points.
Ö In order to obtain exact results for the tolerance comparisons

always activate the option "Set end point". If this option is
activated, two additional contour points are inserted at the beginning
and the end of a line or of a sector of circle. The points are inserted
with a distance of 0,01 millimetres.
If a contour contains many small elements, this option is not
necessary. The maximum number of points to be generated is 32
000. If this number is exceeded, GEOPAK displays the error
message "Too many points".
Sort order of points: It may occur that the elements in a CAD

file are not mutually connected. In this case the position of the
elements is not correct (see picture below).
Ö First of all sort the elements in the correct order.

Confirm.
The contour is read. This process will take some time.
07.04.07 v3.0 415

SCANPAK
The result is shown in the element graphic, in the element list and in
the result field.
If you wish to sort, a maximum number of 7000 elements can be
read.
Further Theme: Error_Message
24.8.4 Export Contour

The specifications of chapter "Import contour" are valid for this chapter except for
the following descriptions.
Procedure
How to export the measured contour data to an external CAD system:
Ö Click on menu "Output" and choose function "Export contour".
Ö Choose your settings for "Select contour", "Type of format" and
"Contour file" in the displayed dialogue window.
Ö Choose the "unit of measurement" of the file.
Ö Choose the desired contour (2D contour or 3D contour)

by clicking on the corresponding icon.
Ö Confirm. The output of the contour is protocoled in the result field.
After you have scanned a contour, the data can be output to CAD systems via
different common interfaces e.g. VDAFS or IGES.
24.8.5 Technical Specification

General conditions for data exchange
Attention must be paid during the design with the CAD system that the end
positions of successive design elements coincide with the start position of the
next element (e.g. in AUTOCAD set OFANG to END).
The maximum sequence of polynomial curves is 22.
Only the contour lines may be used in the data output.
If the option "Sort order of points" is activated, the maximum number of geometric
elements to be read is 7000. If this option is deactivated, up to 31999 elements
can be read in. It is possible to create contours with a maximum number of 31999
points.
This specification is only valid for the exchange of contours between CAD
systems and GEOPAK.
24.8.6 DXF Format

DXF format: ASCII, based on AutoCad V10.0 Autodesk
Convert DXF into GEOPAK
The contours are output as elements.
Blocks must be resolved before the output.
The following elements and group codes are supported:
LINE 10, 20, 30 (starting position) 11, 21, 31 (end position)
POINT 10, 20, 30 (point) (when using the DXF 'POINT' element no
intermediate points are generated in GEOPAK)
CIRCLE 10, 20, 30 (centre), 40 (radius)
ARC 10, 20, 30 (centre), 40 (radius), 50, 60 (angle)
416 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
LINE 10, 20, 30 (starting position) 11, 21, 31 (end position)

POLYLINE 66
VERTEX 10, 20, 30 (location), 42 (bulge)
SEQEND
3DLINE 10, 20, 30 (starting position) 11, 21, 31 (end position)
Group codes not listed here are ignored. In particular, the use of 210,
220, 230 and with POLYLINE 10, 20, 30 with values not equal to 0 leads
to errors.
Convert GEOPAK into DXF

Contours are output as DXF element POLYLINE. When interpolation is activated
each point corresponds to a VERTEX element.
24.8.7 VDAFS Format

VDAFS format : ASCII, V 2.0 according to DIN 66301.
Convert VDAFS into GEOPAK
The contours are output as "sets".
The following VDAFS elements are supported:
HEADER Start identifier of the file
BEGINSET Start of a set
ENDSET End of a set
$$ Comment
POINT Point co-ordinates (when using this element, no intermediate
points are generated in GEOPAK.)
PSET Point sequence
MDI Point vector sequence; the direction vectors are not evaluated
CURVE Curve from segments; the polynomial sequence may not exceed 22
CIRCLE Circle
Using language elements not listed above may lead to errors.
Convert GEOPAK into VDAFS

Contours are output as the VDAFS element PSET.
24.8.8 VDAIS (IGES) Format

VDAIS is a subset of IGES V3.0.
Convert VDAIS into GEOPAK
Element Typ Form Subord Sw PD ptr. Matrix ptr.
Geometric elements
Circular arc 100 0 X X X
2D-point 106 1 X X X
3D-point 106 2 X X X
07.04.07 v3.0 417

SCANPAK
Element Typ Form Subord Sw PD ptr. Matrix ptr.

Straight line 110 0 X X X
Par. Spline curve 112 0 X X X
Types: linear, quadratic, cubic *
Point (--> composite curve) 116 0 X X X
Transformations matrix 124 0 - X !0
Structuring element
Composite curve 102 0 !00 X !0
Group 402 1,7,14,15 !00 X -
PD pointer only on geometric elements *
* General restriction compared to IGES.
Convert GEOPAK into VDAIS
Contours are output as the VDAIS element 110 (straight line).
24.8.9 NC Formats
NC programs are generated and read according to DIN 66025.
Reading NC data into GEOPAK
The following G commands are interpreted:
G1 straight line interpolation
G2 circle interpolation in direction to the right
G3 circle interpolation in direction to the left
G17 XY plane selection
G18 ZX plane selection
G19 YZ plane selection
Note:
the circle in commands G2 and G3 must be defined via the midpoint
(I, J, K);
the co-ordinates can be specified both incrementally and absolutely;
the commands G1, G2, G3 can also be programmed permanently.
Output of GEOPAK in NC formats
The data are output via G1 commands.
Initial and end sequences can be defined specifically for each
control system.
24.8.10 Special Formats

In addition to the above-mentioned formats several special formats for programs
such as PC-DRAFT, PERSONAL DESIGNER, etc. are available.
In these formats it is possible to transfer point data only. To a large extent the
formats may be freely defined using control files.
In all cases these formats are ASCII formats. Internal (binary) CAD formats are
generally not supported.
24.8.11 Error Message

If an error Message is displayed, proceed as follows:
418 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Check the format in the dialogue window "Import contour".

If necessary enlarge the distance of points.
Deactivate the option "Set end point".
As described above it may happen that e.g. an IGES file contains elements which
can not be read by GEOPAK.
24.9 Manipulate Contour

24.9.1 Contents
In this chapter you will find the following topics:
Manipulate Contour
Mirror Contour
Move / Rotate Contour
Scale Contour
Edit Contour Point
Create Offset-Contour
Idealize Contour
Change Point Sequence
Sort Sequence of Contour Points
Middle Contour
Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter
Prepare Leading Contour
Activate Leading Contour
Scanning with Guiding Contour
Scanning of a Nominal Contour
Define Approach Direction
Loop Counter
Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy
Intersection Point (Contour with Line / Circle / Point)
Selection of Point Contour
Delete Contour Points
Delete via "Single Selection"
Delete with Radius
Clean Contour
Delete Reversing Paths from Contour
Delete Double Contour Points
Airfoil Analysis Contents
Min. and Max. Point
Automatic Element Calculation

Introduction
Tolerance Limits
Idealize
Permanency
07.04.07 v3.0 419

SCANPAK
24.9.2 Manipulate Contour

A mouse-click on the menu topic "Contour" provides you with various possibilities
to manipulate your contour (position, shape, etc.). The manipulation is done to
the original contours, that is, no new contours are created. You can cancel any
changes made. All functions are of the teach-in type to be used for the repeat
mode.
For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter, please refer to
the title "Loop Counter".
All contours are processed in the actual co-ordinate system, that is, not
necessarily in the system where they were measured.
This is what you can do with the contour:

Scale,
Mirror,
Move,
Create Offset-Contour.
You can also "Cancel Points". You activate this function, however, using the
menu "Elements".
24.9.3 Scale Contour

For details regarding general principles see under "Manipulate Contour".
You proceed in the following way:
Ö You click in the menu bar on Contour/Scale and come to the
dialogue window "Scale Contour".
Ö Using the arrow, you select an already existing contour.
Ö You enter the scale factors into the text boxes X, Y and Z and
confirm.
All points of the contour are multiplied - relative to the origin of the actual
co-ordinate system - by these factors.
24.9.4 Edit Contour Point

You can use this function to change the co-ordinates of an already existing
contour point.
Proceed as follows:
Ö In the menu bar click on "Contour / Edit contour point" and the
dialogue window "Edit contour point " opens.
Ö Use this arrow to select an already existing contour.
Ö Confirm.
The dialogue window "Select points from contour" is opened.
Ö Set the co-ordinates mode.
Ö Enter the contour point you want to change.
In the GEOPAK learning mode you can select the contour point to be changed in
the element graphic using the mouse.
Ö Confirm your selection.
The dialogue window "Edit contour point " is opened.
420 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
In the dialogue window "Edit contour point" you enter the new co-ordinates of the
contour point to be changed.
24.9.5 Mirror Contour

Ö You click in the menu bar on Contour/Mirror and come to the
dialogue window "Mirror Contour".
Ö Using the symbols, you select one of the planes relative to which
you want to mirror the contour, and then you confirm.
The order of points is inverted. The object is, in particular, to establish from the
original and the mirrored contour one common contour (in one sense of rotation)
(for details see under the topic "Connection Element Contour").
24.9.6 Move / Rotate Contour

All points of the contour are first moved and then rotated - relative to the origin of
the actual co-ordinate system.
Ö You click in the menu bar on "Move/Rotate Contour" and come to
the dialogue window "Move/Rotate Contour".
Ö You enter the "move" figures into the text boxes X, Y and Z, and
then you confirm.
Ö If you then still want to rotate the contour around an axis, you use
the symbols to select one of the three axes (X, Y or Z).
Ö Furthermore, you enter the figure for the angle in the adjacent text
box.
"Rotate" first
If you want to rotate first and move after,
Ö you rotate (as described above), leave the "move" figures at 0 and
confirm. Then ...
Ö call up the dialogue again and move (as described above). Now the
angle of rotation remains at 0.
24.9.7 Create Offset-Contour

For details regarding general principles concerning the topic contour see under
"Manipulate Contour".
Introduction
You have scanned a contour in order to generate a CNC part program (e.g. for
wire spark-erosion machines (for details see under the topic Transfer Contour
into External System). What you need for such a transfer is a contour whose tool
radius is increased or decreased. Such a contour is also called an Offset Contour
or an Equidistant. The perpendicular (normal line is formed at each point of the
contour. The point is moved by the "offset" along the perpendicular,.
07.04.07 v3.0 421

SCANPAK

Ö You click in the menu bar on "Contour/Contour with Offset" and
come to the appropriate dialogue window.
Ö In this dialogue window, you select the contour via the list
functions, and then ...
Ö you enter the offset figure.
Ö Use the option buttons to define in which direction the contour
shall be offset.
Increase / Decrease Contour
To define the direction in which the contour shall be increased or decreased,
imagine a closed contour between start and end point. The option "Increase
contour" moves the contour outwards. For this, the material side of the contour is
of no importance.
Left / Right
The offset orientates at the sort sequence of the contour points. The command
"Left" effects the stated offset to the left side of the contour seen in point
sequence.
The calculation of the offset contour makes it possible to clip off parts of
the contour (see picture below. Upon completion of the calculation, these
constrictions are automatically deleted. This is the reason why the
calculated contour may possibly provide less points than the initial
contour. These points are recovered by the "Back function".
On the left (above) the original contour, on the right (below) the contour
after the offset.
422 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
The "Offset Contour" is shown in the element graphics and recorded in the result
box.
24.9.8 Idealize Contour

The possibility to change a measured contour is important for the creation of a
machine tool part program. A point selection of a contour can be put in relation to
a defined geometric element (point, circle, line, angle). Then, the contour equals
the element in this specific range. This contour range is idealized to the element.
The operation of the function consists of three parts:
Selection of a contour to be changed.
Selection of an element to be taken as the ideal element.
Selection of the contour sections to be idealized.
Proceed as follows:
Ö In the menu bar, click on "Contour/Idealize contour".
The dialogue "Idealize contour" opens.
24.9.8.1 Select contour

In order to be able to work with contours, you must load at least one contour. For
information about how to load a contour, go to the topic Load Contour.
Ö In the list box "Select contour", click on the contour you wish to
idealize.
For information about if and how to apply the loop counter, go

to "Loop Counter".
24.9.8.2 Select element

In order to be able to select an element, the required element must be part of
your part program. For further information, refer to the topic Elements: Overview.
Use the buttons
Point
Line
Circle
Angle
to select an element type with which you wish to idealize the contour.
Ö In the list box "Select element", click on the element with which
you wish to idealize the contour.
For information about if and how to use the loop counter, refer
to the topic "Loop Counter".
24.9.8.3 Select contour range

Use the buttons "Selected range" to select:
Point selection contour. You wish to idealize a contour section
with a manual input. For details, go to "Select Points from Contour".
Defined by element. The contour section is defined by the selected
element.
Complete contour. The complete contour is idealized after the
selected element.
07.04.07 v3.0 423

SCANPAK
24.9.9 Change Point Sequence

The function changes the sequence of the points within a contour. The co-
ordinates of the points and the number of the contour points are not influenced.
The function can be applied to a selected range or to the complete contour.
Proceed as follows:
Ö Click in the menu bar on "Contour/Change point sequence".
The dialogue "Change point sequence" opens.
Select contour
To be able to work with contours you need to load at least one contour. For
information about how to load a contour, refer to the topic Load Contour.
Ö In the list box "Select contour", click on the contour for which
you wish to change the point sequence.
For information about if and how to apply the loop counter,

refer to the topic "Loop Counter".
Select contour range
Ö Click on the button "Point selection contour" and you can

define a contour range.
When confirming the dialogue "Change point sequence", the
dialogue "Point selection contour" opens.
Ö Select a contour range. For more information, refer to "Point
Selection Contour".
Select complete contour
To select the complete contour, click on the symbol "Complete contour".

For more information about this topic, refer to Sort Sequence of the Contour
Points beschrieben.
24.9.10 Sort Sequence of Contour Points

A correct sort sequence of the contour points is important for many types of
calculations. The sequence can be wrong when, for example, a contour has been
imported by an external system. Also the GEOPAK-function "Connection element
contour" can lead to the connection of points to a disordered contour. The
decision as to which of the following functions is the most suitable must be taken
from case to case.
Smallest projected distance Smallest distance in the

space
The points are sorted depending on the distance between adjoining
points. The algorithm starts with the start point (ascending) or the
end point (descending) of the selected range. Then, the next
contour point to the previous one is continuously searched and
sorted anew. This is repeated until the sorting of all contour points is
completed. The point co-ordinates are, depending on the selection,
viewed as a projected point (projected distance) or as a XYZ-point
(in the space).
424 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Reverse sort sequence for points

The sequence of the points is reversed. Thus, the start point of a
contour becomes the end point of the contour and vice versa.
X-co-ordinate Y-co-ordinate Z-co-ordinate The

points are sorted depending on the selected co-ordinate. The start
and the end point of the contour may change.
Radius projected Radius 3D

The points are sorted against the origin of the co-ordinate system
depending on the radius of each point. The start and end point of
the contour will usually change. The radius is calculated, depending
on the selection, either from the projected point (radius projected) or
the XYZ-point (Radius 3D).
Angle range
The points are sorted against the first axis of the contour projection
depending on the angle of each individual point. The angle is always
calculated on the projection plane of the contour. The start point
does not change, the end point may change.
Ascending / Descending
The sort sequence of the previous settings (except "Reverse sort
sequence for points") can be reversed using these option buttons.
Examples:
• Contour points of a gear are sorted with the option "Angle
range".
• A contour parallel to the X-axis could be sorted easily with the
option "X-co-ordinate".
• In most cases, the option "Smallest distance in space" is
sufficient.
24.9.11 Fit in Circle with fixed Diameter

You can fit in a circle with given diameter in a contour with two touching points.
The result is the circle shown in the element graphics below.
Ö In the toolbar, click on the symbol on the left.
Ö In the following "Element Circle" window, click under "Type of

Construction" on the "Fit in Element" symbol.
07.04.07 v3.0 425

SCANPAK
Ö Via the "Fit in Element Circle" and "Select Points from Contour"
windows, you create your circle. See further details to this in the
topics
Constructed Circles and
Select Points from Contour.
This function can only be used on contours with a point sequence. The "Inserted
Circle" is a simulation of the customary methods in order to evaluate spindle and
screw parameters. The starting points must exist shaped as a contour.
24.9.12 Middle Contour

A Middle Contour is calculated, for instance, in cases where the mean for
correction is to be calculated from a variety of workpieces (nests or forms). A
situation where a new contour with a defined pitch or defined pitches is to be
produced from a single contour is regarded as a special case. Thus, the Middle
Contour becomes necessary in case of a tool correction where the nominal, the
actual and also the tool contour must each have the same number of points. Only
if this is the case, a correction can be performed.
Ö You either click on the symbol or use the menu bar with the
functions "Element/Contour".
Ö Using the dialogue window "Element Contour", you allocate a name
and a memory location to the contour you still want to calculate.
Ö You click on the symbol and confirm.

Ö In the window "Middle Contour" under "Avail.", you select the
contours you want to use for the calculation.
Ö Clicking on the double arrow you move the contours under

the heading "Selected" (or also back).
Ö Additionally, you enter the pitch (the spacing between the points) to
be used for calculating the new contour, and then you confirm..
Loop Counter".
The new contour is displayed in the element graphics and recorded
in the result box..
Hint
In the window "Middle Contour" you can, of course, select just one
contour with a different pitch.
24.9.13 Prepare Leading Contour

A leading contour can be provided, e.g. by a CAD system. Upon completion of
the measurement, an actual / nominal comparison can be made with the scanned
contour.
Scanning following a leading contour requires the following actions to be done
previously:
Ö You click on "CNC On" and on the functions "CMM/CNC On"
disposed at the menu bar.
426 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Ö You see in the GEOPAK status line a yellow dot next to the
CMM symbol.
Ö You click on the symbol in the symbol bar, and...
Ö de-activate in the following dialogue window "Element

Contour" the function "Automatic Measurement".
For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter,

please refer to the title "Loop Counter".
Ö You click on the symbol and confirm.

Upon completion of the above, the function "Scanning following a leading
contour" in the menu CMM is activated.
24.9.14 Activate Leading Contour

Before the function "Scanning following Leading Contour" is activated, you must
perform a series of steps. For details see under the topic Prepare Leading
Contour.
This is what you must know
• The points are established by probing.
• For this purpose, every single point of the leading contour is
probed.
• Moreover, it is necessary that a probe is defined.
Ö In the menu "CCM" you click on the function "Scanning following
Leading Contour".
Ö You select the leading contour in the window "Scanning following
Leading Contour".
For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter,

please refer to the topic "Loop Counter".
Ö Using the known symbols you specify the plane along which
scanning is to take place.
Ö In addition to the selection of the plane you

choose a probing direction.
A graphical sign in the dialogue window on the right shows you the
plane where and the direction from which probing takes place.
Ö Clicking on the symbol you specify that traversing will take

place using "Probing Direction of the Leading Contour".
Ö You enter the safety distance and measurement length.
07.04.07 v3.0 427

SCANPAK
The probe radius compensation, if necessary, will be carried out by you at a

later time, requiring a separate step.
24.9.15 Scanning with Guiding Contour

24.9.15.1 Basis
If you want to scan according to a guiding contour, you must consider the
following items:
The points of the guiding contour and the measured points are
treated as probe centre points. The probe radius cannot be
compensated because when working e.g. on vaulted surface, the
exact point on work piece (P) is not known (see picture below).
In order to avoid a crash, enter the required safety distance.

The measured nominal length limits the search in the probing
direction. This way, you avoid a crash with the probe shaft (see also
the related subject Enter Z Offset).
In the first scanning with guiding contour, you should reduce the
movement speed of the CMM.
24.9.15.2 Default:
Specify measurement direction (fixed measurement direction)
If you have selected e.g. the X/Y plane, you measure in the +Z or—
Z direction.
In order to get a short measurement time, the (dash-lined) Z co-
ordinate adapts itself in our example with the X/Y plane (swung line
below) of the workpiece contour.
If you selected, like above, the X/Y-plain, the probing direction in the
X/Y plane is automatically calculated. It passes vertically to the
contour, namely to the inner or outer side. (see picture below [outer
side]).
428 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Measuring Direction specified through Guiding Contour

If the contour of CAT1000S has been generated, also a probing direction exists
that you can use (see picture below).
24.9.16 Loop Counter

For saving and exporting contours, you also can use "Loop Counters".
The procedure for "Saving".
Ö Via the symbol, click in the list field on the contour, with which
you want to begin in the loop, respectively you want to save as first
contour.
Ö Activate the loop counter via the symbol.

When saving, the loop counter is not automatically registered.
Ö Click on the symbol.

Ö In the window "Save Contour as" you must enter the special
characters "@LC" at an independent place (see example below).
contour@LC.gws
At each m loop flow, a file is (example above) created: contour1.gws,
contour2.gws, .., contourN.gws
Notice
For the export of contours with the loop counter the above mentioned
steps are analogously valid.
07.04.07 v3.0 429

SCANPAK
24.9.17 Scanning of a Nominal Contour

This function is used to scan
flat surfaces, e.g. sealing surfaces of cylinder heads, in the

surface mode.
In the edge mode you can scan a nominal contour at high

speed.
For this, you can only use scan probes, like for example
MPP100
SP25
SP80
SP600
The scanning of single points, e.g. with a TP200, is not possible.
The scanning of a nominal contour in the surface mode works like the Phi-Z-
scanning. However, a contour is used as leading geometry instead of a circle.
Proceed as follows
Ö In the menu "CMM" click on the function "Scanning of a nominal
contour"
Ö Select the leading contour in the window "Scanning of a nominal
contour".
For information about if and how to apply the loop counter,

refer to the topic "Loop Counter".
Add probe radius offset to leading contour
The loaded leading contour is positioned either on the workpiece surface or

in the probe centre. When using a contour positioned on the workpiece surface,
activate the button.
Add probe radius offset to measured contour
The measured contour can be compensated by the probe radius. This is

how you get a contour on the workpiece surface. This button is only active in the
edge mode.
Show error message during scanning
With a deflection of less than 0.080 mm, the measurement points captured
in this section during scanning are deleted without a corresponding error
message. If you activate this button, scanning is aborted with a corresponding
error message.
Tolerance Limits
The nominal contour is used to calculate geometrical elements like circles (red)
and lines (blue). The maximum deviation between the nominal contour and the
calculated elements is defined by the tolerance limits of the line and circle
elements.
430 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Enter these tolerance limits into the input fields "Line" and "Circle".
During the scanning process the probe may not loose contact to the workpiece.
Therefore, the offset of the nominal contour is included in the calculation. This
offset is the excursion that is added to the approach direction. For detailed
information, refer to Define Approach Direction.
24.9.18 Define Approach Direction

Define the scan mode or the movement strategy.
When probing a surface and using the Phi-Z-strategy, click on the symbol
"Start point on the surface".
When probing at an edge in one of the three planes XY, XZ and YZ from
the side, click on the symbol "Start point on the edge". This scan mode is quicker
than the scan mode for an unknown contour. As this is a 2D-scan, the third co-
ordinate remains almost constant.
You can define the angles of the direction vectors of the approach direction in the
input fields X, Y and Z. The entered values are automatically adapted so that the
sum of the cosine four squares is 1. The approach direction is used to determine
on which side of the nominal contour the material is.
If you click on the symbol "Change direction vector", the respective angle
of the direction vector is reversed.
Accept CMM-position
When clicking on the symbol "Machine position", the approach direction to the
first contour point is defined. With this function you can assert that no collisions
occur before starting the contour measurement.
Point distance and scan speed
In the input field "Pitch", enter the point distance of the individual
contour points.
In the input field "Scan speed", enter the speed with which you wish
to scan your workpiece.
24.9.19 Recalculate Contour from Memory / Copy

For your measurement task it can be necessary that an already saved contour
must be recalculated (e.g. in a new co-ordinate system). This can be useful if two
contours must be calculated being of two different co-ordinate systems.
Procedure
Ö In the toolbar, click on the symbol ...
Ö and in the following window "Element Contour" on the

keypad.
Ö You can also select via the "Menu Bar / Element / Contour".
A window "Recalculate from Memory / Copy: Contour" is displayed.
07.04.07 v3.0 431

SCANPAK
Ö In the list field "Select Contour", click the contour, which must
be recalculated (copied).
Ö In the "Storage" list box, you enter a no. already existing or a new
no. for your contour.
Ö On principle, you can select
• a whole contour or a
• section of it (also selectable with the mouse).
Ö If and how to use the loop counter, is fully shown in the topic
"Loop Counter".
Ö Via one of the symbols (here the Phi Z plane), you decide in
which plane the contour must be projected.
Ö Via the symbol, you determine whether the contour must be

recalculated as an open or closed contour.
24.9.20 Delete Contour Points

Working with contours makes it necessary to change (delete, move) contour
measurement points. The explanations provided for the following functions show
how geometrical elements can be calculated from contour points and, e.g., how
you evaluate only parts of a contour.
Click on "Contour / Delete Points" in the menu bar in order to open the "Delete
Points" dialogue.
Select contour
In order for you to work with contours, you have to load, at least, one contour. For
information on how to load a contour refer to the topic Load Contour.
Ö Decide whether you want to use the loop counter.
The topic "Loop Counter" provides information as to whether

and how to use the loop counter.
Use contours
For details regarding the practical use of contours refer to the following items:
Clean Contour
24.9.21 Delete Points of a Contour

If, for instance, you wish to evaluate only parts of a contour, or to delete not
desired contour points, the "Delete Points" window gives you four options with
regard to the "Delete Points" function.
Delete via Single Selection
Delete with Radius
Notice
For the following actions, you must know that the reference point is
always the origin of the actual co-ordinate system.
432 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
24.9.22 Delete via "Single Selection"

In cases where you have to delete single points from a contour, you will use this
function.
Ö Click on the symbol.

Ö Confirm the "Delete Points" dialogue.
The "Selection of Point Contour" window opens.
Ö With the mouse cursor (reticule), you mark in the element graphics
the points you want to delete.
The area is marked in another colour (see Fig. below marked in
red).
The number of the selected groups and their co-ordinates are

transferred to the "Selection of Point Contour" window.
24.9.23 Delete with the Co-Ordinates

For cases where you have to delete contour areas from the contour, you will use
this function.
Ö You decide whether you want to use the X, Y or Z co-ordinate for
the selection of the contour points.
Ö "X-Y-Z Co-Ordinates".
Ö Use the check buttons to determine whether you wish to delete the
points above or below the co-ordinate or between two co-ordinates.
Ö The area where you wish to delete the contour points is to be
entered into the text box adjacent to the co-ordinate symbols. You
can input negative values.
For the example shown in the picture below, we activated the option
"X Co-Ordinate" and "above".
The result is shown in a graphics and in the "Select Points from
Contour" window.
07.04.07 v3.0 433

SCANPAK
24.9.24 Delete with Radius

this function.
Ö Click on the symbol "Radius - 3D"
Ö or on the symbol "Radius - projected".

Ö Use the check buttons to determine whether you wish to delete the
points above or below the radius or between two radii.
Ö Enter the radius or the radii (in the present case 10) into the text
box.
For our example (see picture below), we activated the "below"
option.
24.9.25 Delete via an Angle Area

this function.
Ö Click on the "Angle Range" symbol.

Ö Enter the "from" angle (e.g.. 50°) into the first input box, and, into
the second box, the "to" angle (e.g. 50°).
434 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
"From" angle 1, "to" angle 2

Ö Upon confirmation of your entries you get the following contour in
the element graphics, Fig. 2.
Contour with deleted points
24.9.26 Reduce Number of Points

You will reduce the number of points of a contour if you intend to...
speed up calculation,
clean the contour,
process contour data to suit a CAD system or a machine tool.
To this end, there are the following functions available for you:
24.9.27 Delete Linear Parts of a Contour

This function ensures that contour points located inside the run of the contour are
kept within the contour; points, however, located in areas where the contour is
linear, are deleted.
Example:
In the contour shown here (Fig. 1), points not required are to be deleted from the
linear run of the contour. Points deviating less than 0.01 mm from the ideal
contour run are deleted.
07.04.07 v3.0 435

SCANPAK
Contour with not deleted contour points.

Ö Click on the symbol "Deviation from Chord".

Indicate in the "Maximum Deviation" input box the width of the gap
determining which points are deleted, Fig. 2.
The points shown in red are deleted from the contour.

Ö Enter e.g. 0.01mm into the input box designated "Maximum
Deviation".
The element graphics has shown you that the linear portion of the
contour run is 3 mm.
Ö Enter the value 3 mm into the "Max. Pitch" input box.
the element graphics, see Fig. 3.
Contour with deleted points.
24.9.28 Reduce Neighboured Points

This function enables you to delete contour points located close to each other.
This is the case mostly with runs of curves or small radii.
Ö Click on the button "Reduce Neighboured Points".

Ö Enter a figure, e.g. 1 mm, into the input box "Lowest Pitch".
Points located within this distance are deleted.
436 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Points shown in red are deleted from the contour.

The distance is calculated from every point which was not deleted.
24.9.29 Delete Point Intervals from Contour

This function enables you to delete point intervals from contours. By entering a
figure of your choice into the input box "Take every xth Point" you determine the
points which are not to be deleted.
Ö Click on the button "Keep Points by Interval".

Ö Enter a figure, e.g. 3, into the input box "Step of Points to save".
The first contour point and every third contour points will not be
deleted, see Fig. 1.
Points shown in red are deleted from the contour.

the element graphics, see Fig. 2.
Contour with every third point.
Supposing the contour consisted of 1000 contour points and you entered
1001, the contour would be deleted, except the first point.
07.04.07 v3.0 437

SCANPAK
24.9.30 Clean Contour

A contour consists of measurement points arranged in the order of measurement.
The contour should include no points of the same position (double points), no
loops and no reversing paths.
Using the following functions you can:
Delete Reversing Paths
Delete Double Points
24.9.31 Delete Contour Loops

The reason for contour loops can be the functions "Contour with Offset" and
"Probe Radius Compensation" in the scanning dialogue. Performing the function
"Delete Contour Loops" causes the crossing point of the loop to replace the
contour points of the loop, see Fig. 1.
The crossing point is shown in green and the loop points in red.
Ö Click on the symbol "Delete Contour Loops".

Ö Enter the max. number of points into the input box "Biggest Loop".
The time required for calculating this function depends on the number of
loop points which you have entered.

the element graphics, se Fig. 2.
Contour with no loop

If a contour contains several loops, all these loops will be deleted.
24.9.32 Delete Reversing Paths from Contour

Reversing paths are formed as a result of the connection of two contours with
each other and the superposition of contour points.
438 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Contour with reversing paths.
Ö Click on the symbol "Delete Reversing Point Sequences".

Ö Enter an angle, e.g. 10°, which covers the reversing paths, into the
input box "Reversing Angle".
The origin of the angle is, in this case, the point 5.
The function recognises reversing paths, provided they are located within the
entered angle. This function recognises also the end of the reversing paths and
deletes the points not required (shown in red).
Ö Upon confirmation of your entries to get the following contour in the
element graphics, see Fig. 2.
Contour with no reversing paths
24.9.33 Delete Double Contour Points

In order to delete double contour points, click on the symbol. Double
contour points (same position of single meas. points) cannot be used for contour
calculation.
Neighboured points whose distance is less than 0.0001 mm are regarded as
double contour points.
24.9.34 Min. and Max. Point

If, e.g. for fabrication of eyeglasses, you want to know which size must have the
blank, you can use the min-max function in GEOPAK. The function is used,
among other things, to evaluate the greatest extension of a contour in the minus
and plus values of X, Y and Z.
With this function, you also can – for alignment of a co-ordinate system – set the
part on "0" (origin) at an extreme value. All subsequent positions are relative to
this extreme value.
07.04.07 v3.0 439

SCANPAK
Notice
The extreme values are even evaluated (interpolated) if the point itself has
not been measured.
Ö Click on the point symbol in the toolbar because the extreme

values will be stored as point elements.
Ö In the following "Element Point" window, click on the "Min/Max

of Contour" symbol in the "Type of Construction" line and confirm.
Ö In the "Min/Max of Contour" window, select at first a contour.
In the symbol boxes of the adapted contour, you see

that it is also possible to evaluate the extreme values outside the
contour (see red points).

which is the nearest to the origin.

which is the farthest to the origin.
If you will choose specifically the first or the last point of a

contour you click one of the symbols.
Ö Click on one of the symbols (optionally) and confirm.
The point is displayed in another colour on the graphics.
Position of the Point
In the picture below, we have evaluated e.g. the extreme value outside a
gearwheel (above right side).
To locate the co-ordinates already shown in the picture, you continue as follows:
Ö Click in the element graphics on the symbol (left side).
Ö Via click on the green point, you first get the point
no. in a rectangular box.
440 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Ö Through click on the right mouse button on this rectangular box, you
get a list from which you can, e.g. call your information (picture
below).
Ö Through click e.g. on the Y co-ordinate, you get the requested value
(picture below).
24.9.35 Automatic Element Calculation: Introduction

The aim of this functionality is to output contour data in DXF-format to a CAD
system in a manageable file size. You get to the dialogue via the menu bar /
Contour and the function.
Introduction: Example
A measured 2D-profile consists of 3795 points. The profile shall be transferred to
a CAD system in DXF-format. The CAD system, however, works better with
geometric elements than with many single points. Therefore, the points that are
positioned on joint lines and circles should be combined into such elements.
The above illustration represents single points of the contour, however with a
reduced number of points.
Before the transmission, the contour is idealized with automatically calculated
lines and circles. This changes the form of the contour within a tolerance zone of
max. +- 0,010 mm (find detailed information under the topic Tolerance Limits). No
discontinuity occurs in the transitions between the calculated elements. Thus, the
transitions are continuous and the DXF-output can be executed. The number of
output elements is below 100, the file size is now 6 KByte compared to 215
KByte for an output of single points.
07.04.07 v3.0 441

SCANPAK
Single points have been combined to circles and lines.

For more information, read the topic Tolerance Limits and Permanency.
24.9.35.2 Tolerance Limits

For the Automatic Element Calculation you first specify the contour in the
dialogue. Next, the following line shows the input fields for the elements line and
circle.
The line or circle element currently to be calculated is expanded on the contour
until one contour point is positioned outside the specified tolerance limits. Then,
the element is sorted into the list of elements in a way that those elements that
include the most contour points are automatically listed at the top of the list of
elements.
The smaller the tolerance limits, the more lines or circles you get.
The result of the tolerance comparison of the original contour with the Idealized
Contour (offered as an option in the dialogue) must not show a deviation that
exceeds the specified tolerance limits (e.g. 0.100 mm / 0.100 mm; see ill. below).
In the dialogue, you can enter the corresponding start memory number for the
lines or circles.
In the lines "Maximum number of lines (circles)", you enter the values you
consider to be the optimum. For this topic, find detailed information under
Idealize, in this case in connection with the automatic element calculation.
24.9.35.3 Idealize
The points of the contour are locally fitted to the calculated element. The result is
a contour that is ideally fitted to the calculated lines and circles without a
spreading of the measurement points (ill. below, right contour).
442 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Hint
The question as to how many lines or circles shall be calculated can be
explained in an example:
When dealing with a contour that can obviously be defined by three
circles, you should leave it at those three circles. In the list of memory
numbers, the circles including most of the new points are anyhow
positioned at the top. These circles would also be decisive for the
idealized contour.
24.9.35.4 Permanency
The end point of a line or circle element to be calculated is positioned on the start
point of the following element which results in small gaps between the elements.
The connections between the following elements need, however, not be
tangential (see ill. below).
07.04.07 v3.0 443

SCANPAK
A: No permanency
B: The end point of the circle and the start point of the line are in one point,
the lead angles are different.
C: Permanent, the lead angle in the point of intersection is the same for
both elements.
For how to export the contour in DXF-format, refer to the topic "Export Contour".
24.10 Graphics of Elements

24.10.1 Contour View
This function allows different contour-related views to be adjusted in the graphics
of elements. For instance, you can have displayed a single contour including all
elements created within this contour (so-called sub elements).
This is how you get to the "Contour View" window:
Ö Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
function in the menu bar.
This window offers you the following possibilities:
Contour Selection
Partial Circle Display ON and OFF
Point Selection by Keyboard
Display Contour as Lines and/or Points.
The settings you make in the " View Contour" window are for all or single contour.
These settings enable you to suppress or show parts of contours in the graphics
of elements.
24.10.2 Display Sub Elements of a Contour

To change the display of contours, follow these fundamental steps:
444 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
First find out whether you want to view a specific contour or whether
all contours are to be displayed.
Then adjust whether and which further geometrical elements are to
be displayed.
Display contour and its sub elements
Of a contour you wish to view, in the graphics of elements, only the contour itself
and its sub elements, in other words, the elements which were created by means
of this contour (fitted-in circle, etc.).
Ö Activate the check box "Only Active Contour".
Above the contour selected, there appear the number of points the
contour contains, the plane in which plane the contour was created
and whether it is an open or closed contour.
Ö Activate the check box " Only Contour Subelements" within the area
"Geometric Elements".
Selecting "All" causes the contour and all geometric elements (circle, line, etc.) to
be displayed, irrespective of whether or not these elements have been created by
means of the selected contour. If "None" is selected, only the active contour will
be displayed.
24.10.3 Circles as Partial Circle Display

Larger part programs containing numerous elements may cause the graphics of
elements to become unclear and complex. Moreover, sometimes you may
require only partial information on elements (e.g. only on that part of the circle
which runs through a contour) for the graphic view.
Hint
To generate an inlaid circle, use the button "Fit in Element" in the "Circle
Element" dialogue.
Using the "Partial Circle Display" function it is possible to display only that part of
a circle which runs on the contour. The part beyond is masked out. This is based
on the premise that the circle is a sub element of a contour.
07.04.07 v3.0 445

SCANPAK
Mask-out circle elements of contours

Activate the "Partial Circle Display" function, in order to mask-out those parts of
circles which do not run on the contour. This is generally based on the condition
that the circle in question is a sub element of a contour.
You get the following graphics of elements:
24.10.4 Contour Point Selection by Keyboard

A contour consisting of many points located close to each other makes it difficult
for the mouse to catch the desired contour point. When selecting a point with the
mouse, you always get the point located closed to the mouse pointer, when you
have pressed the left mouse button.
Ö Click on the "Contour View" symbol in the graphics of elements

icon bar.
function in the menu bar
Ö Activate the function "Point Selection by Keyboard".
To select contour points using the keyboard, it is necessary
that the "Point Selection Contour" window is open.
To open the "Point Selection Contour" dialogue, you use, for instance, the
"Element Circle" dialogue with "Fit in Element" activated. You confirm and the
dialogue "Fit in element Circle" will be opened. After your inputs in the dialogue
"Fit in element Circle" you confirm again.
Ö Click with the mouse into the graphics of elements to make sure that
the following keyboard inputs do not apply to the open dialogue, but
to the graphics of elements.
This action has to be repeated, whenever you click with the
mouse into the dialogue, for instance, to undo the last point area
selection, as all subsequent keyboard inputs would again be related
to the dialogue. At the beginning, the mouse pointer is always
positioned onto the first contour point.
446 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Ö Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the desired
contour point.
starting point of an area selection.
Ö Use the arrow keys to move the mouse pointer to the contour point
which you wish to define as the starting point of the point area to be
selected.
starting point.
Key Mouse pointer movement
RH arrow key, Moves mouse pointer to the next contour point
Arrow key above
LH arrow key, Moves mouse pointer to the previous contour point
Arrow key below
Ctrl + arrow key, For fast mouse pointer movement on the contour
Page up,
Page down
Pos 1 Moves mouse pointer to the first contour point
End Moves mouse pointer to the last contour point
Enter (first time) Start of selection
Enter (second time) End of selection
In the "Point Selection by Keyboard" mode, you can use the mouse for an
additional functionality, e.g. for zooming into the graphics. That would provide you
a more detailed view while selecting points.
24.10.5 Multi-Colour Contour Display

Within the graphics of elements, contours are always shown in white colour. If, for
instance, a measured contour is required to be compared to its nominal contour,
it might be difficult to distinguish these two contours in the graphics of elements.
The "Multicolour Mode" enables several contours to be shown in different
colours.
Ö Click on the " View Contour" symbol in the graphics of

elements icon bar.
in the menu bar.
Ö Click on "Graphic / Contour in the menu bar.
Ö Activate the "Multicolour Mode" function.
In the multi-colour mode, the contours are shown in five successive colours
(white, green, blue, cyan and magenta). If more than five contours are displayed,
the series of colours repeats cyclically in the specified order, beginning with
white.
Deactivate the multi-colour mode for contours
Deselect the "Multicolour Mode" in the "View Contour" using the check box. Then
all contours will appear in the default colour white.
07.04.07 v3.0 447

SCANPAK
24.10.6 Contour Display as Lines and/or Points

By default, contours are shown in the graphics of elements as a polygon. This is
an array of lines connecting the individual point co-ordinates of the contour. The
contour points co-ordinates themselves are not shown in this type of display.
Show Contour in Points Display
Perform the following steps if only the points of a contour are to be shown in the
graphics of elements:
Ö Click on the "View Contour" symbol in the graphics of elements

icon bar.
in the menu bar.
Ö Click on "Graphic / Contour View" in the menu bar.
Ö Activate the "View Points" function in the "Contour Display Mode"
area.
This type of view is advisable in conjunction with the function "Point Selection by
Keyboard".
The points - lines view is automatically activated during the selection of

points, irrespective of the setting in the "View Contour" dialogue.
24.11 Contours with Tolerance Check

24.11.1 Contours: General
With the "Tolerance Comparison Contours" function, check the geometrical
deviation of an actual contour from a nominal contour. Nominal and actual
contour must be stored in the GEOPAK working memory before the comparison
itself is realized. Moreover, the contours must be available in the same projection.
As a rule, the nominal contour is provided by a CAD system.
24.11.1.1 Tolerance Comparison Contours
Clicking on the symbol in the icon bar, you come to the "Tolerance
Comparison Contours" dialogue window.
Ö In the text boxes, "Nominal" and "Actual", select from the lists
your contours which are, in fact, already available. The nominal
contour can already be a measured contour (for details cf. Load
Contour ). Or load your contour from an external CAD system (for
further details regarding this topic cf. "Load Contour from CAD
System").
Ö Enter into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a "1", if not
already proposed.
24.11.1.2 Tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs

If you want to execute tolerance comparisons with multiple contour pairs, enter
into the input field "Number of act/nom pairs" a number bigger than "1".
If you want to compare, for example, three nominal contours with three actual
contours, then enter into the input field "Number of nom/act pairs" a "3".
448 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Similar to the loop mode, the memory numbers are counted upwards and the
memory number of the selected contours is used as the start number
According to the input example, the following pairs are created.
In order that the tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs

can be executed, all contours must be existing with the relevant
memory numbers. Furthermore, all used contours must be
positioned in the same projection plane.
Your further action is divided into the following sections

Pitch
Best Fit
Tolerance Width
topic).
24.11.2 Pitch
By making inputs in "Pitch"...
you first of all define the points from where measurement must take
place;
in the next step, by Vector Direction, enter the direction along
which the distance from the opposite contour is measured.
The pitch specifies the distance where the individual comparisons are carried out.
The points at which the nominal and actual comparison is carried out are, in most
cases, not identical with the contour points of the actual respectively the nominal
contour points. This is why they are interpolated (cubic curve). This means that
even the areas between the points are calculated. According to your task, you will
opt for one out of six "pitches".
Constant pitch: Uniform distance on the nominal contour.
Comparison only at nominal points: A comparison is realized at each

point of the nominal contour.
Comparison only at actual points: A comparison is carried out at each

point of the actual contour.
07.04.07 v3.0 449

SCANPAK
Hint
This form is not recommended, as it takes a great deal of time. It is
because of the vector direction that the program has to calculate the point
through which the perpendicular goes to the actual point (see picture
below).
1 = Actual contour
2 = Nominal contour
Constant angular pitch: The comparison takes place in a constant angular

pitch relative to the co-ordinate system origin.
Constant pitch (1st co-ordinate): Here, use a uniform distance on the

nominal contour, to be more exact, in the 1st co-ordinate
Example
In the ZX projection, you obtain a uniform distance in the Z-component
with this setting.
Constant pitch (2nd co-ordinate): Here, use a uniform distance on the
nominal contour, to be more exact, in the 2nd co-ordinate
Example
In the ZX projection, you obtain a uniform in the X component with this
setting.
Except for nominal and actual points, enter a constant value in the
respective text box below the symbols.
24.11.3 Comparison (Vector Direction)

Between nominal and actual distance is calculated. Four possibilities are
available (see below). The most frequent application is the "Comparison
Perpendicular to Nominal Contour". This is the comparison that Mitutoyo offers in
the default.
Comparison perpendicular to nominal contour: A perpendicular on the

contour is formed using the comparison point.
Comparison through origin: A line through the origin of the co-ordinate

system is using the comparison point.

• YZ-Contour parallel to Y-axis
• ZX-Contour parallel to Z-axis
• XY-Contour parallel to X-axis
450 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
• RZ-Contour parallel to R-axis (radial plane of section)

• Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Phi-axis (completed representation)
• YZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis
• ZX-Contour parallel to X-axis
• XY-Contour parallel to Y-axis
• RZ-Contour parallel to Z-axis
• Phi-Z-Contour parallel to Z-axis
Circles between nominal and actual contour: A perpendicular to the
nominal contour is created through the reference point. Then, the biggest
possible circle is created with its centre located on the perpendicular. The circle
diameter is then limited by two contour points.
Hint
In certain cases, the circle centre may leave the perpendicular in order to
allow the creation of a bigger circle. In this case, three contour points limit
the expansion of the circle (see ill. below).
24.11.4 Bestfit Contour

Definition and Criteria
The best fit function rotates and shifts a set of co-ordinate values (points of the
actual contour) in such a way that it fits "best" into another group of given co-
ordinates (points of the nominal contour).
The best fit follows the Gaussian criterion requiring that the sum of
the distance squares is minimal.
This means that the distances of the actual points are calculated
from their respective nominal values, and then are squared and
summed. The "best" location is reached when this sum is as small
as possible.
The best fit is based on the nominal-actual comparison. Should the latter
not be possible, the best fit is possible neither.
For further information, refer to the topics
Degrees of Freedom Bestfit ,
07.04.07 v3.0 451

SCANPAK
Bestfit within Tolerance Limits and

Use Bestfit Values .
24.11.5 Degrees of Freedom for Bestfit

Generally, the actual values can be rotated and shifted as you want. Thus, you
can achieve the best result. For this, operate the functions
"Horizontal",
"Vertical",
"Rotate".
Click either on one of the three symbols, or on two or even all three symbols. The
best fit will be automatically made. The result can be seen from the graphical
representation.
If only one rotation is allowed, said rotation is carried out around the origin of the
actual co-ordinate system.
The results are graphically and numerically shown in the "Tolerance Comparison
Contours" window. Here, you see the abbreviations where UD is Upper
Difference; LD = Lower Difference; MD = Mean Difference). In addition to the
above, via various symbols in this window, you have following possibility
In particular via the information symbol, you have the possibility to set
information flags.
Ö Click on the symbol
The mouse changes to a reticle.
Ö Click on the position in the graphics where you want to set the
information or flag.
Ö With a further click on the flag (keep the mouse button pressed) you
can drag the flag to a different position.
Ö Clicking with the right mouse button on the flag, you can, among
other things, delete the flag.
Using the "Learnable Graphic Commands" symbol, you can preset that the
windows are printed out or applied in the repeat mode. You must activate this
function already in the single mode, since, being in the repeat mode, you will
have no more influence.
Also see the topic:
24.11.6 Width of Tolerance (Scale Factor)

24.11.6.1 Definition
An enlarged scale is used to visualize the deviations of the actual contour from
the nominal one. Consequently, the deviations are displayed in a scale larger
than the scale used for watching the nominal contour.
• The upper, the lower tolerance and the tolerance width
determine the scale.
• The difference from upper and lower tolerance is related to the
length of the nominal contour.
452 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
24.11.6.2 Three examples

On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would be equal to about 10 mm.
lower tolerance is 0.1 mm. If you take in this case a tolerance width of 5 %, this
will yield a scale factor of 2,5.
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would also be equal to about 10 mm.
On a DIN A 4-sized sheet of paper, this would be equal to about 4mm.
With regard to tolerances the lower tolerance is, as a rule, in the material,
the upper tolerance is outside.
Define tolerance band with nominal contour
If you want to use the tolerance band of the loaded nominal contour, activate
this button. You have already created the nominal contour with the tolerance
band using the functions "Tolerance band editor" or "Tolerance band contour".
The input fields "Upper tol." and "Lower tol." are shown inactive and an input of
the tolerance limits is not possible.
24.11.6.3 Offset
An overmeasure contour around the nominal contour is created with the offset.
Then, the calculated deviations no longer refer to the nominal contour but to the
overmeasure contour. The reference direction is not influenced by the offset.
Example:
A slot is limited by inside and outside contour. The distance between the contours
(i.e. the slot width) is 52 mm. The tolerance comparison shall be used to examine
the deviation of the slot width from the nominal measurement 52 mm +-0.025
mm.
The inside contour serves as the nominal contour, the outside contour as the
actual contour.
When carrying out the comparison with an offset (overmeasure) e.g. of 52 mm
and a tolerance of +-0.025 mm, a significant deviation is visible.
07.04.07 v3.0 453

SCANPAK
Compared with that, no deviation is visible in the graphic when applying the
onesided tolerance of 51.998 mm and 52.032 mm.
The result of the numerical evaluation shows no difference between the two
processes.
24.11.7 Form Tolerance Contour

The form tolerance of a measured contour to a reference contour is determined
according to DIN 7184 in connection with DIN ISO 1101 as follows:
First, the maximum deviation between both contours is determined
(see in the illustration below the radius of the red circle as a dotted
line).
This radius amount is doubled (diameter of circle).
The value of the diameter includes all deviations when the centre of
the circle is moved on the reference contour.
• Reference contour (black)

• Nominal contour (green)
• Ideal circle (blue; part of the constructional drawing)
• Circle with biggest deviation (red)
Use the function "Line form tolerance" to calculate this value.
Determine line form tolerance
A prerequisite for this function is that you are already using contours
in your part program.
Ö Load a measured contour (nominal contour).
Ö Load an ideal contour (reference contour).
454 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Use the symbol "Loop counter" to control the functionality "Loops" (for
detailed information, refer to this topic).
The symbol "Further tolerance options" offers further possibilities, for

example, how to perform transfers to STATPAK or how to abort a part program
when the measurement results are outside the tolerance limits, etc. (for more
details, also refer to the topic Further Tolerance Options).
If you activate this symbol you can have a form tolerance chart displayed.
Enter the value of the tolerance limit into the input field "Tolerance width".
Bestfit
The best fit is carried out prior to the evaluation of the line form tolerance. The
best fit position of the contour is calculated only temporarily and is not stored. For
details, refer to the topic Best Fit Contour.
24.11.8 Tolerance Band Editor

The tolerance band editor makes it possible to specify various widths of tolerance
ranges within a nominal contour.
Every contour point can be assigned a lower and upper tolerance limit, which can
be stored in the GWS file. In case a contour nominal-to-actual comparison is
performed, the measured contour can be compared to the nominal contour and
its tolerance limits.
The tolerance band editor can be called only in the learn mode.
Define tolerance range of a nominal contour

Ö Load a nominal contour.
Ö Click in the menu bar on "Tolerance / Tolerance Comparison
Elements / Tolerance Band Editor".
Ö Select a nominal contour.
The Tolerance band dialogue is shown.
Ö Define the contour tolerance range.
For details refer to the topic "Define Tolerance Band of a Contour" and "Edit
Tolerance Band of a Contour".
24.11.9 Define Tolerance Band of a Contour

24.11.9.1 Define uniform tolerance range
Your intention is to define a uniform tolerance range, i.e. all contour points have
the same upper and lower tolerance limit.
Ö Click on the "Constant Distribution" symbol.

Ö Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the area "Start of Tolerance
Range".
Now no entries are possible in the "End of Tolerance Range" area.
Mark tolerance range
Ö Use the mouse cursor to mark the contour point where the tolerance
range is to start.
07.04.07 v3.0 455

SCANPAK

A blue cross is shown.
Ö Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the mouse pointer to
the contour point where the tolerance range is to end.
While dragging with the mouse, a second blue cross is shown.
Ö Release the mouse button at the end of the tolerance range to be
defined.
The defined tolerance range is shown marked with a red frame in
24.11.9.2 Define proportional tolerance range

You wish to define a tolerance range having a tolerance range start width and a
tolerance range end width. This means: the tolerance width continues changing
from the tolerance range start to the tolerance range end.
Ö Click on the "Proportional Distribution" symbol.

Now it is possible to make entries in the areas "Start of Tolerance
Ö Enter the "upper and lower limit" in the areas "Start of Tolerance
Ö Continue as described under "Mark Tolerance Range".
For further information on this topic refer to Tolerance Band Editor and Edit
24.11.10 Edit Tolerance Band of a Contour

Relate tolerance range to the whole contour
Click on the selection symbol in order to relate the entries from the areas
"Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of Tolerance Range" to the whole contour.
Delete defined tolerance ranges of the whole contour
Click on the dust bin symbol to delete your tolerance ranges of the whole
contour.
Enter tolerance limits using the mouse
Click on the pipette symbol to take the tolerance ranges by means of the
mouse into the input boxes of the areas "Start of Tolerance Range" and "End of
Tolerance Range".
Ö Click with the mouse cursor on a contour point within a tolerance
range.
Once the "Proportional Distribution" symbol is activated, the

upper and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered into all
input boxes.
Once the "Constant Distribution" symbol is activated, the upper

and lower tolerance limit of a contour point are entered only into the
input boxes of the area "Start of Tolerance Range".
456 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Once you have entered the required values, press again the pipette
symbol in order to switch this function off. Should you click, by mistake,
into the graphics of elements, the values entered would be changed.
Show all elements in the graphics of elements
While defining a tolerance band of a contour, only the current contour is

shown enlarged in the graphics of elements. If you wish to watch all elements,
click on the symbol "Show Elements in Background".
For further information on this topic refer to Tolerance Band Editor and Define
24.11.11 Filter Contour / Element

To get to the dialogue "Filter element", go either to the menu "Element" and then
click on the function, or go to the menu "Contour". The elements "line", "circle",
"sphere" and "contour" can be filtered. Depending on which element you select,
the corresponding type of filter is suggested. If you have, for example, measured
the contour as a circle, you can select the Gauss filter (Circle).
24.11.11.1 Regular Contours

When filtering a contour (menu bar "Contour / Filter Contour") in GEOPAK, a
smoothing effect is realized. We offer you a Gauss low-pass filter where the high
frequency parts will be suppressed. Depending on application, you should
distinguish:
For round contours, you should use the Gauss Filter / Circle, for
oblong contours, the filter via the line.
When using the Gauss-filter, you must in any case enter the
"Run in / run out"-value.
Ö Select the filter via the list in the "Filter Contour" window.
24.11.11.2 Irregular Contours

For contours to which it is almost impossible to assign a Gauss-filter due to their
irregular forms, you will select the "Robust-Spline-Filter".
07.04.07 v3.0 457

SCANPAK
This option allows you filtering for contours and for

Automatic Circle Measurement and the
Automatic Line Measurement.
When the Robust-Spline-filter is selected, the text field for the "Run in / run out"-
entry is deactivated.
24.11.11.3 Automatic Circle Measurement

For the automatic circle measurement a filter can be selected when the scanning
symbol is active (see ill. below).
The "cut off wave length" is calculated with p, the circle diameter and on the
basis of 50 UPR (undulations per revolution). It must be stated for every filter.
The pre-set UPR-size is 50. The formula used internally by GEOPAK is then:
Cut off wave length = p * Circle diameter / UPR
24.11.11.4 Automatic line measurement

For the automatic line measurement (ill. below) the "cut off wave length" must be
entered.
458 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Pre-set are the Gauss-filter and a "cut off wave length" of 1.0.
The measurement unit is limited to millimetres.
Further information
For detailed information about what must be observed when filtering
peaks of a measured contour, refer to the documentation "Filtering
of peaks of a measured contour" on your COSMOS-CD /
DOCUMENTATION / SCANPAK.
Under the file name "SI_contour_filtering_g.pdf" (German) or
"SI_contour_filtering_e.pdf" (English) respectively.
24.12 Scanning - CNC Dual Flank

24.12.1 Dual Flank Scanning
24.12.1.1 General
The function "Dual Flank Scanning" is required for measurements of worms and
threads. During the scanning of the measurement point the probe sphere touches
the right and the left flank of the worm or thread spiral.
The prescribed diameter of the probe sphere to be used is

compulsory and can be taken from the toothed wheel data.
Usually, part programs or the function "Dual flank scanning" are automatically
generated by the Mitutoyo toothed wheel measurement programs, e.g. "Scan-
Worm" from the toothed wheel parameters. You can change the scan parameters
in the editing mode.
For changing scan parameters, open the dialogue window "Dual flank scanning"
via the menu "CMM".
Start position
Like usual, you see at the top left the start position, the input mode for the co-
ordinate system and – if you have a scanning probe suitable for clamping (MPP
4, 5, 100, 300), the clamping function (for more details refer also to "Clamp Axis
with MPP").
The approach direction is only active when you want to operate the dual flank
scanning without rotary table. If you want to operate the dual flank scanning with
a rotary table, the fitting position of the probe stylus determines the approach
direction.
07.04.07 v3.0 459

SCANPAK
Scanning parameter
Apart from the known parameters like scan interval, safety distance etc., you find
under the last position the item "Retraction distance". When you enter the
retraction distance this allows you, in this particular case of the worm, to pull back
beyond the safety distance.
End condition
The scan is ended when the entered height difference is reached when following
the contour.
24.12.1.2 Also without rotary table
It is possible to use the dual flank scanning also without a rotary table when
clicking on this symbol.
When the dual flank scanning is used with a rotary table, the approach direction
is automatically calculated by the probe configuration.
When working without rotary table, all you have to do is to enter the
approach direction yourself.
Hints
In the learning mode you can work with the dual flank scanning when the
software of the machine control supports this option.
In the GEOPAK-Editor this function is also supported when the rotary
table is not set as a CMM.
You need special CMM-ROMs as well as a scanning probe system.
24.13 Laser Probe

24.13.1 Single Point Laser "WIZprobe"
The WIZprobe is a single point laser with a spot size of 30 microns. It can be
used as a single point-measuring probe, and as a scanning probe. The operation
is very similar to the use of touch trigger probes, and scanning probes such as
the SP600.
Therefore our help topics assume that the user has previously attended the
appropriate training courses, and fully understands both the geometry and
scanning measurement within the software.
The following topics refer specifically to the use in scanning, which is the main
use for this probe.
24.13.1.1 General Information

The WIZprobe data collection rate is internally set at 50 points per second, but
this reduces to a maximum of 40 points per second when the probe is used
dynamically on a machine. The dynamic range of the laser is +/- 5 mm, and so
the scanning speed used in the software must be set by the user,
according to the slope of the surface being measured, and
the amount of data required.
If the speed is set too high according to the slope, the next data collection point
will be outside the range, and so an error will be reported.
460 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
24.13.1.2 Select PH10 Probe Angle

During scanning the machine controller will adjust the machines position to keep
the laser within the dynamic range, but care should also be taken to ensure that a
PH10 probe angle is chosen so that the angle between the laser beam and the
surface does not exceed 45 degrees, where possible. Under ideal conditions the
probe can continue to collect data up to an angle of 75 degrees, but in practice
this is difficult to achieve.
The probe features
an advanced algorithm
for real time adaptive control
to automatically adjust the laser power
for different materials, colours and surface angles.
If these items change dramatically during one scan, then the data output will stop
during the adaptation. This is quite normal and prevents bad data being
transmitted.
Further themes:
Calibation
The Menu
Laser-Probe: Measurement Course
24.13.2 Calibration
The WIZprobe can be used at any PH10 angle, and is calibrated in a similar
manner to a touch trigger probe, but uses a different measurement strategy,
which is automatically initiated from the Probe Data Management dialog.
Additionally a specially coated Reference Sphere is provided.
Proceed as follows:
Ö Select Probe Data Management Menu.
Ö Create a new probe position with ‘Edit’ then select WIZlaser button.
Ö Follow the instruction to initiate the calibration.
Further themes
Single Point Laser "WIZprobe"
The Menu
Laser Probe: Measurement Course
24.13.3 The Menu

Because it is not possible to measure a "closed" contour with the laser, it is
always necessary to specify both the ‘start’ and ‘end’ positions. This has the
advantage that because the scanning ‘plane’ also has to be defined, the direction
of scanning is computed automatically.
The Scanning Menu is therefore modified as follows:
07.04.07 v3.0 461

SCANPAK
The parameters Plane, Start, End, Direction etc are selected in the same way as
when using a touch probe. The start condition has to be selected as above.
The scanning speed and pitch are interactive (as discussed at "WIZprobe") but
are not fixed. It is therefore possible to select a speed of 5mm/s with a pitch > 0.1
but not < 0.1
Further themes
Single Point Laser "WIZprobe"
Calibration
Laser-Probe: Measurement Course
24.13.4 Laser Probe: Measurement Course

You will use the laser probe for non-contact measurements (e.g. of soft material).
To get to the function use "Menu bar / CMM / Scanning (Laser probe)".
24.13.4.1 Principles
The laser beam has a focus range of 10 millimetres for measuring (see drawing
below for the example of a point probing from the top). However, the laser probe
achieves the most accurate measurement point in the middle (red line) of the
focus range, i.e. the zero crossing. That means that with a laser probe
measurement, the measurement point is recorded when the laser beam
approaches and reaches the work piece with this mid line. In this case, the
middle LED shows green.
462 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
If you want to measure an edge (ill. below), it is not sure that the contact point
with the work piece is in the middle of the focus range. In this case, the CMM
must be prompted by the machine control to take the measurement point
immediately. The measurement point, however, must be positioned within the
focus range.
We differentiate between a point measurement and a scan measurement. For

point measurement, proceed as described in Measurement Point (Probing Point).
For the laser probe, this dialogue is only extended by the functions
"Surface measure mode" or
"Edge measure mode" respectively.

You can also use the joystick for probing.
07.04.07 v3.0 463

SCANPAK
To switch between the surface and the edge measure mode, use the tool bar
(see ill. below). A change between a surface measurement and an edge
measurement must in any case be announced before starting a new
measurement.
24.13.4.2 Start point for scanning

There are two start options available for scan measurements. The start point of
the scan is either
on the surface or
at the edge of the surface.
In any case the machine control searches the zero crossing and scans the
surface while keeping to this zero crossing.
If you want to switch the starting point to scanning, you must click on the
corresponding symbol (see above) before each new scan process.
Further themes
Single Laser "WIZprobe"
Calibration
The Menu
24.14 Scanning with Rotary Table

24.14.1 Scanning with Rotary Table: Introduction
Provided you have the Mitutoyo MRT320-type rotary table, you can scan your
workpieces in connection with a measuring probing system. This way, you make
use of all the advantages involved in measuring with a single probe only. This
does away e.g. with the necessity of changing probes.
Only one procedure
Unlike other products, the Mitutoyo rotary table makes it possible for you to scan
the workpiece in one go (from all sides).
You access the corresponding dialogue using the "Menu bar / CMM / Scanning
with Rotary Table". The dialogue is divided into five blocks, where you make your
settings. For information on how to proceed within the blocks "Starting Point",
"Approach Direction" and "Scanning Parameters" refer to "CNC Scanning:
Automatic Measurement ON" or other topics.
Probe radius compensation
It always makes sense to activate the Probe Radius Compensation .If

GEARPAK, however, creates the part programs on the basis of the nominal gear
geometry automatically, the probe radius compensation is not activated.
GEARPAK requires the source data.
464 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Further topics:
Scanning with Rotary Table: Three Kinds
Scanning with Rotary Table: Stop Conditions
Rotary-Table: Clamp Axis
For information regarding this subject refer also to Turn Rotary Table.
24.14.2 Scanning with Rotary Table: Three Kinds

Scanning with the rotary table is possible in three ways (see below detail clipped
from "Scanning with Rotary Table" dialogue).
Radial: You will decide for the radial method, if the workpiece can be scanned
from one flank.
Undercut: An undercutting operation will be required in cases where you cannot
finish the scan radially in one scanning direction. In these cases the rotation of
the rotary table has to be changed such to allow the workpiece portions not
covered by the radial scan to be probed (undercut). The probing speed required
for this operation is reduced by the CMM controller.
Due to the curvature of the turbine blade, in a radial scan the probe cannot reach
the area located precisely behind the probe head as shown on the left picture.
In Phi/Z: You will decide for the PhiZ scanning option, if you have to scan a
circle, considering, however, different heights (see picture below. The circle is
located symmetrically around the Z-axis. The radius (older CMMs) is determined
by the starting point. When working with CMMs of more recent generations, you
can enter the radius and decide for a freely selected approach direction in the
dialogue.
07.04.07 v3.0 465

SCANPAK
Hint
With these options you order the scan direction (to the left or to
the right).
Further topics:
(For details regarding this subject refer also to Scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and
PhiZ Planes and Turn Rotary Table).
24.14.3 Scanning with Rotary Table: Stop Conditions

In the "Scanning with Rotary Table" dialogue, you can determine the end of a
scan in three different ways:
The scan is made on a closed contour. The sense of rotation is

determined by the following buttons.
angle. The sense of rotation is determined by the sign (math. positive:

scan to the left; math. negative: scan to the right).
You specify the end point at the workpiece. The sense of rotation is
determined by the following buttons.
With PHI-Z-scanning, also the height difference is available for selection

as a termination mode. GEARPAK, for example, uses this option to terminate the
scan after reaching a certain height difference after the scanning of a worm has
been completed.
The height difference is assigned to the Z-co-ordinate of the start point. In case
that the height difference has been activated and the scan method has changed,
the termination mode changes to "Closed contour".
Further topics:
Scanning with Rotary Table: Three Kinds
(For details regarding this subject refer also to
Scanning in the YZ, ZX, RZ and PhiZ Planes and
Turn Rotary Table).
466 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
24.14.4 Rotary-Table: Clamp Axis

Your probe is type MMP-4, MPP-5, MPP-100 or MPP-300. Thus, the dialogue
"Scanning with rotary table" offers the function "Clamp axis". You can use this
function to clamp two axes with the rotary table for the measurement process.
You should, however, clamp at least one axis mechanically in order to facilitate
remaining on the desired movement path for the control system. The decision as
to which axis should be clamped depends on the expected deflection occurring
during scanning. As a principle, all axes should be clamped that are not relevant
for the measurement.
You can only clamp max. two axis at a time. In this case, the button for the third
axis is inactive.
An automatic determination of the axis to be clamped is not possible when using
the rotary table to scan to four axes.
Further topics:
Scanning with Rotary Table: Three Possiblities
(For further details about this complex, also see
Scanning in Planes YZ, ZX, RZ and PhiZ und
Rotate Table ).
24.15 Manual Scanning by CMM

Even with a CCM with CNC, you have the possibility to scan manually.
Ö Deactivate the CNC function via the menu bar/CMM and the
function "CNC ON/OFF".
In this case, the CMM signal light is getting green (at the
bottom left hand corner in the status bar of the GEOPAK main
window).
You can only measure using the joysticks.
Automatic Measurement On:
A dialogue appears "Manual Scanning".
Automatic Measurement Off:
In this case, you get immediately the window "Measurement Display".
For the rest, refer to the topic "Manual CMM - Touch Trigger ".
24.16 Scanning with External Programs

24.16.1 Scanning with "MetrisScan" (Laser)
With the program MetrisScan you can measure surfaces with more than 1000
points in GEOPAK, provided that you use a CMM with a probe changing system.
GEOPAK then builds the co-ordinate system and initiates the probe change.
MetrisScan works with this co-ordinate system and probe data. MetrisScan also
evaluates and administrates the measurement results.
07.04.07 v3.0 467

SCANPAK
General prerequisites
You get to this function via the menu bar / Machine / Scan (Metris Laser probe).
Of course this requires that the Metris Laser probe is installed.
This probe is only compatible with the machine control UC200 F,
UC300 and UC500.
You require special PROMs (programmable ROMs) and ports.
You can execute the program
in learn mode and in repeat mode.
In the editing mode the program is not executable but editable.
In already existing part programs the program MetrisScan can be
added.
The software prerequisites are required as of MCOSMOS v2.4 and
higher as well as MetrisScan v4.02 and higher.
The program can not be executed in GEOPAk-2D and in the manual mode. The
function “Undo” can only be activated in the editing mode.
24.16.1.2 Hardware and system requirements

Computer
• Dual Pentium III, 1GHz or stronger processor
• 512 MB RAM
• Minimum 40 MB free storage capacity, excluding the store
place for the calling-up program/temp-files).
• 4 free PCI-ports of which one is for the UC COM Card.
Operating system
• Windows 2000 (minimum Service Pack 2) and higher.
• Internet explorer 5.5 and higher.
Special hardware (see 4 PCI-ports)
• Frame grabber (Data translation DT3152)
• Counter card (APCI 1710)
• Metris Probe interface (MPI)
• UC COM PCI card
24.16.1.3 Metris-Dongleoptions
To work with the Metrissoftware you need following Dongleoptions:
API-Lib scanner
API-Lib feature
API-Lib analytfit
API-Lib pc
For information about the program, find detailed information in the topic
"MetrisScan: Program Run ".
468 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
24.16.2 MetrisScan: Program Run

24.16.2.1 Learn-/Repeat Mode
Basically, we have to deal with two different starting conditions:
In the learn mode, MetrisScan needs only to know that a new
program must be learned. The information that the learn mode is
active is sufficient. When finishing MetrisScan, the qualification files
and macro files are transferred back to GEOPAK.
In the repeat mode, the mode, the qualification files and the macro
files are transferred. Upon termination of the program, an error code
is submitted to inform GEOPAK that MetrisScan has correctly
executed the macro.
24.16.2.2 The program run in detail

After activating MetrisScan, all peripheral units connected with the
PC are closed.
The machine control goes to standby.
The co-ordinate system and the probe data are made available to
MetrisScan.
• GEOPAK informs MetrisScan about which GEOPAK program is
currently running, i.e. learn or repeat mode, via a temporary file.
This file also contains information about the macro file and the
qualification file.
• The qualification file is, thinking in terms of GEOPAK,
comparable to the probe data.
• Accordingly, the Macro file can be compared to a part program.
The program MetrisScan starts.
GEOPAK goes to the background.
You wait until MetrisScan has finished.
After termination of the program, the machine control is again
activated and the connections to all previously installed units are
restored.
The current CMM data are loaded again to MCOSMOS.
The data created by Metris are read out of the temporary files and
transferred back to GEOPAK.
Note
In case that a MetrisScan macro file has been created without an
invocation by GEOPAK, you can enter the data manually in the dialogue
"Scanning Laserprobe". The same applies to changes that have been
performed in the edit mode.
For detailed information, refer to the topic Elements from Point Cloud.
24.16.3 Elements from Point Cloud

24.16.3.1 Dialogues
For extracting elements from a point cloud, start the function via the menu bar /
Elements and the function "Metris element extraction". For detailed information
about the prerequisites and the automatic program processes, refer to the topics
Scanning with MetrisScan (Laser) and MetrisScan: Program Process .
07.04.07 v3.0 469

SCANPAK
In the subsequent dialogue, select one of the elements Circle, Plane, Sphere,
Cylinder, Long Hole or Rectangle. As the point cloud is available in (Metris-)
ASCII-format, the program enters this file into the text box "File name".
Confirm with OK and the point cloud appears.
24.16.3.2 Defaults
For the following items, use the above illustration for your orientation:
The language of the menu items and error messages is English.
The size of the graphics window cannot be changed.
The graphics window contains co-ordinate axes at the bottom left for
your orientation.
If you want to have the point cloud rotate, click on one of the rotation
axes X, Y or Z. Then go to "Rotate" and click the arrows to the left or
right. X and Y are interchanged for rotating.
For enlarging or reducing, use the scroll wheel of the mouse.
To turn, rotate and shift the point cloud, use the button "Move" under
the title "MouseMode" while keeping the left mouse button pressed.
24.16.3.3 Define Element

Ö For selecting the area in which the element shall be calculated from
the point cloud, click the button "Select".
Ö Then click with the left mouse button several times on the positions
in the point cloud with which you want to have the element
calculated.
The points are highlighted in red.
24.16.3.4 Calculate
Ö Click the button "Calculate".
The calculated element is drawn within the point cloud in yellow.
After you have confirmed the calculated element, it is transferred to
GEOPAK without defects of form like a theoretical element.
470 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Use the button "Reset" to reset the selection of points, the element
calculation and the view.
24.16.4 Edit Mode / Filter

24.16.4.1 Open Graphic
Like in the learn mode, the starting dialogue and the graphic window open in the
edit mode if you
double-click the function in the menu "Elements" (see also the topic
Elements of the Point Cloud) and
select an element.
If you click "Calculate" immediately thereafter, the element is calculated, shown in
the window and you see the learnt filter settings (see ill. below in the window
"Parameters").
If, however, you click first the button "Parameter", the filter values
are reset.
24.16.4.2 Filter
This filter is a curvature filter. In the "flat" sections, many points are filtered out
and in the sections with a high curvature, many points are recorded. Thus, the
highest curvature is established by the smallest detail parameter. This is
represented in the drawing accordingly.
As for how to work with the filter parameters in detail, refer to your Metris
operating instructions.
24.16.5 Scanning with RenScanDC

RenScanDC is a function for the quick scanning of circles. This functionality is
exclusively incorporated in the UCC machine control by Renishaw.
07.04.07 v3.0 471

SCANPAK
In the learn mode, first open the element dialogue (circle/contour). Only then you
can open the RenScanDC dialogue (menu CMM / Automatic element
measurement / RenScanDC).
If the nominal data of the element are known, the machine control immediately
initiates scanning at scanning speed. If the nominal data are unknown, you are
first required to enter the (slower) learn mode speed. The machine control
memorises the nominal data from this single scan at learn mode speed and is
then able to execute the measurement at scanning speed.
Prerequisites
The circle centre may not deviate from the initial position by more than one
millimetre maximum.
Only full circles can be scanned.
Dialogue
In the dialogue "RenScanDC", you need to enter values for the following items ...
Inner or outer circle
Clearance Height
clockwise or anticlockwise.
24.17 Save and Export Contour

24.17.1 Save Contour
In order to save your work results and to be able to cue it any time you want, you
would like to save your contour.
Ö Via the menu bar and the functions "Output / Save Contour" the
window "Save Contours" is displayed.
Ö Via the symbol, you open the list of elements and activate via
mouse click the contour, you want to save.
Ö For details as to whether and how to use the loop counter refer
to the topic "Loop Counter".
Ö From the list field "Contour File" or
Ö via the symbol, you open the window "Save Contour as".
You have the following four options to save your files:
• as gws file (GEOPAK),
• as SCT file (SCANPAK-3),
• as mbs file (Metris) or
• as txt file for Transpak
The file extension defines the format of the file.
Ö Select "Your" file and the storage location according to Windows
conventions and confirm.
You must enter the path of your contour file in the "Select Contour "
window.
In the list box "Select Contour", you define the contour of your
choice.
472 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Attach: Clicking on the button "Attach" gives you the possibility to

attach a new contour to an already existing one. This option is
applicable only to the gws file type (GEOPAK).
Ö Confirm.
24.17.2 Save Contour in ASCII File

With the "Contour Save" function, you can store contours as ASCII file that
means as a text. Activate this function via the menu bar and the "Output" pull-
down menu.
In the "Contour Save" dialogue window in the list field under "Select Element",
you will find the contours you have measured so far. It is a part of the List of
Elements . Here, the number of contours is not limited.
Ö Click the contour you want to store. If you do not see it in the
displayed zone, you can use the scroll bar to view the whole list.
Ö Now enter the name of the file in the "Contour File" field together
with the path where you want to store the contour.
Ö You can also click on the icon and store the file in the
following dialogue window (Windows conventions).
The file names must get the extension <.gws>. Otherwise, the program does not
recognise the special information contained in the file. The three letters g, w and
s come from "GEOPAK-Win Scanning".
Once you have stored the contour in such a file, you can use e.g. Word- or
Notepad to read, print, or modify the data. It is also possible to edit in these text
files (according to Windows conventions).
24.17.3 Select Contour

By means of this function you select in your part program already used contours.
Ö Click on the arrow symbol.
Ö Confirm.
24.17.4 Transfer Contour into an External System

Whenever you export a contour to an external system, you always load an ASCII-
file. In particular, external systems are, for instance ...
• CAD-Systems,
Ö You click on the menu "Output" and the function "Export

Contour" in the menu bar within the GEOPAK main window.
You get to the window "Export Contour".
Ö Using the arrow in the top list box, you select the contour you
want to export.
Ö You specify, in the format type list box, the format of the ASCII-
file you want to export.
07.04.07 v3.0 473

SCANPAK
Ö You use the text box "Contour File" to save by ...

• Entering the file name, or ...
• ...you select a folder via the symbol. You can also

overwrite an existing file.
• you want to accept the driver defaults, or whether...
or inches.
Further functions
In case the external systems differentiates between the two contour forms
2D contour or...
3D contour - this depends on the properties of the driver - an alternative

selection is possible. The question is whether the contour output will be
performed in a projected way.
It is, off course, possible to re-import (read-in) an exported file.
24.17.5 Load Contour

You have already created a nominal contour and now, for example, you want to
load it for the purpose of comparing the nominal contour to the actual one.
Via the symbol or the menu bar ("Element/Contour"), you get access to the
window "Element Contour".
Click the symbol in this window and you get to the window "Load Contour".
According to Windows conventions and using this symbol you define the
contour of your choice and confirm.
24.17.6 Load Contour from External Systems

Whenever you import a contour from an external system, you always load an
ASCII-file.
In particular, external systems are, for instance
• CAD systems,
Ö You click on the symbol (on the left) on the symbol bar in the
GEOPAK main window, or on the menu "Element" and the function
"Contour".
You get to the window "Element Contour" (for details regarding
options applicable to all elements, such as, e.g. "Measure", etc.,
please see under the topic Contour).
474 v3.0 07.04.07

SCANPAK
Ö In this window, you click on the symbol "Import Contour" (on

the left) and you come to the window "import Contour".
You must remember that you overwrite an existing contour by
selecting an already existing memory number. Before you actually
overwrite, you will be asked a safety check question.
Ö Using the arrow in the top list box, you select the driver for the
external system. By doing this, you specify the format of the ASCII-
file you want to load.
Ö In the text box "Contour File"
• You enter the file name, or ...
• you select an already existing contour file.

Ö In the text box "Pitch" you specify the minimum distance at which
the points on the contour are required to be calculated.
• you want to accept the driver defaults, or whether
or inches.
Further functions
Set End Point: You set two more points close to the start and end point of
each element.
Effect in case of interpolation calculations: at the transition between the elements,
the calculated points keep as close as possible to the given elements. This
function influences the results only in cases where circle and line elements are
available in the ASCII-file. This function does not make any sense in cases where
only points are available.
Sort Order of Points: Using this function you sort the points in such a way
that an ordered succession of points is produced. You would use this function
above all in cases where the points come, e.g. from a CAD system in a
disordered array.
24.17.7 Export to Surface Developer

The function "Export to Surface Developer" serves to prepare the calculation of
surface elements from measured point clouds. The selected contours are written
into a SCN file and the program "Surface Developer" is started.
The function requires contours with the following characteristics:
The probe radius compensation must be deactivated.
Only contours generated in the CNC-mode can be used.
The contours may not have been measured with different probe
diameters.
A surface reconstruction requires at least three contours consisting
of minimum ten points each.
Start the function "Export to Surface Developer" in the GEOPAK menu bar
"Contour".
07.04.07 v3.0 475

SCANPAK
Select contours
Ö Pick a contour from the list box "Available".
If the selected contour is not compatible a message appears in the
dialogue window "Export to Surface Developer" in the section
"Status of Selection". Furthermore, the OK button is inactive.
Ö Click the button "Add".
The contour is shown in the section "Selected".
Ö Select a directory and determine a file name.
Ö Confirm with "OK".
The "Surface Developer" is started and the SCN file is automatically
loaded.
476 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
25 Airfoil Analysis
25.1 Airfoil Analysis: Contents
Airfoil Analysis
Load Airfoil Contours
Analysis of Multiple Airfoil Layers
Preparation of Measurement Results
Select Airfoil Analysis Functions
Airfoil Contour Comparison without Bestfit
Airfoil Contour Comparison with Bestfit
Apply Bestfit on a Part of the Airfoil Contour
Result output
Graphic Output- MAFIS
Tolerance Comparison of Airfoil Contour
Flexible MAFIS Protocol
Airfoil Analysis Functions

Analysis functions with static result values
Mean Camber Line
Leading Edge Point
Trailing Edge Point
Maximum Profile Thickness
Basic Chord Length
Chord Length Overall
Leading Edge Radius
Trailing Edge Radius
Chord Twist Angle
Tangent Twist Angle
Primary Axis Width
Tangent to Stack Axis Distance
Analysis functions with parameter dependent result values

Extreme Lead Edge Centrality
Leading Edge Thickness at
Trailing Edge Thickness at
Lead Edge Centrality at
Gage Twist Angle (Lead Edge)
Gage Twist Angle (Stack)
Bestfit
Complete
Partial
25.2 Airfoil Analysis

Using the MAFIS (Mitutoyo Airfoil Inspection System) airfoil analysis you can
inspect the most common characteristics of airfoils and evaluate and output the
measurement results.
Formerly, the part program commands for the airfoil analysis had to be
programmed manually into the part program. The complicated procedures were
simplified by the dialogue support that focuses on the airfoils.
07.04.07 v3.0 477

Airfoil Analysis
To get to the airfoil analysis use the GEOPAK-Editor or the learning mode via the
menu function "Contour / Airfoil analysis".
The operation of the airfoil analysis dialogue follows the following sequence:
Select of an airfoil contour.
Define number of mean camber line points.
Preparation of the measurement results.
Selection of the airfoil characteristics to be analysed.
Exact definition of the results belonging to an airfoil characteristic
using the Analysis Functions.
If required, additional settings of the bestfit function.
Analysis functions
You can recognise a selected analysis function by the check box.
Then, alsothe option button is active for the detailed setting. The support
graphic displays the last selected analysis function. The support graphic
represents the airfoil section in yellow and the possible results of the function are
highlighted in red.
To get to know which prerequisites must be met and how the dialogue "Airfoil
analysis" is operated in detail, please refer to:
Load Airfoil Contours
Analysis of Multiple Airfoil Layers
Preparation of Measurement Results
Select Airfoil Analysis Functions
Airfoil Contour Comparison without Bestfit
Airfoil Contour Comparison with Bestfit
Apply Bestfit on a Part of the Airfoil Contour
Result output
Graphical Output - MAFIS
Tolerance Comparison Airfoil Contour
Flexible MAFIS Protocol
25.3 Selection of an Airfoil Contour

In order to be principally able to analyse airfoils, you need to select
an airfoil contour.
478 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
Ö Open the listbox "Select airfoil".

Ö Select an airfoil contour.
The airfoil contour must be positioned in the XY-plane or in a plane

parallel thereto to get correct results.
The orientation of the work piece co-ordinate system must ensure that the
leading edge point of the airfoil contour is positioned on a smaller X-co-ordinate
than the trailing edge point.
Number of mean camber line points
By entering the "Camber line points" you define the number of contour points of
which the mean camber line is formed. If you deviate from the preset values, you
enter, for example, half of the overall contour points so that the density of
themean camber line approximately corresponds to the airfoil contour.
Background:
Also in case that you have not selected the analysis function "Mean
camber line", the internal calculation of a mean camber line contour is
necessary, because other function results are based on this mean camber
line. To calculate the areas between two mean camber line points, a
connecting line between the contour points is assumed (straight-line
interpolation). This straight-line connection does not represent reality but
is only an approximation.
On the one hand, a good number of points ensures that the calculated
(straight-line interpolated) mean camber line adapts well to the real
(continuous) mean camber line, in order not to risk inaccurate results. On
the other hand, too many points do not make sense as this would reduce
the calculation speed accordingly.
As the mean camber line contour is calculated from the airfoil contour
which is only an approximation of the real airfoil profile itself, a point
density of the mean camber line that is bigger than the point density of the
airfoil contour does, in general, not make much sense. In this case, a
higher number of points does not result in added accuracy but only
unnecessarily requires computing time.
25.4 Analysis of Multiple Airfoil Layers
If you want to analyse multiple airfoil layers in sequence, activate the

button "Loop counter". This button is only active within part program loops.
Click on the "Loop counter" in "Select airfoils". As you know, the
loop counter goes up by one with each concluded loop. The used
contour has an element number that is bigger than the contour of
the previous loop by one.
Click on "Loop counter" in "Protocol features" in order to increase
the "Number" in the variable name (Identifier + Number) with each
loop (e.g. Mafis001, Mafis002, Mafis003, etc.). This allows you to
assign the created variables to the loop in which they were created
by the number in the variable name.
07.04.07 v3.0 479

Airfoil Analysis
Click on the "Loop counter" in "Tolerance comparison contour". With

each following loop, that nominal airfoil contour is used that has an
element number which is by one higher than the nominal airfoil
contour of the previous loop.
The element numbers of the used current and nominal airfoil contours
must be numbered in sequence. This ensures that with each loop an
airfoil contour is matched to an element number which is sequentially
counted upwards by one each.
25.5 Preparation of Measurement Results

The results of the airfoil analysis are stored in variables. The variable name is
composed of four parts:
Identifier (e.g. "Mafis")
Number with three digits (e.g. "001" or "002")
Underline ("_") as a separator between identifier and number and
the abbreviation of the analysis function.
Abbreviation for the analysis function.
You define the front part of the variable name in the input field "Identifier".
The input field "Number" you use, for example, in the loop mode to be
able to assign the measurement results by the number in the variable name to a
loop.
You can see the full variable name when you click on the option button of a
selected analysis function.
Change variable name
As the "Identifier" you have entered "Airf" in the in the airfoil analysis dialogue.
You have, for example, activated the analysis function "Trailing edge
radius" and clicked on the option button.
In the opened dialogue "Airfoil analysis - trailing edge radius" you see the first
part "Airf001" of the variable name, the separator "_" between "Identifier" and
"Extension". In the input field "Extension" you see "TER" (trailing edge radius) as
a proposition for an abbreviation of the analysis function. The inserted number
"001" is taken on from the input field "Number" and is counted upwards in the
loop mode.
Is the loop counter in the group box "Protocol features" activated, the
variable name changes with each loop from originally "Airf001_TER" to
"Airf002_TER", "Airf003_TER", etc.
Do not use the underline "_" within the variable name. This character is
internally used in the flexible protocol for the organisation of the result
output of the airfoil layers.
480 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
Graphical protocol of the measurement results
Ö Click on the symbol "Show airfoil diagram" if you want a

graphical output of your measurement results.
Ö In the sub-dialogues of the analysis function, click on "Auto. label",
in order to automatically create info fields for the graphically
represented characteristics in the graphics window.
Edit graphic results
To edit during the repeat mode the graphic results, e.g. before a subsequent print
command, in order to, for example, set or shift info fields, you activate the
checkmark button "Program pause". The part program is then stopped in the
repeat mode to enable you to carry out these changes.
25.6 Select Airfoil Analysis Functions

You use the analysis functions to define which elements and results of the airfoil
contours
are calculated,
analysed and
protocolled.
You can use the following analysis functions:
Analysis functions with static result values
Mean Camber Line
Leading Edge Point
Trailing Edge Point
Maximum Profile Thickness
Basic Chord Length
Chord Length Overall
Leading Edge Radius
Trailing Edge Radius
Chord Twist Angle
Tangent Twist Angle
Primary Axis Width
Tangent to Stack Axis Distance
Analysis functions with parameter dependent result values
Extreme Leading Edge Centrality
ess at
Trailing Edge Thickness at
Extreme Leading Edge Centrality at
Gage Twist Angle (Leading Edge)
Gage Twist Angle (Stack)
Bestfit
Complete
Partial
25.7 Tolerance Comparison of Airfoil Contours

With the airfoil contour comparison you can compare measured contours with
nominal or ideal contours.
07.04.07 v3.0 481

Airfoil Analysis
Ö Activate in the field "Tolerance comparison contour" only the

button "Tolerance comparison contour".
Ö Select a nominal or ideal contour in the field "Tolerance comparison
contour".
Ö Enter the upper and lower tolerance limits.
If you confirm the dialogue "Airfoil analysis" with "OK", the airfoil contour
calculations are carried out and you receive the tolerance graphic "Tolerance
comparison contours".
25.8 Airfoil Contour Comparison with Bestfit

Bestfit of the complete airfoil contour
Activate the option "Bestfit" in the section "Tolerance comparison contours".
Ö Select a nominal or ideal contour in the section "Tolerance
comparison contour".
Ö Click on "Apply result on actual airfoil", if you want the results of the
bestfit to be not only stored in variables but also applied to the
current airfoil contour.
Ö Click on "Complete".
Ö Click on the symbol to define which Mafis parameter you

want to have in the protocol.
482 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
Bestfit with tolerance graphic
Ö Activate in the section "Tolerance comparison contour" also

the function "Tolerance comparison contour" by clicking on the
symbol.
Ö Enter the upper and lower tolerance limits,
Ö select via the option button whichMafis parameters you want to

have in the protocol.
Ö Only when you have selected "Apply result on actual airfoil", a
contour tolerance comparison between the fittedcurrent contour
and the nominal contour is represented. Otherwise the tolerance
graphic is only a tolerance comparison between the current and the
nominal contour.
calculations are performed and the tolerance graphic "Tolerance comparison
contours" is displayed.
25.9 Apply Bestfit to a Part of the Airfoil Contour

Activate in the section "Tolerance comparison contour" the option "Bestfit".
Ö Select a nominal or ideal contour in the section "Tolerance
comparison contour".
Ö Click on "Partial".
Ö Click on "Apply result on actual airfoil" when you want the results of
the bestfit not only to be stored in variables but also to be applied to
the current airfoil contour.
Background
To define the analysis range of an airfoil, additional data are required. For
details about this topic, please refer to "Partial Bestfit".
Ö Enter the distances d1 and d2.
Ö To select one of the two possible sections use the option fields
"Concave / convex side".
Only after entering the distances d1 and d2 you open the dialogue window
"Partial bestfit" by clicking on the symbol.
Bestfit with tolerance graphic
Ö In the section "Tolerance comparison contour" you activate

the button "Tolerance comparison contour".
Ö Only if you have selected "Apply result on actual airfoil", a contour
tolerance comparison between the fittedcurrent contour and the
nominal contour is represented in the defined section. Otherwise the
tolerance graphic is only a tolerance comparison between current
and nominal contour in the defined section.
calculations are performed. The tolerance graphic "Tolerance comparison
contours" is displayed. Here, the tolerance comparison is only performed for the
pre-selected section of the airfoil profile.
07.04.07 v3.0 483

Airfoil Analysis
25.10 Result output

25.10.1 Graphical Output
You can have a graphical representation of the measurement results of the airfoil
analysis in the learn and repeat mode.
Ö Click on the symbol "Display airfoil analysis graphic".

Ö Select "Program pause" if you intend to implement changes to the
airfoil analysis graphic in the repeat mode (e.g. shifting of info fields
(label)). Then you can use the graphic, for example, for a following
print command or a flexible protocol. If applicable, the MAFIS
graphics you have changed before are automatically stored in the
temporary MCOSMOS directory as a graphics file. From there they
are integrated by the flexible protocol.
Ö Activate the function "Auto label" in the dialogue windows of the
analysis functions if you want that an information window for the
corresponding characteristic is automatically generated upon
opening of the graphic.
484 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
The information fields in the output graphics immediately show which airfoil
analysis functions have been used.
Leading Edge Radius (LER), Maximum Profile Thickness (MXT), Tangent to
Stack Axis Distance (TSD), Chord Length Overall (CLO), Primary Axis Width
(PAW), Trailing Edge Thickness (TET), Gage Twist Angle (Stack) (GTAS) and
Trailing Edge Radius (TER).
Note
The abbreviations were derived from English technical terms. If you want
to use own abbreviations or extensions, then change the variable name in
the input field "Extension" in the dialogue windows of the analysis
functions. You can form the names of nine characters.
For more information about working with the information fields, please refer to
"Element Information".
25.10.2 Tolerance Comparison of Airfoil Contours

With the airfoil contour comparison you can compare measured contours with
nominal or ideal contours.
Ö Activate in the field "Tolerance comparison contour" only the

button "Tolerance comparison contour".
Ö Select a nominal or ideal contour in the field "Tolerance comparison
contour".
calculations are carried out and you receive the tolerance graphic "Tolerance
comparison contours".
07.04.07 v3.0 485

Airfoil Analysis
25.10.3 Flexible MAFIS-Protocol

The standard setting support the protocol output "Flexible protocol" with two
templates.
You use the template "MAFIS", when you want to include the "Airfoil
analysis graphic" in the protocol.
If you want to additionally include the graphic "Tolerance
comparison contours" generated via the airfoil analysis, use the
template "MAIFISBF".
Create MAFIS protocol using a template
Ö In the pull down menu "Output" open the dialogue window "Open
protocol".
Ö Select from the listbox "Template" the template "MAFIS" or
"MAFISBF".
Ensure that in "Output options" the checkmark button "All tolerance

comparisons" is activated.
Ö Perform yoursettings within the dialogue window "Open protocol".
Ö Confirm your settings in the dialogue window "Open protocol".
Comments and the element graphics in the MAFIS protocol
Both templates represent the element graphic on the first protocol page in order
to allow an overview of all airfoil profiles analysed. In order to make an output of
the element graphic in the protocol possible,
Ö click on the symbol "Store graphic for template" in the graphic

window "Element graphic".
486 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
Ö In the opened dialogue window "Store graphic for template" enter

the required notes and comments. These too appear on the first
protocol page.
To have the element graphic printed out in the MAFIS protocol too, the
input field "View no." must contain a 1.
Ö Confirm your inputs.

Protocols of individual airfoil layers
If you want to create multiple protocols of individual airfoil layers,
you need to program a loop via the function "Program / Loops /
Loop start" into your part program.
For each airfoil layer a separate protocol page is created.
Ö Open the "Airfoil analysis" via the function "Contour" and carry out
the relevant settings.
All tolerance comparisons and graphical evaluations that are
generated now, are part of your MAFIS protocol.
If you have programmed a loop, end the loop with the part program command
"Loop end" via the function "Program / Loops / Loop end".
End MAFIS protocol
To end the MAFIS protocol, click on the function "Output / Close protocol".
Insert tolerance comparisons into the MAFISprotocol manually
With the functions "Define variables and calculate" and "Tolerance variables" you
can manually add results of tolerance comparisons into your part program or the
MAFIS protocol respectively.
The MAFIS template ensures that the measurement results of an airfoil section
are printed on the same protocol page. To guarantee that this also works for
manually inserted tolerance comparisons, you should take care of the following.
The variable name must have the same structure a

s the variable names of the airfoil section. Otherwise the tolerance
comparison is printed on a new page.
Example
In the dialogue window "Airfoil analysis" you have entered "Airf" under "Protocol
features" in the input field "Identifier".
The airfoil section is characterised by a three-digit number, e.g. "001". This
number mustbe followed by an underline "_".
You can use the following characters for your variable name, e.g. "Insert".
The name of the used variable then is "Airf001_Insert".
07.04.07 v3.0 487

Airfoil Analysis
25.11 Airfoil Analysis Functions

25.11.1 Analysis functions with static result values
25.11.1.1 Mean Camber Line
The mean camber line is the mean line of an airfoil profile. With a symmetrical
profile, the mean camber line coincides with the basic chord line. With a
camberedprofile, the mean camber line rises by the size of the camber over the
basic chord line.
Mean camber line contour file

Access to the data of the mean camber line is not possible via a variable. When
you select the analysis function"Mean camber line" via the main dialogue, a GWS
contour file is created with the pre-set number of "Camber line points". The mean
camber line contour file is stored in the temporary directory of your MCOSMOS-
installation (e.g. C:\MCOSMOS\Temp).
The file name of the mean camber line contour file is structured as follows:
The fixed file name prefix "MAFIS_".
The "Identifier" that you have entered in the section "Protocol
features" in the dialogue window "Airfoil analysis" (e.g. "Airf").
The layer number "Number" that was extended to three digits. This
number you have entered in the section "Protocol features" in the
dialogue window "Airfoil analysis" (e.g. "004"). The layer number
rises according to the current loop when the loop counter in the
section "Protocol features" is active.
The file name extension GWS (GEOPAK Scanning).
Then the file "MAFIS_Airf004.gws" is created in the temporary
MCOSMOS directory "C:\MCOSMOS\Temp\".
If you want to further use the mean camber line, you must load the
contour and store this contour in another folder. At the beginning of
a part program to be processed, all files stored by the MAFIS
command in the temporary MCOSMOS directory are deleted and
the mean camber line data would be lost.
If you do not work in loop mode, the mean camber line contour file is
overwritten when you work with the same designator and the same layer
number. To avoid this, you store the mean camber line contour file in
another folder.
488 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
25.11.1.2 Leading Edge Point

The mean camber line crosses the airfoil line at two points. The intersection point
with the smallest X-co-ordinate is the leading edge point (1) LEP.
As the airfoil contour must be positioned in the XY-plane or a plane parallel

thereto, the leadingedge point is composed of two components, the X- and the Y-
co-ordinate.
Output of measurement results
Ö Activate the button "Define variables and calculate" in order to

calculate the measurement results and have them output in the
window"Field for results".
The variable name is represented as active. If required, change the
input fields "Extension" to adapt the names of the variables to your
predefined values.
25.11.1.3 Trailing Edge Point

The mean camber line crosses the airfoil line in two points. The point of
intersection with the biggest X-co-ordinate is the trailing edge point (2) TEP.
As the airfoil contour must be positioned in the XY-plane or a plane parallel

thereto, the trailing edge point is composed of two components, the X- and the Y-
co-ordinate.
Ö According to the desired values, activate the button "Define

variables and calculate" in order to calculate the measurement
results and have them output inthe window " Field for results".
predefined values.
07.04.07 v3.0 489

Airfoil Analysis
25.11.1.4 Maximum Profile Thickness

The maximum profile thicknessis the biggest distance between upper and lower
airfoil contour measured at a right angle to the mean camber line. The maximum
profile thickness corresponds to the diameter of the biggest inscribed circle within
the airfoil contour where the centre of thecircle lies on the mean camber line.
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the maximum thickness MT also output the
X- and Y-centre point co-ordinates of the biggest inscribed circle.
Ö According to the desired results, activate the required buttons

"Define variables and calculate" in order to calculate the
measurement results and have them output in the window " Field for
result".
predefined values.
Tolerate measurement results
To tolerate the "Maximum thickness", activate the button "Tolerance

variable". The input fields "Nominal value, upper and lower tolerance" are now
represented as active.
In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the nominal value of the "Maximum
thickness" from the airfoil data. Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance"
you enter the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.1.5 Basic Chord Length

The basic chord line is the connection between the leading edge point and the
trailing edge point. The length of this basic chord line corresponds to the basic
chord length of the airfoil.

protocol.
The variable name is represented as active.
To tolerate your measurement results, activate the button "Tolerance

Into the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Basic Chord Length" from the
airfoil data. Into the input fields "upper and lower tolerance" you enter the
dimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.1.6 Chord Length Overall

The chord length overall is the maximum overall width of the airfoil. This is the
longest possible chord that can be createdat the airfoil profile.
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the chord length overall CLO, output the X-
and Y-co-ordinates of the start and end point of this chord.
490 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
Ö Activate the button "Define variablesand calculate" in order to

protocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Chord length overall" from the
airfoil data. Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" youenter the
25.11.1.7 Leading Edge Radius

The leading edge radius LER is the radius of the circle that fits best into the
points of the profile leading edge and it is a measure of the curve of the profile
leading edge.
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the leading edge radius, output the X- and
Y-centre point co-ordinates of the circle centre of the leading edge radius.

protocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Leading edge radius" from the
airfoil data. Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" you enter
thedimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.1.8 Trailing Edge Radius

The trailing edge radius TER is the radius of the circle that fits best into the points
of the profile trailing edge and is a measure of the curve of the profile trailing
edge.
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the leading edge radius, output the X- and
Y-centre point co-ordinates of the circle centre of the leading edge radius.

protocol.
07.04.07 v3.0 491

Airfoil Analysis

variable". Theinput fields "Nominal value, upper and lower tolerance" are now
In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Trailing edge radius" from the
airfoil data. Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" you enter the
25.11.1.9 Chord Twist Angle

With this function you can define the chord twist angle CTA between the angle
datum plane ADP and the basic chord line BCL.
The airfoil contour must be positioned in the XY-plane or in a plane parallel
thereto. The intersection line that results from the intersection of the airfoil profile
plane with the angle datum plane ADP (YZ-plane), corresponds to the X-axis or a
parallel to the X-axis. The calculated angle refers to this intersection line.
Application example
For a turbine blade you can check the twist angle defined in the maintenance
manual in a certain cutting plane.

protocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Twist angle" from the airfoil data
or the maintenance manual. Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" you
enter the dimensions of thetolerance limits.
25.11.1.10 Tangent Twist Angle

With this function you calculate the tangent twist angle TTA between the angle
datum plane ADP and the tangent created on the concave side of the airfoil
profile.
The airfoil contour must be positioned in the XY-plane or in a plane parallel
thereto. The intersection line that results of the intersection of the airfoil profile
plane with the angle datum plane ADP (YZ-plane), corresponds to the X-axis or a
parallel line thereto. The calculated angle refers to this intersection line.
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the twist angle, calculate the X- and Y-co-
ordinates of the osculation points of the tangents with the concave side of the
airfoil profile.
Application example
For a turbine blade you can check the twist angle defined in the maintenance
manual in a certain cutting plane.
492 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
Ö Activate the button "Define and calculate variable" in order to

calculate the measurement results and have them output in
theprotocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Tangent twist angle" from the
airfoil data or the maintenance manual. Into the input fields "Upper and lower
tolerance" you enter the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.1.11 Primary Axis Width

The primary axis width PAW describes the maximum distance between two airfoil
profile points in direction of the primary axis (X-axis).
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the width of the primary axis, calculate the
X- and Y-co-ordinatesof the points that define the width of the primary axis
(points with smallest and biggest X-co-ordinate).

protocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Primary axis width" from the
tolerance" you enter the dimensions of the tolerancelimits.
25.11.1.12 Tangent to Stack Axis Distance

The tangent to stack axis distance TSD is the shortest distance between the
stacking point SP and the tangent TL. This tangent is formed at the concave side
of the airfoil profile.
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the tangent to stack axis distance,
calculate the X- and Y-co-ordinates of the osculation points.

protocol.
07.04.07 v3.0 493

Airfoil Analysis

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Tangent to stack axis distance"
from the airfoil data or the maintenance manual. Into the input fields "Upper and
lower tolerance" you enter the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.2 Analysis functions with static result values

25.11.2.1 Extreme Leading Edge Centrality
The analysis function "Extreme leading edge centrality" calculates the distance
ELC from the stacking point SP of the airfoil to the extreme leading edge point P1
in direction of the primary axis (distance of the X-co-ordinates).
In this dialogue you can, in addition to the extreme leading edge positions,
calculate the X- and Y-co-ordinate of the extreme leading edge point.
Ö Activate thebutton "Define variables and calculate" in order to

protocol.
You can also have an output of the co-ordinates of the extreme leading edge
point.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Distance from stacking point to
extreme leading edge point" from the airfoil data or the maintenance manual. Into
the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" you enter the dimensions of the
tolerance limits.
25.11.2.2 Leading Edge Thickness

The airfoil analysis function "Leading edge thickness at" requires in the dialogue
window "Airfoil analysis" the input of a distance "d" from the leading edge point
LE. The profile thickness will be calculated from this distance along the mean
camber line.
Only after input of the distance "d" you open the dialogue window "Leading
edge thickness at" using the option button.

protocol.
You can also have an output of the co-ordinates of the points between which the
distance was calculated.
494 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Leading edge thickness" from the
25.11.2.3 Trailing Edge Thickness

The airfoil analysis function "Trailing edge thickness at" requires inthe dialogue
window "Airfoil analysis" the input of a distance "d" from the trailing edge point
TE. The edge thickness will be calculated from this distance along the mean
camber line.
Only after input of the distance "d" you open thedialogue window "Trailing
edge thickness at" using the option button.

protocol.
You can also have an output of the co-ordinates of the points between which the
distance was calculated.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Trailing edge thickness" from the
25.11.2.4 Extreme Leading Edge Centrality at a given contour rotation

The airfoil analysis function "Extreme leading edge centrality at" requires in the
dialogue window "Airfoil analysis" the input of an angle α. Around this angle the
airfoil is to be rotated around the stacking point SP. If you enter a positive angle
value, the contour is rotated anticlockwise.
Enter first the rotation angle α and then open the dialogue window
"Extreme leading edge centrality at" using the option button.
After rotating the contour around the angle α, the rotated contour (in the ill. below
represented in Magenta) has a point with the smallest X-co-ordinate P1', the
extreme leading edge point.
07.04.07 v3.0 495

Airfoil Analysis
The analysis function "Extreme leading edge centrality at" calculates the distance
LECA from the stacking point SP of the airfoil to the extreme leading edge point
P1'.
Furthermore, the X- and Y-co-ordinates of the point P1 of the originalcontour are
calculated. After rotation around the angle α, P1 becomes point P1'.

protocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Distance LECA from the stacking
point SP of the airfoil to the extreme leading edge point P1'" from the airfoil data
or the maintenance manual. Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" you
enter the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.2.5 Gage Twist Angle (Lead Edge)

The airfoil analysis function "Gate twist angle (lead edge)" GTAL requires in the
dialogue window "Airfoil analysis" the input of two radii (r1 and r2). The centre
point of these radii lies in the leading edge point LE of the airfoil contour. The
connection line of the intersecting points (P1 and P2) of the circles at the bottom
side (concave side) of the airfoils is built by the gage twist line GTLL (gage twist
line).
The angle created by the gage twist line GTLL and the angle datum plane ADP or
X-axis respectively, is the gage twist angle GTAL. This angle GTAL is calculated
by the analysis function "Gage twist angle (leading edge)".
Furthermore the X- and Y-co-ordinates of the points P1 and P2 are calculated.
496 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
As the airfoil contour must lie in the XY-plane or in a parallel plane thereto, a
section through the angle datum plane ADP corresponds to the X-axis.
First, enter the radii r1 and r2 in the dialogue window "Airfoil analysis" and
then open the dialogue window "Gage twist angle (lead edge)" using the option
button.

protocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the value for the "Gage twist angle
(lead edge)" from the airfoil data or the maintenance manual. Into the input fields
"Upper and lower tolerance" you enter the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.2.6 Gage Twist Angle (Stack)

The airfoil analysis function "Gage twist angle (stack)" GTAS requires in the
dialogue window "Airfoil analysis" the input of four distances (d1, d2, d3 and d4).
With the distances d1 and d2 first the basic points P1 and P2 are determined by
cutting the bottom side of the airfoil line (concave side) with two lines. These lines
have the distances d1 (herenegative) and d2 (here positive) from the stacking
point SP rectangular to the angle datum plane ADP.
From the points P1 and P2 the distances d3 or d4 respectively (positive values
for d3 and d4) must be transferred downwards to get the points P3 and P4. The
line running through the points P3 and P4 defines the gage twist line stack GTLS
(gage twist line stack).
The angle formed by the gage twist line (stack) GTLS and the angle datum plane
ADP or X-axis respectively, is the gage twist angle GTAS. This angle GTAS is
calculated by the analysis function "Gage twist angle (stack)".
Furthermore, the X- and Y-co-ordinates of the points P1 and P2 are calculated.
07.04.07 v3.0 497

Airfoil Analysis
As the airfoil contour must lie in the XY-plane or a plane parallel thereto, a
section through the angle datum plane ADP corresponds to the X-axis.
First, enter the distances d1, d2, d3 and d4 in the dialogue window "Airfoil
analysis".
Then open the dialogue window "Gage twist angle (stack)" using the option
button.
Ö Activate the button "Define variables and calculate " in order to

protocol.

In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the value for the "Gage twist angle
(stack)" from the airfoil data or the maintenance manual. Into the input fields
"Upper and lower tolerance" you enter the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
25.11.3 Bestfit
25.11.3.1 Complete Bestfit
The functionality "Complete Bestfit" tries to fit in the measured airfoil contour as
good as possible into the corresponding ideal airfoil contour. The "Bestfit" is
performed by shifting the measured airfoil contour along the X- and Y-axis as well
as by rotation around the stack axis (Z-axis).
498 v3.0 07.04.07

Airfoil Analysis
The possible bestfit is achieved when the sum of the distance squares between
all points of the ideal airfoil contour and the corresponding shifted and rotated
points of the measured airfoil contour is minimal.
Ö Activate the button "Define variables and calculate" to

calculate the relevant measurement result and have it output in the
protocol.
Tolerate measurement result
To tolerate the measurement result "Max. deviation of an airfoil point",

activate the button "Tolerance variable". The input fields "Nominal value, upper
and lower tolerance" are now represented as active.
In the input field "Nominal value" you enter from the airfoil data the "Max.
deviation of an airfoil point". Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" you
enter the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
Please note
The "Max. deviation of an airfoil point" results from the used algorithm of
the maximum of all minimum distances between the nominal contour
points and the current contour.
25.11.3.2 Partial Bestfit

The functionality "Partial bestfit" is designed to try to fit a certain part of the
measured airfoil contour into the corresponding part of the ideal airfoil contour as
good as possible. The "Bestfit" is performed by shifting the defined airfoil section
along the X- and Y-axis as well as by rotation around the stack axis (Z-axis).
The possible bestfit is achieved when the sum of the distance squares between
all points of the ideal airfoil sub-contour and the corresponding shifted and
rotated points of the measured airfoil sub-contour is minimal.
The sub-curve (CVS or CCS) is defined by two distances d1 and d2. These
distances are measured along the mean camber line (MCL), from the leading
edge point (LE) or the trailing edge point (TE) respectively.
Scn011_BestFitPartial_16.bmp
These distances define two lines that run in a right angle through the mean
camber line. These lines include the airfoil sub-curves. One on the convex side of
the airfoil (CVS) and one on the concave side of the airfoil (CCS). By selecting
the airfoil side (convex or concave side), the airfoil sub-curve for which the bestfit
is calculated, is finally defined.
Ö Click on the symbol "Define variables and calculate" in order to

calculate the measurement results and have the measurement
results output in the protocol.

07.04.07 v3.0 499

Airfoil Analysis
In the input field "Nominal value" you enter the "Max. deviation of an airfoil point"
from the airfoil data. Into the input fields "Upper and lower tolerance" you enter
the dimensions of the tolerance limits.
500 v3.0 07.04.07

PDF Um Geopak Engl v3.0

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF Um Geopak Engl v3.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PDF Um Geopak Engl v3.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GEOPAK

Geometrical 3D-Measurement Software for

User's Manual v3.0

5.5.4 Branches ..................................................................................... 38

6 Learn Mode ..................................................................... 50

6.13 Windows and Tools............................................................... 63

7.12 Probe Calibration: Limitations ............................................. 81

7.32 Combination of Racks......................................................... 100

8 Workpiece Alignment................................................... 113

8.12 Align Axis Parallel to Axis.................................................. 122

9 Pallet Co-Ordinate System .......................................... 132

10.19 Surfaces ............................................................................... 150

11 Constructed Elements ................................................. 170

11.3 Intersection Elements......................................................... 178

12 Automatic Element Recognition ................................. 190

13 Carbody Measurement ................................................ 195

13.9 Joint Co-ordinate System ................................................... 201

14 Graphics of Elements................................................... 203

14.29 Calculate New Elements out of Contour Points ............... 220

15 Nominal and Actual Comparison................................ 224

15.21 Perpendicularity .................................................................. 241

15.38.11 Tolerance Band Editor ............................................................. 262

16 Print and File Output.................................................... 270

16.23 Close Protocol ..................................................................... 281

17 CMM Movements .......................................................... 292

17.17 Measurement Point with Imaginary Point ......................... 304

17.37.3 Movement Speed ...................................................................... 324

18 Programming Tools...................................................... 333

18.16.2 Settings in the dialogue........................................................... 343

19 Sequence Control......................................................... 368

20 Input Instruments ......................................................... 380

21 Special Programs ......................................................... 383

21.3 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS) .................................... 384

22 Repeat Mode................................................................. 386

24 SCANPAK ..................................................................... 397

24.5.2 Manual CMM: Fixed Probe....................................................... 402

24.9.8.1 Select contour........................................................................ 423

24.11.1.2 Tolerance comparison of multiple contour pairs .................... 448

24.16.2.1 Learn-/Repeat Mode.............................................................. 469

25 Airfoil Analysis ............................................................. 477

25.11.1.7 Leading Edge Radius............................................................. 491

4 Hints for Help

5 Part Program Editor

The part program editor allows you to

5.2 GEOPAK Editor: Contents

Edit Part Programs

Find Programming Error

5.3 File Management

In a part program, GEOPAK instructions are stored which result in a

Ö Via the symbols, you decide to select a new "Part

Via this dialogue, it is possible to create a local subprogram. That

5.3.2 Open Part Program

Ö If you search for a subprogram, click on the symbol.

5.3.3 Edit Several Part Programs Simultaneously

You switch to the other icon via mouse-click.

5.3.5 Change Name of Part Program

Of course, you can modify names of part programs in MCOSMOS you

5.3.6 Export Part Program (ASCII/DMIS)

An information box displays the number of part program lines,

In an information box, you are prompted to select the looked

You can optionally start searching forward or backwards.

It is possible to optionally search forward or backwards.

Program continuation after the error handler

Through the error message, the "EXISTING_BORE" label is started

If this part program is available as a subprogram, the error handler